xx

TG8000
Multiformat Test Signal Generator
ZZZ

User Manual

*P071303607*
071-3036-07
xx TG8000
Multiformat Test Signal Generator
ZZZ

User Manual

Register now!
Click the following link to protect your product.
► www.tek.com/register
This document supports firmware version 2.5 and above.
www.tek.com
071-3036-07
Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries
or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication
supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.

Contacting Tektronix
Tektronix, Inc.
14150 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA

For product information, sales, service, and technical support:

In North America, call 1-800-833-9200.
Worldwide, visit www.tek.com to find contacts in your area.
 Warranty
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its
option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement
in exchange for the defective product. Parts, modules and replacement products used by Tektronix for warranty
work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance. All replaced parts, modules and products become
the property of Tektronix.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of
the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible
for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping
charges prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within
the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping
charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage
resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product;
b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage
or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or
integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty
of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE
AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.
TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
[W2 – 15AUG04]
 IMPORTANT
READ BEFORE OPERATING EQUIPMENT
This software is provided under license from Tektronix, Inc. Retention of this program for more than thirty (30)
days or use of the program in any manner constitutes acceptance of the license terms.

CAREFULLY READ THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. If you cannot agree to the license terms,
promptly contact the nearest Tektronix Field Office for return assistance.
TEKTRONIX SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
THE PROGRAM, OR PROGRAMS, ENCODED OR INCORPORATED WITHIN EQUIPMENT, IS
FURNISHED SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. RETENTION OF
THE PROGRAM FOR MORE THAN THIRTY DAYS OR USE OF THE PROGRAM IN ANY MANNER
WILL BE CONSIDERED ACCEPTANCE OF THE AGREEMENT TERMS. IF THESE TERMS ARE NOT
ACCEPTABLE, THE UNUSED PROGRAM AND ANY ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION SHOULD
BE RETURNED PROMPTLY TO TEKTRONIX FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE LICENSE FEE PAID. (FOR
INFORMATION REGARDING THE RETURN OF PROGRAMS ENCODED OR INCORPORATED WITHIN
EQUIPMENT, CONTACT THE NEAREST TEKTRONIX SALES OFFICE.

DEFINITIONS. “Tektronix” means Tektronix, Inc., an Oregon corporation, or local Tektronix’ legal entity that is
supplying the equipment.
“Program” means the Tektronix software product (executable program and/or data) enclosed with this Agreement
or included within the equipment with which this Agreement is packed.
“Customer” means the person or organization in whose name the Program was ordered.

LICENSE. Customer may:

1. Use the Program on a single machine at any one time;
2. If the Program is provided in connection with a floating−user license, the Program may be used on multiple
machines provided that the user is authorized, and the total number of users at any one time does not exceed
the total number of licensed concurrent users;
3. Modify the Program or merge it with another for use on the single machine; and
4. Copy the Program for archival or backup purposes, provided that no more than one (1) such copy is permitted
to exist at any one time. If the Program is provided in connection with a floating−user license, the Program
may be copied onto multiple machines for use by authorized users.
Each copy of the Program made by Customer must include a reproduction of any copyright notice or restrictive
rights legend appearing in or on the copy of the Program as received from Tektronix.
Customer may not:
1. Use the Program on more than one machine at any one time, unless covered by a floating-user license
or separate site license;
2. Transfer the Program to any person or organization outside of Customer or the corporation of which Customer
is a part without the prior written consent of Tektronix, except in connection with the transfer of the equipment
within which the programs are encoded or incorporated;
3. Export or re-export, directly or indirectly, the program, any associated documentation, or the direct product
thereof, to any country to which such export or re-export is restricted by law or regulation of the United States
or any foreign government having jurisdiction without the prior authorization, if required, of the Office of
Export Administration, Department of Commerce, Washington, D.C. and the corresponding agency of such
foreign government;
4. For object-code Programs only, reverse compile or disassemble the Program for any purpose; or
5. Copy the documentation accompanying the Program.
For Programs designed to reside on a single-machine and support one or more additional machines, either locally
or remotely, without permitting the Program to be transferred to an additional machine for local execution, the
additional machines shall be considered within the definition of “single machine”. For programs permitting the
Program to be transferred to an additional machine for local execution, a separate license shall be required for each
such machine with which the Program may be used, or each concurrent user authorized under a floating−user
license.
Title to the Program and all copies thereof, but not the media on which the Program or copies may reside, shall be
and remain with Tektronix or others for whom Tektronix has obtained a respective licensing right.
Customer shall pay when due all property taxes that may now or hereafter be imposed, levied or assessed with
respect to the possession or use of the Program or this license and shall file all reports required in connection with
such taxes.
Any portion of the Program modified by Customer or merged with another program shall remain subject to
these terms and conditions.
If the Program is acquired by or for an agency of the U.S. Government, the Program shall be considered computer
software developed at private expense and the license granted herein shall be interpreted as granting Customer
restricted rights in the Program and related documentation as defined in the applicable acquisition regulation.
THE PROGRAM MAY NOT BE USED, COPIED, MODIFIED, MERGED, OR TRANSFERRED TO
ANOTHER EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED BY THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
UPON TRANSFER OF ANY COPY, MODIFICATION, OR MERGED PORTION OF THE PROGRAM, THE
LICENSE GRANTED HEREIN IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.

TERM. The license granted herein is effective upon acceptance by Customer, and shall remain in effect until
terminated as provided herein. The license may be terminated by Customer at any time upon written notice to
Tektronix. The license may be terminated by Tektronix or any third party from whom Tektronix may have obtained
a respective licensing right if Customer fails to comply with any term or condition and such failure is not remedied
within thirty (30) days after notice hereof from Tektronix or such third party. Upon termination by either party,
Customer shall return to Tektronix or destroy, the Program and all associated documentation, together with
all copies in any form.

LIMITED WARRANTY. Tektronix warrants that the media on which the Program is furnished and the encoding of the
Program on the media will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) months
from the date of shipment. If any such medium or encoding proves defective during the warranty period, Tektronix
will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective medium. Except as to the media on which the Program is
furnished, the Program is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied. Tektronix does
not warrant that the functions contained in the Program will meet Customer’s requirements or that the operation
of the Program will be uninterrupted or error-free.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration
of the warranty period. If Tektronix is unable to provide a replacement that is free from defects in materials and
workmanship within a reasonable time thereafter, Customer may terminate the license for the Program and return
the Program and any associated materials for credit or refund.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PROGRAM IN LIEU OF ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPLACE DEFECTIVE MEDIA, OR REFUND CUSTOMER’S
PAYMENT IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH
OF THIS WARRANTY.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, IN NO EVENT SHALL TEKTRONIX OR OTHERS FROM WHOM
TEKTRONIX HAS OBTAINED A LICENSING RIGHT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR CONNECTED WITH
CUSTOMER’S POSSESSION OR USE OF THE PROGRAM, EVEN IF TEKTRONIX OR SUCH OTHERS
HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

THIRD-PARTY DISCLAIMER. Except as expressly agreed otherwise, third parties from whom Tektronix may have
obtained a licensing right do not warrant the program, do not assume any liability with respect to its use, and do not
undertake to furnish any support or information relating thereto.

GENERAL. This Agreement contains the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use, reproduction,
and transfer of the Program.
Neither this Agreement nor the license granted herein is assignable or transferable by Customer without the
prior written consent of Tektronix.
This Agreement and the license granted herein shall be governed by the laws of the state of Oregon.
All questions regarding this Agreement or the license granted herein should be directed to the nearest Tektronix
Sales Office.
Table of Contents
Important safety information .................................................................................... xiii
General safety summary .................................................................................... xiii
Service safety summary ...................................................................................... xv
Terms in this manual ........................................................................................ xvi
Symbols and terms on the product ......................................................................... xvi
Compliance information ........................................................................................ xvii
EMC compliance ........................................................................................... xvii
Safety compliance ......................................................................................... xviii
Environmental considerations ............................................................................... xx
Preface ............................................................................................................. xxi
Supported products .......................................................................................... xxi
About this manual ........................................................................................... xxi
Product documentation..................................................................................... xxii

Getting started
Getting started..................................................................................................... 1-1
Product description .......................................................................................... 1-1
Accessories ................................................................................................... 1-4
Options and upgrades ....................................................................................... 1-4
Initial product inspection.................................................................................... 1-6
To install the mainframe .................................................................................... 1-6
Module installation and removal ......................................................................... 1-11
Functional checks.......................................................................................... 1-16

Operating basics
Operating basics .................................................................................................. 2-1
Front panel controls ......................................................................................... 2-1
Rear panel connectors ....................................................................................... 2-6
Frame reset signals ........................................................................................ 2-20
Fan fault alarm ............................................................................................. 2-21
Mainframe menus.......................................................................................... 2-22
How to connect the generator to a network ............................................................. 2-48
How to use the mainframe General Purpose Interface (GPI) ......................................... 2-50
How to upgrade the instrument firmware ............................................................... 2-53
How to backup/restore presets and user data using a USB drive ..................................... 2-65
How to transfer user files using FTP..................................................................... 2-67
Inspection and cleaning ................................................................................... 2-69

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual i

Table of Contents

Modules
AG7 Audio Generator module .................................................................................. 3-1
AG7 module product description .......................................................................... 3-1
How to operate the AG7 module........................................................................... 3-2
AG7 module main menu .................................................................................... 3-3
AG7 module factory default settings ...................................................................... 3-6
AGL7 Analog Genlock module ................................................................................. 3-7
AGL7 module product description......................................................................... 3-7
How to operate the AGL7 module ......................................................................... 3-8
AGL7 module main menu .................................................................................. 3-9
AGL7 module factory default settings .................................................................. 3-16
ATG7 Analog Test Generator module........................................................................ 3-17
ATG7 module product description ....................................................................... 3-17
How to operate the ATG7 module ....................................................................... 3-18
To select an output signal on the ATG7 module........................................................ 3-19
ATG7 module main menu ................................................................................ 3-21
ATG7 module factory default settings................................................................... 3-28
AVG7 Analog Video Generator module ..................................................................... 3-29
AVG7 module product description....................................................................... 3-29
How to operate the AVG7 module ....................................................................... 3-30
To select an output signal on the AVG7 module ....................................................... 3-31
AVG7 module main menu ................................................................................ 3-36
AVG7 module factory default settings .................................................................. 3-47
AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module...................................................... 3-48
AWVG7 module product description.................................................................... 3-48
How to operate the AWVG7 module .................................................................... 3-49
To select an output signal on the AWVG7 module .................................................... 3-50
AWVG7 module main menu ............................................................................. 3-52
AWVG7 module factory default settings................................................................ 3-62
BG7 Black Generator module................................................................................. 3-63
BG7 module product description......................................................................... 3-63
How to operate the BG7 module ......................................................................... 3-64
BG7 module main menu .................................................................................. 3-65
BG7 module factory default settings .................................................................... 3-74
DVG7 Digital Video Generator module ..................................................................... 3-75
DVG7 module product description ...................................................................... 3-75
How to operate the DVG7 module....................................................................... 3-76
To select an output signal on the DVG7 module ....................................................... 3-77
DVG7 module main menu ................................................................................ 3-79
DVG7 module factory default settings .................................................................. 3-95

ii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Table of Contents

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module ........................................................ 3-97

GPS7 module product description ....................................................................... 3-98
How to operate the GPS7 module........................................................................ 3-99
To configure the GPS7 module.......................................................................... 3-100
GPS7 module main menu ................................................................................ 3-113
GPS7 module factory default settings .................................................................. 3-154
HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module ......................................................... 3-157
HD3G7 module product description.................................................................... 3-158
How to operate the HD3G7 module .................................................................... 3-159
To select an output signal on the HD3G7 module..................................................... 3-160
HD3G7 module zone plate signals...................................................................... 3-172
HD3G7 module zone plate pattern control parameters ............................................... 3-175
HD3G7 module zone plate dependent parameters .................................................... 3-177
How to use zone plate signals on the HD3G7 module................................................ 3-184
HD3G7 module main menu ............................................................................. 3-185
HD3G7 module factory default settings................................................................ 3-212
HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module .......................................................... 3-214
HDLG7 module product description ................................................................... 3-214
How to operate the HDLG7 module.................................................................... 3-215
To select an output signal on the HDLG7 module .................................................... 3-216
HDLG7 module main menu ............................................................................. 3-223
HDLG7 module factory default settings ............................................................... 3-227
HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module ......................................................... 3-228
HDVG7 module product description ................................................................... 3-228
How to operate the HDVG7 module ................................................................... 3-229
To select an output signal on the HDVG7 module .................................................... 3-230
HDVG7 module main menu............................................................................. 3-232
HDVG7 module factory default settings ............................................................... 3-249
SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module........................................... 3-252
SDI7 module product description ....................................................................... 3-252
How to operate the SDI7 module ....................................................................... 3-253
To enter the option key on the SDI7 module .......................................................... 3-254
To select an output signal on the SDI7 module........................................................ 3-257
SDI7 module zone plate signals......................................................................... 3-270
SDI7 module zone plate pattern control parameters .................................................. 3-273
SDI7 module zone plate dependent parameters ....................................................... 3-275
How to use zone plate signals on the SDI7 module................................................... 3-282
SDI7 module main menu ................................................................................ 3-283
Dolby E metadata configuration.................................................................... 3-311
Dolby E generated formats.......................................................................... 3-311
SDI7 module factory default settings................................................................... 3-337

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual iii

Table of Contents

Index
Index

iv TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Installing or removing the instrument into or from the rack ................................... 1-8
Figure 1-2: TG8000 slot numbering.......................................................................... 1-13
Figure 1-3: Removing the blank panel ....................................................................... 1-13
Figure 1-4: Installing a module ............................................................................... 1-14
Figure 1-5: Securing a module................................................................................ 1-14
Figure 1-6: Removing a module .............................................................................. 1-15
Figure 2-1: TG8000 front panel ................................................................................ 2-1
Figure 2-2: TG8000 rear panel.................................................................................. 2-6
Figure 2-3: AG7 module connectors ........................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-4: Location of J452 on the AG7 module ............................................................ 2-7
Figure 2-5: AGL7 module connectors ......................................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-6: Location of J040 and J960 on the AGL7 module ............................................... 2-9
Figure 2-7: ATG7 module connectors........................................................................ 2-10
Figure 2-8: AVG7 module connectors ....................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-9: AWVG7 module connectors .................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-10: BG7 module connectors........................................................................ 2-11
Figure 2-11: DVG7 module connectors (Option BK) ...................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-12: GPS7 module connectors ...................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-13: HD3G7 module connectors .................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-14: HDLG7 module connectors.................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-15: HDVG7 module connectors (Option BK).................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-16: SDI7 module connectors ....................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-17: Mainframe main menu ......................................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-18: PRESET submenu .............................................................................. 2-23
Figure 2-19: SEQUENCE submenu.......................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-20: FRAME RESET STATUS submenu .......................................................... 2-26
Figure 2-21: UTILITY submenu ............................................................................. 2-28
Figure 2-22: UTILITY submenu (Continued)............................................................... 2-29
Figure 2-23: SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu ............................................................ 2-37
Figure 2-24: NETWORK INFORMATION submenu ..................................................... 2-38
Figure 2-25: NETWORK SETUP submenu................................................................. 2-39
Figure 2-26: GPI ALARM SELECT submenu ............................................................. 2-41
Figure 2-27: AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu........................................................... 2-42
Figure 2-28: Mainframe DIAGNOSTICS submenu........................................................ 2-43
Figure 2-29: Internal frequency calibration menu .......................................................... 2-47
Figure 2-30: Pin connections for a crossover Ethernet cable .............................................. 2-48
Figure 2-31: Example transfer.exe window after the network upgrade is complete .................... 2-62
Figure 2-32: Example FTP view of the instrument file structure ......................................... 2-68
Figure 2-33: Example FTP error message when flash memory is full.................................... 2-68

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual v

Table of Contents

Figure 3-1: AG7 module main menu........................................................................... 3-3

Figure 3-2: AG7 module CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu........................................... 3-4
Figure 3-3: AG7 module AUDIO TIMING submenu........................................................ 3-6
Figure 3-4: AGL7 module main menu ......................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-5: AGL7 module GENLOCK submenu........................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-6: AGL7 module OUTPUT submenu ............................................................. 3-12
Figure 3-7: AGL7 module SIGNAL submenu .............................................................. 3-13
Figure 3-8: AGL7 module TIMING submenu .............................................................. 3-14
Figure 3-9: Front-panel test signal buttons .................................................................. 3-19
Figure 3-10: ATG7 module main menu...................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-11: ATG7 module SELECT OUTPUT submenu................................................. 3-23
Figure 3-12: ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu ................................................. 3-24
Figure 3-13: ATG7 module ID TEXT submenu ............................................................ 3-25
Figure 3-14: ATG7 module TIMING submenu ............................................................. 3-26
Figure 3-15: ATG7 module APL submenu .................................................................. 3-27
Figure 3-16: Front-panel test signal buttons................................................................. 3-32
Figure 3-17: AVG7 module main menu ..................................................................... 3-36
Figure 3-18: AVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu .............................................. 3-37
Figure 3-19: AVG7 module OVERLAY submenu.......................................................... 3-38
Figure 3-20: AVG7 module LOGO submenu ............................................................... 3-39
Figure 3-21: AVG7 module ID TEXT submenu ............................................................ 3-40
Figure 3-22: AVG7 module CIRCLE submenu ............................................................. 3-42
Figure 3-23: AVG7 module TIMING submenu............................................................. 3-43
Figure 3-24: AVG7 module VIDEO submenu .............................................................. 3-44
Figure 3-25: AVG7 module APL submenu.................................................................. 3-46
Figure 3-26: Front-panel test signal buttons................................................................. 3-51
Figure 3-27: AWVG7 module main menu................................................................... 3-52
Figure 3-28: AWVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ........................................... 3-53
Figure 3-29: AWVG7 module OVERLAY submenu....................................................... 3-54
Figure 3-30: AWVG7 module LOGO submenu ............................................................ 3-55
Figure 3-31: AWVG7 module ID TEXT submenu ......................................................... 3-56
Figure 3-32: AWVG7 module CIRCLE submenu .......................................................... 3-58
Figure 3-33: AWVG7 module TIMING submenu.......................................................... 3-59
Figure 3-34: AWVG7 module VIDEO submenu ........................................................... 3-61
Figure 3-35: BG7 module main menu ....................................................................... 3-65
Figure 3-36: BG7 module BLACK submenu ............................................................... 3-66
Figure 3-37: BG7 module HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu..................................... 3-69
Figure 3-38: BG7 module TIMING submenu............................................................... 3-69
Figure 3-39: BG7 module TIMECODE submenu .......................................................... 3-71
Figure 3-40: BG7 module VITC submenu .................................................................. 3-73
Figure 3-41: Front-panel test signal buttons................................................................. 3-78

vi TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Table of Contents

Figure 3-42: DVG7 module main menu ..................................................................... 3-80

Figure 3-43: DVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu .............................................. 3-82
Figure 3-44: DVG7 module OVERLAY submenu ......................................................... 3-83
Figure 3-45: DVG7 module LOGO submenu............................................................... 3-84
Figure 3-46: DVG7 module ID TEXT submenu............................................................ 3-85
Figure 3-47: DVG7 module CIRCLE submenu ............................................................ 3-87
Figure 3-48: DVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu................................................... 3-88
Figure 3-49: DVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu............................................... 3-89
Figure 3-50: DVG7 module TIMING submenu ............................................................ 3-91
Figure 3-51: DVG7 module VIDEO submenu.............................................................. 3-92
Figure 3-52: DVG7 module BLACK submenu (Option BK only) ....................................... 3-94
Figure 3-53: Simplified GPS/GLONASS antenna system ................................................ 3-103
Figure 3-54: Time flow block diagram...................................................................... 3-107
Figure 3-55: GPS7 module main menu ..................................................................... 3-114
Figure 3-56: GPS7 module REFERENCE submenu ...................................................... 3-118
Figure 3-57: GPS7 module BLACK submenu ............................................................. 3-122
Figure 3-58: GPS7 module BLACK TIMING submenu.................................................. 3-124
Figure 3-59: GPS7 module HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu .................................. 3-126
Figure 3-60: GPS7 module TIMECODE submenu........................................................ 3-127
Figure 3-61: GPS7 module VITC submenu ................................................................ 3-129
Figure 3-62: GPS7 module GPS SETUP submenu ........................................................ 3-130
Figure 3-63: GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu .................................................... 3-133
Figure 3-64: GPS7 module TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu ............................................ 3-138
Figure 3-65: GPS7 module DST SCHEDULE submenu ................................................. 3-139
Figure 3-66: GPS7 module PROGRAM TIME submenu ................................................ 3-142
Figure 3-67: GPS7 module JAM SYNC submenu ........................................................ 3-143
Figure 3-68: GPS7 module LEAP SECOND submenu ................................................... 3-144
Figure 3-69: GPS7 module EPOCH SELECT submenu.................................................. 3-145
Figure 3-70: GPS7 module ALARM TIME submenu .................................................... 3-145
Figure 3-71: GPS7 module ALARM DELAY submenu .................................................. 3-146
Figure 3-72: GPS7 module LTC submenu.................................................................. 3-148
Figure 3-73: GPS7 module LTC TIMING submenu ...................................................... 3-150
Figure 3-74: GPS7 module GPI submenu .................................................................. 3-150
Figure 3-75: GPS7 module GPO submenu ................................................................. 3-151
Figure 3-76: GPS7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu ................................................... 3-152
Figure 3-77: Front-panel test signal buttons................................................................ 3-165
Figure 3-78: Optical zone plates (enlarged) ................................................................ 3-172
Figure 3-79: A “KX-only” zone plate........................................................................ 3-178
Figure 3-80: A “KX2-only” zone plate....................................................................... 3-179
Figure 3-81: A “KY-only” zone plate........................................................................ 3-180
Figure 3-82: A “KY2-only” zone plate....................................................................... 3-181

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual vii

Table of Contents

Figure 3-83: HD3G7 module main menu................................................................... 3-186

Figure 3-84: HD3G7 module main menu (Continued).................................................... 3-187
Figure 3-85: HD3G7 module STATUS menu in generator mode ........................................ 3-190
Figure 3-86: HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu ............................................... 3-191
Figure 3-87: HD3G7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ........................................... 3-192
Figure 3-88: HD3G7 module AUDIO (EMBEDDED) submenu ........................................ 3-193
Figure 3-89: HD3G7 module AUDIO : CHANNEL submenu........................................... 3-194
Figure 3-90: HD3G7 module TIMING submenu .......................................................... 3-196
Figure 3-91: HD3G7 module TIMECODE submenu ..................................................... 3-197
Figure 3-92: HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu ........................................................... 3-199
Figure 3-93: HD3G7 module Ancillary Payload submenu ............................................... 3-202
Figure 3-94: HD3G7 module Ancillary Payload submenu (Continued) ................................ 3-203
Figure 3-95: AFD code “1001” for a 16:9 coded frame................................................... 3-207
Figure 3-96: HD3G7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu ........................................... 3-208
Figure 3-97: HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu ................................................. 3-209
Figure 3-98: Front-panel test signal buttons................................................................ 3-218
Figure 3-99: HDLG7 module main menu .................................................................. 3-223
Figure 3-100: HDLG7 module LINK OFFSET submenu ................................................ 3-226
Figure 3-101: HDLG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu.......................................... 3-226
Figure 3-102: Front-panel test signal buttons .............................................................. 3-231
Figure 3-103: HDVG7 module main menu................................................................. 3-233
Figure 3-104: HDVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ......................................... 3-235
Figure 3-105: HDVG7 module OVERLAY submenu..................................................... 3-236
Figure 3-106: HDVG7 module LOGO submenu .......................................................... 3-237
Figure 3-107: HDVG7 module ID TEXT submenu ....................................................... 3-238
Figure 3-108: HDVG7 module CIRCLE submenu ........................................................ 3-240
Figure 3-109: HDVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu .............................................. 3-241
Figure 3-110: HDVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu .......................................... 3-242
Figure 3-111: HDVG7 module TIMING submenu ........................................................ 3-244
Figure 3-112: HDVG7 module TIMECODE submenu ................................................... 3-245
Figure 3-113: HDVG7 module VIDEO submenu ......................................................... 3-246
Figure 3-114: HDVG7 module BLACK submenu (Option BK only) ................................... 3-248
Figure 3-115: Front-panel test signal buttons .............................................................. 3-261
Figure 3-116: Optical zone plates (enlarged)............................................................... 3-270
Figure 3-117: A “KX-only” zone plate ...................................................................... 3-276
Figure 3-118: A “KX2-only” zone plate ..................................................................... 3-277
Figure 3-119: A “KY-only” zone plate ...................................................................... 3-278
Figure 3-120: A “KY2-only” zone plate ..................................................................... 3-279
Figure 3-121: SDI7 module main menu .................................................................... 3-284
Figure 3-122: SDI7 module main menu (Continued) ..................................................... 3-285
Figure 3-123: SDI7 module STATUS menu in Generator mode ......................................... 3-289

viii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Table of Contents

Figure 3-124: SDI7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu ................................................. 3-290

Figure 3-125: SDI7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu ............................................. 3-291
Figure 3-126: SDI7 module OVERLAY submenu ........................................................ 3-293
Figure 3-127: SDI7 module LOGO submenu .............................................................. 3-295
Figure 3-128: SDI7 module ID TEXT submenu........................................................... 3-298
Figure 3-129: SDI7 module CIRCLE submenu............................................................ 3-300
Figure 3-130: SDI7 module BURNT-IN TIMECODE submenu ........................................ 3-301
Figure 3-131: SDI7 module AUDIO (EMBEDDED) submenu.......................................... 3-302
Figure 3-132: SDI7 module AUDIO : CHANNEL submenu ............................................ 3-304
Figure 3-133: DOLBY-E CONFIG submenu diagram – part 1 .......................................... 3-306
Figure 3-134: DOLBY-E CONFIG submenu diagram – part 2 .......................................... 3-307
Figure 3-135: SDI7 module TIMING submenu ........................................................... 3-319
Figure 3-136: SDI7 module TIMECODE submenu ....................................................... 3-320
Figure 3-137: SDI7 module VIDEO submenu ............................................................. 3-323
Figure 3-138: SDI7 module Ancillary Payload submenu................................................. 3-326
Figure 3-139: SDI7 module Ancillary Payload submenu (Continued) .................................. 3-327
Figure 3-140: AFD code “1001” for a 16:9 coded frame ................................................. 3-331
Figure 3-141: SDI7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu ............................................. 3-332
Figure 3-142: SDI7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu .................................................. 3-335

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual ix

Table of Contents

List of Tables
Table i: TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator documentation...................................... xxii
Table 1-1: Standard and optional accessories ................................................................. 1-4
Table 1-2: Instrument and module options .................................................................... 1-4
Table 1-3: TG8000 environmental requirements ............................................................. 1-9
Table 1-4: AC line power requirements...................................................................... 1-10
Table 2-1: States of the INT and EXT reference indicators ................................................. 2-3
Table 2-2: States of the TIME (timecode) LED indicator.................................................... 2-4
Table 2-3: States of the FAULT LED indicator ............................................................... 2-5
Table 2-4: GPS7 module LTC/GPI connector pin assignments ........................................... 2-14
Table 2-5: Pin assignments of the mainframe GPI connector ............................................. 2-50
Table 2-6: Signal level combinations and the corresponding preset for the mainframe GPI........... 2-50
Table 2-7: External inspection check list .................................................................... 2-69
Table 3-1: AG7 module factory default settings .............................................................. 3-6
Table 3-2: Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 input signals ............................................ 3-15
Table 3-3: Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals ........................................... 3-15
Table 3-4: AGL7 module factory default settings .......................................................... 3-16
Table 3-5: ATG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons ................................. 3-20
Table 3-6: Test signals in the ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu .............................. 3-24
Table 3-7: ATG7 module factory default settings........................................................... 3-28
Table 3-8: AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons ................................. 3-32
Table 3-9: AVG7 module factory default settings .......................................................... 3-47
Table 3-10: AWVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons............................. 3-51
Table 3-11: Timing adjustment ranges for AWVG7 module output signals ............................. 3-60
Table 3-12: AWVG7 module factory default settings ...................................................... 3-62
Table 3-13: BG7 module output signal formats............................................................. 3-67
Table 3-14: BG7 module Option CB test signals (BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs only) ........... 3-68
Table 3-15: Timing adjustment ranges for BG7 output signals ........................................... 3-70
Table 3-16: BG7 module factory default settings ........................................................... 3-74
Table 3-17: DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons ................................ 3-78
Table 3-18: DVG7 module factory default settings......................................................... 3-95
Table 3-19: Figures of merit for signal quality ............................................................. 3-105
Table 3-20: Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 input signals........................................... 3-120
Table 3-21: GPS7 module output signal formats .......................................................... 3-123
Table 3-22: Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 output signals ......................................... 3-124
Table 3-23: GPS7 module LTC output signal formats .................................................... 3-149
Table 3-24: GPS7 module factory default settings ........................................................ 3-154
Table 3-25: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G level A (1920 × 1080)............................. 3-160
Table 3-26: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level A (1280 × 720) ............................. 3-160

x TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Table of Contents

Table 3-27: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level A (2K × 1080) .............................. 3-160
Table 3-28: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)............................ 3-161
Table 3-29: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level B (2K × 1080) .............................. 3-161
Table 3-30: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 1080)............................. 3-161
Table 3-31: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 720) .............................. 3-161
Table 3-32: HD3G7 module Generator mode – HD-SDI (1920 × 1080)................................ 3-161
Table 3-33: HD3G7 module Generator mode – HD-SDI (1280 × 720) ................................. 3-161
Table 3-34: HD3G7 module Converter mode – 3G Level A 1920 × 1080 formats .................... 3-162
Table 3-35: HD3G7 module Converter mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)............................ 3-162
Table 3-36: HD3G7 module Converter mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 1920 × 1080).................... 3-163
Table 3-37: HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons............................. 3-166
Table 3-38: HD3G7 module zone plate pattern control parameters ..................................... 3-176
Table 3-39: HD3G7 module factory default settings ...................................................... 3-212
Table 3-40: HDLG7 module signal formats ................................................................ 3-217
Table 3-41: HDLG7 module HD test signal set assigned to the test signal buttons.................... 3-219
Table 3-42: HDLG7 module projector test pattern set assigned to the test signal buttons ............ 3-220
Table 3-43: HDLG7 module sample structure/depth signal formats..................................... 3-224
Table 3-44: HDLG7 module factory default settings...................................................... 3-227
Table 3-45: HDVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons ............................. 3-231
Table 3-46: HDVG7 module output signal formats ....................................................... 3-248
Table 3-47: HDVG7 module factory default settings ..................................................... 3-249
Table 3-48: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (1920 × 1080) ............................. 3-257
Table 3-49: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (1280 × 720) ............................... 3-257
Table 3-50: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (2K × 1080)................................ 3-257
Table 3-51: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080) ............................. 3-258
Table 3-52: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2K × 1080)................................ 3-258
Table 3-53: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2×HD 1080) .............................. 3-258
Table 3-54: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2×HD 720) ................................ 3-258
Table 3-55: SDI7 module – HD-SDI (1920 × 1080) ...................................................... 3-258
Table 3-56: SDI7 module – HD-SDI (1280 × 720) ........................................................ 3-258
Table 3-57: SDI7 module – SD-525 (720 × 486) .......................................................... 3-258
Table 3-58: SDI7 module – SD-625 (720 × 576) .......................................................... 3-259
Table 3-59: SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons ................................ 3-261
Table 3-60: SDI7 module zone plate pattern control parameters......................................... 3-274
Table 3-61: Dolby E generated formats – 23.98 Hz frame rate .......................................... 3-312
Table 3-62: Dolby E generated formats – 24 Hz frame rate .............................................. 3-313
Table 3-63: Dolby E generated formats – 25 Hz frame rate .............................................. 3-314
Table 3-64: Dolby E generated formats – 29.97 Hz frame rate .......................................... 3-315
Table 3-65: Dolby E generated formats – 30 Hz frame rate .............................................. 3-316
Table 3-66: Dolby E loudness measurements – 23.98 and 24 Hz frame rates .......................... 3-317
Table 3-67: Dolby E loudness measurements – 25 Hz frame rate ....................................... 3-318

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xi

Table of Contents

Table 3-68: Dolby E loudness measurements – 29.97 and 30 Hz frame rates .......................... 3-318
Table 3-69: SDI7 module factory default settings ......................................................... 3-337

xii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

Important safety information
This manual contains information and warnings that must be followed by the user
for safe operation and to keep the product in a safe condition.
To safely perform service on this product, additional information is provided at
the end of this section. (See page xv, Service safety summary.)

General safety summary

Use the product only as specified. Review the following safety precautions to
avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it.
Carefully read all instructions. Retain these instructions for future reference.
Comply with local and national safety codes.
For correct and safe operation of the product, it is essential that you follow
generally accepted safety procedures in addition to the safety precautions specified
in this manual.
The product is designed to be used by trained personnel only.
Only qualified personnel who are aware of the hazards involved should remove
the cover for repair, maintenance, or adjustment.
Before use, always check the product with a known source to be sure it is
operating correctly.
This product is not intended for detection of hazardous voltages.
Use personal protective equipment to prevent shock and arc blast injury where
hazardous live conductors are exposed.
While using this product, you may need to access other parts of a larger system.
Read the safety sections of the other component manuals for warnings and
cautions related to operating the system.
When incorporating this equipment into a system, the safety of that system is the
responsibility of the assembler of the system.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xiii

Important safety information

To avoid fire or personal Use proper power cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
injury certified for the country of use.
Do not use the provided power cord for other products.

Ground the product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, make sure that the product is properly grounded.
Do not disable the power cord grounding connection.

Power disconnect. The power cord disconnects the product from the power
source. See instructions for the location. Do not position the equipment so that it
is difficult to disconnect the power cord; it must remain accessible to the user at
all times to allow for quick disconnection if needed.

Observe all terminal ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common terminal, that
exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal.

Do not operate without covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed, or with the case open. Hazardous voltage exposure is possible.

Avoid exposed circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components

when power is present.

Do not operate with suspected failures. If you suspect that there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Disable the product if it is damaged. Do not use the product if it is damaged
or operates incorrectly. If in doubt about safety of the product, turn it off and
disconnect the power cord. Clearly mark the product to prevent its further
operation.
Before use, inspect voltage probes, test leads, and accessories for mechanical
damage and replace when damaged. Do not use probes or test leads if they are
damaged, if there is exposed metal, or if a wear indicator shows.
Examine the exterior of the product before you use it. Look for cracks or missing
pieces.
Use only specified replacement parts.

Do not operate in wet/damp conditions. Be aware that condensation may occur if

a unit is moved from a cold to a warm environment.

xiv TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Important safety information

Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere.

Keep product surfaces clean and dry. Remove the input signals before you clean
the product.

Provide proper ventilation. Refer to the installation instructions in the manual for
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
Slots and openings are provided for ventilation and should never be covered or
otherwise obstructed. Do not push objects into any of the openings.

Provide a safe working environment. Always place the product in a location

convenient for viewing the display and indicators.
Avoid improper or prolonged use of keyboards, pointers, and button pads.
Improper or prolonged keyboard or pointer use may result in serious injury.
Be sure your work area meets applicable ergonomic standards. Consult with an
ergonomics professional to avoid stress injuries.
Use only the Tektronix rackmount hardware specified for this product.

Service safety summary

The Service safety summary section contains additional information required to
safely perform service on the product. Only qualified personnel should perform
service procedures. Read this Service safety summary and the General safety
summary before performing any service procedures.

To avoid electric shock. Do not touch exposed connections.

Do not service alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this

product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is
present.

Disconnect power. To avoid electric shock, switch off the product power and
disconnect the power cord from the mains power before removing any covers or
panels, or opening the case for servicing.

Use care when servicing with power on. Dangerous voltages or currents may exist
in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and disconnect
test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing components.

Verify safety after repair. Always recheck ground continuity and mains dielectric
strength after performing a repair.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xv

Important safety information

Terms in this manual

These terms may appear in this manual:

WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result

in injury or loss of life.

CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in

damage to this product or other property.

Symbols and terms on the product

These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read
the marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you
read the marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.

When this symbol is marked on the product, be sure to consult the manual
to find out the nature of the potential hazards and any actions which have to
be taken to avoid them. (This symbol may also be used to refer the user to
ratings in the manual.)

The following symbol(s) may appear on the product:

xvi TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

Compliance information
This section lists the EMC (electromagnetic compliance), safety, and
environmental standards with which the instrument complies.

EMC compliance
European Union EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.
EN 55032 Class A. Product Family Standard for Multimedia Equipment –
Emissions 1 2
EN 55103-2 Environment E2. Product Family Standard for Audio, Video,
Audio-Visual. Industrial and Light Commercial. Part 2: Immunity.
EN 55103-2:2009 Annex A. Radiated magnetic field immunity
IEC 61000-4-2+A1+A2. Electrostatic discharge immunity
IEC 61000-4-3+A1. RF electromagnetic field immunity
IEC 61000-4-4. Electrical fast transient / burst immunity
IEC 61000-4-5. Power line surge immunity
IEC 61000-4-6+A1+A2. RF conducted immunity
IEC 61000-4-11. Power line voltage fluctuation immunity
EN 61000-3-2. AC power line harmonic emissions
EN 61000-3-3. Voltage changes, fluctuations, and flicker

European contact.
Mfr. Compliance Contact
Tektronix, Inc. PO Box 500, MS 19‐045
Beaverton, OR 97077, USA
www.tek.com
1 This product is intended for use in nonresidential areas only. Use in residential areas may cause electromagnetic
interference.
2 For compliance with the EMC standards listed here, high quality shielded interface cables should be used.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xvii

Compliance information

Australia / New Zealand Complies with the EMC provision of the Radiocommunications Act per the
Declaration of following standard, in accordance with ACMA:
Conformity – EMC EN 55022. Radiated and conducted emissions, Class A, in accordance
with EN 55032.

Australia / New Zealand contact.

Fluke Australia PTY LTD
Unit 26, 7 Anelia Avenue
Castle Hill, NSW, Australia 2154

Russian Federation This product is approved by the Russian government to carry the GOST mark.

Safety compliance
This section lists the safety standards with which the product complies and other
safety compliance information.

EC declaration of Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the

conformity – low voltage Official Journal of the European Union:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
EN 61010-1. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements.

U.S. nationally recognized UL 61010-1. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
testing laboratory listing Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements.

Canadian certification CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1. Safety Requirements for Electrical

Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General
Requirements.

Additional compliances IEC 61010-1. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements.

Equipment type Test and measuring equipment.

Safety class Class 1 – grounded product.

xviii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Compliance information

Pollution degree A measure of the contaminants that could occur in the environment around
descriptions and within a product. Typically the internal environment inside a product is
considered to be the same as the external. Products should be used only in the
environment for which they are rated.
Pollution Degree 1. No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs.
Products in this category are generally encapsulated, hermetically sealed, or
located in clean rooms.
Pollution Degree 2. Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs.
Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must
be expected. This location is a typical office/home environment. Temporary
condensation occurs only when the product is out of service.
Pollution Degree 3. Conductive pollution, or dry, nonconductive pollution
that becomes conductive due to condensation. These are sheltered locations
where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled. The area is protected
from direct sunshine, rain, or direct wind.
Pollution Degree 4. Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through
conductive dust, rain, or snow. Typical outdoor locations.

Pollution degree rating Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 61010-1). Rated for indoor, dry location
use only.

IP rating IP20 (as defined in IEC 60529).

Measurement and Measurement terminals on this product may be rated for measuring mains voltages
overvoltage category from one or more of the following categories (see specific ratings marked on
descriptions the product and in the manual).
Category II. Circuits directly connected to the building wiring at utilization
points (socket outlets and similar points).
Category III. In the building wiring and distribution system.
Category IV. At the source of the electrical supply to the building.

NOTE. Only mains power supply circuits have an overvoltage category rating.
Only measurement circuits have a measurement category rating. Other circuits
within the product do not have either rating.

Mains overvoltage Overvoltage category II (as defined in IEC 61010-1).

category rating

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xix

Compliance information

Environmental considerations
This section provides information about the environmental impact of the product.

Product end-of-life Observe the following guidelines when recycling an instrument or component:
handling
Equipment recycling. Production of this equipment required the extraction and
use of natural resources. The equipment may contain substances that could be
harmful to the environment or human health if improperly handled at the product’s
end of life. In order to avoid release of such substances into the environment and
to reduce the use of natural resources, we encourage you to recycle this product
in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or
recycled appropriately.
This symbol indicates that this product complies with the applicable European
Union requirements according to Directives 2012/19/EU and 2006/66/EC
on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) and batteries.
For information about recycling options, check the Tektronix Web site
(www.tek.com/productrecycling).

Perchlorate materials. This product contains one or more type CR lithium

batteries. According to the state of California, CR lithium batteries are
classified as perchlorate materials and require special handling. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for additional information.

xx TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

Preface
This manual describes how to install and operate the TG8000 Multiformat Test
Signal Generator.

Supported products
The information in this manual applies to the following Tektronix products:
TG8000 mainframe (includes the replaceable Power Supply module)
AG7 Audio Generator module
AGL7 Analog Genlock module
ATG7 Analog Test Generator module
AVG7 Analog Video Generator module
AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module
BG7 Black Generator module
DVG7 Digital Video Generator module
GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module
HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module
HDLG7 HD Dual Link Generator module
HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module
SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

About this manual

This manual is composed of the following sections:
Getting started shows you how to configure and install your TG8000 system
and provides an Incoming Inspection procedure. The section also describes
the mainframe options and how to install modules.
Operating basics provides an overview of the front-panel controls and
rear-panel connections.
Modules provides operating information for each of the modules that can
be added to the TG8000 mainframe.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual xxi

Preface

Terms in the manual Newer GPS7 modules have a GPS receiver that is both GPS and GLONASS
capable. Older GPS7 module have a GPS receiver that is only GPS capable.
The term “GPS” is used throughout this manual to generically refer to GPS and
GLONASS signal functionality.

Product documentation
The following table lists the user documents for the TG8000 and its related
modules:

Table i: TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator documentation

Availability
Document Tektronix Part Number Description Print Web CD
User Manual 071-3036-xx (English) Describes how to install, operate, and
071-3037-xx (Japanese) configure the instrument
071-3038-xx (Russian)
PC Tools Technical Reference 077-0684-xx Describes how to use the PC tools software
that is supplied with the instrument
Specifications and 077-0685-xx Lists the product specifications and
Performance Verification provides procedures for verifying the
performance of the instrument
Programmer Manual 077-0686-xx Provides programming information for the
mainframe and related modules
Service Manual 077-0687-xx Describes how to service the mainframe to
the module level (such as circuit boards
and fuses) and provides information about
servicing generator modules
Declassification and Security 077-0688-xx Describes how to clear or sanitize the data
Instructions storage (memory) devices in the product
for customers with data security concerns.
Release Notes 077-0689-xx Describes the new features, improvements,
and limitations of the instrument firmware
Video Sync Pulse Generator 077-0563-xx Provides information for system
and Electronic Changeover (ECO422D) integrators who are designing systems for
Unit System Integration 077-0877-xx high-definition (HD) and standard-definition
Technical Reference (ECO8000 / ECO8020) (SD) digital video content where Tektronix
electronic changeover units and video
sync pulse generators are to be deployed.

xxii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

Getting started
Getting started
This section contains the following information to get you started using the
TG8000 generator:
Product description
List of instrument accessories and options
Initial product inspection procedure
Installation instructions (mainframe and modules)
Functional check procedures

Product description
The TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator is a multiformat TV signal
generator platform supporting both analog and digital video standards. The
TG8000 consists of a mainframe and up to four plug-in modules. The modules
are either signal generators or they provide special functions, such as genlock
capability.

Key features The TG8000 and the available modules provide the following features:
Simultaneous generation of HDTV/SDTV synchronization signals and test
signals in a variety of formats
Modular architecture with up to four generators or special function modules
Analog genlock function dealing with NTSC or PAL black burst signal,
HDTV trilevel sync signal, and CW signals (AGL7)
Synchronization with the GPS and/or GLONASS timing signal (GPS7)
Timecode generator with VITC (GPS7 and BG7), with LTC (GPS7), and with
ATC (HDVG7) when a GPS7 module is installed
Timecode generator with ATC (HD3G7 and SDI7) with or without a
GPS7 module
Dual link SDI generator and converter (HDLG7)
3 Gb/s SDI video generator (HD3G7 and SDI7 with Option 3G)
3 Gb/s SDI video converter (HD3G7)
Independent setting of amplitudes, frequencies, and audio clicks of 16 channel
embedded audio signal (DVG7 and HDVG7)
Independent setting of amplitudes, frequencies, and audio clicks of embedded
audio signal (up to 32 channels) (HD3G7 and SDI7)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–1

Getting started

Circle, logo, and text overlays on test signals (AVG7, AWVG7, DVG7,
HDVG7, SDI7)
Zone plate signals (HD3G7 and SDI7)
Moving picture generation function by scrolling the active area of the signal
(AVG7, AWVG7, DVG7, HD3G7, HDLG7, HDVG7, and SDI7)
User-defined ancillary data payload (HD3G7 and SDI7)
Reference generator performance level
Ethernet interface for remote control, upgrading the instrument firmware,
and downloading or copying various user data such as test signal files, logo
files, and preset files
General Purpose Interface (GPI) port for recalling instrument presets and
outputting alarm signals
USB port for upgrading the instrument firmware and backing up or restoring
user data such as test signal files, logo files, and preset files
User replaceable Power Supply module

Contents of the TG8000 A signal library, software application packages, and product documentation for
and TG700 Software both the TG8000 and TG700 generators are included in the TG8000 and TG700
Library and Documentation Software Library and Documentation DVD, which is provided as a standard
DVD accessory with the product. You can use the contents of the DVD to execute the
following operations:
Upload and download files such as signal files, logo files, and preset files
Download signals from the signal library to the generator mainframe
Create a logo (logo file) to be inserted into the test signal
Create a frame picture file using the generation of a picture or test pattern

1–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

Module compatibility Each of the modules that was designed to operate in the Tektronix TG700 TV
between the TG8000 and Signal Generator Platform will also operate in the TG8000 mainframe.
TG700 mainframes
GPS7 module. The adjustment of the mainframe oscillator depends on the
mainframe in which the GPS7 module is installed:
TG8000 mainframe: You need to set only the internal frequency of the
mainframe oscillator. (See page 3-100, GPS7 module oven calibration
procedures.)
TG700 mainframe: You need to set the internal frequency of the mainframe
oscillator and characterize the mainframe oscillator frequency as a function of
voltage. Refer to the TG700 User Manual for more information (Tektronix
part number 071-1970-XX).
GPS receiver: There are three versions of the GPS receiver as described
below. (See page 3-102, How to determine which GPS receiver is installed in
your GPS7 module.)
3002. This receiver supports GPS signals only and was replaced by the
3015 receiver. This receiver is compatible with both the TG8000 and
TG700.
3015. This receiver supports GPS and GLONASS signals and was
replaced by the 3023 receiver. There are some reported limitations with
this receiver. See the TG8000 Release Notes for more information. The
TG8000 must have firmware version 1.6 or above installed and the TG700
must have firmware version 5.64 installed for this receiver to operate.

NOTE. On the TG700, the GPS receiver module ID readout is not available.
Users need to view the GPS CONSTELLATION submenu of the GPS SETUP
menu to determine if the GPS/GLONASS receiver is installed.

3023. This receiver supports GPS and GLONASS signals. The TG8000
must have firmware version 2.5 or above installed for this receiver to
operate. This receiver is not compatible with the TG700.

SDI7 module. The behavior of the Moving Picture function depends on the
mainframe in which the SDI7 module is installed:
TG8000 mainframe: When Moving Picture is enabled, the circle and text
overlays remain static regardless of the signal type (standard test signal or
“frame (.BMP) picture”). However, the logo overlay remains static for only
standard test signals but continues to move when used with a “frame (.BMP)
picture.”
TG700 mainframe: When Moving Picture is enabled, the circle and text
overlays remain static and the logo overlay moves regardless of the signal
type (standard test signal or “frame (.BMP) picture”).

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–3

Getting started

Accessories
The following table lists the standard and optional accessories provided with
the TG8000 mainframe and modules.

Table 1-1: Standard and optional accessories

Tektronix
Accessory Std. Opt. part number
TG8000 User Manual (English) ● 071-3036-xx
Japanese and Russian language versions are available in
PDF format on the product DVD.
TG8000 Software Library and Product Documentation DVD ● 063-4440-xx
Rackmounting hardware ● 351-1137-00
Power cord ● Varies by
(See page 1-5, International power cord options.) option
Blank rear panel ● 614-1051-00
GPS/GLONASS rooftop antenna (5.0 VDC, 1588 MHz range ● SPG8000ANT
signals, F connector) for GPS and GLONASS satellites 1
1 The antenna works with the integrated internal GPS receiver of a GPS7 module.

Options and upgrades

Mainframe and module The following table lists the options that can be ordered with the
options TG8000 mainframe and modules.

Table 1-2: Instrument and module options

Option Description Instrument/module
3G When you order Option 3G, an option key is SDI7
provided which enables 3G-SDI signal generation
on the module for which the option is specified.
DBT When you order Option DBT, an option key is SDI7
provided which enables embedded audio Dolby
E program generation on the module for which
the option is specified.
D1 When you order Option D1, a Calibration Test TG8000 mainframe,
Data Report is provided with the instrument AG7, AGL7, ATG7, AVG7,
and/or module for which the option is specified. AWVG7, GPS7, HD3G7,
HDLG7, HDVG7, SDI7
BK When you order Option BK, two serial digital DVG7, HDVG7
black signal outputs are added to the module.
CB When you order Option CB, 10 field ID and BG7
NTSC/PAL color bars signals can be output from
the BLACK3 and BLACK4 outputs.

1–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

International power cord All of the available power cord options listed below include a lock mechanism
options except as otherwise noted.
Opt. A0 – North America power (standard)
Opt. A1 – Universal EURO power
Opt. A2 – United Kingdom power
Opt. A3 – Australia power
Opt. A5 – Switzerland power
Opt. A6 – Japan power
Opt. A10 – China power
Opt. A11 – India power (no locking cable)
Opt. A12 – Brazil power (no locking cable)
Opt. A99 – No power cord

Firmware and hardware Firmware upgrades. Tektronix releases product updates to add new features and
upgrades to fix problems with the software or firmware. You can find the latest firmware
for your product at the Tektronix Web site (www.tek.com/downloads). (See
page 2-53, How to upgrade the instrument firmware.)

Hardware upgrades. You can order any of the modules listed at the front of this
manual to install in the TG8000 generator mainframe. (See page xxi, Supported
products.) In addition, you can order a replacement Power Supply module for the
TG8000 mainframe by purchasing a TG800UP PW upgrade.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–5

Getting started

Initial product inspection

Perform the following product inspection procedure when you receive your
instrument:
1. Inspect the shipping carton for external damage, which may indicate damage
to the instrument.
2. Remove the TG8000 generator from the shipping carton, and then check
that the instrument has not been damaged in transit. Prior to shipment the
instrument is thoroughly inspected for mechanical defects. The exterior
should not have any scratches or impact marks.

NOTE. Save the shipping carton and packaging materials for instrument
repackaging in case shipment becomes necessary.

3. Verify that the shipping carton contains the basic instrument, all modules
you ordered, the standard accessories and any optional accessories that you
ordered listed in the table. (See Table 1-1.)
Contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative if there is a problem
with your instrument or if your shipment is incomplete.

To install the mainframe

This section provides installation information for the TG8000 mainframe.

Module installation The TG8000 mainframe is shipped with the generator modules that you ordered
already installed and configured. You can add or remove modules as necessary for
your application. (See page 1-11, Module installation and removal.)

1–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

Rackmount installation

WARNING. Personal injury or damage to the instrument can occur if the

instrument is not properly secured in the equipment rack.

The TG8000 is configured at shipment for use in an equipment rack. Refer

to the Rackmount Slides and Rails Kit Instructions, Tektronix part number
071-2746-XX, that was supplied with the instrument for instructions on how
to install the rackmounting hardware.

To install the instrument into an equipment rack. After you have installed the
rackmounting hardware, perform the following steps to install the instrument
into an equipment rack:

WARNING. To prevent injury during product installation, use care not to pinch
hands or fingers in the rails and slides.

1. Insert the instrument left and right slides into the ends of the rack rails while
tilting the long handle part of each lever upward. (See Figure 1-1.)

NOTE. Make sure to insert the instrument slides inside the inner rack rails. You
may also need to tilt the rear of the instrument up or down at a slight angle to fit
the slides into the rails.

2. Push the instrument into the rack until it stops.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the instrument and rackmount, do not force the
instrument into the rack if it does not slide smoothly. The rails assembly may need
to be adjusted to resolve the problem.

3. Retighten any loose screws and push the instrument all the way into the rack.
If the tracks do not slide smoothly, readjust the rail assemblies.
4. When adjusting is completed, tighten all rail assembly 10-32 screws using
28 inch-lbs of torque.
5. If the instrument has knob screws on the front corners, tighten them so that
they are secured in the rack.
6. To remove the instrument from the rack, loosen the knob screws.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–7

Getting started

Figure 1-1: Installing or removing the instrument into or from the rack

To remove the instrument from an equipment rack. Perform the following steps to
remove an instrument that is installed in an equipment rack:

WARNING. To prevent injury when removing the product from the rack, do not
forcefully and abruptly pull the product from the rack. Pull with the minimum
force required to move the instrument with a consistent, even motion.

1. Loosen the knob screws, if present, that attach the front of the instrument
to the rack.
2. Gently pull the instrument toward you until you can reach the levers at the
rear of the instrument.
3. Tilt both lever handles upward simultaneously to allow them to clear the
stops. (See Figure 1-1.)
4. Pull the instrument past the stops and out of the rack.

1–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

Environmental operating Check that the location of your installation has the proper operating environment
requirements as listed in the following table. (See Table 1-3.)

CAUTION. Damage to the instrument can occur if this instrument is powered on at

temperatures outside the specified temperature range.

Table 1-3: TG8000 environmental requirements

Parameter Description
Temperature Operating 0 °C to +50 °C
Nonoperating –20 °C to +60 °C
Relative Operating 20% to 80% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb
Humidity temperature 29.4 °C
Nonoperating 5% to 90% (No condensation); Maximum wet-bulb
temperature 40.0 °C
Altitude Operating To 3,000 m (9,842 feet)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1 °C each
300 m above 1.5 km.
Nonoperating To 15,000 m (49,212 feet)

Leave space for cooling by ensuring standard side clearance for rack mounting or
2 inches (5.1 cm) of side clearance for benchtop use. Also, ensure sufficient rear
clearance (approximately 2 inches) so that cables are not damaged by sharp bends.
For complete specifications for the instrument, refer to the TG8000 Specifications
and Performance Verification Technical Reference provided on the DVD that
shipped with your instrument.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–9

Getting started

Power connection The TG8000 operates from a single-phase power source with the neutral
conductor at or near earth ground. The line conductor is fused for over-current
protection. A protective ground connection through the grounding conductor in
the locking power cord is essential for safe operation.

CAUTION. The instrument does not have a power switch. When you connect the
power cable to the AC line connector, the instrument powers on.

AC power requirements. Check that your location provides the proper electrical
power requirements as listed in the following table. (See Table 1-4.)

Table 1-4: AC line power requirements

Parameter Description
Line Voltage Range 100 - 240 VAC
WARNING. To reduce the risk of fire
and shock, ensure that the mains supply
voltage fluctuations do not exceed 10% of
the operating voltage range.
Line frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum power 120 VA

Connecting the power cable. Connect the power cable to the instrument first, and
then connect it to the AC power source. Connecting the power cable causes the
instrument to power on.
After connecting the power, make sure that the fan on the rear panel is working.
If the fan is not working, turn off the power by disconnecting the power cable
from the AC power source, and then contact your local Tektronix Field Office
or representative.

1–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

Module installation and removal

The following procedures describe how to install and remove modules from the
TG8000 mainframe. A screwdriver with a #1 Phillips tip is the only tool you need
to install or remove a module.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the mainframe and module, always remove the
power cord before installing or removing a module.
To prevent instrument problems, be sure to upgrade the instrument firmware to the
latest version before you install a new module. If you install a module with newer
firmware than the version installed in the instrument mainframe, the instrument
may not boot up. (See page 2-53, How to upgrade the instrument firmware.)

To prevent component
damage

CAUTION. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage components on the module

and mainframe. To prevent ESD or other component damage, follow the
guidelines below when installing, removing or handling a module.

Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap to discharge the static voltage from
your body while installing or removing modules from the TG8000 mainframe.
Transport and store modules in a static-protected bag or container.
Do not slide the module over any surface.
Handle modules as little as possible.
Do not touch module components or connector pins.
Do not use any devices capable of generating or holding a static charge in the
work area where you remove, install, or handle modules.
Avoid handling modules in areas that have a floor or work-surface covering
capable of generating a static charge.
Do not remove the module circuit board assembly from the shield. The
shield is an important stiffener which prevents damage to surface-mount
components.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–11

Getting started

To install a module To install a module into an empty slot in the mainframe, perform the following
procedure:
1. Unplug the power cord from the power connector on the rear panel of the
mainframe.
2. Use the following guidelines to select the slot where you will install the
module. The following figure shows a sample module configuration with
the associated slot numbers.
For AGL7 and GPS7 modules, only one of these modules can be installed
in the TG8000 mainframe at a time, and it must be installed only in slot 1.
All other modules may be installed in any slot location.

NOTE. When installing a GPS7 module into an existing TG8000 mainframe, it

is suggested that you calibrate the mainframe oscillator oven as part of the
installation and qualification process. (See page 2-47, CAL OVEN submenu
(GPS7 module only).)
Although the GPS7 module will operate only in slot 1, you can use the GPS7
module to test diagnostics in each of the four mainframe slots. Refer to the
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference
for more information.

For the AG7, ATG7, AVG7, AWVG7, BG7, DVG7, HD3G7, HDLG7,
HDVG7, and SDI7 modules, up to four of the modules can be installed
in the TG8000 mainframe.
The TG8000 Power Supply module is user replaceable and must be
installed only in the position shown in the following figure. The TG8000
Power Supply module cannot be installed in a TG700 mainframe.
If you move an AGL7 module from a TG700 mainframe to a TG8000
mainframe, or if you move an AGL7 module from a TG8000 with
firmware version 1.2 or below to a TG8000 with firmware version 1.3 or
above, the FPGA of the AGL7 module will be automatically updated
when the instrument boots.

CAUTION. To prevent an update failure of your AGL7 module, do not remove

or cycle power on the TG8000 while the instrument is rebooting after
installing the AGL7 module. The FPGA update on the AGL7 module takes
about three minutes and there is no indication on the front panel that the AGL7
module is being updated. If power is interrupted before the FPGA update is
complete, the module will need to be returned to Tektronix for service.

1–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

Figure 1-2: TG8000 slot numbering

3. Use a screwdriver with a #1 Phillips tip to loosen the two screws of the blank
panel attached to the slot you want to use, and then pull it away from the
instrument. Save the blank panel for future use. (See Figure 1-3.)
If you are installing a new module into a slot that already contains a module,
remove the existing module. (See page 1-15, To remove a module.)

Figure 1-3: Removing the blank panel

CAUTION. Be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module
when you insert the module into the mainframe.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–13

Getting started

4. Insert the module into the slot, paying attention to the module orientation.
(See Figure 1-4.) Push the module into the slot until the connector board of
the module is firmly engaged with the Main board of the mainframe.

Figure 1-4: Installing a module

5. Tighten the two screws to secure the module to the mainframe. (See
Figure 1-5.)

Figure 1-5: Securing a module

1–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

To remove a module To remove a module from the mainframe, perform the following procedure:

CAUTION. To facilitate module removal, attach terminations or BNC cables to the

module connectors. The connector may be damaged if too much force is applied
to it during module removal.

1. Unplug the power cord from the power connector on the mainframe rear panel.
2. Attach 75 Ω terminations or BNC cables to the BNC connectors on the
module to be removed. Module removal becomes easier if the terminations or
cables are attached to the connectors at the left and right ends.
3. Use a screwdriver with a #1 Phillips tip to loosen the two screws securing
the module to the mainframe.

CAUTION. Be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module
when you remove the module from the mainframe.

4. Pull the module slowly toward you while supporting the terminations or BNC
cables attached to the connectors. (See Figure 1-6.)

Figure 1-6: Removing a module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–15

Getting started

5. If this empty slot will not be used, you must attach a blank panel to the
mainframe to control instrument cooling and EMI emissions.
a. Align the blank panel with the open slot of the mainframe.
b. Tighten the two screws to secure the blank panel to the mainframe.
A blank panel is available as an optional accessory for the
TG8000 mainframe. Refer to Accessories. (See page 1-4.)
6. If you want to install another module into the slot from which the module is
removed, perform Installing a Module starting at step 4. (See page 1-11,
Module installation and removal.)

Functional checks
Use the following procedures to check that the TG8000 modules installed in
your instrument are functional.

AG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the AG7 Audio Generator module
check is functional:

Required equipment.

Digital audio monitor

Oscilloscope
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω Termination

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization process for all installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.
4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.
5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the AG7 main menu as shown
below appears.

6. Connect the 1+2 connector to the digital audio monitor using the 75 Ω BNC
cable.

1–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

7. Set the digital audio monitor to display the status for the audio data.
8. Check that any CRC error does not appear on the monitor.
9. Change the BNC cable from the 1+2 connector to the 3+4 connector, and
check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor.
10. Change the BNC cable from the 3+4 connector to the 5+6 connector, and
check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor.
11. Change the BNC cable from the 5+6 connector to the 7+8 connector, and
check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor.
12. Change the BNC cable from the 7+8 connector to the SILENCE connector,
and check that no CRC errors appear on the monitor.
13. Connect the 48 kHz CLOCK connector to the oscilloscope CH1 input using
the 75 Ω BNC cable and 75 Ω termination.
14. Check that the appropriate clock signal is displayed on the screen.

AGL7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the AGL7 Analog Genlock module
check is functional:

Required equipment.

TV signal generator
NTSC/PAL waveform monitor
HDTV waveform monitor
75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω termination

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization process for all installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.
4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–17

Getting started

Genlock function.
5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the AGL7 main menu shown
below appears.

6. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GENLOCK from the
main menu and then press the ENTER button.
7. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Internal and then press
the ENTER button.
8. Check that INT.REF indicator at the right side of the front panel lights. This
shows that the instrument is using the internal reference signal.
9. Connect one of the TV signal generators output connectors to the AGL7 REF
connector, using the 75 Ω BNC cable. Terminate the other side of the REF
connector with the 75 Ω termination.
10. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the menu item
corresponding to the input signal and then press the ENTER button.
11. Check that EXT.REF indicator at the right side of the front panel lights. This
shows that the instrument is locked to the input signal.
12. Disconnect the BNC cable from the REF connector.
13. Check that EXT.REF indicator at the right side of the front panel blinks.
This shows that the external reference signal is not being input to the REF
connector.

Black signal outputs.

14. Press the front-panel BACK button.
15. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT
from the main menu.
16. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, then press
the ENTER button. The SELECT FORMAT submenu shown below appears.

17. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC or PAL for your
waveform monitor and then press the ENTER button.

1–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

18. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst, then press
the ENTER button.
19. Connect the BLACK 1 connector to the NTSC/PAL waveform monitor using
the 75 Ω BNC cable.
20. Set the waveform monitor to view the black burst signal.
21. Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed.
22. Press the BACK button twice to display the SELECT OUTPUT menu.
23. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 2, then press
the ENTER button.
24. Repeat steps 17 and 18.
25. Connect the BLACK 2 connector to the NTSC/PAL waveform monitor using
the 75 Ω BNC cable.
26. Set the waveform monitor to view the black burst signal.
27. Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed.
28. Press the BACK button twice to display the SELECT OUTPUT menu.
29. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 3 and then
press the ENTER button. This displays the SELECT FORMAT submenu.
30. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 60i and then press
the ENTER button.
31. Connect the BLACK 3 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using
the 75 Ω BNC cable.
32. Check that the appropriate HDTV trilevel sync signal is displayed.

ATG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the ATG7 Analog Test Generator
check module is functional:

Required equipment.

NTSC/PAL waveform monitor

75 Ω BNC cable
75 Ω terminator

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11, Module
installation and removal.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization process for all installed modules is executed.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–19

Getting started

3. Check that no error messages appear on the display.

4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.

SIGNAL output.
5. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the SIGNAL connector to one of the
input connectors on the waveform monitor rear panel.
6. Use the 75 Ω terminator to terminate the other loop through connector on the
waveform monitor rear panel.
7. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the ATG7 main menu shown
below appears.

8. Press the front-panel FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select NTSC or PAL.
9. Press one of the front-panel test signal buttons (for example COLOR BAR)
to output a signal.
10. Set the waveform monitor to view the signal.
11. Check that the signal appears as expected. For example, if you selected a
color bars signal in step 7, check that the color bars signal appears.

BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs.

12. Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL connector, and then connect it
to the BLACK 1 connector.
13. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT
from the main menu.
14. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1.
15. Press the front-panel ENTER button. The SELECT FORMAT submenu
shown below appears.

16. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC or PAL.
17. Press the ENTER button. The SELECT SIGNAL submenu shown below
appears.

1–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

18. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst. Press the
ENTER button to enable the selection.
19. Set the waveform monitor to view the blanking area of the signal.
20. Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed.
21. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2
connector.
22. Press the front-panel BACK button twice to return to the main menu.
23. Repeat steps 14 through 20 to check the BLACK 2 output.

BARS output.
24. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK2 connector to the BARS connector.
25. Press the BACK button twice to return to the main menu.
26. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BARS.
27. Press the ENTER button. The SELECT FORMAT submenu appears.
28. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC or PAL.
29. Press the ENTER button. The SELECT SIGNAL submenu appears.
30. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 100% Color Bars.
Press the ENTER button to enable the selection.
31. Set the waveform monitor to view the color bars signal.
32. Check that the appropriate color bars signal appears.

AVG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the AVG7 Analog Video Generator
check module is functional:

Required equipment.

Waveform monitor
75 Ω BNC cable

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization process for all installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.
4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–21

Getting started

5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the AVG7 main menu shown
below appears.

6. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select a format, and then press the ENTER button.
7. Press one of the front-panel test signal buttons (for example COLOR BAR)
to output a signal.
8. Press the BACK button to display the main menu.
9. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO from the main
menu and then press the ENTER button. The VIDEO submenu shown below
appears.

10. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CH1/2/3: Composites
and then press the ENTER button.
11. Connect the upper (or lower) CH 1 connector to the waveform monitor using
the 75 Ω BNC cable.
12. Set the waveform monitor to view the signal.
13. Check that the signal appears as expected. For example, if you selected a
color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears.
14. Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 1 connector, and then connect the
BNC cable to the CH 2 connector.
15. Check that the signal appears as expected.
16. Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 2 connector, and then connect the
BNC cable to the CH 3 connector.
17. Check that the signal appears as expected.
18. Disconnect the BNC cable from the CH 3 connector, and then connect the
BNC cable to the CH 1 connector.
19. Press the test signal button again to output the another test signal in the same
signal set.
20. Check that the signal on the waveform monitor changes. You need not
perform this check for the CH 2 and CH 3 connectors.
21. Repeat steps 11 through 20 for the lower (or upper) output channels.

1–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

AWVG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video
check Generator module is functional:

Required equipment.

HDTV waveform monitor

Three 75 Ω BNC cables
Three 75 Ω terminators

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization process for all installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.
4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.
5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the AWVG7 main menu shown
below appears.

6. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button
to select a format, then press the ENTER button.
7. Press one of the front-panel test signal buttons (for example COLOR BAR)
to output a signal.
8. Use the 75 Ω BNC cables to connect the upper (or lower) CH 1, CH 2, and
CH 3 connectors to the CH A, CH B, and CH C inputs of the waveform
monitor respectively.
9. Use the 75 Ω terminators to terminate the other loop-through connectors
on the waveform monitor real panel.
10. Press the CH A button on the waveform monitor, and set the waveform
monitor to view the signal.
11. Check that the signal appears as expected. For example, if you selected a
color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears.
12. Press the CH B button on the waveform monitor.
13. Check that the signal appears as expected. For example, if you selected a
color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears.
14. Press the CH C button on the waveform monitor.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–23

Getting started

15. Check that the signal appears as expected. For example, if you selected a
color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears.
16. Press the CH A button on the waveform monitor.
17. Press the test signal button again to output another test signal in the same
signal set.
18. Check that the signal on the waveform monitor changes. You do not need to
perform this check for the CH 2 and CH 3 connectors.
19. Disconnect the BNC cable from the upper (or lower) CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3
connectors, and then connect the BNC cables to the lower (or upper) CH 1,
CH 2, and CH 3 connectors.
20. Repeat steps 10 through 18 for the lower (or upper) output channels.

BG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the BG7 Black Generator module
check is functional:

Required equipment.

NTSC/PAL waveform monitor

HDTV waveform monitor
75 Ω BNC cable

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization process for all installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.
4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.
5. Set the TG8000 to the factory default settings:
a. Press the front-panel MODULE button until TG8000 : PRESET is
displayed.
b. Press the front-panel ENTER button to enter the PRESET menu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
d. Press the front-panel ENTER button to load the factory default presets.
e. When the presets have finished loading, press the BACK button to exit
the PRESET menu.

1–24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

6. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the BG7 main menu shown
below appears.

7. Press the front-panel ENTER button. The BLACK FORMAT menu selection
shown below appears.

8. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC or PAL and then
press the ENTER button to enable the selection.
9. Connect the BLACK 1 connector to the NTSC/PAL waveform monitor using
the 75 Ω BNC cable.
10. Set the waveform monitor to view the blanking area of the signal.
11. Check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed.
12. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 59.94i and then
press the ENTER button to enable the selection.
13. Disconnect the BNC cable from the NTSC/PAL waveform monitor, and then
reconnect it to the HDTV waveform monitor.
14. Check that the appropriate HDTV trilevel sync signal is displayed.
15. Repeat steps 6 through 14 for the BLACK 2, BLACK 3, and BLACK 4
outputs.

DVG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the DVG7 Digital Video Generator
check module is functional:

Required equipment.

Serial digital waveform monitor

75 Ω BNC cable

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization process for all installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.
4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–25

Getting started

5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the DVG7 main menu shown
below appears.

6. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select a format, then press the ENTER button.
7. Press one of the front-panel test signal buttons (for example COLOR BAR)
to output a signal.
8. Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the serial digital waveform monitor
using the 75 Ω BNC cable.
9. Set the waveform monitor to view the signal.
10. Check that the signal appears as expected. For example, if you selected a
color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears.
11. Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector, and then connect
the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector.
12. Check that the signal appears as expected.

GPS7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the GPS7 GPS Synchronization and
check Timecode module is functional.

NOTE. Depending on which other modules are present and what formats they
generate, you may get a clock conflict message. If this occurs, press the ENTER
button to accept the change and continue the test. This may happen at multiple
steps in one or several of the functional tests.

Required equipment.
GPS/GLONASS antenna feed with good signal level
SDI video signal source (can be external, or a DVG7 or HDVG7 module in
either a reference instrument or the mainframe under test)
NTSC black source (can be a second TG8000 or TG700 mainframe with a
BG7 or GPS7 module)
WFM8300 or equivalent with Option CPS
Voltmeter
LTC/GPIO breakout adapter cable (Tektronix part number 012-1717-XX)
Female XLR connector, three wires, and one 9-pin DSUB male header with
solder cups, assembled as described in the LTC Output test

1–26 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

BNC-to-banana-plug adapter
(2) 75 Ω coaxial terminators (Tektronix part number 011-0163-XX)
(2) BNC T connectors
(3) 1 meter BNC cables

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization of all the installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.
4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.
5. Run the GPS7 module diagnostics:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to scroll through the menu.
Take note of any errors or warnings.
6. Load the factory preset:
a. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 appears.
b. Press ENTER to select Preset.
c. If needed, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Recall.
d. Press the left (◄) arrow button until Factory Preset appears.
e. Press the ENTER button to load the preset.
7. When loading is complete, press the BACK button to exit the Factory Default
menu.

DC antenna output power voltage.

1. Connect the BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter to the voltmeter.
2. Connect the BNC T to the adapter.
3. Connect a 75 Ω BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector.
4. Connect the other end of the cable to the antenna input on the rear of the
module.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–27

Getting started

5. Set the antenna power to 3.3 V:

a. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GPS SETUP.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Antenna Power.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 3.3 V.
f. Press the ENTER button.
6. Check that the voltmeter shows between 3.3 V and 4 V.
7. Use the left (◄) arrow to set the antenna voltage to 5 V.
8. Press the ENTER button.
9. Check that the voltmeter shows between 5 V and 6 V.

Antenna current and fault thresholds.

1. Connect the BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter to the voltmeter.
2. Connect the BNC T to the adapter.
3. Set the antenna power to 5 V:
a. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GPS SETUP.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Antenna Power.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 5 V.
f. Press the ENTER button.
4. Connect a 75 Ω BNC cable to the other end of the BNC T connector.
5. Connect the other end of the cable to the antenna input on the rear of the
module.
6. Check that the LED located between the DSUB connector and the antenna
input on the rear panel of the module is flashing green. Green indicates an
open circuit.
7. Apply a 75 Ω terminator to the BNC T and check that the voltage is between
4.5 V and 5 V.
8. Check that the LED on the module back panel is a steady green. This indicates
a nominal load.
9. Connect the second BNC T and 75 Ω terminator to the antenna system to
exceed the allowed antenna current.

1–28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

10. Check that the LED on the module rear panel is a steady red. This indicates a
short circuit.
11. Remove the terminators and the connection to the voltmeter.

Lock to GPS and/or GLONASS through antenna.

CAUTION. To avoid antenna damage, do not turn on the DC antenna power until
you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage. Antenna
damage can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select.

1. Set the antenna voltage as needed by the antenna in the test system.
2. Determine which type of GPS receiver is installed:
a. Press the MODULE button to navigate to TG8000 : PRESET.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY.
c. Press the ENTER button to enter the UTILITY submenu.
d. If necessary, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000
: UTILITY: VERSION INFO (H/W).
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select GPS7.
f. The second line of the display includes a module ID field. Perform one of
the following actions:
If the module ID is 3015 or 3023, proceed to step 3.
If the module ID is 3002, then proceed to step 4.
3. Set the GPS Constellation type to GPS & GLONASS:

NOTE. You need to perform the following step only if your GPS7 module has a
GPS/GLONASS receiver.

a. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module.

b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GPS SETUP.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GPS
CONSTELLATION.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select GPS & GLONASS.
f. Press the ENTER button to make the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–29

Getting started

4. Navigate to the signal quality menu:

a. Press the MODULE button to navigate to the GPS7 module.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select STATUS from the
GPS7 module menu.
c. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Signal Quality.
5. Connect the GPS/GLONASS input signal feed to the antenna input on the
rear of the module.
6. Check that the signal quality changes from No Signal to Low Signal to
Acquiring satellites to Adjusting phase to Locked.

NOTE. It is okay if some steps are skipped. Depending on the signal level, it may
take from a few seconds to several minutes to leave the “No Signal” state.

7. Make sure that the instrument has been running for at least 20 minutes before
performing the next step.
8. Enter the Diagnostics menu and check for “fine” status. This indicates the
GPS is operating at the maximum stability:
a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select TUNE and check that
the instrument shows Fine on the right side of the display.
9. Press the BACK button to exit the Diagnostics menu.

Black output and frame pulse.

1. Connect an SDI signal, like one from a DVG7 or HDVG7 module, to the
SDI A input of a WFM8300, and select that input as the active input on the
waveform monitor.
2. Connect a cable from the Black 1 output on the GPS7 module to the reference
input of the WFM8300. Terminate the loop through on the monitor with a
75 Ω terminator.
3. Press the EXT REF button on the WFM8300.

1–30 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

4. Set the HD trilevel sync rate to Integer on the GPS7 module:

a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select HD TRI-LEVEL
SYNC RATE.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Integer (60, 50, 30,
25, 24).
e. Press the ENTER button.
f. Press the BACK button to exit the HD Tri-level Sync Rate submenu.
5. Set Black 1 to NTSC on the GPS7 module:
a. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black 1.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select FORMAT.
d. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC.
e. Press the ENTER button.
6. Check that the WFM8300 shows NTSC as the reference input.
7. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 60i in the Select
Format menu.
8. Press the ENTER button.
9. Check that the WFM8300 shows a 1080 60i signal on the reference input.
10. Disconnect the Black 1 signal from the module and the WFM8300.
11. Connect the Black 2 signal from the module to the reference input of the
WFM8300.
12. Set Black 2 to a 1080 50i signal on the GPS7 module:
a. Press the BACK button to exit the Black 1 submenu.
b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black 2.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 50i.
e. Press the ENTER button.
13. Check that the WFM8300 shows a 1080 50i signal on the reference input.
14. Use the left (◄) arrow button to select PAL.
15. Press the ENTER button.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–31

Getting started

16. Use the left (◄) arrow button to select Black Burst.
17. Press the ENTER button.
18. Check that the WFM8300 shows PAL on the reference input.
19. Press the BACK button to exit the PAL submenu.
20. Press the BACK button again to exit the Select Format submenu.
21. Disconnect the Black 2 signal from the module and the WFM8300.
22. Connect the Black 3 signal from the module to the reference input of the
WFM8300.
23. Set Black 3 to a PAL signal on the GPS7 module:
a. Use the right (►) arrow button to select Black 3.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Use the right (►) arrow button to select PAL.
d. Press the ENTER button.
24. Check that the WFM8300 shows PAL on the reference input.
25. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 24p.
26. Press the ENTER button.
27. Check that the WFM8300 shows 1080 24p on the reference input.
28. Press the BACK button to exit the Select Formats menu.

Black output VITC.

1. Connect a cable from the Black 1 output on the module to the CMPST A input
on the WFM8300, and terminate the loop through with a 75 Ω terminator.
Activate the input by pressing the C input button on the front panel of the
monitor.
2. On the WFM8300, press the CONFIG button and select VITC as the timecode
source.
3. On the TG8000, press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
4. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
5. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black 1.
6. Press the ENTER button.
7. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select FORMAT.
8. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC.
9. Press the ENTER button.

1–32 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

10. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Timecode.
11. Press the ENTER button.
12. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Time of Day as the
Timecode Source.
13. Press the ENTER button.
14. Use the up (▲) arrow to select the VITC submenu and press the ENTER
button to select VITC 1.
15. Press the right (►) arrow to select Output : Enable.
16. Press the ENTER button.
17. Use the down (▼) arrow to select Line number.
18. Press the left (◄) arrow to select Line number: 14.
19. Check that the time of day is correctly updating on the WFM8300 Timecode
display.
20. Repeat the procedure for Black 2 and Black 3 signals.

LTC output.
1. Connect the LTC/GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC/GPI DSUB on the
back of the GPS7 module.
2. Construct an adapter by soldering wires between a female XLR and a 9-pin
DSUB male header with solder cups, with this pin out:
a. XLR pin 1 to DSUB pin 1.
b. XLR pin 2 to DSUB pin 2.
c. XLR pin 3 to DSUB pin 3.
3. Connect the LTC 1 output on the breakout cable to the XLR adapter you
just made.
4. Connect the DSUB end of the adapter you just made to the remote connector
on the WFM8300.
5. Configure the WFM8300 to use LTC as the Timecode source.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–33

Getting started

6. Configure the LTC 1 output of the GPS7 module for 30 fps drop frame:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT LTC.
c. Press the ENTER button to select LTC 1.
d. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Format.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 30 fps drop frame.
f. Press the ENTER button.
g. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Source.
h. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Time of Day.
i. Press the ENTER button.
7. Check that the time of day is correctly updating on the WFM8300 timecode
display.
8. Repeat this procedure for LTC 2 at 30 fps.
9. Repeat this procedure for LTC 3 at 25 fps.
10. Repeat this procedure for LTC 4 at 24 fps.

GPI output.
1. Check that the antenna signal is connected to the antenna input of the module
and that the instrument shows the signal is locked:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button, if needed, to select STATUS.
c. Check that the top line of the status display shows Locked.
2. Connect the GPI 1 output to the voltmeter:
a. Connect the BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter to the voltmeter.
b. Connect the LTC/GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC/GPI DSUB
on the back of the GPS7 module.
c. Connect the GPI 1 connector on the breakout cable to the
BNC-to-Banana-plug adapter.

1–34 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

3. Configure the GPI 1 output to be asserted on unlock:

a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT GPIO.
c. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Output 1.
d. Press the ENTER button.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Loss of lock.
f. Press the ENTER button.
4. Check that the voltage on the GPI 1 output measures between 4.5 V and 5.5 V.
5. Disconnect the antenna input. After 15 seconds, check that the GPI 1 output
is below 0.5 V.
6. Repeat this procedure for the GPI 2 output.

GPI input.
1. Configure the GPS7 GPI input to reset the program time:
a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT GPIO.
c. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Input 1.
d. Press the ENTER button.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Reset Program Time.
f. Press the ENTER button.
g. Press the BACK button to exit the Select GPIO menu.
2. Press the up arrow to select the STATUS display.
3. If needed, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to display Program
Time.
4. Write down the program time.
5. Connect the LTC/GPIO breakout adapter cable to the LTC/GPI DSUB on the
back of the GPS7 module.
6. Attach a 75 Ω terminator to the GPI input for 2 seconds, and then remove it.
7. Look at the program time now and compare it to the program time you wrote
down before. The time on the display should have reset to the default start
time of 00:00:00.00 and now be counting again.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–35

Getting started

Genlock.
1. Set the Reference Source to Internal.
a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select REFERENCE.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. If needed, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SOURCE.
d. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Internal.
e. Press the ENTER button.
2. Check that the INT indicator at the right side of the front panel lights. This
shows that the instrument is using the internal reference signal.
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC Burst.
4. Press the ENTER button.
5. Check that the INT indicator is not lit and the EXT indicator is flashing. This
shows that the is not locked to any reference signal.
6. Press the BACK button to exit the Reference Source menu.
7. Connect the NTSC signal generator output to the BLACK 1 / REF IN
connector using a 75 Ω BNC cable.
8. Set the NTSC signal generator to output an NTSC signal.
9. Check that the EXT indicator lights. This shows that the instrument is using
the external reference signal.
10. Disconnect the test setup.

HD3G7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video
check Generator module is functional.

Required equipment.

HD-SDI video signal generator

3 Gb/s waveform monitor
Two 1 m (3 ft) BNC to BNC high-bandwidth cables

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization of all the installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.

1–36 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

Generator function.
4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 main menu shown
below appears.

5. Press the down (▼) arrow button to select Output Mode, and then use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the desired output mode. When
the desired output mode is displayed, press the Enter button to confirm it.
This example will use the 3G-Level A (1920 × 1080) output mode.
6. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select 1080 50p, then press ENTER.
7. Press the COLOR BAR button and select a signal to output.
8. Press the BACK button to exit the COLOR BARS menu.
9. Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using
the 75 Ω BNC cable.
10. Press the up (▲) arrow button to display the DIAGNOSTICS menu.
11. Press the ENTER button.
12. Press the right (►) arrow to scroll through the Diagnostics readouts.
13. Check that the PLL Status Flex1 reading and the DDS Status DDS1 Phase
reading show Lock.
14. Press the right (►) arrow button to display the CRC Errors submenu and
monitor the CRC error counts for five seconds.
15. Press the right (►) arrow button to scroll through the menus and check that
the voltage readings show (OK).
16. Set the waveform monitor to view the signal.
17. Check that the signal appears as expected. Check for errors on the video
session screen of the waveform monitor.
18. Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector, and then connect
the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector.
19. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select 1080 59.94p, then press ENTER.
20. Check that the signal appears as expected on the waveform monitor and check
for errors on the video session screen.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–37

Getting started

Converter function.
21. Set the HDTV video generator as indicated below:
Output signal: Ramp
Format: 1080 59.94i
22. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 main menu shown
below appears.

23. Connect the output connector on the HDTV video generator to the HD SDI
IN connector on the HD3G7 using the 75 Ω BNC cable.
24. Connect the SIGNAL 1 output connector on the HD3G7 to an SDI input
connector on the waveform monitor using a 75 Ω BNC cable.
25. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select 1080 59.94p, and then press the ENTER button.
26. Press the OTHER button to select the converter mode.
27. Press the BACK button to return to the STATUS menu, which should now
look like the one below:

28. Check that the STATUS display shows 1080 59.54i as the input.
29. Press the up (▲) arrow button to display the DIAGNOSTICS menu.
30. Press the ENTER button to access the DIAGNOSTICS menu, and then
use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button (if necessary) to navigate to the
DIAGNOSTICS : PLL STATUS page.
31. Check that the Jit reading shows Lock.
32. Press the right (►) arrow button to display the CRC Errors submenu and
monitor the CRC error counts for five seconds.
33. If there are CRC errors, press the right (►) arrow button until you see the
Clear CRC Errors menu, and then press the ENTER button to clear the
errors.
34. Press the right (►) arrow button to scroll through the menus and check that
the voltage readings show (OK).
35. Check that a 1080 59.94p ramp signal is displayed on the waveform monitor.

1–38 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

HDLG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video
check Generator module is functional.

Required equipment.

HDTV digital video generator

HDTV waveform monitor
Three 75 Ω BNC cables

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization of all the installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.
4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.

Generator function.
5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HDLG7 main menu shown
below appears.

6. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select the 1080 59.94p format, and then press the ENTER button.
7. Press the COLOR BAR button to select SMPTE RP219 Color Bars, and
then press the BACK button to return to the main menu.
8. Connect the upper LINK A connector to the INPUT A connector on the
HDTV waveform monitor using a 75 Ω BNC cable.
9. Connect the upper LINK B connector to the INPUT B connector on the
HDTV waveform monitor using the 75 Ω BNC cable.
10. Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT A signal.
11. Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed.
12. Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT B signal.
13. Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed.
14. Change the BNC cable from the upper LINK A connector to the lower
LINK A connector.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–39

Getting started

15. Change the BNC cable from the upper LINK B connector to the lower
LINK B connector.
16. Repeat steps 10 through 13 for the lower LINK A and LINK B connectors.

Converter function.
17. Set the HDTV digital video generator as indicated below:
Output signal: 100% Color Bars
Format: 1080 59.94i
18. Connect the output connector on the HDTV digital video generator to the HD
SDI IN connector on the HDLG7 using the 75 Ω BNC cable.
19. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select 1080 59.94p, and then press the ENTER button.
20. Press the OTHER button to select the converter mode.
21. Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT A signal.
22. Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed.
23. Set the waveform monitor to view the INPUT B signal.
24. Check that the appropriate color bars signal is displayed.
25. Change the BNC cable from the lower LINK A connector to the upper
LINK A connector.
26. Change the BNC cable from the lower LINK B connector to the upper
LINK B connector.
27. Repeat steps 21 through 24 for the upper LINK A and LINK B connectors.

HDVG7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video
check Generator module is functional:

Required equipment.

HDTV waveform monitor

75 Ω BNC cable

Procedure.
1. Install the module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization process for all installed modules is executed.
3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.

1–40 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

4. Warm up the instrument for 20 minutes.

5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HDVG7 main menu shown
below appears.

6. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select a format, then press ENTER.
7. Press one of the front-panel test signal button (for example COLOR BAR) to
output a signal.
8. Connect the SIGNAL 1 connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using
the 75 Ω BNC cable.
9. Set the waveform monitor to view the signal.
10. Check that the signal appears as expected. For example, if you selected a
color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears.
11. Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1 connector, and then connect
the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 2 connector.
12. Check that the signal appears as expected.

SDI7 module functional Use the following procedure to check that the SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI
check Video Generator module is functional.

Required equipment.

3 Gb/s waveform monitor

One 1 m (3 ft) BNC to BNC high-bandwidth cable

Procedure.
1. Install the SDI7 module into the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 1-11.)
2. Power on the TG8000 mainframe by connecting it to the power source. The
initialization of all the installed modules is executed.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–41

Getting started

3. Check that no error messages appear on the LCD display.

4. Use the mainframe UTILITY menu to determine if Option 3G is enabled on
the SDI7 module. Some of the steps in this procedure depend on whether
the option is enabled or not.
a. Press theMODULE button until TG8000 : PRESET is displayed.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 :
UTILITY, and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY :
OPTIONS ENABLED is displayed.
d. The second line of the display indicates the option status:
SDI7[slot number] None indicates that Option 3G is not enabled
SDI7[slot number] 3G indicates that Option 3G is enabled

NOTE. If more than one SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe, use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to display the option status of the desired
SDI7 module.
If Option 3G is not enabled and you have the option key, you can enter the
option key to enable the option. (See page 3-254, To enter the option key
on the SDI7 module.)

e. Press the BACK button to return to the mainframe menu.

1–42 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Getting started

5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the SDI7 main menu for
channel 1 appears as shown in the following figure.

NOTE. The SDI7 module provides two channels of output. The display indicates
which SDI7 channel is selected. For example, a display of SDI7[3-1] indicates
that the SDI7 module is installed in slot 3 and that channel 1 is selected. A display
of SDI7[3-2] indicates that channel 2 is selected.
Press the MODULE button to advance from channel 1 to channel 2. You can press
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to switch between channels 1 and 2 of the
selected SDI7 module when the STATUS menu is displayed as shown above.

6. Press the down (▼) arrow button to select OUTPUT MODE, and then use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the appropriate output mode
for your SDI7 module as listed below. When the desired output mode is
displayed, press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Option 3G enabled: select the 3G-Level A (1920 × 1080) output mode.
Option 3G not enabled: select the HD 1080 59.94i output mode.
7. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select the appropriate format for your SDI7 module as listed below. When the
desired format is displayed, press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Option 3G enabled: select the 1080 50p format.
Option 3G not enabled: select the 1080 50i format.
8. Press the COLOR BAR button and select a signal to output.
9. Press the BACK button to exit the COLOR BARS menu.
10. Connect the SIGNAL 1A connector to the HDTV waveform monitor using
the 75 Ω BNC cable.
11. Set the waveform monitor to view the signal.
12. Check that the signal appears as expected. Check for errors on the video
session screen of the waveform monitor.
13. Disconnect the BNC cable from the SIGNAL 1A connector, and then connect
the BNC cable to the SIGNAL 1B connector.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 1–43

Getting started

14. Press the FORMAT button and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select the appropriate format for your SDI7 module as listed below. When the
desired format is displayed, press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Option 3G enabled: select the 1080 59.94p format.
Option 3G not enabled: select the 1080 59.94i format.
15. Check that the signal appears as expected on the waveform monitor and check
for errors on the video session screen.
16. Press the BACK button to exit the OUTPUT MODE submenu.
17. Repeat steps 5 through 16 for Channel 2 of the SDI7 module. To test channel
2, connect the SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B outputs to the waveform monitor.
18. Press the up (▲) arrow button to display the DIAGNOSTICS menu.
19. Press the ENTER button.
20. Press the right (►) arrow to scroll through the Diagnostics readouts.
21. Check that the PLL Status Flex0 and Flex1 readings show Lock.
22. Check that the DDS Status DDS0 Phase and DDS1 Phase readings show
Lock.
23. Press the right (►) arrow button to scroll through the menus and check that
the voltage readings show (OK).

NOTE. The SDI7 module provides additional diagnostics for checking the DDR2
and SRAM memory that can be accessed only in factory mode. See the TG8000
Service Manual for information on using the factory mode.

1–44 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

Operating basics
Operating basics
This section introduces you to the basics of operating the TG8000. Common
module functions are discussed here, while module-specific functions are
discussed in the module-specifc sections of this manual. This section contains the
following topics:
Front-panel controls
Rear-panel connectors
About the frame reset signals
Note for format settings

Front panel controls

The following figure shows the locations of the front-panel controls. A brief
discussion of each feature follows the illustration.

Figure 2-1: TG8000 front panel

LCD display The LCD display is a two-line, 40-character-per-line display. Almost all menus
have two lines of text, where the first line shows the current position in the
current menu, and the second line shows the current selection (if there is not a
submenu). If nothing is on the second line, press the ENTER button to access
the corresponding submenu.
You can adjust the contrast of the LCD display using the UTILITY submenu.
(See page 2-27, UTILITY submenu.)

MODULE button Use the MODULE button to select the mainframe or installed module to control.
Repeatedly pressing this button scrolls through the main menu, which shows the
mainframe and the installed modules. Select the one you want to control.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–1

Operating basics

FORMAT button When an ATG7, AVG7, AWVG7, DVG7, HD3G7, HDLG7, HDVG7, or
SDI7 module is selected (active), use the FORMAT button to change the video
format for the output signal. Pressing this button displays the menu to allow you
to select a format for the active module.

Menu control buttons Use these buttons to control the menu display. (See page 2-22, Mainframe menus.)
Arrow (▲), (▼), (◄), and (►) Buttons. Use these arrow buttons to scroll through
the available menu items.

ENTER button. Use the ENTER button to enable the selected menu item.

BACK button. Use the BACK button to disable the selected menu item and return
to the previous menu item.

Test signal buttons Use these buttons to select the output test signals. Each of these 10 buttons
represents a signal set, or group of the same type of test signals. You scroll
through the test signals in a signal set by repeatedly pressing the test signal button.
You can change the signal assignment using the SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN
submenu. (See page 2-37, SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu.)

FRONT PANEL ENABLE Use this button to enable or disable the front-panel buttons. When pressing this
button button for about one second while the front-panel buttons are enabled, all of the
front-panel buttons are disabled. If you have selected a timeout period in the
FRONT PANEL DISABLE item in the UTILITY submenu, and that period passes
without a button push, all of the front-panel buttons are also disabled.
Press and hold this button for about three second to enable the front-panel buttons.
The timeout counter is restarted (if the timeout period is already set) and the
indicator next to the button lights to show that the front-panel is enabled.
Refer to UTILITY Submenu for more information about the settings the period
until the front panel times out. (See page 2-27.)

USB port Use the USB port to upgrade the instrument firmware and to copy files such as
presets and test signal files between instruments.
(See page 2-53, How to upgrade the instrument firmware.)
(See page 2-67, How to transfer user files using FTP.)

2–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

LED indicators The front panel includes the following LED indicators:

INT and EXT reference LED indicators. The INT (internal) and EXT (external)
LEDs indicate the status of the reference signal used to time signals. The states of
the INT and EXT indicators depend on whether a timing module is installed in the
mainframe. The following table shows the states of the LEDs for the different
mainframe reference signal configurations.

Table 2-1: States of the INT and EXT reference indicators

GPS7 module installed AGL7 module installed No timing module installed
EXT INT EXT INT EXT INT
Reference LED LED LED LED LED LED
source Status state state Status state state Status state state
Internal Good Off Solid Good Off Solid Good Off Solid
green green green
Internal Warming up Off Blinking Warming up Off Blinking Warming Off Blinking
green green up green
GPS and/or Good Solid Off NA Off Off NA Off Off
GLONASS 1 green
GPS and/or FOM not Solid Off NA Off Off NA Off Off
GLONASS 1 reach to amber
“GPO
signal
warning”
GPS and/or “GPO Loss Solid Solid NA Off Off NA Off Off
GLONASS 1 of Lock” red green
Genlock Good Solid Off Good Solid Off NA Off Off
green green
Genlock “Near Loss Solid Off “Near Loss Solid Off NA Off Off
of Genlock” amber of Genlock” amber
Genlock “No Solid Solid “Loss of Solid Solid NA Off Off
Genlock red green Lock” red green
Detected”
1 Earlier versions of the GPS7 module included a receiver that could use only GPS signals. Later versions of the module include a receiver that can use GPS
and/or GLONASS signals. (See page 3-102, How to determine which GPS receiver is installed in your GPS7 module.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–3

Operating basics

TIME (timecode) LED indicator. The TIME (timecode) LED indicates the status of
the timecode function. The state of the TIME LED depends on whether a GPS7
module is installed in the mainframe. The following table shows the states of the
TIME LED for the different mainframe timecode signal configurations.

Table 2-2: States of the TIME (timecode) LED indicator

GPS7 module installed No GPS7 module installed
Timecode
Selected timecode source Timecode status TIME LED state Status TIME LED state
Internal GPS7 installed Off NA Off
Internal “Program Time” Off NA Off
selected
External (GPS/GLONASS, VITC, or “Time of Day” selected Solid green NA Off
LTC) 1
External (LTC only) SMPTE standard Solid green NA Off
External (LTC only) Outside SMPTE Solid yellow NA Off
standard
External (GPS/GLONASS, VITC, or Missing, discontinuous, Solid red NA Off
LTC) 1 badly timed, wrong
FPS in External Time
source
1 Earlier versions of the GPS7 module included a receiver that could use only GPS signals. Later versions of the module include a receiver that can use GPS
and/or GLONASS signals. (See page 3-102, How to determine which GPS receiver is installed in your GPS7 module.)

2–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

FAULT LED indicator. The FAULT LED illuminates when there is a problem with
the instrument hardware. The following table shows the states of the FAULT LED
for hardware failures.

Table 2-3: States of the FAULT LED indicator

FAULT LED
Instrument condition Example(s) state User actions
A fault condition exists that ▪ The fan has stopped turning Blinking red 1. A flashing FAN FAULT message
has the potential to damage ▪ The internal temperature of the appears on the LCD display. Press
the instrument hardware instrument is too high the ENABLE button to dismiss the fault
message.
2. Check the instrument rear panel to
verify that the fan is operating.
3. The flashing FAN FAULT message
will reappear in 30 seconds if the fault
condition still exists. The FAULT LED
will continue to blink red unless the fan
restarts.
4. Unplug the instrument from the
power source and contact Tektronix
customer support.
A fault condition exists ▪ The fan speed is out of range Solid red 1. If the instrument is still on, navigate
that renders the instrument ▪ The power supply operation is out to the UTILITY > DIAGNOSTICS menu.
unusable of range 2. Scroll through the diagnostic
readouts and look for voltage “Warn”
messages.
3. Unplug the instrument from the
power source and contact Tektronix
customer support.
A fault condition exists, but the ▪ The clock PLL is out of range Solid amber 1. Navigate to the
instrument is still usable UTILITY > DIAGNOSTICS menu.
2. Scroll through the diagnostic
readouts and look for a “PLL UL”
(unlocked) message.
3. When you are ready to have
the instrument serviced, unplug the
instrument from the power source and
contact Tektronix customer support.
Normal ▪ The instrument is operating Off None
properly
▪ The instrument is turned off

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–5

Operating basics

Rear panel connectors

The following figure shows the locations of the TG8000 mainframe and module
connectors on the rear panel. A brief discussion of each connector follows the
illustration.

CAUTION. If power is applied to the mainframe, be sure to terminate any unused

outputs on any of the modules using 75 Ω terminators.

Figure 2-2: TG8000 rear panel

Power connector The TG8000 is designed to operate from a single-phase power source with the
neutral conductor at or near earth ground. Only the line conductor is fused for
over-current protection. A protective ground connection through the grounding
conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.

WARNING. Injury or death can occur as the result of electrical shock. To avoid
electrical shock, do not connect power to the TG8000 when the top cover is off.
Dangerous potentials are present on the Power circuit board.

The TG8000 operates from an AC line frequency of 50/60 Hz, over the range of
100 - 240 VAC (±10%), without the need for configuration. (See Table 1-4 on
page 1-10.)

10/100/1000 BASE-T port Use this port to connect to your local Ethernet network. You can control the
TG8000 mainframe and all installed modules remotely through the port. Also,
you can upload and download various files such as signal files, logo files, and
preset files through the port.

General Purpose Interface You can use the GPI port to recall one of the seven available instrument presets
(GPI) port and output an alarm signal. (See page 2-50, How to use the mainframe General
Purpose Interface (GPI).)

2–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

AG7 module connectors The AG7 Audio Generator module is equipped with six BNC connectors as
described below. (See Figure 2-3.)

Figure 2-3: AG7 module connectors

1+2: Outputs channels 1 and 2 of the selected AES/EBU serial digital audio
signal.
3+4: Outputs channels 3 and 4 of the selected AES/EBU serial digital audio
signal.
5+6: Outputs channels 5 and 6 of the selected AES/EBU serial digital audio
signal.
7+8: Outputs channels 7 and 8 of the selected AES/EBU serial digital audio
signal.
SILENCE: Outputs a silence signal (DAR signal).
48 kHz CLOCK: Outputs a 48 kHz clock signal. The clock output level
can be set as described below.

Setting the clock output level. Use jumper J452 on the AG7 module to set the
output level of the 48 kHz clock signal. (See Figure 2-4.)
Install the jumper on pins 3+4 of J452 (factory-default position) to set the clock
output level to CMOS compatible. Install the jumper on pins 1+2 of J452 to set
the clock output level to 1V.

Figure 2-4: Location of J452 on the AG7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–7

Operating basics

AGL7 module connectors The AGL7 Analog Genlock module is equipped with six BNC connectors as
described below. (See Figure 2-5.)

Figure 2-5: AGL7 module connectors

REF: Input loopthrough connectors for an external reference signal, which
can be NTSC/PAL black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signals. The signal
input requires proper external termination.
CW: Internally terminated input connector for CW (Continuous Wave)
signals: 1, 3.58, 4.43, 5, and 10 MHz.
You can configure the CW connector to output a 48 kHz word clock signal:
(See page 2-8, Changing the Input/Output configuration.)
BLACK 1: Outputs the selected black burst signal.

NOTE. You cannot output HDTV trilevel sync signals from the BLACK 1
connector.

BLACK 2: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal.
BLACK 3: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal.

Alarm output. You can configure the BLACK 1, BLACK 2, or BLACK 3

connector to output an alarm. When an alarm condition is detected, the output
signal from the selected connector turns off for about 60 ms.
The AGL7 module alarm output is available only when the GPI ALARM
OUTPUT menu item is set to Enable. (See page 2-50, How to use the mainframe
General Purpose Interface (GPI).)

Changing the Input/Output configuration. The CW connector is configured at the

factory to be an input for CW signals. You can reconfigure the connector to output
a 48 kHz word clock signal by changing the position of an internal cable.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the mainframe and the module, be sure to

disconnect the power cord before removing the module.

2–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

To output a 48 kHz word clock signal from the CW connector:

1. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the connector labeled J040 on the
AGL7 module. (See Figure 2-6.)
2. Reconnect the cable to the connector labeled J960 on the AGL7 module.
3. Place the 48 kHz CLOCK label provided with the module on the rear panel
below the CW connector.

NOTE. The word clock signal automatically follows the format of the
Black 1 signal.

Figure 2-6: Location of J040 and J960 on the AGL7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–9

Operating basics

ATG7 module connectors The ATG7 Analog Test Generator module is equipped with four BNC connectors
as described below. (See Figure 2-7.)

Figure 2-7: ATG7 module connectors

BLACK 1: Outputs the selected black burst, timing pulse, or subcarrier
signal.
BLACK 2: Outputs the selected black burst, timing pulse, or subcarrier
signal.
SIGNAL: Outputs the signal selected using the front-panel test signal buttons.
(See Table 3-5 on page 3-20.)
BARS: Outputs the selected black burst or color bars signal.

AVG7 module connectors The AVG7 Analog Video Generator module is equipped with three pairs of BNC
connectors as described below. (See Figure 2-8.)

Figure 2-8: AVG7 module connectors

NOTE. Each pair of connectors (CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3) output the same signal.

CH 1: Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal.

CH 2: Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal.
CH 3: Outputs the selected analog component or composite video signal.

2–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

AWVG7 module The AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module is equipped with three
connectors pairs of BNC connectors as described below. (See Figure 2-9.)

Figure 2-9: AWVG7 module connectors

NOTE. Each pair of connectors (CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3) output the same signal.

CH 1: Outputs the selected analog component video signal.

CH 2: Outputs the selected analog component video signal.
CH 3: Outputs the selected analog component video signal.

BG7 module connectors The BG7 Black Generator module is equipped with four BNC connectors as
described below. (See Figure 2-10.)

Figure 2-10: BG7 module connectors

BLACK 1: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal.
BLACK 2: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal.
BLACK 3: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal.
Option CB enables this connector to also output a 10 field ID or color bars
signal.
BLACK 4: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal
output. Option CB enables this connector to also output a 10 field ID or color
bars signal.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–11

Operating basics

DVG7 module connectors The standard DVG7 Digital Video Generator module is equipped with two BNC
connectors to output serial digital video signals. Option BK adds two additional
BNC connectors to output serial digital black signals. (See Figure 2-11.)

Figure 2-11: DVG7 module connectors (Option BK)

SIGNAL 1: Outputs the selected serial digital video signal.
SIGNAL 2: Outputs the selected serial digital video signal.
BLACK 1: Outputs the selected serial digital black signal (Option BK only).
BLACK 2: Outputs the selected serial digital black signal (Option BK only).

NOTE. The SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 connectors output the same test signal, and
the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors output the same black signal.

GPS7 module connectors The GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module is equipped with four
BNC connectors and one 15-pin, D-sub connector as described below. (See
Figure 2-12.)

Figure 2-12: GPS7 module connectors

2–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

ANTENNA: Input connector for a GPS and/or GLONASS antenna.

The antenna input must meet specific requirements. (See page 3-103,
GPS/GLONASS antenna requirements.)
You can use the GPS7 module menu to enable this connector to provide 3.3 V
or 5 V DC power to the antenna. When the connector is configured to provide
power to the antenna, the rear-panel POWER indicator lights as follows:
Blinks green to indicate an open circuit. This occurs if no antenna is
connected or if the current load is less than expected because a splitter
or DC block is being used.
Displays solid red if the connected antenna is shorted. A shorted antenna
will not damage the GPS7 module. If a splitter is used on the antenna, it
may appear as a short at DC but will still pass through the RF signal,
which will allow the GPS to function.
Displays solid green if the current load of the antenna is within the
nominal range.
LTC/GPI: 15 pin, D-sub connector that carries four differential LTC signals,
one ground closure input, and two ground closure outputs. You can use the
menus to independently set the format and timing of the four LTC signals and
to select the function of the ground closure input and outputs.
You can configure LTC1 to be an LTC input instead of an output. The
supported LTC input signal formats include 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97 drop frame,
and 30 Hz, as per SMPTE 12M.
The LTC/GPI connector provides full functionality when you use the LTC
DSUB-to-XLR breakout cable that is available as an optional accessory with
the GPS7 module. The LTC/GPI connector provides partial functionality when
you use a standard RGBHV (VGA-to-BNC) breakout cable. (See Table 2-4.)

NOTE. You do not need the optional LTC and GPI breakout cable if you are using
only VITC and/or ATC as a timecode signal.
For correct operation if you use a VGA-to-BNC breakout cable, pins 6, 7, 8, and
10 must be internally grounded together in the cable and to the connector shell.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–13

Operating basics

Table 2-4: GPS7 module LTC/GPI connector pin assignments

Pin # Function VGA cable
1 GP01 Red BNC
2 GP02 Green BNC
3 GPI Blue BNC
4 No connection
5 LTC4N
6 Ground Ground
7 LTC3N Ground
8 LTC2N Ground
9 No connection
10 LTC1N Ground
11 No connection
12 LTC3P
13 LTC2P H BNC
14 LTC1P V BNC
15 LTC4P

BLACK 1 / REF IN: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel
sync signal. You can also configure this connector to receive analog video,
HD tri-level sync, or CW signals for use as a Genlock reference. The GPS7
module will sync with CW signals at 1, 3.58, 4.43, 5, or 10 MHz. (Earlier
GPS7 modules do not have the reference input capability. On these modules,
the connector is labeled BLACK 1.)
BLACK 2: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync signal.
You can configure this output connector to turn off if certain errors are
detected. The output will remain off as long as the error occurs. Use this
function to trigger a downstream ECO to switch to backup.
BLACK 3 / 10 MHz: Outputs the selected black burst or HDTV trilevel sync
signal. You can also configure this connector to output a 10 MHz sine wave.
(This connector is labeled 10 MHz / BLACK 3 on earlier GPS7 modules.)

NOTE. You can use the menus to independently set the format and timing of the
three black outputs and to enable VITC to be applied to the output signal.
For HD trilevel sync signals, the BLACK 1, 2, and 3 outputs are a group that must
all output either integer or non-integer rates. (See page 3-126, GPS7 module HD
TRI-LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu.)

2–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

HD3G7 module connectors The HD3G7 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module provides four BNC connectors
as described below. (See Figure 2-13.)

Figure 2-13: HD3G7 module connectors

SIGNAL 1: Outputs the selected HD-SDI serial digital video test signal or an
upconverted version of the input signal on the SDI IN connector.
SIGNAL 2: The Signal 2 output can be configured to output a test pattern,
where it produces the same output as the Signal 1 output, or to output a Black
signal in the same format as the Signal 1 output. (See page 3-208, HD3G7
module SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu.)
SDI IN: Input connector for an HD-SDI (4:2:2) video signal that you want to
be upconverted.
TRIGGER: Outputs a selected signal. The available choices for output are:
system clock (148.5 MHz), frame/field pulse (once per video frame or field),
or a line pulse (once per video line).
When an interlaced format is selected, the frame/field pulse selection produces
a frame-rate square wave trigger output which is low during field one and
high during field two. The frame pulse selection produces the once per field
pulse for all other formats.

NOTE. When the SECONDARY OUTPUT selection is set to Test Pattern the
SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 connectors output the same test signal.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–15

Operating basics

HDLG7 module connectors The HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator is equipped with five BNC
connectors as described below. (See Figure 2-14.)

Figure 2-14: HDLG7 module connectors

HD SDI IN: Input connector for an HD-SDI (4:2:2) video signal that you
want to be upconverted.

NOTE. Each pair of connectors (LINK A and LINK B) output the same signal.

LINK A: Outputs the selected HD-SDI dual-link video test signal or an

upconverted version of the signal on the HD SDI IN connector.
LINK B: Outputs the selected HD-SDI dual-link video test signal or an
upconverted version of the signal on the HD SDI IN connector.

2–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

HDVG7 module connectors The standard HDVG7 Digital Video Generator module is equipped with two BNC
connectors to output serial digital video signals. Option BK adds two additional
BNC connectors to output serial digital black signals. (See Figure 2-15.)

Figure 2-15: HDVG7 module connectors (Option BK)

NOTE. The SIGNAL 1 and SIGNAL 2 connectors output the same test signal, and
the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors output the same black signal.

SIGNAL 1: Outputs the selected serial digital video signal.

SIGNAL 2: Outputs the selected serial digital video signal.
BLACK 1: Outputs the selected serial digital black signal (Option BK only).
BLACK 2: Outputs the selected serial digital black signal (Option BK only).

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–17

Operating basics

SDI7 module connectors The SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module provides five
BNC connectors as described below. (See Figure 2-16.)

Figure 2-16: SDI7 module connectors

NOTE. When the SECONDARY OUTPUT selection is set to Test Pattern for
channel 1, the SIGNAL 1A and SIGNAL 1B connectors will output the same test
signal. The same is true for the channel 2 connectors when Test Pattern is set as
the SECONDARY OUTPUT selection for channel 2.

SIGNAL 1A: Outputs the selected SDI serial digital video test signal for
channel 1.
SIGNAL 1B: This output can be configured to output one of the following
signals: Test Pattern, Black, Black (No Audio), Black (Mute Audio), Test
Pattern (No Audio), or Test Pattern (Mute Audio).
When set to any of the Test Pattern selections, the Signal 1A and Signal 1B
connectors will output the same test signal. When set to any of the Black
selections, the Signal 1B black signal is the same format and sample structure
as the Signal 1A output. (See page 3-283, SDI7 module main menu.)
SIGNAL 2A: Outputs the selected SDI serial digital video test signal for
channel 2.
SIGNAL 2B: This output can be configured to output one of the following
signals: Test Pattern, Black, Black (No Audio), Black (Mute Audio), Test
Pattern (No Audio), or Test Pattern (Mute Audio).
When set to any of the Test Pattern selections, the Signal 2A and Signal 2B
connectors will output the same test signal. When set to any of the Black
selections, the Signal 2B black signal is the same format and sample structure
as the Signal 2A output.(See page 3-283, SDI7 module main menu.)

2–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

TRIG OUT: This output can be configured to output one of the following
signals: system clock (148.5 MHz), frame/field pulse (once per video frame
or field), line pulse (once per video line), or pixel clock. (See page 3-332,
SDI7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu.)
When an interlaced format is selected, the frame/field pulse selection produces
a frame-rate square wave trigger output which is low during field one and
high during field two. The frame pulse selection produces the once per field
pulse for all other formats.
The frame/field pulse and the line pulse signals are derived from the signal
format of the selected trigger source (channel 1 or channel 2).
The rate of the pixel clock depends on the signal format of the selected trigger
source (channel 1 or channel 2):
27 MHz for SD formats
74.25 or 74.18 MHz for HD formats and most 3G formats (where 74.25
MHz is for integer frame rates and 74.18 MHz is for non-integer frame
rates such as 59.94, 29.97, and 23.98 fps)
(Option 3G only) 148.5 MHz for signal formats such as 50p and 60p;
148.35 MHz for signal formats such as 59.94p.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–19

Operating basics

Frame reset signals

The TG8000 uses the three frame reset signals described below to output different
video formats simultaneously.

FRAME RESET 1 This frame reset signal supports the 1/1.001 system signal, and is used by the
following video formats. These signals are synchronized with each other.
NTSC 1080 23.98sF 30 fps DF LTC
525-270 1080 29.97p 23.98 fps LTC
1035 59.94i 1080 59.94i
1080 23.98p 1080 59.94p 1
720 59.94p

FRAME RESET 2 This frame reset signal is used only for PAL, 625, or HD / LTC formats with 50
Hz or 25 Hz frame rates. These signals are synchronized with each other.
PAL 1080 25p 25 fps LTC
625-270 1080 50i
1080 50p 1

FRAME RESET 3 This frame reset signal is used for HD / LTC formats with 60 Hz, 30 Hz or 24 Hz
frame rates. These signals are synchronized with each other.
1035 60i 24 fps LTC
1080 24p 25 fps LTC
1080 24sF 30 fps LTC 2
1080 30p
1080 60p 1
1080 60i
720 60p
1 HD3G7, HDLG7, and SDI7 with Option 3G only.
2 Not drop frame

Frame reset signal 1 is not synchronized with frame reset signals 2 or 3 unless
a GPS7 module is installed. When a GPS7 module is installed, the frame reset
signal 1 synchronization is related to the frame reset signals 2 and 3 through
the GPS7 epoch timing.
You can see which of the three frame reset signals are used by each output of
each module by using the FRAME RESET STATUS submenu. (See page 2-26,
FRAME RESET STATUS submenu.)

2–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

Fan fault alarm

CAUTION. If the fan on the rear panel stops operating properly, the internal
components of the instrument could be damaged due to overheating. To prevent
this damage, disconnect the power cable from the AC power source.

The TG8000 displays the following warning message if the fan on the rear panel
stops operating properly. If this warning message appears, disconnect the power
cable from the AC voltage line and contact your local Tektronix Field Office
or representative.

When the warning message appears, the LCD backlight flashes on and off and
the front-panel buttons are disabled. If the beeper is enabled in the UTILITY
submenu, the instrument will beep periodically for the duration of a fan fault
condition. (See page 2-27, UTILITY submenu.) If the GPI Alarm Output is
enabled and the GPI Fan Fault alarm is enabled, the GPI interface triggers a
ground closure when a fan fault is detected.
You can operate the buttons temporarily (for approximately 30 seconds) by
pressing the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button until the button illuminates.
During the 30 seconds, you can use the UTILITY menu to view the diagnostics to
see if there are additional hardware failures such as voltages and temperatures.
After 30 seconds, the fan fault alarm will retrigger if the fan fault condition still
exists and the front panel buttons will be disabled again. In this case, you should
disconnect the AC power source and contact Tektronix to obtain repair service.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–21

Operating basics

Mainframe menus
Main menu When you power on the TG8000 and the initializing process for all of the installed
module is completed, the top menu item of the mainframe main menu appears on
the LCD display. The mainframe main menu allows you to access submenus to
set the various system settings. The following figure shows the mainframe main
menu. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the available
menu selections in the main menu.

Figure 2-17: Mainframe main menu

PRESET. Recalls instrument settings saved as a preset, or saves the current

instrument settings as a preset. When you select this menu item and then press the
ENTER button, you access the PRESET submenu. (See page 2-23.)

SEQUENCE. Selects and executes a sequence program loaded into the TG8000.
Select this menu item and press the ENTER button, to access the SEQUENCE
submenu. (See page 2-25.)

FRAME RESET STATUS. Displays the status of the frame reset signals. Select this
menu item and press the ENTER button to access the FRAME RESET STATUS
submenu. (See page 2-26.) Refer to Frame Reset Signals for detailed information
about the frame reset signals. (See page 2-20.)

UTILITY. Sets the system related settings such as network parameters, signal sets
assignment to the front-panel test signal buttons, and enabling options. Select
this menu item and press the ENTER button, to access the UTILITY submenu.
(See page 2-27.)

2–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

PRESET submenu Use this menu to recall instrument settings saved as a preset or save the current
instrument settings to a preset. There are 13 user-selectable presets. The first
seven numbered presets can be recalled using the mainframe GPI (General
Purpose Interface). Use the up (◄) or right (►) arrow button to scroll through the
menu items. (See Figure 2-18.)
The following three presets are named at the factory and have special functions:
Power On Default: Use this preset to save instrument settings that you want
automatically loaded when the TG8000 powers on. If one of the seven presets
is selected in the mainframe GPI (General Purpose Interface), that preset
takes precedence over this Power On Default preset. You cannot assign this
preset name to another preset.

NOTE. If you want to save network parameters to a preset, use the Power On
Default preset.

User Default: Use this preset to save user-specified default settings. If you
save new instrument settings in this preset, a confirmation message appears to
prevent overwriting.
Factory Default: Use this preset to reset the mainframe and all of the installed
modules to the factory default settings. The following settings are not affected
by the factory default: front-panel timeout, and network parameters.

Figure 2-18: PRESET submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–23

Operating basics

RECALL. Recalls instrument settings saved in the selected preset. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a different preset, and then press the
ENTER button to implement the selection. While the preset is loading into the
instrument, the name of the selected preset blinks. When the loading is complete,
the blinking stops.

SAVE. Saves the current instrument settings to one of the 14 available presets.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the destination preset, and
then press the ENTER button to implement the selection.

RENAME. Renames the selected preset. Perform the following steps to rename
a preset:
1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the preset you want to
rename.
2. Press the ENTER button twice to begin editing the preset name. The
underscore character (_) appears under the first letter of the preset name.
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
to the letter you want to modify.
4. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the new character. The
available characters include the full alphabet, numerals from 0 to 9, and many
standard ASCII symbols. The text strings may contain up to 32 characters.
5. Enter all of the desired characters then press ENTER button.
6. Press the BACK button twice to exit the PRESET submenu. This returns to
the top of the mainframe main menu.
7. Press the ENTER button to reenter the PRESET submenu.
8. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the SAVE menu item.
9. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the preset name edited
in step 2.
10. Press ENTER button to save the preset with the new name.

DELETE. Deletes the contents of the specified preset. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to select the preset you want to delete, and then press the
ENTER button to implement the selection. You cannot delete the following
presets: Power on Default, User Default, and Factory Default.

2–24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

SEQUENCE submenu Use this menu to select and run a sequence that is already loaded into the TG8000.
(See Figure 2-19.) A sequence is a series of generator settings defined using the
Tcl language and SCPI commands. The TG8000 loads a sequence and runs the
command and settings in the order dictated by the sequences file.
Refer to the TG8000 Programmer Manual for more information about using
sequences.

Figure 2-19: SEQUENCE submenu

PLAYBACK. Selects and runs a sequence. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select the sequence you want to run, and then press the ENTER button to
run the sequence.
If no sequence is loaded into the instrument, the message "No Sequence Found" is
displayed on the second line.

STOP. Stops the currently running sequence. When you select the menu item and
then press the ENTER button, the sequence is stopped.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–25

Operating basics

FRAME RESET STATUS Use this menu to display which of the three frame reset signals is used by the
submenu output of the installed modules. Refer to Frame Reset Signals for detailed
information about the frame reset signals. (See page 2-20.)
Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu items. The
following figure shows the FRAME RESET STATUS submenu.

NOTE. The character after the module name represents the output connector of
the module. For example, B1 represents the BLACK 1 connector.
When the TG8000 is genlocked using either an AGL7 or GPS7 module, the text
“(GL)” appears at the end of the line for the frame reset that is being used by the
genlock function. The following figure indicates that the TG8000 is genlocked
using the AGL7 module and that FRAME RESET 1 is being used by the genlock
function.
As shown in the following figure for FRAME RESET 3, no module name is
displayed when a frame reset signal is not being used by any of the installed
modules.

Figure 2-20: FRAME RESET STATUS submenu

For each of the frame reset signals, if two or more modules are using the same
frame reset signal, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select which
modules are displayed.

2–26 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

FRAME RESET 1. Displays the module(s) and output(s) using the 2.997 Hz frame
reset signal.

FRAME RESET 2. Displays the module(s) and output(s) using the 6.250 Hz frame
reset signal.

FRAME RESET 3. Displays the module(s) and output(s) using the 3.000 Hz frame
reset signal.

UTILITY submenu Use this menu to set the system-related settings such as the contrast of the LCD
display and the network parameters or to enable module options. Use the up
(▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu items. The following
figures show the UTILITY submenu.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–27

Operating basics

Figure 2-21: UTILITY submenu

2–28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

Figure 2-22: UTILITY submenu (Continued)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–29

Operating basics

VERSION INFO (H/W). Displays the hardware version of the mainframe (CPU),
the FPGA (Frame), and the Front Panel board (FP). Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select the module for which you want to display the hardware
version.
When a GPS7 module is installed, the hardware version display includes the GPS
receiver module ID code and the firmware version number installed on the GPS
receiver module (1.08 in the image below).

The ID value in the above readout represents the hardware version of the GPS
receiver. The possible values are:
3002. This value indicates that the receiver supports GPS signals only. This
receiver was replaced by the 3015 receiver.
3015. This value indicates that the receiver supports GPS and GLONASS
signals. This receiver was replaced by the 3023 receiver. There are some
reported limitations with this receiver. See the TG8000 Release Notes for
more information.
3023. This value indicates that the receiver supports GPS and GLONASS
signals.

VERSION INFO (F/W). Displays the firmware version number of the mainframe
and the date and time of the firmware build. The date and time are in the format
<month, date, time, year>.

OPTIONS. This menu item is available only if an SDI7 module is installed in the
mainframe. Displays the status of whether Option 3G and/or DBT is enabled or
not: SDI7[slot number] None is displayed if no software options are enabled; 3G
and/or DBT is displayed if Option 3G and/or DBT is enabled.
If more than one SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe, use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to display the option status of another SDI7 module.
To view the module ID and to enable Option 3G and/or DBT, select this menu
item, and then press the ENTER button to access the OPTIONS submenu. (See
page 2-35, OPTIONS submenu (SDI7 module only).)

2–30 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN. Assigns signal sets to the front-panel test signal buttons
and assigns a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to the
OTHER test signal button. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER
button to access the SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu. (See page 2-37.)

LCD CONTRAST. Adjusts the contrast of the LCD display. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to decrease or increase the display contrast.

BEEPER CONTROL. Enables or disables the beeper function in the instrument.

When enabled, the beeper alerts the user when a fan fault condition has been
detected. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to enable or disable the
beeper.

FRONT PANEL DISABLE. Sets the time-out period until the front-panel buttons are
disabled. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the following
choices: Disable, Immediately, 1 Minute, 10 Minutes, 30 Minutes, and 1 Hour.
Press the ENTER button to enable the selection.
When you select any of these time-out periods (except Disable), the front-panel
buttons are disabled when that time passes without a button push. If this happens,
press and hold the FRONT PANEL ENABLE button for about 1 second to restart
the time-out counter and enable the front-panel buttons.
The FRONT PANEL ENABLE button is illuminated when the front-panel buttons
are enabled.

NETWORK. Displays the current network parameters of the mainframe or sets the
network parameters for the 10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the mainframe. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to toggle between Information and Setup.
When you select Information and press the ENTER button, you will access the
NETWORK INFORMATION submenu. (See page 2-38.) When you select Setup
and press the ENTER button, you will access the NETWORK SETUP submenu.
(See page 2-39.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–31

Operating basics

ALARM STATUS. Displays the name of the highest severity mainframe alarm
currently in effect. When no alarm is active, the message No Alarm is displayed.
Alarms must be enabled in the GPI ALARM SELECT submenu or the AGL7
ALARM SELECT submenu (when an AGL7 module is installed) before they will
appear in the Alarm Status display after an alarm has been triggered.
If multiple alarms have been triggered, only the name of the highest severity
alarm is displayed. From low (1) to high (5) severity, the following alarm names
may appear:
1. No Alarm: No errors have been detected.
2. Genlock: Near Loss of Lock: The frequency of the genlock signal and the
internal reference signal have shifted considerably, and the TG8000 is near
loss of lock. If this message appears, check the frequency of the genlock
signal or the internal reference signal of the TG8000.
3. Genlock: Loss of Lock: The TG8000 cannot lock to the genlock signal.
4. Genlock: No Signal: A genlock signal is not connected.
5. Fan Fault: The fan on the rear panel has stopped operating properly.

NOTE. The ALARM STATUS submenu does not update after you enter the
UTILITY menu. Therefore, if a new alarm occurs while you are looking at this
submenu, you will not see the new alarm until you exit and reenter the UTILITY
menu.

ALARM RESET. Resets all of the mainframe alarms that have been triggered.
Press the ENTER button to clear the triggered alarms. If the condition(s) that
triggered the alarm(s) still exists, the alarm(s) will come back immediately.

GPI ALARM OUTPUT. Enables or disables the GPI interface from triggering a
ground closure when an enabled GPI alarm is triggered. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to enable or disable the GPI alarm output. Use the GPI ALARM
SELECT menu item to select which GPI alarms to enable.

GPI ALARM SELECT. Selects which GPI alarms are enabled or disabled. When
the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu selection is set to Enabled, the GPI interface
triggers a ground closure when an enabled GPI alarm is triggered. Select GPI
ALARM SELECT, and then press the ENTER button to access the GPI ALARM
SELECT submenu. (See page 2-41, GPI ALARM SELECT submenu.)

2–32 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT. This menu item is available only when an AGL7 module
is installed in the mainframe. Enables or disables the AGL7 module from blanking
one of the black outputs to trigger a downstream Electronic Change Over (ECO)
unit when an enabled AGL7 alarm is triggered. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to disable the AGL7 module alarm output or to select which AGL7
connector will output the alarm signal (BLACK 1, BLACK 2, or BLACK 3). Use
the AGL7 ALARM SELECT menu item to select which AGL7 alarms to enable.

AGL7 ALARM SELECT. This menu item is available only when an AGL7 module
is installed in the mainframe. When the AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT menu selection
is set to Enabled, the AGL7 module blanks one of the black outputs when an
enabled AGL7 alarm is triggered. Select AGL7 ALARM SELECT, and then
press the ENTER button to access the AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu. (See
page 2-42, AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu.)

FIRMWARE UPGRADE. Selects the type of firmware upgrade (USB or Network)

to be performed and initiates the upgrade process. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select USB or Network, and then press the ENTER button to start
the upgrade process. (See page 2-53, How to upgrade the instrument firmware.)

USB (status). Displays the current status of the USB port:

Not Connected is displayed when no USB drive is connected to the
instrument.
Not Mounted is displayed when a USB drive is connected to the instrument
but is not mounted. Press the ENTER button to mount the drive. Normally,
a USB drive will automatically mount when the drive is initially connected
to the instrument.
Mounted is displayed when a USB drive is connected to the instrument and
is mounted. Press the ENTER button to safely unmount the drive. The
message You May Now Safely Remove USB Drive appears when it is safe
to remove the drive.

CAUTION. To prevent the loss of data on the USB drive, be sure to unmount the
USB drive before you remove the drive from the instrument.

BACKUP/RESTORE. Backs up or restores the instrument presets or all user data to

or from a connected USB drive. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select the type of backup or restore operation, and then press the ENTER button
to perform the operation. (See page 2-65, How to backup/restore presets and
user data using a USB drive.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–33

Operating basics

FLASH MEMORY. Displays the total amount of flash memory that is installed in
the mainframe and displays the amount of memory that remains free (available).
The flash memory is used by the test signal files that you install in the mainframe.
When the amount of available memory is low, you may need to delete test signals
from memory before you can install new test signals.

DIAGNOSTICS. Displays the results of diagnostic tests or executes the diagnostic

routines for the mainframe and installed modules. Use the up (▲) or down (▼)
arrow button to display diagnostic results or to choose to run the diagnostic
routines. When diagnostic results are displayed, use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to select between the various diagnostic results. When you
select DIAGNOSTICS and then press the ENTER button, you access the
DIAGNOSTICS submenu. (See page 2-43, Mainframe DIAGNOSTICS submenu.)

CAL OVEN. This menu item is available only when a GPS7 module is installed
in the mainframe. Calibrates the frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator
without removing the instrument from service. This menu item appears only
when the mainframe has software version 5.1 or above installed and when there is
GPS7 module installed in the mainframe. Select CAL OVEN, and then press the
ENTER button to access the CAL OVEN submenu. (See page 2-47.)

2–34 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

OPTIONS submenu This submenu is available only if an SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe.
(SDI7 module only) Use this menu to view the unique module ID of the selected SDI7 module, to
view or enter the option key for Option 3G and/or DBT, and to view the status of
whether Option 3G and/or DBT has been enabled. The following figure shows
the OPTIONS submenu.

NOTE. If you ordered Option 3G and/or DBT as an upgrade to the SDI7 module,
you must enter the option key to enable the option.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–35

Operating basics

MODULE ID. Displays the unique ID of the selected SDI7 module. You will need
to provide this ID number when you order Option 3G.

OPTION KEY. Displays the option key assigned to the selected SDI7 module.

To enter an option key, perform the following steps:

1. Press the ENTER button to enter the option key edit mode. The underscore
character (_) appears under the first character of the option key.
2. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the first character of
the option key.
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
to the next character in the option key.
4. Enter all of the option key characters, and then press ENTER button to
confirm the selections.
5. Cycle power on the instrument to ensure the newly enabled option(s) is fully
operational.

CAUTION. For Option DBT upgrades, be sure to cycle power on the instrument
after entering the new option key. A reboot is required in order to fully activate
the Dolby E functionality.

OPTIONS. Displays the enabled options for the selected SDI7 module: None is
displayed if no software options are enabled, 3G and/or DBT is displayed when
Option 3G and/or DBT has been enabled.

2–36 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN Use this menu to assign signal sets to a specific front-panel test signal button
submenu and to assign a frame picture file created by the Frame Picture Generator to
the OTHER test signal button. The following figure shows the SIGNAL KEY
ASSIGN submenu.

Figure 2-23: SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN submenu

TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN. Assigns signal sets to a specific front-panel test signal
button. The mainframe is shipped from the factory with signal sets corresponding
to each button name already assigned. For example, when you press the COLOR
BAR test signal button, the three types of color bars signals (100% Color Bars,
75% Color Bars, and SMPTE Color Bars) are available for output.
Perform the following steps to assign signal sets to a specific test signal button:
1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the module to which you
want to assign signal sets, and then press the ENTER button.

This will display the following submenu to assign signal sets. The first line
shows the name of the test signal button, and second line shows the name of
the assigned signal set.

2. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the test signal button to
which you want to assign a signal set (for example COLOR BAR KEY).
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the signal set you want to
assign to the selected test signal button (for example COLOR BAR).
4. Press the ENTER button to assign the signal set to the selected test signal
button.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all signal set assignments are completed.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–37

Operating basics

FRAME PICTURE KEY ASSIGN. Assigns frame picture files downloaded to the
TG8000 to the OTHER test signal button. This operation is required to output the
frame picture files as a picture (natural picture or test pattern).
Perform the following steps to assign a frame picture file to the OTHER test
signal button:
1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the module to which you
want to assign a frame picture file, and press the ENTER button.

This will display the following submenu. The second line shows the folder
name that was created when the frame picture file was downloaded to the
TG8000 mainframe.

2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the folder in which the
frame picture file is saved.
3. Press the ENTER button to assign the frame picture file to the OTHER button.
Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about
creating a frame picture file and downloading the file from a PC to the TG8000
mainframe.

NETWORK INFORMATION Use this menu to display all of the current network parameters. Use the left (◄)
submenu or right (►) arrow button to select a network parameter and display the assigned
address. The following selections are available: IP Address, Subnet Mask,
Gateway Address, MAC Address, and DHCP Server.

The following figure shows NETWORK INFORMATION submenu.

Figure 2-24: NETWORK INFORMATION submenu

2–38 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

NETWORK SETUP Use this menu to set the network parameters for the 10/100/1000 BASE-T port
submenu on the TG8000, which will be used when you remotely control the TG8000
using a PC and when you transfer files between the TG8000 and a PC. Refer to
Connecting to a Network for detailed information about connecting the TG8000 to
a PC. (See page 2-48.) Use the up (◄) or right (►) arrow button to scroll through
the menu items. The following figure shows the NETWORK SETUP submenu.

Figure 2-25: NETWORK SETUP submenu

DHCP. Enables or disables the TG8000 to receive IP address settings using the
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) service on your network. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between Enabled and Disabled. Press
the ENTER button to implement the selection. If you select Disable in this menu,
you will need to set address values in each of the following menu items.

NOTE. Under some network environments, the TG8000 might not be able to get
the IP address automatically from a DHCP server. In this case, you need to enter
the appropriate address value in each submenu item.
Refer to your network administrator or to the user documentation supplied with
your network server operating system (OS) for detailed information about DHCP
server functions.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–39

Operating basics

IP ADDRESS. Sets the IP address of the TG8000. When no value is set, the
default value is used. If DHCP service is enabled, the IP address obtained from
the DHCP server is used instead of the address entered here. Refer to Manually
Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address.

NOTE. If you enter blank characters for the IP address, the network function of
the TG8000 becomes invalid.

SUBNET MASK. Sets the subnet address of the TG8000. When no value is set, the
default value is used. If DHCP service is enabled, the subnet address obtained
from the DHCP server is used instead of the address entered here. Refer to
Manually Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an
address.

GATEWAY ADDR. Sets the gateway address of the TG8000. Refer to Manually
Setting a Network Address below for instructions on how to enter an address.

Manually setting a network address. Use the following procedure to manually

enter a network address:
1. Press the ENTER button to enter the edit mode to input the address.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
( _ ), and use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to enter the address value.
3. After you enter the address value, press the ENTER button to enable the
address.

2–40 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

GPI ALARM SELECT Use this submenu to select which GPI alarms are enabled or disabled. When
submenu the GPI ALARM OUTPUT menu selection is set to Enabled, the GPI interface
triggers a ground closure when an enabled GPI alarm is triggered. The following
figure shows the GPI ALARM SELECT submenu.

Figure 2-26: GPI ALARM SELECT submenu

For each of the following alarms, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button
to select between Enable and Disable, and then press the ENTER button to
implement the selection.

Fan Fault. Enables or disables a GPI alarm signal when a fan fault is detected.

No Signal. This menu item appears only when an AGL7 or GPS7 module is
installed. Enables or disables a GPI alarm signal when no genlock signal is
detected.

Loss of Lock. This menu item appears only when an AGL7 or GPS7 module is
installed. Enables or disables a GPI alarm signal when a loss of genlock condition
is detected.

Near Loss of Lock. This menu item appears only when an AGL7 or GPS7 module
is installed. Enables or disables a GPI alarm signal when a loss of genlock
condition is detected. This can happen when the frequency of the input signal
is too far from the correct frequency.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–41

Operating basics

AGL7 ALARM SELECT This menu item appears only when an AGL7 module is installed. Use this
submenu submenu to select which AGL7 alarms are enabled or disabled. When the AGL7
ALARM OUTPUT menu selection is set to Enabled, the AGL7 module blanks
one of the black outputs when an enabled AGL7 alarm is triggered. The following
figure shows the AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu.

Figure 2-27: AGL7 ALARM SELECT submenu

For each of the following AGL7 alarms, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between Enable and Disable, and then press the ENTER button
to implement the selection.

No Signal. Enables or disables an AGL7 alarm signal when no genlock signal is

detected.

Loss of Lock. Enables or disables an AGL7 alarm signal when a loss of genlock
condition is detected.

Near Loss of Lock. Enables or disables an AGL7 alarm signal when a loss of
genlock condition is detected. This can happen when the frequency of the input
signal is too far from the correct frequency.

2–42 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

Mainframe DIAGNOSTICS Use this menu to view diagnostic readouts and to execute the diagnostic routines
submenu for the mainframe and installed modules. The following figure shows the
DIAGNOSTICS submenu.

Figure 2-28: Mainframe DIAGNOSTICS submenu

TUNE. Displays how far the TG8000 system is deviating from the calibrated
internal frequency of the mainframe oscillator in order to lock to an external
reference input. One value of this readout is to determine if the instrument
oscillator needs to be calibrated. If the instrument is locked to a traceable
reference, then any tune value indicates error in the instrument calibration. For
example, if the instrument is locked to GPS and/or GLONASS and the Tune
readout is more than ±0.1 e-6, then you should consider calibrating the internal
frequency of the instrument. This can be performed while the instrument is in
service with no disruption to the operation. (See page 2-47, CAL OVEN submenu
(GPS7 module only).)
The first part of the Tune readout indicates the fractional amount of deviation
from the calibrated frequency. For example, if you use a GPS7 or AGL7 module
to lock to a video source that is 5 parts per million high, then the readout will say
“+5.00e-6”. This allows you to measure the frequency of the reference input and
to see if the input is near the end of the available tuning range. If the TG8000
system is in internal reference mode, the tune value should be 0.00 e-6 and the
integer values will equal the calibration value (CAL readout).

NOTE. The TUNE display will show non-zero deviation values only when
an AGL7 or GPS7 module is installed and the signal reference setting is not
configured as INTERNAL.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–43

Operating basics

The integer values indicate the actual tuning control word. The allowed range of
the tuning control word is 0 to 4,194,304. The first number is the current value of
the word and the second number is the target value for the tuning control loop.
In most cases, these two values are the same. However, in the case where the
TG8000 system needs to make a large frequency change to achieve signal lock,
then depending on the instrument mode, the value may slew slowly to the target
value to stay inside the allowed slew rate for reference systems. In this case, the
first number will slew over seconds or minutes until it equals the value of the
second number. If the instrument is taking a long time to lock to an external
reference signal, the Tune readout may provide valuable information about what
is happening.

CAL. Displays the tuning control word for the calibrated frequency of the
mainframe oscillator and how far the TG8000 system is deviating from the
calibrated frequency to achieve a lock to the internal reference.
The first part of the CAL readout indicates the fractional amount of deviation
from the calibrated frequency. For example, a readout of “0.59e-6” indicates
a fractional correction of 0.59 parts per million. When a calibration of the
instrument oscillator is performed, the CAL readout values will typically change.
Over the life of the oscillator oven, the expected frequency drift is ±2.5 e -6, so
this number should always be in this range. If the fractional number is not within
this range, then the instrument may have been miscalibrated, or the oscillator oven
may have drifted out of specification since the last calibration. In this case, you
should consider calibrating the internal frequency of the instrument. This can be
performed while the instrument is in service with no disruption to the operation.
(See page 2-47, CAL OVEN submenu (GPS7 module only).)

PLL. Displays the frequency in MHz and the lock status for each of the mainframe
clocks used to drive the video outputs. All of the clocks should show a status of
locked (LK) during normal instrument operation.

TEMP. Displays the current temperatures of the mainframe and CPU in °C

followed by their status. OK is displayed as the status when a temperature is within
the operating range; WARN is displayed when a temperature is out of range.

2–44 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

VOLTAGE. Displays the current voltage readings for the various mainframe and
module slot voltages. OK is displayed as the status when a voltage is within the
operating range; WARN is displayed when a voltage is out of range.
The Voltage readings include the status of the RTC (Real Time Controller) battery
power level. The following readouts may appear:
> 40% (OK) indicates the battery power is good.
20% to 40% (WARN) indicates the battery power is getting low and should
be replaced soon.
< 20% (LOW) indicates that the battery should be replaced immediately.

CAUTION. The RTC battery should be replaced before it loses power. The RTC
battery powers non-volatile memory that contains system information such as the
network configuration settings and the real time clock settings. This information
is accessed only when the instrument is powered on and initializes.

FAN SPD. Displays the current fan speed in RPM followed by the status. OK is
displayed as the status when the fan operation is within range; WARN is displayed
when the fan operation is out of range.

PS HRS. Displays the number of hours that the power supply has been active.
The instrument uses a log to track the number of hours that the power supply has
been powering the instrument. For critical applications, you may want to replace
the power supply periodically to prevent down time.
The expected life of the power supply varies with the temperature and load. For
a fully-loaded instrument in a 25 °C room, the power supply is specified to last
at least 15 years (131,400 hours). For a lightly loaded instrument with only one
or two modules running a 25 °C, the power supply should last 20 years (175,000
hours). At the maximum room temperature, the expected life of the power supply
is significantly less. For example, for a fully loaded instrument operating at 50 °C
room temperature, the expected life of the power supply is 5 years (43,800 hours).
Use these guidelines to help you decide when to replace the power supply.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–45

Operating basics

RUN. Runs the diagnostic routines for the mainframe and the installed modules.
The instrument must be in Factory mode in order to access this menu selection.

CAUTION. Before you execute the diagnostic routines, be sure to save the current
instrument settings to a preset. After the diagnostics are completed, reboot the
instrument and then recall the saved settings. You do not need to reboot the
instrument if you run the diagnostics while the instrument is in normal mode.

Press the ENTER button to execute the diagnostic routines.

The GPS7 module has its own diagnostics submenu; running the mainframe
diagnostics here does not run the GPS7 diagnostics. (See page 3-152, GPS7
module DIAGNOSTICS submenu.) If all of the diagnostic routines are completed
without any errors, the instrument will display "Pass".
If a diagnostic error is displayed, contact your local Tektronix Field Office or
representative.

NOTE. The front-panel buttons are disabled until the diagnostic routines are
completed.

2–46 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

CAL OVEN submenu Use this menu to set the internal frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator.
(GPS7 module only) This may be done without removing the instrument from service, allowing you to
compensate for oven drift while the instrument is in its operating environment.
This menu only appears when there is a GPS7 module installed.
The mainframe oscillator is calibrated by storing the current frequency of the
oscillator while it is locked to GPS and/or GLONASS or a reference video signal.

NOTE. Perform the mainframe internal frequency calibration at least once a year
to compensate for oscillator drift. With a GPS7 module installed, this calibration
can be done while the instrument is in service.
If your GPS7 module is installed in a TG700 mainframe, you need to also
characterize the oscillator frequency as a function of voltage. Refer to the TG700
User Manual for more information (Tektronix part number 071-1970-XX).

The following figure shows the CAL OVEN submenu. You can find a complete
internal frequency calibration procedure in the Oven Calibration Procedures
section. (See page 3-100.)

Figure 2-29: Internal frequency calibration menu

Press the ENTER button to execute the oscillator frequency calibration routine or
press the BACK button to exit the menu.

CAUTION. To prevent an incorrect oscillator frequency from being stored as the

calibrated value, be sure that the instrument is locked to one of the following
signal sources before you run the internal frequency calibration routine:
Rubidium clock, GPS and/or GLONASS antenna (GPS7 module only), or the
master sync signal of your video installation. To run the gain calibration, the
instrument must be locked to a GPS and/or GLONASS reference.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–47

Operating basics

How to connect the generator to a network

The TG8000 has a 10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the rear panel that allows you to
use a PC to remotely control the instrument and to upload and download files such
as signal or logo files.
This section provides instructions for connecting the TG8000 to a single PC or to
a network, and for setting the network parameters on 10/100/1000 BASE-T port.
Refer to the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about
how to upload and download files using the 10/100/1000 BASE-T port.

Connecting the TG8000 to The TG8000 uses the rear-panel 10/100/1000 BASE-T port to communicate with
your PC(s) a PC or network. Use one of the following two methods to connect the TG8000 to
your PC(s): (See Figure 2-2 on page 2-6.)
If you are connecting the TG8000 directly to a single PC, use a crossover
Ethernet cable to connect between the 10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the
TG8000 and the Ethernet port on the PC.
If you need to construct your own crossover cable, use the following figure to
change the pin connections on a straight cable to produce a crossover cable.
(See Figure 2-30.)
If you are connecting the TG8000 to your local Ethernet network, use a
straight Ethernet cable to connect between the 10/100/1000 BASE-T port on
the TG8000 and the Ethernet hub port of your local network. By connecting to
an Ethernet network, you can access the TG8000 using any PC on the network.

Figure 2-30: Pin connections for a crossover Ethernet cable

Setting Ethernet network Use the NETWORK SETUP submenu to set the network parameters for the
parameters TG8000 mainframe.

Accessing the NETWORK SETUP submenu.

Perform the following procedure to access the NETWORK SETUP submenu:

1. Press the front-panel MODULE button repeatedly to display the mainframe
main menu.
2. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select UTILITY, and then press
the ENTER button. This accesses the UTILITY submenu.

2–48 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Network.

4. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Setup. This accesses the
NETWORK SETUP submenu. (See Figure 2-25 on page 2-39.)

Setting the parameters on a network with a DHCP server. If your network has a
DHCP server, use the NETWORK SETUP submenu to enable the TG8000 to
function as a DHCP client. When the TG8000 is connected to the network and
DHCP service is enabled, the TG8000 obtains the necessary network addresses
automatically from the DHCP server.

NOTE. Under some network environments, the TG8000 may not be able to get
the IP address automatically from a DHCP server. In this case, you need to enter
the appropriate address value in each submenu item.
Refer to your network administrator or to the user documentation supplied with
your network server operating system (OS) for detailed information about DHCP
server functions.

Setting the parameters on a network without a DHCP server. If your network does
not have a DHCP server, perform the following procedure to set the network
parameters:
1. If you connect the TG8000 directly to a single PC:
a. Set the IP ADDRESS parameter to be the same IP address as the PC's
address except for the last number. The last number must be different than
the last number in the PC's IP address.
b. Set the SUBNET MASK parameter to be the same net mask (subnet
mask) used by the PC. Do not enter a number if the PC does not have
a net mask.
c. You do not need to enter a GATEWAY ADDR if you are directly
connected to a single PC.
2. If you connect the TG8000 to your local Ethernet network, see the Caution
note below.

CAUTION. To prevent communication conflicts on your Ethernet network, ask your

local network administrator for the correct numbers to enter in the NETWORK
PARAMETERS submenu if you connect the TG8000 to your local Ethernet
network.

3. Verify the Ethernet connection by using a ping command from the PC.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–49

Operating basics

How to use the mainframe General Purpose Interface (GPI)

The TG8000 mainframe provides a dedicated RJ-45 connector on the rear panel
to serve as a General Purpose Interface (GPI). With the mainframe GPI, you can
recall one of the seven available presets and output an alarm signal.
This section describes how to use the mainframe GPI and its available features.

Pin assignments of the GPI The following figure shows the pin assignments of the GPI connector. Use pins 1,
connector 2, and 3 to input signals for recalling a preset. Use pin 4 to output an alarm signal.
Frame ground is used for the ground return. When using a shielded LAN cable
(shielded twisted pair cable), you can use the shield of the cable as ground.
Table 2-5: Pin assignments of the mainframe GPI connector
Pin number Function Level
1, 2, and 3 Input High > 2.4 V or open (connected to an internal
10 kΩ pull-up resistor)
Low < 0.8 V or ground (input impedance: 10 kΩ)
Timing: Ignores pulses < 40 ms and always detects
pulses > 60 ms
6 Output Low < 0.4 V or ground (when sinking 100 mA;
maximum on-resistance 4 Ω)

Recalling a preset You can recall one of the seven presets by combinations of signal levels for pins 1,
2, and 3 of the GPI connector. The following table shows the combinations of
signal levels for the pins and the preset number to be recalled.
Table 2-6: Signal level combinations and the corresponding preset for the mainframe
GPI
Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1 Preset number
High High Low 1
High Low High 2
High Low Low 3
Low High High 4
Low High Low 5
Low Low High 6
Low Low Low 7

2–50 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

All of the input signals are active low. When the signal level(s) for the specified
pin(s) goes from High to Low, the corresponding preset is recalled. For example,
when the signal level for pin 3 goes from High to Low, preset 1 is recalled.

NOTE. Since the signal transition cannot be detected on the edge of the signal, the
signal level needs to be held low for about 0.5 seconds before the preset signal is
recognized. The time required to change the instrument settings depends on the
contents of the selected preset.

Outputting an alarm signal The TG8000 can output an alarm signal from pin 6 on the GPI port connector
when an internal error occurs. Since the output signal is an active low; the signal
level for pin 6 goes from High to Low when any errors occur.
In addition, you can specify a BLACK output on the AGL7 module as an alarm
output. When an enabled AGL7 alarm occurs, the output signal from the selected
connector turns off for about 60 ms.

NOTE. The AGL7 hardware must be at Version 3.x or above to support outputting
an alarm signal.

The alarm signal is output when one of the following internal errors occurs:
The fan stops working (GPI alarm only).

NOTE. The following genlock alarms are available only when an AGL7 or GPS7
module is installed.

A genlock signal is not connected.

The TG8000 does not lock to a genlock signal.
The frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference shift
considerably, and the TG8000 is near loss of lock. The threshold for near loss
of lock is approximately 2 × 10-6 from the ends of the tune range.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–51

Operating basics

The alarm signal output can be enabled using the GPI ALARM OUTPUT
and AGL7 ALARM OUTPUT menu items in the UTILITY submenu. (See
page 2-41.) (See page 2-42.)

NOTE. After the instrument is powered on, it takes about three minutes to detect
a stable error signal (this time is required to stabilize the temperature in the
temperature-controlled oven in the internal reference oscillator). You can see
the remaining time before the alarm becomes effective in the AGL7 main menu
as shown below.

2–52 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

How to upgrade the instrument firmware

NOTE. It is recommended that you always upgrade the instrument firmware
before you install a new module.

You can use the UTILITY menu to upgrade the firmware installed in the
instrument using one of the following two methods:
USB upgrade: Install the upgrade using a USB drive that is connected to the
instrument.
Network upgrade: Install the upgrade using a PC that has an Ethernet
network connection to the instrument.

CAUTION. To prevent the loss of your user created files during a firmware
upgrade, be sure to backup all user data to a USB drive as instructed in the
upgrade procedures.
During the firmware upgrade process, all files created or installed by the user are
deleted. The deleted files include presets, signal files, frame picture files, logo
files, sequence files, and for the SDI7 module, can also include text and font files.
At the end of the upgrade process, the standard set of factory installed signal files,
logo files, and SDI7 module font files are restored. After the upgrade is complete,
you can then restore the backed up data from the USB drive.

AGL7 module upgrades If the TG8000 you are upgrading has an AGL7 module installed, and if the
firmware version in the TG8000 is 1.2 or earlier, the FPGA of the AGL7 module
will be automatically updated when the instrument reboots after the firmware
upgrade. This will also occur if the AGL7 module is moved from a TG700
mainframe to a TG8000 mainframe.

CAUTION. To prevent an upgrade failure of your AGL7 module, do not remove or

cycle power on the TG8000 while the instrument is rebooting after the firmware
upgrade. The FPGA update on the AGL7 module takes about three minutes and
there is no indication on the front panel that the AGL7 module is being updated. If
power is interrupted before the FPGA update is complete, the module will need to
be returned to Tektronix for service.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–53

Operating basics

Determine if an upgrade is You do not need to upgrade the firmware if your instrument has the latest firmware
needed version already installed. Perform the following steps to determine if the firmware
on your instrument needs to be upgraded:
1. Power on the instrument.
2. Verify the current firmware version installed on the instrument:
a. Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 : PRESET.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 :
UTILITY, and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VERSION INFO
(F/W).
d. In the second line of the display readout, note the version of the installed
firmware.

Instrument firmware version number

3. Verify the latest version of firmware at the Tektronix Web site:

a. Use the Web browser on a PC to navigate to the following Tektronix Web
site:
http://www.tek.com/downloads

b. On the Downloads Finder Web page, search by model number (such

as TG8000) and filter by software and software type to locate the
firmware-upgrade package for the instrument.
c. Note the latest version number of the firmware-upgrade package(s).

Web site firmware version number

4. If the latest firmware version at the Web site is the same as the version on your
instrument, you do not need to upgrade the firmware and no action is required.
5. If the latest firmware version at the Web site is newer than the version on your
instrument, you should upgrade the firmware.
6. Download the latest firmware version to your PC.
7. After the software package is downloaded, click on the self-extracting archive
to extract the following files into the directory of your choice: transfer.exe
and firmware.pkg. There may also be a readme.txt file.

NOTE. If the firmware upgrade package contains a readme.txt file, be sure to read
the file before you attempt to upgrade the firmware on your instrument.
If you are performing the upgrade using a network connection, the transfer.exe
and firmware.pkg files must be located in the same directory on the PC.

2–54 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

To perform the upgrade, you can use either the USB upgrade procedure or the
network upgrade procedure. The time required to complete the upgrade is about
10 minutes.

CAUTION. During the upgrade process, once the instrument has started to erase
internal flash memory, DO NOT remove power from the instrument. If you do so,
the instrument flash memory will be corrupted. The instrument will have to be
sent to a Tektronix factory service center to have the system firmware restored.
If power to the instrument is lost before it begins erasing the internal flash
memory, you can restart the firmware upgrade after the instrument reboots.
To prevent loss of your user files, be sure to use the Backup All User Data to USB
option as instructed during the upgrade procedure.

To upgrade the firmware 1. Connect a USB drive to the PC that contains the latest TG8000 firmware.
using a USB drive 2. On the PC, navigate to the USB drive.
3. In the root directory of the USB drive, create a directory named:
TgUpgrd

CAUTION. To prevent an upgrade failure, the upgrade files must be located in a

folder named “TgUpgrd” in the root directory of the USB drive. The folder name
is case sensitive.

4. Open the TgUpgrd directory and copy the firmware.pkg file (from the
extracted archive) to the USB device.
The USB drive should have a directory path of TgUpgrd\firmware.pkg.

NOTE. For a USB upgrade, you do not need to copy the transfer.exe file from
the extracted archive to the USB drive.

5. Safely remove the USB device from the PC and insert it into the USB port
on the front panel of the instrument.
6. If necessary, power on the instrument.
7. Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 : PRESET.
8. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY,
and then press the ENTER button.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–55

Operating basics

9. Verify the status of the USB drive:

a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: USB <status>.
b. Verify that the USB status is Mounted.
c. If the status is Not Mounted, press the ENTER button to mount the USB
drive.
10. Back up the user created files:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: BACKUP/RESTORE.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Backup All User
Data to USB, and then press the ENTER button to start the backup
process.
c. A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation. Press
the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the
operation.
d. During the first stage of the copy process, the display shows the names
of the files as they are copied. Depending on the size of the files being
copied, this may take a couple of minutes.
e. When all of the files have been copied, the message “Finishing copy...” is
displayed while the file system buffers are emptied. This message may
appear for a couple of minutes.
f. When the backup operation is complete, the message “Backup completed
successfully” or “Restore completed successfully” is displayed before
the menu display returns to normal.

NOTE. If the USB drive fills up before the backup operation completes, an
error message is displayed. Press the ENTER or BACK button to clear the
error message. (See page 2-66, Memory requirements.)

11. After the backup operation is complete, press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
button to select TG8000 : UTILITY : FIRMWARE UPGRADE.
12. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select USB Upgrade, and then
press the ENTER button to start the upgrade process.

2–56 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

13. A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the upgrade operation.
The old and new firmware version numbers are displayed. Press the ENTER
button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the operation.

NOTE. If the instrument displays a message indicating that a USB device

containing the firmware was not detected, verify that the USB drive is properly
mounted and has the correct directory path (TgUpgrd\firmware.pkg).

14. A second confirmation message is displayed to remind you that the upgrade
will delete all user-created files on the instrument.

CAUTION. If you did not backup your user files as described in step 10, it is
recommended that you press the BACK button to cancel the upgrade and then
backup your user files before performing the upgrade. You will restore the user
files after the upgrade.

15. Press the ENTER button to proceed with the upgrade or press the BACK
button to cancel the upgrade.
16. Monitor the progress of the upgrade operation:
a. During the upgrade process, the display shows the progress of the upgrade
and shows messages such as “Reading Firmware Data” and “Erasing
Application FS Partition”. This may take a several minutes.
b. When the upgrade has completed, the message “Tektronix Generator
Booting” is displayed while the instrument reboots before the menu
display returns to normal.

CAUTION. If your instrument has a AGL7 module installed, make note of the
following steps. If you interrupt the initialization of the AGL7 module during
the upgrade, the AGL7 module will be inoperable and will have to be returned
to Tektronix for service.
If you do not reboot the instrument a second time, the AGL7 module will
not be fully upgraded.

c. AGL7 module only: If your instrument has a AGL7 module installed,

you will see the message “Initializing AGL7” displayed for several
minutes during the reboot. Do not interrupt this process.
d. AGL7 module only: After the instrument reboots, cycle power again to
complete the AGL7 upgrade.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–57

Operating basics

17. After the upgrade process is complete and the instrument reboots, restore
the user created files:
a. Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 : PRESET.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 :
UTILITY, and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: BACKUP/RESTORE.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Restore All User
Data from USB, and then press the ENTER button to start the restore
process.
e. A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation. Press
the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the
operation.
f. During the first stage of the copy process, the display shows the names
of the files as they are copied. Depending on the size of the files being
copied, this may take a couple of minutes.
g. When all of the files have been copied, the message “Finishing copy...” is
displayed while the file system buffers are emptied. This message may
appear for a couple of minutes.
h. When the restore operation is complete, the message “Backup completed
successfully” or “Restore completed successfully” is displayed before
the menu display returns to normal.

NOTE. If the flash memory on the instrument fills up before the restore
operation completes, an error message is displayed. Press the ENTER
or BACK button to clear the error message. (See page 2-66, Memory
requirements.)

18. Unmount the USB drive:

a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: USB <status>. The USB status should be Mounted
b. Press the ENTER button to unmount the USB drive. After the message
“You may now safely remove the USB drive” is displayed, the menu
readout should change to TG8000 : UTILITY : USB (Not mounted).
c. Remove the USB drive from the instrument.

2–58 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

19. If your TG8000 includes an HDLG7 module, proceed with the following
steps to complete the upgrade:

CAUTION. While upgrading, do not press the front panel buttons or cycle the
instrument power. Doing so can corrupt the module memory and FPGA image.

a. Power on the TG8000.

b. Press the MODULE button until the name of the HDLG7 module you are
upgrading appears.
c. Press and hold the ENTER button until “Upgrade FPGA” appears.
d. Press the ENTER button to upgrade the module.
e. The upgrade will take approximately three minutes. After it is complete,
remove power from the TG8000 and then reapply power to reboot the
system.

NOTE. If you are upgrading the FPGA of multiple HDLG7 modules, you need
to upgrade them separately and reboot the instrument after each upgrade. For
example, if you have three HDLG7s, the FPGA upgrade process sequence will
be: select and upgrade a module, then reboot, then select and upgrade another
module, then reboot, select and upgrade the final module, then reboot. You do not
need to upgrade the modules in any particular order.

20. Verify that the firmware version in the instrument is the same version you
just installed:
a. Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 : PRESET.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 :
UTILITY, and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VERSION INFO
(F/W).
d. In the second line of the display readout, verify that the CPU (0) version
number is the same version number as the upgrade file you installed.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–59

Operating basics

To upgrade the firmware 1. Connect the TG8000 generator and a PC to your local Ethernet network. (See
using an Ethernet network page 2-48, How to connect the generator to a network.)
2. Download the upgrade files to the PC. (See page 2-54, Determine if an
upgrade is needed.)
3. Power on the instrument.
4. Insert a USB drive into the USB port on the front panel of the instrument.
5. Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 : PRESET.
6. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY,
and then press the ENTER button.
7. Verify the status of the USB drive:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: USB <status>.
b. Verify that the USB status is Mounted.
c. If the status is Not Mounted, press the ENTER button to mount the USB
drive.
8. Back up the user created files:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: BACKUP/RESTORE.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Backup All User
Data to USB, and then press the ENTER button to start the backup
process.
c. A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation. Press
the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the
operation.
d. During the first stage of the copy process, the display shows the names
of the files as they are copied. Depending on the size of the files being
copied, this may take a couple of minutes.
e. When all of the files have been copied, the message “Finishing copy...” is
displayed while the file system buffers are emptied. This message may
appear for a couple of minutes.
f. When the backup operation is complete, the message “Backup completed
successfully” or “Restore completed successfully” is displayed before
the menu display returns to normal.

NOTE. If the USB drive fills up before the backup operation completes, an
error message is displayed. Press the ENTER or BACK button to clear the
error message. (See page 2-66, Memory requirements.)

2–60 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

9. After the backup operation is complete, prepare the instrument for the
firmware upgrade:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: FIRMWARE UPGRADE.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Network Upgrade,
and then press the ENTER button. This puts the instrument in upgrade
mode and makes it ready to receive the upgrade files through the
10/100/1000 BASE-T port.
c. A second confirmation message is displayed to remind you that the
upgrade will delete all user-created files on the instrument.

CAUTION. If you did not backup your user files as described in step 8, it is
recommended that you press the BACK button to cancel the upgrade and then
backup your user files before performing the upgrade. You will restore the
user files after the upgrade.

d. Press the ENTER button to proceed with the upgrade or press the BACK
button to cancel the upgrade.
10. From the instrument display, note the current IP address of the instrument.
11. Perform the firmware upgrade:
a. On the PC, double-click the transfer.exe file to launch the transfer
program.
b. Type the IP address or DNS name of the instrument you are upgrading,
and then press Enter. This starts the firmware upgrade process.

CAUTION. To prevent upgrade failure, do not close the transfer.exe window

until the transfer utility asks for another IP address.
When the firmware upgrade completes, the instrument should reboot.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–61

Operating basics

c. The transfer utility displays done when the software upgrade completes
and asks for the address of another instrument. When the software
upgrade completes, the instrument should reboot.

Figure 2-31: Example transfer.exe window after the network upgrade is complete
d. If the instrument did not reboot at the completion of the firmware upgrade,
remove and reapply power to the instrument to cause it to reboot.
e. While the instrument reboots, the message “Tektronix Generator Booting”
is displayed before the menu display returns to normal.

CAUTION. If your instrument has a AGL7 module installed, make note of the
following steps. If you interrupt the initialization of the AGL7 module during
the upgrade, the AGL7 module will be inoperable and will have to be returned
to Tektronix for service.
If you do not reboot the instrument a second time, the AGL7 module will
not be fully upgraded.

f. AGL7 module only: If your instrument has a AGL7 module installed,

you will see the message “Initializing AGL7” displayed for several
minutes during the reboot. Do not interrupt this process.
g. AGL7 module only: After the instrument reboots, cycle power again to
complete the AGL7 upgrade.

2–62 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

12. After the upgrade process is complete and the instrument reboots, restore
the user created files:

CAUTION. To prevent the loss of your user files, be sure to use the Restore All
User Data from USB option in the restore procedure.

a. Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 : PRESET.

b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 :
UTILITY, and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: BACKUP/RESTORE.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Restore All User
Data from USB, and then press the ENTER button to start the restore
process.
e. A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation. Press
the ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the
operation.
f. During the first stage of the copy process, the display shows the names
of the files as they are copied. Depending on the size of the files being
copied, this may take a couple of minutes.
g. When all of the files have been copied, the message “Finishing copy...” is
displayed while the file system buffers are emptied. This message may
appear for a couple of minutes.
h. When the restore operation is complete, the message “Backup completed
successfully” or “Restore completed successfully” is displayed before
the menu display returns to normal.

NOTE. If the flash memory on the instrument fills up before the restore
operation completes, an error message is displayed. Press the ENTER
or BACK button to clear the error message. (See page 2-66, Memory
requirements.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–63

Operating basics

13. Unmount the USB drive:

a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: USB <status>. The USB status should be Mounted
b. Press the ENTER button to unmount the USB drive. After the message
“You may now safely remove the USB drive” is displayed, the menu
readout should change to TG8000 : UTILITY : USB (Not mounted).
c. Remove the USB drive from the instrument.
14. If your TG8000 includes an HDLG7 module, proceed with the following
steps to complete the upgrade:

CAUTION. While upgrading, do not press the front panel buttons or cycle the
instrument power. Doing so can corrupt the module memory and FPGA image.

a. Power on the TG8000.

b. Press the MODULE button until the name of the HDLG7 module you are
upgrading appears.
c. Press and hold the ENTER button until “Upgrade FPGA” appears.
d. Press the ENTER button to upgrade the module.
e. The upgrade will take approximately three minutes. After it is complete,
remove power from the TG8000 and then reapply power to reboot the
system.

NOTE. If you are upgrading the FPGA of multiple HDLG7 modules, you need
to upgrade them separately and reboot the instrument after each upgrade. For
example, if you have three HDLG7s, the FPGA upgrade process sequence will
be: select and upgrade a module, then reboot, then select and upgrade another
module, then reboot, select and upgrade the final module, then reboot. You do not
need to upgrade the modules in any particular order.

2–64 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

How to backup/restore presets and user data using a USB drive

You can use the UTILITY menu to backup or restore the instrument presets and all
user data using a USB drive that is connected to the instrument. (See page 2-27,
UTILITY submenu.) You can use the backup and restore functions to duplicate
settings and signal files between different TG8000 generators.

How the backup and During the backup operation, files are copied to a directory named “TgBackup”
restore operations work in the root directory of the USB drive. The restore operation expects to copy
files from this same directory.
All of the copy operations will create new directories/files on either the TG8000
or the USB drive as needed. If a file with the same name exists in the destination
location, it will be overwritten. However, if a file exists in the destination location
and not in the source location, the file will be left alone. Therefore, the restore
and backup operations act as an overlay, and do not guarantee that there will not
be additional files left in the destination location that did not exist in the source
location.

Presets. When presets are copied, only the MSTATEX.YY files and enough
directory structure to hold them in their correct locations (for example,
HDVG7/PRESET/MSTATE0.01) will be copied or created.

NOTE. The preset file names use the format MSTATEX.YY. In this example, X
denotes the slot name, YY denotes the preset number (there are 13 possible
presets). Separate presets are stored for each individual mainframe slot.

Only presets that have content are copied or written by the backup/restore
processes. This is because only presets that have been saved have files associated
with them and the backup/restore process copies only those files. Any preset
that has never been saved will not have an associated file and therefore will not
be copied.

All user data. When all of the user data is copied, every user file except for the
FPGA configuration files will be copied. User files are defined as any file that
exists in the /app/F0 directory on the instrument. The files in this directory can
include presets, signal files, frame picture files, logo files, sequence files, and for
the SDI7 module, can also include text and font files. The user data files do not
include the application software or any Linux files.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–65

Operating basics

Memory requirements It is recommended that you use the FLASH MEMORY readout in the UTILITY
menu to determine how much memory is available on the instrument before you
perform a restore operation. Here is how much memory is required:
If you are backing up or restoring only presets, you will need up to 1 MB of
free space on the USB drive or in the flash memory of the instrument.
If you are backing up or restoring all of the user data in the instrument, you
will need up to 96 MB of free space on the USB drive or in the flash memory
of the instrument.
If the backup or restore operation runs out of memory on the USB drive or the
flash memory on the instrument before the operation is complete, the operation
will copy as much data as it can and will then display an error message stating that
the backup or restore operation was incomplete because the drive or device is full.

To backup/restore presets 1. Connect a USB drive to the TG8000 generator.

or user data using a 2. Press the MODULE button to select TG8000 : PRESET.
USB drive
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY,
and then press the ENTER button.
4. Verify the status of the USB drive:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY
: USB <status>.
b. Verify that the USB status is Mounted.
c. If the status is Not Mounted, press the ENTER button to mount the USB
drive.
5. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY :
BACKUP/RESTORE.
6. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select one of the following:
Backup Presets to USB
Backup All User Data to USB
Restore Presets from USB
Restore All User Data from USB
7. Press the ENTER button to start the selected backup or restore operation.
8. A warning message is displayed asking you to verify the operation. Press the
ENTER button to proceed or press the BACK button to cancel the operation.

2–66 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

9. Monitor the progress of the file copy operation:

a. During the first stage of the copy process, the display shows the names
of the files as they are copied. Depending on the size of the files being
copied, this may take a couple of minutes.
b. When all of the files have been copied, the message “Finishing copy...” is
displayed while the file system buffers are emptied. This message may
appear for a couple of minutes.
c. When the backup or restore operation is complete, the message “Backup
completed successfully” or “Restore completed successfully” is displayed
before the menu display returns to normal.

NOTE. If the USB drive or the flash memory on the instrument fills up before
the backup or restore operation completes, an error message is displayed.
Press the ENTER or BACK button to clear the error message. (See page 2-66,
Memory requirements.)

10. After the backup or restore operation is complete, press the up (▲) or down
(▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY : USB (Mounted).
11. Press the ENTER button to unmount the USB drive. After the message “You
may now safely remove the USB drive” is displayed, the menu readout should
change to TG8000 : UTILITY : USB (Not mounted).
12. Remove the USB drive from the instrument.

How to transfer user files using FTP

When the TG8000 generator is connected to an Ethernet network, you can use
an FTP client to drag and drop user files to or from the generator. Perform the
following steps to transfer files to or from the instrument using FTP:
1. Connect the TG8000 generator to your local Ethernet network. (See
page 2-48, How to connect the generator to a network.)
2. On a computer connected to the same network as the TG8000 generator, open
an FTP client such as Windows Explorer.
3. In the Windows Explorer command box, enter “ftp://IP address”, where IP
address is the network address assigned to the TG8000 generator.

NOTE. Some FTP clients may ask for login credentials. In this case, login with a
user name of “anonymous” and no password.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–67

Operating basics

4. The Windows Explorer window should immediately connect to the instrument

and show the directory structure as shown below.

Figure 2-32: Example FTP view of the instrument file structure

5. Use Windows Explorer to drag and drop user files to or from the TG8000
generator.

NOTE. If the flash memory on the instrument fills up before the copy operation
completes, an error message similar to the one below is displayed. Click OK to
clear the error message. (See page 2-66, Memory requirements.)

Figure 2-33: Example FTP error message when flash memory is full
6. After you are done transferring files, close the Windows Explorer window.

2–68 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Operating basics

Inspection and cleaning

Inspect and clean the instrument as often as your operating conditions require.
The collection of dirt can cause instrument overheating and operational failure.
Dirt acts as an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat dissipation. Dirt
also provides an electrical conduction path that can cause an instrument failure,
especially under high-humidity conditions.

CAUTION. Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the
plastics used in this instrument. Use only deionized water when cleaning the
front-panel controls. Use a 75% isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner, and rinse
with deionized water.

Avoid the use of high-pressure compressed air when cleaning dust from the
interior of this instrument. High-pressure air can cause electrostatic discharge
(ESD). Instead, use low-pressure compressed air (about 9 psi).

Exterior inspection Using the following table as a guide, inspect the outside of the instrument for
damage, wear, and missing parts. You should thoroughly check instruments that
appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused to verify correct operation and
performance. Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead
to further damage to the instrument.
Table 2-7: External inspection check list
Item Inspect for Repair action
Cabinet and front panel Cracks, scratches, deformations, Replace defective module
damaged hardware
Front-panel buttons Missing or damaged Repair or replace missing or defective
buttons
Connectors Broken shells, cracked insulation, Replace defective modules; clear or wash
deformed contacts, and dirt in connectors out dirt
Accessories Missing items or parts of items, bent pins, Replace damaged or missing items,
broken or frayed cables, and damaged frayed cables, and defective modules
connectors

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 2–69

Operating basics

Exterior cleaning Perform the following steps when you clean the exterior of the instrument:

WARNING. To avoid injury or death, unplug the power cord from line voltage
before cleaning the instrument. Avoid getting moisture inside the instrument
during external cleaning. Use only enough liquid to dampen the cleaning cloth.

1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the instrument with a lint-free cloth.
2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint-free cloth dampened with a 75% isopropyl
alcohol-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
3. Clean the monitor screen with a lint-free cloth dampened with a 75%
isopropyl alcohol-and-water solution.

2–70 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

Modules
AG7 Audio Generator module
This section describes the module-specific functions of the AG7 Audio Generator
module. Refer to the following locations for additional information about the
module:
AG7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors. (See
page 2-7.)
AG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
is functional. (See page 1-16.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

AG7 module product description

The AG7 Audio Generator module can output serial digital audio signals that
comply with the AES/EBU standard. The module contains the following features:
8 channels (4 AES/EBU audio pairs) of serial digital audio outputs with 24
or 20 bits resolution
Adjustable frequencies, amplitudes, and audio clicks in every channel
Silence and 48 kHz clock (word clock) outputs
Full remote control using Ethernet interface

The module also supports the following audio frequencies:

Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz
50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz
100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz
150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz
200 Hz 1000 Hz 4800 Hz 15000 Hz
250 Hz 4000 Hz 5000 Hz 16000 Hz
300 Hz 1200 Hz 6000 Hz 20000 Hz
400 Hz 1500 Hz 1600 Hz

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–1

AG7 Audio Generator module

How to operate the AG7 module

After the AG7 module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed
in the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
there are no error messages on the display.
3. After the initialization process, the mainframe main menu appears as shown
below.

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the AG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

5. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus. (See page 3-3, AG7 module main menu.)

3–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AG7 Audio Generator module

AG7 module main menu

Use the AG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Select the audio channel whose parameters are to be changed
Select the audio data resolution
Select the frame reset signal to be synchronized
Select the timing offset for the audio signal outputs

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the AG7 module main menu.

Figure 3-1: AG7 module main menu

CHANNEL PARAMETERS. Selects the channel for which the parameters are to be
set (from Channel 1 to Channel 8). Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button
to make the selection.
Press the front-panel ENTER button to access the CHANNEL PARAMETERS
submenu where you can set frequency, amplitude, and audio click insertion. (See
page 3-4.)

RESOLUTION. Sets the resolution of the serial digital audio signal data. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to make the selection. The choices are 24 bits
or 20 bits. Press the ENTER button to enable the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–3

AG7 Audio Generator module

AUDIO-VIDEO SYNC. Selects the frame reset signal that is synchronized with the
digital audio signals. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to make the
selection. The selection items are Free Run, Frame Reset 1, and Frame Reset 2.
For Free Run, the audio signal is not synchronized with any of the frame reset
signals. Press the ENTER button to enable the selection.

NOTE. If the frame reset signal used by the audio signals is reset by the change of
the video format, the audio signal timing is also reset.

AUDIO TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the audio signal outputs relative to the
genlock signal or the internal reference signal. Select this menu item and press the
ENTER button to access the AUDIO TIMING submenu. (See page 3-6, AG7
module AUDIO TIMING submenu.)

AG7 module Use this menu to set the frequency, amplitude, and audio click of the selected audio
CHANNEL PARAMETERS channel. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu
submenu items. The following figure shows the CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu.

Figure 3-2: AG7 module CHANNEL PARAMETERS submenu

3–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AG7 Audio Generator module

Frequency. Sets the audio signal frequency for the selected audio channel. Use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to make the selection. The choices are:
Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz
Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz
50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz
100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz
150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz
200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz
250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz
300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz

When Inactive is selected, audio data output is disabled. Press the ENTER
button to enable the selection.

Amplitude. Sets the audio signal amplitude for the selected audio channel. Use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the value. You can set the value from
-60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps.

Audio click. Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel. The audio tone, if
any, is turned off for an interval around the audio click. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to make the selection. The choices are OFF, 1 sec, 2 sec, 3 sec,
and 4 sec. Press the ENTER button to enable the selection.
Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for the Audio Click
rate. When Audio Click is valid, Audio Tone is turned off for 0.25 seconds around
the click. For example, if you select 3 sec for the click rate, the audio tone will be
output for 2.75 seconds, and silent for 0.25 seconds; the click occurs during this
silence. When Audio Click is OFF, the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY
menu is output continuously. Audio Click makes it easy to identify any of the
four output channels.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–5

AG7 Audio Generator module

AG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the audio signal outputs relative to the
AUDIO TIMING submenu internal reference signal (frame reset signal).

NOTE. The AUDIO TIMING delay can be adjusted only if a valid subframe pulse
is present and the AUDIO-VIDEO SYNC selection in the AG7 main menu is set
to Frame Reset 1 or Frame Reset 2.

The following figure shows the AUDIO TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-3: AG7 module AUDIO TIMING submenu

Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set the
value from -160 ms to +160 ms in 1 ms steps. A minus timing value is set as
Delay and plus is set as Advance.

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.

AG7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the AG7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-1: AG7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
CHANNEL 1 to CHANNEL 8
Frequency 1000 Hz
Amplitude -20.0 dBFS
Audio Click OFF
RESOLUTION 20 bits
AUDIO-VIDEO SYNC Free Run
AUDIO TIMING
Delay or Advance 0.0 msec

3–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AGL7 Analog Genlock module

AGL7 Analog Genlock module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the AGL7 Analog
Genlock module. Refer to the following locations for additional information
about this module:
AGL7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors.
(See page 2-8.)
AGL7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
is functional. (See page 1-17.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

AGL7 module product description

The AGL7 Analog Genlock module provides genlock function for the mainframe
and installed modules. It is equipped with two reference inputs, the loopthrough
inputs and the terminated CW input. The AGL7 module can genlock the following
signals:
NTSC black burst signal: burst lock or sync lock
PAL black burst signal: burst lock and sync lock
HDTV trilevel sync signal
CW: 1, 3.58 (NTSC sub-carrier), 4.43 (PAL sub-carrier), 5, and 10 MHz
Alarm output capability (The AGL7 hardware must be at Version 3.x or above
to support outputting an alarm signal.)

NOTE. The AGL7 module alarm output is available only when the GPI ALARM
OUTPUT menu item is set to Enable. (See page 2-50, How to use the mainframe
General Purpose Interface (GPI).)
PAL-M and PAL-N are not supported by the AGL7, ATG7, and BG7 modules.

There are three rear-panel output connectors that can output black burst signals
and HDTV trilevel sync signals.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–7

AGL7 Analog Genlock module

How to operate the AGL7 module

After the AGL7 module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is
installed in the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following
procedure to access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
there are no error messages on the display.
3. After the initialization process, the mainframe main menu appears as shown
below.

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the AGL7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

5. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus. (See page 3-9, AGL7 module main menu.)

AGL7 module upgrades If the TG8000 you are upgrading has an AGL7 module installed, and if the
firmware version in the TG8000 is 1.2 or earlier, the FPGA of the AGL7 module
will be automatically updated when the instrument reboots after the firmware
upgrade. This will also occur if the AGL7 module is moved from a TG700
mainframe to a TG8000 mainframe.

CAUTION. To prevent an upgrade failure of your AGL7 module, do not remove or

cycle power on the TG8000 while the instrument is rebooting after the firmware
upgrade. The FPGA update on the AGL7 module takes about three minutes and
there is no indication on the front panel that the AGL7 module is being updated. If
power is interrupted before the FPGA update is complete, the module will need to
be returned to Tektronix for service.

3–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AGL7 Analog Genlock module

AGL7 module main menu

Use the AGL7 module main menu to select the genlock source and the output
whose parameters are to be changed.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the AGL7 module main menu.

Figure 3-4: AGL7 module main menu

STATUS. Displays the genlock source and status. The following status messages
may appear: Locked, Loss of Lock, and No signal.

GENLOCK. Selects the genlock source and sets the timing offset of the genlock
signal relative to the internal reference signal. When you select this menu item
and press the ENTER button, you will access the GENLOCK submenu. (See
page 3-10.)

SELECT OUTPUT. Selects the output for you to change the signal format, output
signal, and timing offset relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset
signal). Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, BLACK
2, or BLACK 3. When you select any of these and press the ENTER button, you
will access the OUTPUT submenu to set the parameters of the selected output.
(See page 3-12.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–9

AGL7 Analog Genlock module

AGL7 module Use this menu to select the genlock source for the mainframe and the installed
GENLOCK submenu modules, set the timing offset, and set the instrument actions when lock is lost.
Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the GENLOCK submenu.

Figure 3-5: AGL7 module GENLOCK submenu

SOURCE. Selects the signal source to genlock the mainframe and the installed
modules. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the genlock source,
and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. Select from the
following genlock sources:
Internal: Uses the internal reference signal.
NTSC Burst: Burst locks to an NTSC black burst signal applied to the
REF connector.
NTSC Burst with 10 Field ID: Burst locks to an NTSC black burst with 10
Field ID signal applied to the REF connector.
PAL Burst: Burst locks to a PAL black burst signal applied to the REF
connector.
525 SYNC: Sync locks to an NTSC black burst signal applied to the REF
connector.

3–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AGL7 Analog Genlock module

625 SYNC: Sync locks to a PAL black burst signal applied to the REF
connector.
HD SYNC: Locks to an HDTV trilevel signal applied to the REF connector.
CW: Locks to the 1, 3.58, 4.43, 5, or 10 MHz continuous wave signal applied
to the CW connector.

TIMING. Adjusts the timing offset of the input signal relative to the internal
reference signal (frame reset signal). When you select this menu item and press
the ENTER button, you will access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-14.)

LOCK LOSS ACTION. Sets the way the AGL7 module reacts when a loss of
genlock state occurs (for example, genlock source is absent or incompatible). Use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the action, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection. Select from the following actions:
Go Internal Frequency: Switches automatically to the internal reference
and blinks the EXT.REF indicator.
Stay Current Frequency: Maintains the current state.

FRAME RESET (CW). Selects the frame reset signal frequency to be used when a
CW signal is applied to the CW connector. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select the frequency, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. Select from the following frequencies:
6.250 Hz : PAL and 50 Hz Group: Uses the Frame Reset 2 signal with a
frequency of 6.250 Hz.
2.997 Hz : NTSC, 59.94, 23.98 Group: Uses the Frame Reset 1 signal with a
frequency of 2.997 Hz.
3.000 Hz : 60 and 24 Hz Group: Uses the Frame Reset 3 signal with a
frequency of 3.000 Hz.
Keep Composite Timing: Keeps the synchronization shock small by using
the previous NTSC or PAL timing whenever possible, even if you change the
genlock source to CW while the instrument is genlocked to a NTSC or PAL
black burst signal. The frame frequency is the same as the NTSC or PAL
frequency that was previously used. Use a 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 3.58 MHz (for
NTSC), or 4.43 MHz (for PAL) signal as a CW signal source.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–11

AGL7 Analog Genlock module

AGL7 module Use this submenu to set the signal format and the timing offset for the output
OUTPUT submenu selected in the SELECT OUTPUT menu item. Use the up (▲) or down (▼)
arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the OUTPUT
submenu.

Figure 3-6: AGL7 module OUTPUT submenu

SELECT FORMAT. Selects the format for the signal output from the BLACK 1,
BLACK 2, or BLACK 3 connector. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button
to select the format. The available choices described below depend on which
output connector you select.

NOTE. When you change signal format, synchronization shock occurs.

When BLACK 1 is selected, the formats listed below are available. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection and to access the SIGNAL submenu
where you will select a black burst signal. (See page 3-13.)
NTSC
NTSC No Setup
PAL
When BLACK 2 is selected, the formats listed below are available. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection and to access the SIGNAL submenu
where you will select a black burst signal. (See page 3-13.)
NTSC
NTSC No Setup
PAL
HD SYNC (Same as BLACK 3)

3–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AGL7 Analog Genlock module

When BLACK 3 is selected, the formats listed below are available. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection and to enable the selected trilevel
sync signal or the black burst signal when Black Burst (Same as BLACK2) is
selected.
1080 60i
1080 59.94i
1080 50i
1080 24sF
1080 23.98sF
1080 30p
1080 29.97p
1080 25p
1080 24p
1080 23.98p
720 60p
720 59.94p
720 50p
Black Burst (Same as BLACK 2)

TIMING. Adjusts the timing offset for the output signals relative to the internal
reference signal (frame reset signal). When you select this menu item and press
the ENTER button, you will access the TIMING submenu where you will select
the timing offset. (See page 3-14.)
You cannot set the timing offset under the following conditions:
When HD SYNC (Same as BLACK 3) is selected as a format for the
BLACK 2 output.
When Black Burst (Same as BLACK 2) is selected as a format for the
BLACK 3 output.

AGL7 module Use this menu to select the black burst signal for the NTSC, NTSC No Setup, and
SIGNAL submenu PAL formats. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the black burst
signal, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. The following
figure shows the SIGNAL submenu.

Figure 3-7: AGL7 module SIGNAL submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–13

AGL7 Analog Genlock module

The available choices described below depend on which format you select:
When the NTSC or NTSC No Setup format is selected, the signals listed
below are available:
Black Burst
Black Burst with Field REF
When the PAL format is selected, the signals listed below are available:
Black Burst
Black Burst with No Field REF

AGL7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the input and output signals relative to
TIMING submenu the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Use the up (▲) or down (▼)
arrow button to scroll through the menu.

The TIMING submenu uses the same menu structure for both input and output
signals, except for the menu items displayed in the first line. The following
figure shows the TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-8: AGL7 module TIMING submenu

Vertical. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the vertical offset.
The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format. (See
Table 3-2.) (See Table 3-3.)

Horizontal coarse. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the coarse
horizontal offset. The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected
signal format. (See Table 3-2.) (See Table 3-3.)

3–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AGL7 Analog Genlock module

Horizontal fine. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the fine
horizontal offset. The range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected
signal format. (See Table 3-2.) (See Table 3-3.)

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.

Table 3-2: Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 input signals

Format name Line settings Coarse settings (μs) Fine settings (ns)
NTSC ± 525 ± 63.5556 ± 10.00
PAL ± 1250 ± 64.0000 ± 10.00
1080 60i ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 10.00
1080 59.94i ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 10.00
1080 50i ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 10.00
1080 24sF ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 10.00
1080 23.98sF ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 10.00
1080 30p ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 10.00
1080 29.97p ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 10.00
1080 25p ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 10.00
1080 24p ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 10.00
1080 23.98p ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 10.00
720 60p ± 375 ± 22.2222 ± 10.00
720 59.94p ± 375 ± 22.2444 ± 10.00
720 50p ± 375 ± 26.6667 ± 10.00

Table 3-3: Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals

Format name Line settings Coarse settings (μs) Fine settings (ns)
NTSC ± 525 ± 63.5556 ± 10.00
PAL ± 1250 ± 64.0000 ± 10.00
1080 60i ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 7.00
1080 59.94i ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 7.00
1080 50i ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 7.00
1080 24sF ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 7.00
1080 23.98sF ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 7.00
1080 30p ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 7.00
1080 29.97p ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 7.00
1080 25p ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 7.00
1080 24p ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 7.00
1080 23.98p ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 7.00

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–15

AGL7 Analog Genlock module

Table 3-3: Timing adjustment ranges for AGL7 output signals (cont.)
Format name Line settings Coarse settings (μs) Fine settings (ns)
720 60p ± 375 ± 22.2222 ± 7.00
720 59.94p ± 375 ± 22.4444 ± 7.00
720 50p ± 375 ± 26.6667 ± 7.00

AGL7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings of the AGL7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-4: AGL7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
GENLOCK : SOURCE Internal
GENLOCK : TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal Coarse 0.0000 ms
Horizontal Fine 0.00 nsec
GENLOCK : LOCK LOSS ACTION Go Internal Frequency
GENLOCK : FRAME RESET (CW) 14.985 Hz : NTSC and 59.94 Hz Group
OUTPUT : BLACK 1
FORMAT NTSC
SIGNAL Black Burst
OUTPUT : BLACK 2
FORMAT NTSC
SIGNAL Black Burst
OUTPUT : BLACK 3
FORMAT 1080 59.94i
SIGNAL Trilevel Sync
BLACK x : TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal Coarse 0.0000 ms
Horizontal Fine 0.00 nsec

3–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the ATG7 Analog Test
Generator module. Refer to the following locations for additional information
about this module:
ATG7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors. (See
page 2-10.)
ATG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
is functional. (See page 1-19.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

ATG7 module product description

The ATG7 Analog Test Generator module is an analog test signal generator that
provides NTSC/PAL analog composite signals. The ATG7 module provides the
following features:
SIGNAL output connector, which outputs test signals selected from the
front-panel test signal buttons. You can overlay ID text on this video signal
output.
BARS output connector, which outputs NTSC (with or without setup) and
PAL color bars signals, black burst signals, and other video test signals. You
can overlay ID text on this video signal output.
BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 output connectors, which output NTSC (with or
without setup) and PAL black burst signals, composite sync and composite
blanking signals, NTSC (with or without setup) and PAL subcarrier signals,
H/V drive signals, and other video signals.
Individual format and timing control for each output.
Full remote control using Ethernet interface.

NOTE. PAL-M and PAL-N are not supported by the AGL7, ATG7 and
BG7 modules.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–17

ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

How to operate the ATG7 module

After the ATG7 module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is
installed in the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following
procedure to access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
there are no error messages on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below.

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the ATG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

5. Select the signal format and the test signal that you want to output from the
SIGNAL connector. (See page 3-19, To select an output signal on the ATG7
module.)
6. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus to select the signal format and test signal you want to
output from the BLACK 1, BLACK 2, and BARS connectors, and to set
the other output parameters.
Refer to ATG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main menu
and the submenu items. (See page 3-21.)

3–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

To select an output signal on the ATG7 module

The SIGNAL connector on the ATG7 module provides the capability to output
test signals assigned to the front-panel test signal buttons. To output a signal
from the connector, you need to select a signal format and an output signal as
described below.

To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format:
1. If the ATG7 module menu is not displayed, press the front-panel MODULE
button until the ATG7 module main menu appears as shown below.

2. Press the FORMAT button. The menu display changes as follows:

3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the FORMAT button
repeatedly, to select one of the signal formats, and then press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. When you change the signal format, synchronization shock occurs.

To select the test signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the
corresponding test signal buttons. When the ATG7 module is selected and you
press any of the front-panel test signal buttons, the selected signal in the signal set
is output on the SIGNAL connector. (See Figure 3-9.)

For example, when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button, a signal in the
Color Bars signal set is output. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or
press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal
from the Color Bars signal set.

Figure 3-9: Front-panel test signal buttons

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–19

ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

The following table lists the ATG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal
buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set. The list of
available signals changes depending on the selected signal format.
Table 3-5: ATG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
NTSC and NTSC No Setup formats
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, SMPTE Color
Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step, 10 Step, Modulated 5 Step, Modulated
Pedestal, Modulated Ramp, Ramp, Shallow Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field (NTSC format only), 10% Flat Field,
40% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field,
Field Square Wave, Black Burst, Black Burst with
Field Ref
MULTIBURST Multiburst 100% Multiburst, 60% Multiburst, Multipulse
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep, 60% Sweep, Chroma Frequency
Response
MONITOR Monitor 100% Red Field, 75% Red Field, 2 Level Pedestal
& Pluge, 4 Level Pedestal & Pluge, Convergence
Pattern, Grey Window, White Window, Safe Area,
Monitor Setup
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar Window 2T Pulse & Bar, Sin X/X
OTHER Other FCC Composite, FCC Multiburst, NTC7
Combination, NTC7 Composite, Matrix 1, SNG
Color Bars
PAL format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, 100% Color
Bars Over Red, 75% Color Bars Over Red
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step, 10 Step, Modulated 5 Step, Modulated
10 Step, Modulated Pedestal, Modulated Ramp,
Ramp, Shallow Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 40% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field,
Field Square Wave, Black Burst, Black Burst with
No Field Ref, Field Square Wave
MULTIBURST Multiburst 100% Multiburst, 60% Multiburst, Multipulse
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep, 60% Sweep
MONITOR Monitor 100% Red Field, 75% Red Field, 2 Level Pedestal
& Pluge, 4 Level Pedestal & Pluge, Convergence
Pattern, Grey Window, White Window, Safe Area,
Monitor Setup Matrix
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T Pulse & Bar, Sin X/X
OTHER Other CCIR 17, CCIR 18, CCIR 330, CCIR 331, UK ITS 1,
UK ITS 2, UK 1 Line ITS, ITS Matrix 1

3–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

ATG7 module main menu

Use the ATG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Set the text overlay on the SIGNAL output
Set the timing offset on the SIGNAL output
Set the APL settings on the SIGNAL output
Set the output parameters for the BLACK 1, BLACK 2, and BARS outputs
using the SELECT OUTPUT submenu. (See page 3-23.)

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the ATG7 module main menu.

Figure 3-10: ATG7 module main menu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–21

ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

STATUS. Displays the current video standard and the selected signal for the
SIGNAL output.

SELECT OUTPUT. Selects the output whose parameters will be set. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to make the selection. The choices are BLACK 1,
BLACK 2, or BARS. Select any of the items, and then press the ENTER button
to access the SELECT OUTPUT submenu. (See page 3-122.)

ID TEXT. Sets a text that is overlaid on the test signal output from the SIGNAL
connector. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the
ID TEXT submenu. (See page 3-25.)

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the SIGNAL output relative to the internal
reference signal (frame reset signal). Select this menu item, and then press the
ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-26.)

APL. Sets the APL and Bounce features available for the test signal output from
the SIGNAL connector. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button
to access the APL submenu. (See page 3-27.)

3–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

ATG7 module Use this menu to set the video format, signal, and timing offset for the BLACK 1,
SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 2, or BARS output. You can also use this menu to set the ID text
submenu overlay for the BARS output. The following figure shows the SELECT OUTPUT
submenu.

Figure 3-11: ATG7 module SELECT OUTPUT submenu

SELECT FORMAT. Selects the video format for the selected output. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL.

NOTE. When you change the video format, synchronization shock will occur;
the video format changes immediately at the output as you change the format
selection.

Select the format you want, then press the front-panel ENTER button to access
the SELECT SIGNAL submenu, where you select the output signal to use. (See
page 3-24.)

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the selected output relative to the internal
reference signal (frame reset signal). Select this menu item and press the ENTER
button, to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-26.)

ID TEXT. Sets a text that is overlaid on the test signal output from the BARS
connector. Select this menu item and press the ENTER button to access the
ID TEXT submenu. (See page 3-25.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–23

ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

ATG7 module Use this menu to select an output signal for the BLACK 1, BLACK 2, or BARS
SELECT SIGNAL submenu connector. The following figure shows the SELECT SIGNAL submenu.

Figure 3-12: ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu

Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to scroll through the selections. Press
the ENTER button to enable the selected signal.

Which signals are available depend on the selected output connector and the video
format. The following table lists the available signals for each output connector
and video format.
Table 3-6: Test signals in the ATG7 module SELECT SIGNAL submenu
Format Test signals
BLACK1 and BLACK 2 connectors
NTSC and NTSC No Setup Black Burst, Black Burst with Field REF,
Composite Sync, Composite Blanking,
Subcarrier, H Drive, V Drive, Field Reference
PAL Black Burst, Black Burst No Field REF, Composite
Sync, Composite Blanking, Subcarrier, H Drive,
V Drive, Field Reference, PAL Pulse
BARS connector
NTSC and NTSC No Setup Black Burst, Black Burst with Field REF, 100%
Color Bar, 75% Color Bar, SMPTE Color Bar,
40% Flat Field, Other 1 (SNG Color Bars), Other
2 (Monitor Setup Matrix)
PAL Black Burst, Black Burst No Field REF, 100%
Color Bar, 75% Color Bar, 100% Color Bar Over
Red, 75% Color Bar Over Red, 40% Flat Field,
Other 1 (4 Level Pedestal & Pluge), Other 2
(Monitor Setup Matrix)

3–24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

ATG7 module Use this menu to edit text that is overlaid on the signal for the SIGNAL and
ID TEXT submenu BARS outputs, and to set the display position of the text. Use the up (▲) or
down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The following table shows
the ID TEXT submenu.

Figure 3-13: ATG7 module ID TEXT submenu

Status. Sets the blinking mode of the text overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select one of the following blink modes, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Enable: Turns on the blinking function of the overlay.
Blink Fast: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0.5 second intervals.
Blink Slow: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1.0 second intervals.
Disable: Turns off the blinking function of the overlay.

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the text. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–25

ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the text. The position is set as a percentage
of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

EDIT. Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. Perform the
following steps to edit the text:

NOTE. You can use up to 18 characters for the text. Use the blank character to
erase unneeded character(s).

1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select EDIT, and then press the
ENTER button to enable the text edit mode.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
(_) to the character you want to change.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the desired character.
4. After you enter all of the desired characters, press the ENTER button to exit
the text editing mode.
5. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select SAVE, and then press the
ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file being output.

SAVE. Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output.
Press the ENTER button to save them to the signal file.

ATG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the selected output relative to the
TIMING submenu internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
button to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the TIMING
submenu.

Figure 3-14: ATG7 module TIMING submenu

3–26 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

Vertical. Sets the vertical timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from -1/2 color frame to
+1/2 color frame in 1 line steps.

Horizontal. Sets the horizontal timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to adjust the timing offset. You can set the value from -1 line to +1 line
in one clock steps (18.5 ns).

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.
The ATG7 horizontal timing can only be adjusted in clock cycle increments. You
can match the AGL7 or GPS7 module timing to the ATG7 module by adjusting the
fine timing controls on the AGL7 or GPS7 module.

ATG7 module Use this menu to set the APL and Bounce features for the test signal output from
APL submenu the SIGNAL connector. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll
through the menu. The following figure shows the APL submenu.

Figure 3-15: ATG7 module APL submenu

MODE. Sets the output mode of the APL signal. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select the mode, and then press the ENTER button to confirm
the selection. The choices are:
APL OFF: Outputs the selected signal without making any changes.
High APL: Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines (for
NTSC) or 4 lines (for PAL) and changes the lines except the last line to the
100% flat field signal, and then outputs them.
Low APL: Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines (for
NTSC) or 4 lines (for PAL) and changes the lines except the last line to the
0% flat field signal, and then outputs them.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–27

ATG7 Analog Test Generator module

APL (Bounce): Outputs the High APL signal and Low APL signal alternately
for the period set in the PERIOD menu item.
Bounce: Outputs the 100% flat field signal and 0% flat field signal alternately
(regardless of the selected signal) for the period set in the PERIOD menu item.

PERIOD. Sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in
APL (Bounce) or Bounce mode. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the interval. You can set the value from 0.5 seconds to 2.0 seconds in
0.5 second steps.

ATG7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the ATG7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-7: ATG7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
STATUS (Shows the signal format and NTSC SMPTE Color Bars
signal name output from the SIGNAL
connector)
OUTPUT : BLACK 1 and BLACK 2
FORMAT NTSC
SIGNAL Black Burst
OUTPUT : BARS
FORMAT NTSC
SIGNAL SMPTE Color Bar
ID TEXT
Status Disable
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 msec
APL
Mode APL OFF
Period 1.0 sec

3–28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the AVG7 Analog Video
Generator module. Refer to the following locations for additional information
about this module:
AVG7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors. (See
page 2-10.)
AVG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
is functional. (See page 1-21.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

AVG7 module product description

The AVG7 Analog Video Generator module is an analog video signal generator
which provides analog composite and component video signals in various formats.
The module contains the following features:
Supports the following system formats: NTSC, NTSC no setup, PAL,
525 GBR, 525 YPbPr, 525 Beta, 625 GBR, and 625YPbPr.
Six analog composite or component video outputs.
Outputs a frame picture created by the Frame Picture Generator application.
Overlay of circle, text, or logo on the video signal.
Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output
test signal.
Full remote control using Ethernet interface.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–29

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

How to operate the AVG7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
no error messages appear on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below.

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the AVG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

5. Select the signal format and the signal you want to output. (See page 3-31,
To select an output signal on the AVG7 module.)
6. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus.
Refer to AVG7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu
items and the submenu items. (See page 3-36.)

3–30 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

To select an output signal on the AVG7 module

To output a signal from the AVG7 module, you need to select a signal format
and output signal as described below.

To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format:
1. If the AVG7 module menu is not displayed, press the front-panel MODULE
button until the AVG7 module main menu appears as shown below.

2. Press the FORMAT button. The menu display changes as follows:

3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the FORMAT button
repeatedly, to select one of the signal formats, and then press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. When you change signal format, synchronization shock occurs.

4. If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output, the
instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and
displays the following message "Now Loading...". When you see the
message, "Done (Press BACK)", press the BACK button.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–31

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

To select the test signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the
corresponding test signal buttons. When the AVG7 module is selected and you
press any of the front-panel test signal buttons, the selected signal in the signal set
is output. (See Figure 3-16.)

For example, when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button, a signal in the
Color Bars signal set is output. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or
press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal
from the Color Bars signal set.

Figure 3-16: Front-panel test signal buttons

You can download a frame picture file (created by the Frame Picture Generator)
to the mainframe and output the picture from the AVG7 module. Refer to the
TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create,
download, and output a frame picture.

The following table lists the AVG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal
buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set. The list of
available signals changes depending on the selected signal format.
Table 3-8: AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
NTSC and NTSC No Setup formats
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, SMPTE Color
Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step, 5 Step, Modulated 5 Step, Modulated
Pedestal, Modulated Ramp, Shallow Ramp, Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst, Black Burst with Field ref, 0% Flat Field
(NTSC only), 10% Flat Field, 40 % Flat Field, 50%
Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, Field Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multiburst 100% Multiburst, 60% Multiburst, Multipulse
SWEEP Sweep 60% Sweep, 100% Sweep, Chroma Frequency
Response
MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern, Gray Window, 100% Red
Field, 2 Level Pedestal & Pluge, 4 Level Pedestal
& Pluge, 75% Red Field, Monitor Setup, White
Window, Safe Area
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar Window 2T Pulse & Bar, Sin X/X

3–32 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

Table 3-8: AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
TIMING —– —–
SDI —– —–
OTHER Other FCC Composite, FCC Multiburst, Matrix 1, NTSC
Combination, NTC7 Composite, SNG Color Bars
PAL-1 format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, 100% Color Bars
Over Red, 75% Color Bars Over Red
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step, Modulated 5 Step, Modulated Ramp, Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst, 50% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, Field
Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multiburst 60% Multiburst, Multiplus
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep
MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern, Grey Window, White Window,
2 Level Pedestal & Pluge, 4 Level Pedestal & Pluge,
75% Red Field
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar Window 2T Pulse & Bar, Sin X/X
TIMING —– —–
SDI —– —–
OTHER Other CCIR 17, CCIR 18, CCIR 330, CCIR 331, UK ITS
1, UK ITS 2
PAL-2 format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step, 5 Step, Modulated 10 Step, Modulated
5 Step, Modulated Ramp, Shallow Ramp, Ramp,
Modulated Pedestal
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Burst, 50% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, Field
Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multi Burst 100% Multiburst, 60% Multiburst
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep, 60% Sweep
MONITOR Monitor Convergence, Monitor Setup Matrix, 100% Red
Field, 75% Red Field, White Window, Safe Area
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T Pulse & Bar, Sin X/X
TIMING —– —–
SDI —– —–
OTHER Other ITS Matrix 1, UK 1 Line ITS
525 Beta format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step, Modulated Ramp, Ramp, Oversize Ramp,
Shallow Ramp Matrix, Valid Ramp, Valid 5 Step

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–33

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

Table 3-8: AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black, 0% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, 50% Flat
Field, Field Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60% Multiburst
SWEEP Sweep 60% Sweep
MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern, Grey Window, White Window,
2 Level Ped. & Pluge, 4 Level Ped. & Pluge, 75%
Red Field, Chroma Noise
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T Pulse & Bar, TPulses
TIMING Timing 50% Bowtie, 100% Bowtie
SDI —– —–
OTHER Other Test Matrix
525 GBR format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step, Shallow Ramp, Oversize Ramp, Shallow
Ramp Matrix, Luminance Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field, Field
Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60% Multiburst
SWEEP Sweep 100% Line Sweep 5.5 MHz, 100% Line Sweep
8 MHz
MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern, Grey Window, 2 Level Ped.
& Pluge, White Window, 4 Level Ped. & Pluge
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T Pulse & Bar
TIMING Timing Bowtie
SDI —– —–
OTHER —– —–
525 YPbPr format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step, Ramp, Oversize Ramp, Shallow Ramp
Matrix, Valid Ramp, Valid 5 Step, Modulated Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black, 0% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, 50% Flat
Field, Field Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60% Multiburst
SWEEP Sweep 60% Sweep
MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern, Grey Window, White Window,
2 Level Ped. & Pluge, 4 Level Ped. & Pluge, 75%
Red Field, Chroma Noise
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T Pulse & Bar, T Pulses
TIMING Timing 50% Bowtie, 100% Bowtie

3–34 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

Table 3-8: AVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
SDI —– —–
OTHER Other Test Matrix
625 YPbPr format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, 100% Color Bars
Over Red, 75% Color Bars Over Red
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step, Modulated Ramp, Ramp, Oversize Ramp,
Shallow Ramp Matrix, Valid 5 Step, Valid Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field, Field
Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60% Multiburst
SWEEP Sweep 60% Sweep
MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern, Grey Window, White Window,
2 Level Ped. & Pluge, 4 Level Ped. & Pluge, 100%
Red, 75% Red
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T Pulse & Bar, T Pulses
TIMING Timing 50% Bowtie, 100% Bowtie
SDI —– —–
OTHER Other Test Matrix
625 GBR format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars
LINEARITY Linearity Oversize Ramp, Luminance Ramp, Shallow Ramp,
Shallow Ramp Matrix, 5 Step
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, Field
Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60% Multiburst
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep
MONITOR Monitor Convergence Pattern, Grey Window, 2 Level Ped.
& Pluge, White Window, 4 Level Ped. & Pluge
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar Window 2T Pulse & Bar
TIMING Timing Bowtie
SDI —– —–
OTHER —– —–

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–35

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

AVG7 module main menu

Use the AVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Set the logo, text, or circle overlay on the output signal.
Set the timing offset on the output signal.
Set the APL settings on the output signal.
Scroll the active picture area of the output signal.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the AVG7 module main menu.

Figure 3-17: AVG7 module main menu

3–36 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

MOVING PICTURE. Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. Select
this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING
PICTURE submenu. (See page 3-37.)

OVERLAY. Selects an item (logo, text, or circle) to overlay on the output test
signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay. Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu. (See page 3-38.)

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal
reference signal (frame reset signal). Select this menu item, and then press the
ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-43.)

VIDEO. Sets the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being
output and enables or disables the signal output from CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3.
Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO
submenu. (See page 3-44.)

APL. Sets the APL and Bounce features available for the signal output. When
you select this menu item and then press the ENTER button, you will access
the APL submenu. (See page 3-46.)

AVG7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the output signal up/down,
MOVING PICTURE left/right, or randomly. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll
submenu through the menu. The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu.

Figure 3-18: AVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–37

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

H step. Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period
menu item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You
can set the value from -60 to +60 in 4-sample steps.

V step. Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu
item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set
the value from -15 to +15 in 1-line steps.

Period. Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set the value from
1 to 16 in 1-frame steps.

Random. Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select between Disable and Enable. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

AVG7 module Use this menu to select an item (logo, ID Text, or circle) to overlay on the output
OVERLAY submenu test signal, and to set the blinking mode for the overlay. Use the up (▲) or
down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows
the OVERLAY submenu.

Figure 3-19: AVG7 module OVERLAY submenu

OBJECT. Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following overlays, and then press the
ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay.
Logo: Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the
output signal in a specified position. (See page 3-39.)
ID Text: Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay
the output signal in a specified position. (See page 3-40.)
Circle: Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and
position to overlay the output signal. (See page 3-42.)

3–38 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

BLINK. Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following blink modes, and then press
the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
OFF: Turns off the blinking function of the overlay.
Fast: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0.5 second intervals.
Slow: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1.0 second intervals.

AVG7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the
LOGO submenu display position of the logo. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll
through the menu. The following figure shows the LOGO submenu.

NOTE. To display a logo using the LOGO submenu, you need to create a logo file
(.lgo) and download it to the LOGO folder of the module. Refer to the TG8000
PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo
file and download it to the TG8000.

Figure 3-20: AVG7 module LOGO submenu

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–39

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps.

Logo. Selects the logo you want to display. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select OFF or a logo file name. Press the ENTER button confirm the
selection. When you select OFF, the logo overlay is disabled.

SAVE. Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file. Press the ENTER
button to save the current settings.

AVG7 module Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set
ID TEXT submenu the display position of the text. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu.

Figure 3-21: AVG7 module ID TEXT submenu

Status. Enables or disables the text overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between Enable and Disable, and then press the ENTER button
to confirm the selection.

3–40 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the text. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the text. The position is set as a percentage
of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

EDIT. Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. Perform the
following steps to edit the text:

NOTE. You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text. Use the blank character
to erase unneeded character(s).

1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select EDIT, and then press the
ENTER button to enable the text edit mode.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
( _ ) to the character you want to change.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the desired character.
4. After you enter all of the desired characters, press the ENTER button to exit
the text editing mode.
5. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select SAVE, and then press the
ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file.

SAVE. Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output.
Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–41

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

AVG7 module Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and to set its position on
CIRCLE submenu the display. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu.
The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu.

Figure 3-22: AVG7 module CIRCLE submenu

Status. Enables or disables the circle overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Enable and Disable. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps.

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps.

Diameter. Sets the diameter of the circle. The diameter is set as a percentage of
active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
value. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

3–42 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

AVG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the output signal relative to the internal
TIMING submenu reference signal (frame reset signal). Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
scroll through the menu items. The following figure shows the TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-23: AVG7 module TIMING submenu

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.

Vertical. Sets the vertical timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from -1 to +1 frame of
the selected signal format in 1 line steps.

Horizontal coarse. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the coarse
horizontal offset. You can set the value from -1 to +1 line of the selected signal
format in 1 clock (18.5 ns) steps.

Horizontal fine. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the fine
horizontal offset. You can set the value from -10 ns to +10 ns in 0.1 ns steps.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–43

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

AVG7 module Use this menu to perform the following tasks:

VIDEO submenu Set the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output.
Enable or disable the signal output of each channel.
Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signals when a
GBR signal is being output.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the VIDEO submenu.

Figure 3-24: AVG7 module VIDEO submenu

3–44 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

CONFIGURATION. Sets the configuration of the output channels. Use the left (◄)
or right (►) arrow button to select between CH1:Y CH2:C CH3:Composite
and CH1/2/3 Composites. When you select CH1:Y CH2:C CH3:Composite,
a Y signal, C signal, and composite signal are output from the CH 1, CH 2,
and CH 3 connectors respectively. When you select CH1/2/3:Composites, a
composite signal is output from each output connector. Press the ENTER button
to confirm the selection. This menu item appears only when a composite signal is
being output.

GBR SYNC. Sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the B signal
and R signal when a GBR signal is being output. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Sync ON Green and Sync ON All Channels.
When you select Sync ON All Channels, a sync signal is multiplexed with the
G, B, and R signals. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. This menu
item appears only when a GBR signal is being output.

G/Y. Turns the CH 1 signal output on or off for a component signal, or turns the
Y signal on or off for a composite signal. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently
selected signal (YPbPr component, GBR component, or composite) and the
output channel configuration.

B/Pb/B-Y. Turns the CH 2 signal output on or off for a component signal, or turns
the B-Y signal on or off for a composite signal. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm
the selection. The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the
currently selected signal (YPbPr component, GBR component, or composite)
and the output channel configuration.

R/Pr/R-Y. Turns the CH 3 signal output on or off for a component signal, or turns
the R-Y signal on or off for a composite signal. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm
the selection. The signal name displayed depends on the video format of the
currently selected signal (YPbPr component, GBR component, or composite)
and the output channel configuration.

SCH PHASE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the SCH phase
for a composite signal. You can set the value from -180 degrees to +180 degrees
in 1 degree steps. This setting is not saved as a preset.

NOTE. If you try to set the SCH phase over +180 degrees, the value jumps to
-179 degrees. Also, if you try to set the SCH phase under -180 degrees, the value
jumps to +179 degrees.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–45

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

AVG7 module Use this menu to set the APL and Bounce parameters for the test signal outputs.
APL submenu Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the APL submenu.

Figure 3-25: AVG7 module APL submenu

MODE. Sets the output mode of the APL signal. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select the mode, and then press the ENTER button to confirm
the selection. The choices are:
APL OFF: Outputs the selected signal without making any changes.
High APL: Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines (for
NTSC) or 4 lines (for PAL) and changes the lines except the last line to the
100% flat field signal, and then outputs them.
Low APL: Divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines (for
NTSC) or 4 lines (for PAL) and changes the lines except the last line to the
0% flat field signal, and then outputs them.
APL (Bounce): Outputs the High APL signal and Low APL signal alternately
for the period set in the PERIOD menu item.
Bounce: Outputs the 100% flat field signal and 0% flat field signal alternately
(regardless of the selected signal) for the period set in the PERIOD menu item.

PERIOD. Sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in
APL (Bounce) or Bounce mode. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the interval. You can set the value from 0.5 seconds to 2.0 seconds in
0.5 second steps.

3–46 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AVG7 Analog Video Generator module

AVG7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the AVG7 Generator
module. These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the
PRESET : RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-9: AVG7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
STATUS NTSC SMPTE Color Bars
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable
OVERLAY : OBJECT Logo
OVERLAY : BLINK OFF
OVERLAY : LOGO
Logo OFF
OVERLAY : ID TEXT
Status Disable
OVERLAY : CIRCLE
Status Disable
X Position 0.0% APH
Y Position 0.0% APH
Diameter 90% APH
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal Coarse 0.0000 ms
Horizontal Fine 0.00 ns
VIDEO
CONFIGURATION CH1/2/3 Composites
GBR SYNC Sync ON All Channels
G/Y ON
B/Pb/B-Y ON
R/Pr/R-Y ON
SCH PHASE 0 deg
APL
MODE APL OFF
PERIOD 1.0 s

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–47

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the AWVG7 Analog
Wideband Video Generator module. Refer to the following locations for
additional information about this module:
AWVG7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors.
(See page 2-11.)
AWVG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the
module is functional. (See page 1-23.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

AWVG7 module product description

The AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module is a 30 MHz bandwidth
video signal generator, which provides wideband analog component video signals
for HDTV systems. The module provides the following features:
Supports the following system formats: 1080/60i, 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
1080/24sF, 1080/23.98sF, 1080/30p, 1080/29.97p, 1080/25p, 1080/24p,
1080/23.98p, 720/60p, 720/59.94p, 720/50p, 720/24p, and 720/23.98p.

NOTE. Signals for the following system formats are preinstalled in the mainframe:
1080/60i, 1080/59.94i, 1080/24sF, 1080/23.98sF, 720/60p, and 720/59.94p.
Signals for additional system formats are included on the TG8000 SW Library
and Documentation DVD that is supplied as a standard accessory. Refer to
the TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to
download signal files from the DVD to the TG8000.

Six analog component video outputs.

Outputs a frame picture created by the Frame Picture Generator application.
Overlay of circle, text, or logo on the video signal.
Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output
test signal.
Full remote control using Ethernet interface.

3–48 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

How to operate the AWVG7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into to the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
no error messages appear on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below.

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the AWVG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

5. Select the signal format and the signal you want to output. (See page 3-50, To
select an output signal on the AWVG7 module.)
6. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus.
Refer to AWVG7 module main menu for detailed information about the main
menu items and the submenu items. (See page 3-52.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–49

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

To select an output signal on the AWVG7 module

To output a signal from the AWVG7 module, you need to select a signal format
and output signal as described below.

To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format:
1. If the AWVG7 module menu is not displayed, press the front-panel MODULE
button until the AWVG7 module main menu appears as shown below.

2. Press the FORMAT button. The menu display changes as follows:

3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the FORMAT button
repeatedly, to select one of the signal formats, and then press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. When you change the signal format, synchronization shock occurs.

4. If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output, the
instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and
displays the message "Now Loading...". When you see the message, "Done
(Press BACK)", press the BACK button.

3–50 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

To select the test signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the
corresponding test signal buttons. When the AWVG7 module is selected and you
press any of the front-panel test signal buttons, the selected signal in the signal set
is output. (See Figure 3-26.)

For example, when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button, a signal in
the Color Bars signal set is output. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or
press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal
from the Color Bars signal set.

Figure 3-26: Front-panel test signal buttons

You can download a frame picture file (created by the Frame Picture Generator)
to the mainframe and output the picture from the AWVG7 module. Refer to the
TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create,
download, and output a frame picture.

The following table lists the AWVG7 signal sets that are assigned to the test signal
buttons and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set.
Table 3-10: AWVG7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step, 5 Step, Ramp, Shallow Ramp,
Valid Ramp 1
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, 50%
Flat Field
MULTI BURST Multi Burst Multiburst 1-10 MHz, Multiburst
10-20 MHz, Multiburst 20-30 MHz
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep 1-15 MHz, 100% Sweep
1-30 MHz
MONITOR Monitor 75% Blue Field, Convergence, 75%
Green Field, 75% Red Field
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T30 Pulse & Bar
TIMING Timing Bowtie 1 ns Marker
SDI —– —–
OTHER —– —–
1 The Valid Ramp signal is available in YPbPr format only.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–51

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

AWVG7 module main menu

Use the AWVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Set the logo, text, or circle overlay on the output signal.
Set the timing offset on the output signal.
Scroll the active picture area of the output signal.
Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signals when a
GBR signal is being output.
Enable or disable the output signal on the CH1, CH2, and CH3 connectors.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the AWVG7 module main menu.

Figure 3-27: AWVG7 module main menu

MOVING PICTURE. Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. Select
this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING
PICTURE submenu. (See page 3-53.)

3–52 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

OVERLAY. Selects an item (logo, text, or circle) to overlay on the output test
signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay. Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu. (See page 3-54.)

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal
reference signal (frame reset signal). Select this menu item, and then press the
ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-59.)

VIDEO. Sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signal
when a GBR signal is being output and enables or disables the signal output from
CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button
to access the VIDEO submenu. (See page 3-61.)

AWVG7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the output signal up/down,
MOVING PICTURE left/right, or randomly. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll the
submenu menu. The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu.

Figure 3-28: AWVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu

H step. Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period
menu item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You
can set the value from -60 to +60 in 4-sample steps.

V step. Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu
item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set
the value from -15 to +15 in 1-line steps.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–53

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

Period. Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set the value
from 1 to 16 in 1-frame steps.

Random. Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select between Disable and Enable. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

AWVG7 module Use this menu to select an item (logo, ID Text, or circle) to overlay on the output
OVERLAY submenu test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay. Use the up (▲) or
down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows
the OVERLAY submenu.

Figure 3-29: AWVG7 module OVERLAY submenu

OBJECT. Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following overlays, and then press the
ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay.
Logo: Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the
output signal in a specified position. (See page 3-55.)
ID Text: Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay
the output signal in a specified position. (See page 3-56.)
Circle: Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and
position to overlay the output signal. (See page 3-58.)

BLINK. Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following blink modes, and then press
the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
OFF: Turns off the blinking function of the overlay.
Fast: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0.5 second intervals.
Slow: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1.0 second intervals.

3–54 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

AWVG7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the
LOGO submenu display position of the logo. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll
through the menu. The following figure shows the LOGO submenu.

NOTE. To display a logo using the LOGO submenu, you need to create a logo file
(.lgo) and download it to the LOGO folder of the module. Refer to the TG8000
PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo
file and download it to the TG8000.

Figure 3-30: AWVG7 module LOGO submenu

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps.

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps.

Logo. Selects the logo you want to display. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select OFF or a logo file name. Press the ENTER button confirm the
selection. When you select OFF, the logo overlay is disabled.

SAVE. Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file. Press the ENTER
button to save the current settings.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–55

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

AWVG7 module Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set
ID TEXT submenu the display position of the text. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu.

Figure 3-31: AWVG7 module ID TEXT submenu

Status. Enables or disables the text overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between Enable and Disable, and then press the ENTER button
to confirm the selection.

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the text. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the text. The position is set as a percentage
of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

3–56 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

EDIT. Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. Perform the
following steps to edit the text:

NOTE. You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text. Use the blank character
to erase unneeded character(s).

1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select EDIT, and then press the
ENTER button to enable the text edit mode.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
(_) to the character you want to change.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the desired character.
4. After you enter all of the desired characters, press the ENTER button to exit
the text editing mode.
5. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select SAVE, and then press the
ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file.

SAVE. Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output.
Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–57

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

AWVG7 module Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set its position on
CIRCLE submenu the display. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu.
The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu.

Figure 3-32: AWVG7 module CIRCLE submenu

Status. Enables or disables the circle overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Enable and Disable. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps.

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps.

Diameter. Sets the diameter of the circle. The diameter is set as a percentage of
active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
value. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

3–58 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

AWVG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the output signal relative to the internal
TIMING submenu reference signal (frame reset signal). Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
change the menu items. The following figure shows the TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-33: AWVG7 module TIMING submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–59

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.
The adjustment range of the timing offset settings depends on the selected signal
format. (See Table 3-11 on page 3-60.)

Vertical. Sets the vertical timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from -1 to +1 frame of
the selected signal format in 1 line steps.

Horizontal coarse. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the coarse
horizontal offset. You can set the value from -1 to +1 line of the selected signal
format in 1 clock (18.5 ns) steps.

Horizontal fine. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the fine
horizontal offset. You can set the value from -10 ns to +10 ns in 0.1 ns steps.
Table 3-11: Timing adjustment ranges for AWVG7 module output signals
Signal format Line settings Coarse settings (μs) Fine settings (ns)
1080 60i YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 10.00
1080 59i YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 10.00
1080 50i YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 10.00
1080 24sF YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 10.00
1080 23sF YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 10.00
1080 30p YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 10.00
1080 29p YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 10.00
1080 25p YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 10.00
1080 24p YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 10.00
1080 23p YPbPr/GBR ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 10.00
720 60p YPbPr/GBR ± 375 ± 22.2222 ± 10.00
720 59p YPbPr/GBR ± 375 ± 22.4444 ± 10.00
720 50p YPbPr/GBR ± 375 ± 26.6667 ± 10.00
720 30p YPbPr/GBR ± 375 ± 53.3333 ± 10.00
720 29p YPbPr/GBR ± 375 ± 45.9770 ± 10.00
720 25p YPbPr/GBR ± 375 ± 44.4444 ± 10.00
720 24p YPbPr/GBR ± 375 ± 55.5556 ± 10.00
720 23p YPbPr/GBR ± 375 ± 55.6111 ± 10.00

3–60 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

AWVG7 module Use this menu to perform the following tasks:

VIDEO submenu Enable or disable the signal output from the CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3 connectors.
Set whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B and R signals when a
GBR signal is being output.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the VIDEO submenu.

Figure 3-34: AWVG7 module VIDEO submenu

GBR SYNC. Sets whether a sync signal is multiplexed with the B signal and R
signal when a GBR signal is being output. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between Sync ON Green and Sync ON All Channels. When
you select Sync ON All Channels, a sync signal is multiplexed with the G, B, and
R signals. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. This menu item
appears only when a GBR signal is being output.

CH 1. Turns the CH 1 signal output on or off. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. The signal name that is displayed before the ON/OFF status depends on
the format of the currently selected signal (YPbPr component or GBR component).

CH 2. Turns the CH 2 signal output on or off. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. The signal name that is displayed before the ON/OFF status depends on
the format of the currently selected signal (YPbPr component or GBR component).

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–61

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module

CH 3. Turns the CH 3 signal output on or off. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. The signal name that is displayed before the ON/OFF status depends on
the format of the currently selected signal (YPbPr component or GBR component).

AWVG7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the AWVG7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-12: AWVG7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
STATUS 1080 59i YPbPr 100% Color Bars
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable
OVERLAY : OBJECT Logo
OVERLAY : BLINK OFF
OVERLAY : LOGO
Logo OFF
OVERLAY : ID TEXT
Status Disable
OVERLAY : CIRCLE
Status Disable
X Position 0.0% APH
Y Position 0.0% APH
Diameter 90.0% APH
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal Coarse 0.000 ms
Horizontal Fine 0.00 ns
VIDEO
GBR SYNC Sync ON All Channels
Y ON
Pb ON
Pr ON

3–62 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 BG7 Black Generator module

BG7 Black Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the BG7 Black Generator
module. Refer to the following locations for additional information about this
module:
BG7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors. (See
page 2-11.)
BG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
is functional. (See page 1-24.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

BG7 module product description

The BG7 Black Generator module is a multiformat black generator with the
following features:
Four outputs for NTSC (with or without setup) or PAL black burst and HDTV
trilevel sync signals.
Individual format and timing control for each output.
Black burst with field ID and NTSC/PAL color bars signals output
(Option CB).
Full remote control using Ethernet interface.
Timecode generator with VITC when a GPS7 module is installed (the
BG7 module hardware must be version 1.2 or above).

NOTE. PAL-M and PAL-N are not supported by the AGL7, ATG7 and
BG7 modules.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–63

BG7 Black Generator module

How to operate the BG7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
there are no error messages on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below.

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the BG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

5. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus.
Refer to BG7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu
items and submenu items. (See page 3-65.)

3–64 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 BG7 Black Generator module

BG7 module main menu

Use the BG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Select an output to format.
Set the HD trilevel sync rate for all of the BLACK outputs.
Set the format of the selected output.
Select the test signal for the BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs
(Option CB only).
Set the timing offset for the selected output.
Set timecode parameters for the selected output when a GPS7 module is
installed. The BG7 module hardware must be version 1.2 or above and the
mainframe must have software version 5.1 or above installed.

The following figure shows the BG7 module main menu.

Figure 3-35: BG7 module main menu

SELECT OUTPUT. Selects which BLACK output to configure for signal format,
timing, and timecode parameters or selects the HD trilevel sync rate for the four
BLACK outputs.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the output you want to
configure (BLACK 1, BLACK 2, BLACK 3, BLACK 4, or HD TRI-LEVEL
SYNC RATE), and then press the ENTER button to access the BLACK
submenu (See page 3-122.) or the HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu (See
page 3-69.).

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–65

BG7 Black Generator module

BG7 module Use this menu to set the signal format, timing, and timecode parameters for the
BLACK submenu selected output. The following figure shows the BLACK submenu.

Figure 3-36: BG7 module BLACK submenu

3–66 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 BG7 Black Generator module

FORMAT. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the signal
formats in the following table. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. When you change the signal format, synchronization shock will occur.

Table 3-13: BG7 module output signal formats

Non-integer HD trilevel sync rate 1 Integer HD trilevel sync rate 1
NTSC NTSC
NTSC-J NTSC-J
PAL PAL
1080 59.94i 1080 60i
1080 23.98sf 1080 50i
1080 29.97p 1080 24sf
1080 23.98p 1080 30p
720 59.94p 1080 25p
1080 24p
720 60p
720 50p
1 The signal formats available in this submenu depend on the HD trilevel sync rate setting (non-integer or integer),
which is set using the Select Output selection in the BG7 module main menu. (See page 3-65, BG7 module
main menu.)

FIELD REFERENCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to Enable or
Disable the field reference in the output signal. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.

NOTE. The Field Reference menu item is available only when a non-HD format is
set as the signal format of the selected BLACK output. With Option CB, this menu
item appears only for the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 outputs.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–67

BG7 Black Generator module

TEST SIGNAL. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the desired
test signal. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. The available
signals depend on the selected format (NTSC/NTSC-J or PAL).

NOTE. The Test Signal menu item appears only with Option CB, only for the
BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs, and only when a non-HD format is set as the
signal format of the selected BLACK output.

Table 3-14: BG7 module Option CB test signals (BLACK 3 and BLACK 4 outputs only)
NTSC or NTSC-J format PAL format
Black Burst Black Burst No Field Reference
Black Burst with Field REF Black Burst
Black Burst with 10 Field ID 100% Color Bars
100% Color Bars 75% Color Bars (100% White)
75% Color Bars (100% White) 100% Color Bar Over Red
SMPTE EG1 Color Bar 75% Color Bar Over Red
40% Flat Field 40% Flat Field
Convergence Convergence
Pluge and Luma Reference Pluge and Luma Reference
Shallow Ramp CCIR 17
NTC7 Combination CCIR 18
NTC7 Composite

TIMING. Press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu, which allows
you to set the timing offset for the selected black signal output. (See page 3-69,
BG7 module TIMING submenu.)

TIMECODE. Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu, which
allows you to set timecode parameters for the selected BLACK output. (See
page 3-71, BG7 module TIMECODE submenu (GPS7 module only).)

NOTE. The TIMECODE menu item is available only when a GPS7 module is
installed, and only when a non-HD format is set as the signal format of the
selected BLACK output.
The BG7 module hardware must be version 1.2 or above.

3–68 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 BG7 Black Generator module

BG7 module Use this submenu to select whether an integer or non-integer clock will be used
HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC for the HD tri-level sync rate for the BLACK outputs. Use the left (◄) or right
RATE submenu (►) arrow button to select Integer (60, 50, 30, 25, 24) or Non-Integer (59.94,
29.97, 23.98). Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. The clock rate selected here affects which signal formats are available
for the BLACK outputs.

The following figure shows the HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC-RATE submenu.

Figure 3-37: BG7 module HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu

BG7 module Use this submenu to adjust the timing offset of the selected BLACK output
TIMING submenu relative to the genlock signal or the internal reference signal. Use the up (▲) or
down (▼) arrow button to select between Vertical and Horizontal offset. The
following figure shows the TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-38: BG7 module TIMING submenu

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.
The horizontal timing can only be adjusted in clock cycle increments. You can
match the timing of the AGL7 module to the BG7 module by adjusting the fine
timing controls on the AGL7 module.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–69

BG7 Black Generator module

Vertical: Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the vertical
timing. For NTSC and PAL, you can adjust the timing by ± ½ a color frame.
For HDTV trilevel sync signals, you can adjust the timing by ± ½ a field or
frame (progressive or interlaced signals, respectively). (See Table 3-15.)
Horizontal: Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the
horizontal offset. You can set the value from -1 line to +1 line in one clock
steps (18.5 ns for NTSC or PAL, 13.5 ns for HDTV).

Table 3-15: Timing adjustment ranges for BG7 output signals

Format name Vertical line settings Horizontal time settings (μs)
NTSC/NTSC-J ± 525 ± 63.5556
PAL ± 1250 ± 64.0000
1080 60i ± 562 ± 29.6296
1080 59.94i ± 562 ± 29.6593
1080 50i ± 562 ± 35.5556
1080 24sF ± 562 ± 37.0370
1080 23.98sF ± 562 ± 37.0741
1080 30p ± 562 ± 29.6296
1080 29.97p ± 562 ± 29.6593
1080 25p ± 562 ± 35.5556
1080 24p ± 562 ± 37.0370
1080 23.98p ± 562 ± 37.0741
720 60p ± 375 ± 22.2222
720 59.94p ± 375 ± 22.2444
720 50p ± 375 ± 26.6667

3–70 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 BG7 Black Generator module

BG7 module Use this submenu to set timecode parameters for the selected output. This menu is
TIMECODE submenu present only if GPS7 module is installed.
(GPS7 module only)
NOTE. To display the TIMECODE submenu, the BG7 module hardware must be
version 1.2 or above and the mainframe must have software version 5.1 or above
installed.
This submenu is available only when NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL is the
selected signal format. This submenu is not available when the selected signal
format is HD SYNC.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The
following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu.

Figure 3-39: BG7 module TIMECODE submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–71

BG7 Black Generator module

SOURCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the timecode
source from the following choices. The default value is Disable.
Disable: Disables the timecode function for the BG7 module.
Local (DST): Uses the local time of day as determined from the
GPS/GLONASS antenna with Daylight Saving Time offset as the timecode.
Local (No DST): Uses the local time of day as determined from the
GPS/GLONASS antenna without Daylight Saving Time offset as the
timecode.
UTC: Uses Coordinated Universal Time as determined from the
GPS/GLONASS antenna as the timecode.
Program Time: Uses the program time counter as the timecode.

OFFSET. Use this menu item to set a time offset for the BG7 module outputs
from the timecode input from the GPS7 module. You can enter a time offset of
up to ±23:59:59:29 (maximum frame value depends on the frame rate of the
video signal) of the GPS/GLONASS timecode (hours : minutes : seconds : video
frames). Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select a digit in the offset value to change. An underline character
appears under the selected offset digit.
After you select an offset digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
change the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required for you offset.
Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change.

NOTE. The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to
±23:59 hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones
in the range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use
ST309 data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined
programmed offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12
to +13 hours.

30 DROP. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to enable or disable the 30
Drop mode. Use this mode to correct for frame-rate error in NTSC-rate signals or
to allow the timecode to run continuously and drift away from the correct time.

VITC. Allows inserting the same VITC signal on 1 or 2 lines of the vertical
interval. Select VITC 1 for one line and VITC 2 for the second line. Select the
VITC signal you want to configure, and then press the ENTER button to enter the
VITC submenu for the selected signal. (See page 3-73.)

3–72 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 BG7 Black Generator module

BG7 module Use this menu to enable or disable the output of the VITC signal and to select the
VITC submenu video line on which the VITC signal will be inserted. Use the up (▲) or down
(GPS7 module only) (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the
VITC submenu.

Figure 3-40: BG7 module VITC submenu

OUTPUT. Use this menu item to enable or disable insertion of a VITC on the
selected line. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select ENABLE or
DISABLE. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Line number. Use this menu item to select the video line on which the VITC
signal will be inserted. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the
video line number. The line number range varies by format: you can select from
line 10 to line 20 for NTSC, and from line 6 through line 22 for PAL. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–73

BG7 Black Generator module

BG7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the BG7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-16: BG7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
OUTPUT : BLACK 1 to BLACK 4
Format NTSC
SIGNAL Black Burst
OUTPUT : HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC Non-integer
RATE
FIELD REFERENCE 1 Disable
TEST SIGNAL 1 Black Burst
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 msec
TIMECODE 2
SOURCE Disable
30 DROP Enable Drop Frame
VITC 2
OUTPUT Disable
VITC 1 Line 14
VITC 2 Line 16
1 The TEST SIGNAL menu item replaces the FIELD REFERENCE menu item on the BLACK 3 and BLACK 4
outputs when the BG7 module has Option CB installed.
2 The TIMECODE and VITC menu items are present only when a GPS7 module is also installed in the mainframe.

3–74 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the DVG7 Digital Video
Generator module. Refer to the following locations for additional information
about this module:
DVG7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors. (See
page 2-12.)
DVG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
is functional. (See page 1-25.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

DVG7 module product description

The DVG7 Digital Video Generator module is a digital video generator that
provides NTSC composite digital signals and 525/625 component digital signals.
The module provides the following features:
Two serial digital video outputs.
Two serial digital black outputs (Option BK only).
Overlay of circle, text, or logo on the video signal.
Moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output signal.
Up to 16 channels of 24- or 20-bit embedded digital audio with a sample
rate of 48 kHz.
Full remote control using Ethernet interface.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–75

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

How to operate the DVG7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
no error messages appear on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below.

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the DVG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

5. Select the signal format and the test signal you want to output. (See page 3-77,
To select an output signal on the DVG7 module.)
6. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus.
Refer to DVG7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu
items and the submenu items. (See page 3-79.)

3–76 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

To select an output signal on the DVG7 module

To output a signal from the DVG7 module, you need to select a signal format
and output signal as described below.

To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format:
1. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the DVG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

2. Press the FORMAT button. The menu display changes as follows:

3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the FORMAT button
repeatedly, to select one of the signal formats, and then press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. When you change signal format, synchronization shock occurs.

4. If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output, the
instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and
displays the message "Now Loading...". When you see the message, "Done
(Press BACK)", press the BACK button.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–77

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

To select the test signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the
corresponding test signal buttons. When the DVG7 module is selected and you
press any of the front-panel test signal buttons, the selected signal in the signal set
is output. (See Figure 3-41.) For example, when you press the COLOR BAR test
signal button, a signal in the Color Bars signal set is output.

Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the COLOR BAR test signal
button repeatedly to select a different signal from the Color Bars signal set.

Figure 3-41: Front-panel test signal buttons

You can download a frame picture file (created by the Frame Picture Generator)
to the mainframe and output the picture from the DVG7 module. Refer to the
TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create,
download, and output a frame picture.

The following table lists the signal sets that are assigned to each test signal button
and shows the test signals that are available in each signal set. The list of available
signals changes depending on the selected signal format.
Table 3-17: DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
525-270 format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars, SMPTE Color
Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step, 3 Channel Ramp, 5 Step, B-Y Valid Ramp,
Limit Ramp, Modulated Ramp, Oversize Ramp,
R-Y Valid Ramp, Shallow Ramp, Shallow Ramp
Matrix, Valid Ramp, Y Valid Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field,
Field Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60% Multiburst, Multipulse
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep, 60% Sweep, SinX/X
MONITOR Monitor 2 Level Ped. & Pluge, 4 Level Ped. & Pluge,
Convergence Pattern, Gamut Test, Grey Window,
White Window
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T Pulse and Bar, T Pulses
TIMING Timing 2.5 MHz Bowtie, 500 kHz Bowtie, Active Picture
Timing, Co-Siting Pulse

3–78 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

Table 3-17: DVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test, PLL Test, SDI Matrix
OTHER Other Chroma Freq. Resp., Color Palette, FCC
Composite, FCC Multiburst, NTC7 Combination,
NTC7 Composite
625-270 format
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Colour Bars, 75% Colour Bars, 100% Colour
Bars Over Red, 75% Colour Bars Over Red
LINEARITY Linearity 10 Step, 3 Channel Ramp, 5 Step, B-Y Valid Ramp,
Limit Ramp, Modulated Ramp, Oversize Ramp,
R-Y Valid Ramp, Shallow Ramp, Shallow Ramp
Matrix, Y Valid Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field, Field
Square Wave
MULTI BURST Multi Burst 60% Multiburst
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep, 60% Sweep, SinX/X
MONITOR Monitor 100% Red Field, 2 Level Ped. & Pluge, 4 Level Ped.
& Pluge, 75% Red Field, Convergence Pattern,
Gamut Test, Grey Window, White Window
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T 4T 10T Pulse & Bar, 2T 4T 20T Pulse & Bar
TIMING Timing 2.5 MHz Bowtie, 500 kHz Bowtie, Active Picture
Timing, Co-Siting Pulse
SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test, PLL Test, SDI Matrix
OTHER Other CCIR 17, CCIR 18, CCIR 330, CCIR 331,
CCIR 331 G2

DVG7 module main menu

Use the DVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Set the logo, text, or circle overlay on the output signal.
Set the timing offset on the output signals.
Scroll the active picture area of the output signal.
Enable or disable the output and set parameters for each embedded audio
group.
Enable or disable the video output signal.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–79

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the DVG7 module main menu.

Figure 3-42: DVG7 module main menu

3–80 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

MOVING PICTURE. Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. Select
this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING
PICTURE submenu. (See page 3-82.)

OVERLAY. Selects an item (logo, text, or circle) to overlay on the output test
signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay. Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu. (See page 3-83.)

AUDIO (EMBEDDED). Sets the parameters for the embedded audio on the output
test signals. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1,
Group 2, Group 3, or Group 4. Select any of the items, and then press the
ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu. (See page 3-241.)

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the
internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-91.)

VIDEO. Enables or disables the Y, Pb, or Pr component of the output serial digital
video signals, the EDH (Error Detection Handling) insertion, and the output
mode for an audio/video timing measurement. You can also set the resolution of
the output serial digital video signals. Select this menu item, and then press the
ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu. (See page 3-92.)
BLACK (OPTION). This menu selection is available only with Option BK, and
sets the parameters of the serial digital black signals output from the BLACK 1
and BLACK 2 connectors. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER
button to access the BLACK submenu. (See page 3-94.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–81

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal
MOVING PICTURE up/down, left/right, or randomly. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
submenu scroll the menu. The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE submenu.

Figure 3-43: DVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu

H step. Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period
menu item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You
can set the value from -252 to +252 in 4-sample steps.

V step. Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu
item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set
the value from -252 to +252 in 1-line steps.

Period. Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set the value from 1
to 16 in 1-frame steps.

Random. Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select between Disable and Enable. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

3–82 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to select an item (logo, ID Text, or circle) to overlay on the output
OVERLAY submenu test signal and to set the blinking mode for the overlay. Use the up (▲) or
down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows
the OVERLAY submenu.

Figure 3-44: DVG7 module OVERLAY submenu

OBJECT. Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following overlays, and then press the
ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay.
Logo: Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the
output signal in a specified position. (See page 3-84.)
ID Text: Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay
the output signal in a specified position. (See page 3-85.)
Circle: Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and
position to overlay the output signal. (See page 3-87.)

BLINK. Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following blink modes, and then press
the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
OFF: Turns off the blinking function of the overlay.
Fast: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0.5 second intervals.
Slow: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1.0 second intervals.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–83

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the
LOGO submenu display position of the logo. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll
through the menu. The following figure shows the LOGO submenu.

NOTE. To display a logo using the LOGO submenu, you need to create a logo file
(.lgo) and download it to the LOGO folder of the module. Refer to the TG8000
PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo
file and download it to the TG8000.

Figure 3-45: DVG7 module LOGO submenu

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps.

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps.

Logo. Selects the logo you want to display. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select OFF or a logo file name. Press the ENTER button confirm the
selection. When you select OFF, the logo overlay is disabled.

SAVE. Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file. Press the ENTER
button to save the current settings.

3–84 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to edit the text that is overlaid on the output test signal and to set
ID TEXT submenu the display position of the text. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu.

Figure 3-46: DVG7 module ID TEXT submenu

Status. Enables or disables the text overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between Enable and Disable, and then press the ENTER button
to confirm the selection.

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the text. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the text. The position is set as a percentage
of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–85

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

EDIT. Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. Perform the
following steps to edit the text:

NOTE. You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text. Use the blank character
to erase unneeded character(s).

1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select EDIT, and then press the
ENTER button to enable the text edit mode.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
(_) to the character you want to change.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the desired character.
4. After you enter all of the desired characters, press the ENTER button to exit
the text editing mode.
5. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select SAVE, and then press the
ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file.

SAVE. Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output.
Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file.

3–86 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set its position on
CIRCLE submenu the display. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu.
The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu.

Figure 3-47: DVG7 module CIRCLE submenu

Status. Enables or disables the circle overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Enable and Disable. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.

X position. Sets the horizontal position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps.

Y position. Sets the vertical position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps.

Diameter. Sets the diameter of the circle. The diameter is set as a percentage of
active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
value. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–87

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to perform the following tasks:

AUDIO GROUP submenu Enable or disable the embedded audio of the selected audio group.
Select which audio channel to enable.
Set the emphasis status bits, sampling alignment status bits, and sample bits
of the selected audio group.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the AUDIO GROUP submenu.

Figure 3-48: DVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu

Status. Enables or disables the generation of embedded audio for the selected
audio group. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between Enable
and Disable. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Channel. Selects the audio channel for which you will change the parameters.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1, 2, 3, or 4. Select any audio
channel, and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO CHANNEL
submenu. (See page 3-89.)

3–88 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

Emphasis. Sets the emphasis status bits for the selected audio group. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NO EMPHASIS, CD, or CCITT. Press
the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Sampling. Sets the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Frame, Frame without
Frame Number, or Asynchronous. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection.

Resolution. Sets the resolution of the audio signal data for the selected audio
group. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between 24 bits and
20 bits. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

DVG7 module Use this menu to set the frequency, amplitude, and audio click of the embedded
AUDIO CHANNEL audio signal for the selected audio channel. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
submenu button to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the AUDIO
CHANNEL submenu.

Figure 3-49: DVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–89

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

Frequency. Sets the audio signal frequency of the selected audio channel. Use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the frequency. The selection
items are as follows:
Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz
Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz
50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz
100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz
150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz
200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz
250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz
300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz

When Inactive is selected, the audio data output is disabled. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

Amplitude. Sets the audio signal amplitude of the selected audio channel. Use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the amplitude. You can set the value
from -60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps.

Audio click. Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel. The audio tone, if
any, is turned off for an interval around the audio click. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to make the selection. The choices are OFF, 1 sec, 2 sec, 3 sec,
and 4 sec. Press the ENTER button to enable the selection.
Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for the Audio Click
rate. When Audio Click is valid, Audio Tone is turned off for 0.25 second around
the click. For example, if you select 3 sec for the click rate, the audio tone will
be output for 2.75 seconds, and silent for 0.25 second; the click occurs during
this silence.
When Audio Click is OFF, the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY menu
is output continuously. Audio Click makes it easy to identify any channel(s) of the
four output channels.

3–90 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative
TIMING submenu to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Use the up (▲) or down
(▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the
TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-50: DVG7 module TIMING submenu

Vertical. Sets the vertical timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value within 1/2 frame for
525-270 and 625-270 formats.

Horizontal. Sets the horizontal timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from -1 to +1 line in
1-clock (37.0 ns for 525-270 and 625-270 formats) steps.

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–91

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to perform the following tasks:

VIDEO submenu Turn each serial digital video component (Y, Pb, or Pr) on or off individually.
Turn the insertion of the EDH (Error Detection and Handling) on or off.
Set the resolution of the serial digital video signals to 8 or 10 bits.
Turn the output mode for an audio/video timing measurement on or off.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the VIDEO submenu.

Figure 3-51: DVG7 module VIDEO submenu

3–92 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

Y. Turns the Y component of the serial digital video signals on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Pb. Turns the Pb component of the serial digital video signals on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Pr. Turns the Pr component of the serial digital video signals on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Resolution. Sets the resolution of the serial digital video signals. Use the left (◄)
or right (►) arrow button to select between 10 bits and 8 bits. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

EDH. Turns the insertion of the EDH (Error Detection and Handling) information
on or off on the serial digital video signals. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection.

AV timing mode. Turns the output mode for an audio/video timing measurement
on or off. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and
OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
When you turn this mode on, the specified audio and video signals are
synchronously on for 0.5 second and off for 4.5 seconds. With this signal, you can
measure the time delay that accumulates between the audio and video content of
the television signal during signal transport. The time delay can be measured by a
video analyzer with the serial digital video signal or by an oscilloscope with the
analog audio and video signals extracted from the serial digital video signal.
The following settings are recommended for the audio and video signals when
you use this mode:
Audio signal (CH1 and CH2 of Group 1): 10000 Hz, -20 dBFS
Video signal: 100% Flat Field

NOTE. The AV Timing Mode setting is not saved as a preset.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–93

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

DVG7 module Use this menu to set the output parameters of the serial digital black signals output
BLACK submenu from the BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 connectors.
(Option BK Only)
Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The
following figure shows the BLACK submenu.

Figure 3-52: DVG7 module BLACK submenu (Option BK only)

FORMAT. Selects the format of the output serial digital black signals. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 525-270 or 625-270. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

SIGNAL. Selects the serial digital black signal to output. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to select between Black (serial digital black), 40% Flat Field,
50% Flat Field, and 100% Flat Field. Press the ENTER button to confirm
the selection.

AUDIO (EMBEDDED). Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital
black signals. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1,
Group 2, Group 3, or Group 4. Select any of the groups, and then press the
ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu. (See page 3-88.)

3–94 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the serial digital black outputs relative to the
internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-91.)

VIDEO. Sets the resolution and EDH insertion of the serial digital black signals.
Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO
submenu. (See page 3-92.)

DVG7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the DVG7 Generator
module. These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the
PRESET : RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-18: DVG7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
STATUS 525-270 SMPTE Color Bars
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable
OVERLAY : OBJECT Logo
OVERLAY : BLINK OFF
OVERLAY : LOGO
Logo OFF
OVERLAY : ID TEXT
Status Disable
OVERLAY : CIRCLE
Status Disable
X Position 0.0% APH
Y Position 0.0% APH
Diameter 90% APH
AUDIO : GRP-1 to GRP-4
Status Disable
Emphasis No Emphasis
Sampling Frame
Resolution 20 bits

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–95

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module

Table 3-18: DVG7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Menu item name Settings
AUDIO : GRP-1 : Ch-1 to CH-4
Frequency 1000 Hz
Amplitude -20.0 dBFS
Audio Click OFF
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 μs
VIDEO
Y ON
Pb ON
Pr ON
Resolution 10 bits
EDH ON
AV Timing Mode OFF
Option BK
(BLACK) FORMAT 525-270
(BLACK) SIGNAL Black
(BLACK) AUDIO : GRP-1 to GRP-4
Status Disable
Emphasis No Emphasis
Sampling Frame
Resolution 20 bits
(BLACK) AUDIO : CH-1 to CH-4
Frequency 1000 Hz
Amplitude -20.0 dBFS
Audio Click OFF
(BLACK)TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 μs
(BLACK)VIDEO
Resolution 10 bits
EDH ON

3–96 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the GPS7 GPS
Synchronization and Timecode module. Refer to the following locations for
additional information about this module:
GPS7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors. (See
page 2-12.)
GPS7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
is functional. (See page 1-26.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–97

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module product description

The GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module provides the following
features:
Integrated GPS receiver that can serve as the system timing reference when
connected to a GPS and/or GLONASS signal (See page 3-102, GPS receiver
types.)
Three analog black video outputs for NTSC, PAL, or trilevel HD sync signals
REF IN input (shared with the BLACK 1 output connector) to apply analog
video, trilevel HD sync, or CW signals to use as a generator lock (Genlock)
reference. Earlier GPS7 modules do not have the Genlock features.

NOTE. The menus and menu discussions in this manual represent the newest
features and software available, including all Genlock features and the REF IN
input. Earlier instruments without the REF IN input have similar menu structures
but not identical menu content.

Timecode output available as VITC on the black outputs and from four
independent LTC outputs
LTC input (shared with LTC output connector) to use as an optional time
reference
Timecode reference to time-of-day from the GPS receiver, internal source,
VITC on the reference input, or to a program time counter for elapsed-time
timecode
Simple Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server functionality to respond to time
requests over the Ethernet interface
3.3 V or 5 V DC power output available for the GPS/GLONASS antenna
One General Purpose Interface (GPI) input that allows you to remotely reset
the program time, reacquire the GPS position, or to force a jam sync
Two General Purpose Interface (GPI) outputs that allow you to send an alarm
signal when the GPS/GLONASS signal quality falls below a user-selectable
level, when there is a loss of lock on the GPS/GLONASS signal or incoming
black signal with VITC, or at a user-selected time
Ability to schedule GPS/GLONASS clock changes for Daylight Saving Time
(DST) and for leap seconds
Ability to configure how the instrument responds when there is a loss of
lock to the GPS/GLONASS signal, and how the instrument responds when
the signal is recovered

3–98 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Ability to configure how the instrument responds when there is a loss of lock
from the black signal input
Ability to configure how the instrument synchronizes to an incoming VITC
signal when VITC is selected as the time-of-day reference

How to operate the GPS7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Watch the display for messages during the boot process. Messages are
displayed for a few seconds. If a serious error is detected during boot, the
module menus will not be displayed.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below:

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the GPS7 module main menu
appears. It will look similar to what is shown below:

5. Configure the GPS7 module as required for your installation. (See page 3-100,
To configure the GPS7 module.)
6. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus.
Refer to GPS7 module main menu for detailed information about the main menu
items and the submenu items. (See page 3-113.)

NOTE. Configure your GPS7 for your installation before putting it into service.
(See page 3-100, To configure the GPS7 module.) After you have configured the
module, save the configuration as the power-on preset so that if power is lost,
the GPS7 will power-on in the correct configuration. (See page 2-23, PRESET
submenu.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–99

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

To configure the GPS7 module

When you first receive your GPS7 module, there are a few things you need to do,
and a few things you should know, before putting it into service. This section
includes information about the following:
Performing an internal frequency calibration
Understanding the GPS/GLONASS antenna system
Understanding signal quality
Understanding time flow
Configuring module settings

GPS7 module oven If you are installing a GPS7 module into an existing TG8000 mainframe, it
calibration procedures is suggested that you calibrate the mainframe oscillator oven as part of the
installation and qualification process. If you have received your GPS7 module
already installed in a mainframe, you can set the internal frequency after putting
the module in its operating environment and allowing it to reach a stable operating
condition.
Information about the Oven Calibration menu is available in the GPS7 module
CAL OVEN submenu section. (See page 2-47.)

NOTE. Perform the mainframe internal frequency calibration at least once a year
to compensate for oscillator drift. With a GPS7 module installed, this calibration
can be done while the instrument is in service.
If your GPS7 module is installed in a TG700 mainframe, you need to also
characterize the oscillator frequency as a function of voltage. Refer to the TG700
User Manual for more information (Tektronix part number 071-1970-XX).

WARNING. Dangerous electric shock hazards exist inside the TG8000 mainframe.
Only qualified service personnel should perform these procedures. Failure to use
appropriate precautions can result in injury or death.

3–100 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

To calibrate the internal frequency. Perform the following procedure to set the
internal frequency of the mainframe internal oscillator. This adjustment stores the
current frequency of the oscillator while it is locked to a GPS and/or GLONASS
signal. It is stored for used when the instrument is set to Internal mode. This
procedure can be done without any disruption to operation and is best performed
in the operating environment of the instrument.
1. Connect the power cord to the TG8000 mainframe.
2. Check for error messages as the instrument starts.
3. Connect a GPS and/or GLONASS signal to the rear of the module.
4. Allow the instrument to warm up for a minimum of 20 minutes.
5. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 : STATUS appears.
6. Check that the signal status shows Locked.
7. Check that signal lock indicator displays Fine:
a. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Press the right (►) arrow button to select TUNE.
d. Check that Fine is showing on the right side of the LCD display.
8. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 appears.
9. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select UTILITY.
10. Press the ENTER button.
11. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select CAL OVEN : SELECT.
12. Press the ENTER button to access the Internal Frequency Calibration
submenu.
13. Press the ENTER button to start the calibration. The instrument will display
the stored calibration value.
14. Press the ENTER button.
15. Press the BACK button to exit the calibration menu when the calibration
is complete.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–101

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS receiver types Earlier versions of the GPS7 module included a receiver that could use only GPS
signals. Later versions of the module include a receiver that can use GPS or
GLONASS signals. If your module has the GPS/GLONASS receiver, use the
GPS SETUP submenu to configure the module for the type of signal you are
using. (See page 3-130, GPS7 module GPS SETUP submenu.)

How to determine which GPS receiver is installed in your GPS7 module.

1. Press the MODULE button to navigate to TG8000 : PRESET.
2. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : UTILITY.
3. Press the ENTER button to enter the UTILITY submenu.
4. If necessary, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 :
UTILITY: VERSION INFO (H/W).
5. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select GPS7.
6. The second line of the display includes a module ID field, which represents
the hardware version of the GPS receiver. The possible values are:
3002. This value indicates that the receiver supports GPS signals only.
This receiver was replaced by the 3015 receiver.
3015. This value indicates that the receiver supports GPS and GLONASS
signals. This receiver was replaced by the 3023 receiver. There are some
reported limitations with this receiver. See the TG8000 Release Notes
for more information.
3023. This value indicates that the receiver supports GPS and GLONASS
signals.

3–102 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS/GLONASS antenna The GPS7 module requires an external antenna to receive GPS and/or GLONASS
requirements signals from satellites. (See page 3-102, GPS receiver types.) You must set up an
antenna system to provide the GPS and/or GLONASS signal as an input to the
module. You can configure the instrument to provide 3.3 V or 5 V DC power for
the antenna.

WARNING. Prevent risk of shock or fire by ensuring that the GPS/GLONASS

antenna is protected from lightning strikes when it is mounted outside a building
or facility. The GPS7 module and TG8000 mainframe do not have isolation
protection from lightning, so the facility installation must provide suitable
protection for the GPS/GLONASS antenna external to the TG8000 mainframe.
Failure to use appropriate precautions can result in injury or death.

CAUTION. To avoid antenna damage, do not turn on the DC antenna power until
you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage. Antenna
damage can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select.
The frequencies for GPS and GLONASS signals are slightly different. Be sure to
choose an antenna that supports all of the satellite constellations you intend to use.

When a GPS/GLONASS feed is first connected to the antenna input on the

module, it can take several minutes for the signal quality to reach its nominal
potential. How long that takes depends on such things as antenna site, cable
plant design, and available satellites. Excluding those variables, the typical time
to acquire satellites and achieve specified stability with a good satellite signal,
known position, and a warmed up instrument, is two minutes.

GPS/GLONASS antenna Antenna systems vary depending on the operating environment and on safety and
system regulatory requirements. A simplified typical system is shown in the following
figure to help you with planning and understanding the trade-offs of one set up
versus another. (See Figure 3-53.)

Figure 3-53: Simplified GPS/GLONASS antenna system

A GPS/GLONASS specific antenna with amplifier provides sufficient gain to
drive a reasonable length of cable, and provides filtering to reject signals at other
frequencies. A typical example of a GPS antenna is the Trimble Bullet III, 35 dB,
5 V, antenna.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–103

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

In a simple system without the optional booster, Cable 1 connects the antenna
to the GPS7. The length of this cable is limited by its attenuation at the carrier
frequency (i.e. 1575 MHz for GPS). The GPS7 should have a signal that is 18 dB
or greater above the ambient level. For example, for a 35 dB antenna, the allowed
cable loss is 35 – 18 = 17 dB. (See Figure 3-53.)

Cables. Attenuation varies significantly depending on cable type. Cable loss is

about 13 dB/100 ft for a miniature coaxial cable like the Belden 1855, while for a
RG11 style like the Belden 7731, the loss is only 5.5 dB/100 ft. This correlates to
an allowable length of 130 ft for the small cable, to over 300 ft for the larger cable.
A booster amplifier can be added if more length is needed, as shown in the
optional block in the signal path system. (See Figure 3-53.)
If a 20 dB amplifier is added, then 20 dB more cable loss can be accommodated.
This equates to another 150 ft of small coax, or 360 ft of large coax.
Although the GPS7 input and most of the other components are 50 Ω, either
50 Ω or 75 Ω cables can be used in most installations. The reflections from the
impedance mismatch will not cause significant changes in the system because the
signal is narrow band and the cable loss is usually many dBs. However, you
should not mix short cable lengths of different impedances, as this might create
reflections with the potential to cause signal degradation.

Amplification. The GPS7 provides either 3.3 V or 5 V DC power to drive the

amplified antenna and booster amplifier. The power is carried on the same coax as
the GPS/GLONASS signal, and can be turned off if the antenna is powered by a
separate supply. When you are designing the antenna system, check the voltage
and current requirements of the components to insure compatibility.
The location of the booster amplifier is important. It needs to be before the
second length of cable shown in the simplified antenna system diagram. If the
booster amplifier is placed just before the GPS7, then the signal will have been
attenuated too far and the output may be noisy. If you cannot put the optional
booster amplifier in the middle of a long run of cable, then put it near the antenna
rather than near the GPS7 end.
For more complex systems, a variety of booster amplifiers, powered and passive
splitters, DC blocks, and filters are available from a number of vendors.

Antenna location. It is important that the GPS/GLONASS antenna location has

a clear view of a large part of the sky. Since GPS and GLONASS satellites are
constantly orbiting the earth, they may be in any direction at a given time. If part
of the sky is blocked by buildings, trees, mountains, etc., then fewer satellites will
be visible. It is also possible to get reflected signals that will have come by a
longer path than expected and thus may degrade timing accuracy and stability.
When evaluating a site, it is important to monitor it over several days and with a
variety of weather conditions present.

3–104 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

This antenna information is not intended to cover all aspects of the antenna system
design. Important topics that were not covered include items like lightening
protection and drip loops. For information about the cable plant design in your
system, contact the appropriate person or group in your organization, or contract
with a qualified installer.

Figures of Merit (FOM) These numbers are a compendium of the GPS/GLONASS signal quality and the
processes that occur as the instrument progresses through the states needed to lock
on to the GPS/GLONASS signal. The FOM provides a simple scale to evaluate
the state of the GPS/GLONASS lock.
The FOM drives the external reference indicator (LED) on the front panel of the
mainframe. When in internal mode, the external LED is off. When in external
mode and the FOM is ≥ 6, the LED is steady green. When the FOM is < 6, the
LED is flashing green.
The FOM provides the scale by which you can set the signal warning threshold.
(See page 3-151, GPS7 module GPO submenu.)

You can see the description of the FOM in the GPS7 STATUS menu. The
following table lists the figures of merit and their descriptions.
Table 3-19: Figures of merit for signal quality
Figure
of merit
(FOM) Indicator Description
0 No signal This means that no usable satellite signals are
detected. This is normal for a short time after
the signal is applied, but if it lasts more than a
minute or so, then it usually means one of the
following: that there is a problem in the antenna
or cable, the antenna is blocked from direct line
of sight to the satellites, or the power is not
getting to the antenna.
1 Low signal This means that some signal is detected, but
that the signal quality is too low for extraction
of useful timing or position information. This is
a normal situation for a short duration, but if it
persists, the causes are likely to be similar to
those for FOM state 0.
2 Acquire satellites This means that the instrument is receiving data
from the satellites and is determining which
signals to use.
3 Bad position This means that the instrument detects that
the stored position is different from the current
position. In this case, the instrument will
automatically go to FOM state 4 and reacquire
the position.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–105

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Table 3-19: Figures of merit for signal quality (cont.)

Figure
of merit
(FOM) Indicator Description
4 Acquire position This means that the instrument is acquiring
multiple fixes of the satellite position and
averaging this into a new position to store in
flash. This state will also be displayed if you
manually perform a new position acquisition.
This state normally lasts 60 seconds with good
GPS/GLONASS signal quality.
5 Adjust phase This means that the instrument is adjusting the
time base or frame timing to correctly line up
with the GPS/GLONASS signal.
6 Locked > These states indicate that the phase of
Signal quality is ≤ 16 the frame signals is within 150 ns of the
GPS/GLONASS signal. The number of arrows
7 Locked >> indicates the signal quality. It is normal for this
Signal quality is > 16 to vary with the time of day as the different
8 Locked >>> satellites move through their orbits, as well as
Signal quality is > 26 with changes in weather and other conditions.

9 Locked >>>>
Signal quality is > 42
10 Locked >>>>>
Signal quality is > 68
11 Locked >>>>>>
Signal quality is > 110

NOTE. The duration of some states depends on the strength of the received
GPS/GLONASS signal. If the antenna only has access to part of the sky, or if the
cable loss between the antenna and the receiver is too large, then it may take
significantly longer to progress up to the higher entries in the FOM table.

Time flow block diagram The following time flow diagram shows time information is used at different
points in the system. In particular, it illustrates how the different user inputs and
configuration settings combine with the time base to create the timecode. An
asterisk (*) denotes points of possible user input.

3–106 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Figure 3-54: Time flow block diagram

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–107

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS RCVR. The GPS/GLONASS signal can be selected as the source for a time
of day clock used for timecode outputs, and as a phase reference for video outputs.
The GPS/GLONASS signal carries the time represented as the number of weeks
and number of seconds since the GPS Epoch (0:00:00 UTC, January 6 1980).
For example, 12:00:00 UTC on November 5, 2008 is represented as 1504 weeks
plus 302,400 seconds. An additional 14 leap seconds that have passed between
January 1980 and November 2008 are also signalled in messages from the
GPS/GLONASS satellite systems.

NOTE. Since November 2008, an additional 2 leap seconds have been added and
are also signalled in messages from the GPS/GLONASS satellite systems.

Internal Time Set *. If you want to set Time Setup to internal mode, enter the
current date and time and then set the Time Setup to Internal in order to transfer
that time to the Master Time. The time zone offset and leap second information is
used to convert local time to a master time that is equivalent to GPS/GLONASS
time. Set the local time zone offset before setting the internal time.

VITC Reader. When the GPS7 is genlocked to NTSC or PAL, the Vertical Interval
Timecode on the genlock reference input can be decoded and used as the time
source. This time can be viewed on the status bar, and is used as the time source
for all the time code outputs. Since the phase of the video signals are set by the
genlock, the epoch system does not operate from the VITC input. If SMPTE309
date data is available, the time and date information on the VITC input will be
used if enabled in the TIME OF DAY submenu. (See page 3-133, GPS7 module
TIME OF DAY submenu.)

LTC Reader. When the GPS7 reference source is set to INTERNAL, NTSC, PAL
or HD SYNC, the LTC signal applied to the LTC 1 input can be used at the time
source. This time can be viewed on the status bar and is used as a time source
for all the time code outputs. If SMPTE309 date data is available, the time and
date information on the LTC input will be used if enabled in the TIME OF DAY
submenu. (See page 3-133, GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu.)

Time Setup Selection. The possible Time code sources depend on the selected
Reference source. If GPS signal is the selected reference source, then GPS or
internal time is available. If Genlock is the selected reference source, then VITC,
LTC, or internal time is available. If Internal is the selected reference source, then
internal time is the time code source.
If VITC or LTC is the time code source, then the time synchronization mode needs
to be set. There are three choices. Synchronize now sets the time when the user
presses the ENTER button (if the incoming time is valid and stable). Synchronize
once sets the time once when a valid and stable time code is detected. Follow sets
the time every time a new stable and valid time is detected.

3–108 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Master Time. The Master Time is the basis for all timecode outputs and for the
phase reference of all video outputs.

Leap Seconds. Leap second information is stored and then updated by satellite
every 20 to 30 minutes

Offset to TAI. TAI is the International Atomic Time, represented as the number of
seconds since the epoch of 0:00:00 January 1, 1958. Proposed standard SMPTE
404M defines the SMPTE Epoch at that same moment. There are exactly 8040
days and 19 leap seconds between the SMPTE Epoch (TAI) and the GPS Epoch.

Epoch Calculations. The number of seconds since the SMPTE Epoch is used to
precisely align video frames with the Master Time clock. For example, an NTSC
system operates at 29.97 frames per second (30 fps/1.001), so there are precisely
30,000 frames every 1001 seconds. By knowing the total number of seconds
since the SMPTE Epoch, when all video frames were perfectly aligned, the
GPS7 module can determine "where" the GPS pulse-per-second signal is located
with respect to video framing. The Epoch adjustment is made only if the system is
set to use GPS as the video reference.

Frame Engine. The frame engine supplies frame pulse signals based on the
SMPTE Epoch to each video output. This ensures that they are properly aligned
with respect to the calculated phase for the selected video format of each output.

Output Timing. Each video output has an independent offset that can be specified
to shift that output in order to align the video and LTC signals in the studio. This
time adjustment does not affect the timecode that is applied to that output; the
signal and timecode stay together as the timing is changed. The timing offset range
and resolution depend on the signal. See the specific output menu for details.

Leap Second Information. The GPS signal indicates the number of leap seconds
between GPS time and UTC. As of December 31, 2016, a total of 37 leap seconds
are required for the adjustment between TAI and UTC. This information only
stays current when a GPS/GLONASS signal is connected. On instrument boot up,
stored leap second information is used, and an asterisk appears next to the time
in the status screen until the leap second information from the GPS/GLONASS
signal is received.

Time Zone Offset *. The GPS7 has a selectable offset between UTC and the local
time, usually representing the local time zone. This offset can be specified in
hours+minutes+seconds, allowing specification of time zones that do not align
with the usual hours-only offset, or for other applications not related to time zones.
You can also use this setting to set the internal time to calculate “backwards” to
the Master Time.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–109

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

When the input time source is set to VITC or LTC, the instrument works similar
to how it works in internal mode, pre-correcting the master time of day by the
time zone offset. This pre-correction assumes that the incoming time code has
the correct local time, and causes the outgoing time codes to nominally match the
incoming ones, regardless of time-zone offset. This means that when switching
from GPS to VITC or LTC mode, the time-zone offset usually does not need to
change. However, if the time code synchronization mode is set to "Synchronize
now" or "Synchronize once", and the time-zone offset is changed after the
time-code sync has occurred, then the time-zone change offsets the incoming and
outgoing time codes until the user reasserts the time synchronization.
Additionally, if the time is being set by LTC or VITC with SMPTE309 date data,
the system can be configured to use the time zone and DST from the input. (See
page 3-133, GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu.)

Leap Second Apply *. Leap seconds, when required, are added on June 30, and/or
December 31, at 23:59:60 UTC. That is, the minute preceding midnight has
61 seconds instead of 60, numbered 0..60 instead of 0..59. This might be an
inconvenient time to make a local clock adjustment. For example, this is during
prime time for the North American Eastern Time Zone. Therefore, the GPS7
gives the option of deferring the leap second adjustment (if any) on these dates
for up to 24 hours.

DST Change *. Daylight Saving Time (DST) changes twice a year in many time
zones, but some locations do not observe daylight savings time. The GPS7 has a
user programmable DST adjustment to the time zone offset that is made by adding
or subtracting a specified amount from the current time setting. The scheduled
date and time of the change must be programmed into the GPS7. There are two
methods for scheduling the DST offset:
Once. In Once mode, the DST offset is applied only once on the date and time
you specify. Set the DST offset to either add or subtract an hour from the time
zone offset, depending on whether DST is starting or ending in your location.
Recurring. In Recurring mode, the DST offset is applied when the DST
START date and time that you specify occurs, and is removed when the DST
END date and time that you specify occurs. The recurring DST offset can
only be a positive number, such as one hour. The DST START/END dates are
formatted as the DST rules are written (e.g., DST starts on the First Sunday in
March at 02:00). For example, to change to daylight savings time, schedule
the system to add one hour to the time zone offset at 02:00:00 (local time) on
March 6, 2011. To return to standard time, schedule the system to remove the
DST offset at 02:00:00 on November 6, 2011. At the scheduled time and date,
the DST change is added to the time zone offset as seen from the instrument
display. You can then program the next scheduled DST change.
The incoming VITC or LTC reference may have DST shift already applied. To
avoid duplicating DST shifts, disable the DST SCHEDULER if the time of day
reference has DST applied.

3–110 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Task Scheduler. The task scheduler is responsible for triggering scheduled

events at the appropriate time. This includes DST changes, deferred leap second
adjustments, and triggered alarm outputs.

NTP Server. The GPS7 includes an implementation of the Simple Network Time
Protocol, using the network interface of the TG8000 mainframe. The NTP server
is automatic; when the Master time is set to GPS and the GPS7 acquires a valid
time, the server will respond with valid NTP packets to time requests from NTP
clients. When the Master time is set to GPS, the server always responds with UTC
time only. It is the responsibility of the NTP client (PC workstation, file server,
etc.) to be configured with the correct time zone offset. The NTP Server will work
only if the system is locked to a GPS/GLONASS signal
When using VITC or LTC input as the time reference, the NTP service is not
available.

TC Offset *. Every timecode output has an independent offset (hours, minutes,

seconds, frames) that can be added to the value of the selected timecode source.

TC Engine. The timecode engine runs at the rate specified through the user
interface and generates the actual timecode bits needed for each output.

LTC. The GPS7 module has four independent linear timecode outputs. Each
output can be set independently with regard to timecode format, module timing,
and timecode delay.

Analog Black. The GPS7 module has three analog sync outputs. Each output
can be configured as NTSC or PAL black burst (with optional VITC insertion)
or HD trilevel sync. The BG7 module has four analog sync outputs which can
be similarly configured.

HD-SDI. The standard HDVG7 module has one HD-SDI test signal generator
(with two outputs), for which ancillary timecode (ATC) can be added. If Option
BK is available, then there are two independent HD-SDI test signal generators
available.

Program Time. As an alternate to the local time of day, a program time counter
can be used as a timecode source for any output. This counter can represent
elapsed time, such as the timecode associated with program content during the
editing process, for example.

Reset Value. The program time counter will start counting from the specified
reset value. Program time can be reset to this value at any time using either the
user interface or a general purpose interface (GPI) input.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–111

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Alarm Time. An alarm can be set to generate when the program time counter
matches a predefined value. For example, you can specify the start timecode of
your program content at 01:00:00:00. The program time can be initialized to
00:59:00:00 to start a one minute leader before the program. The alarm time could
be set at 00:59:55:00 to signal a five second countdown before the program start,
perhaps to signal a change from color bars to black within the pre-program leader.

GPI Out. The GPS7 module has two General Purpose Interface (GPI) outputs,
either of which may be configured to begin when the program time matches
a specified alarm time.

To configure GPS7 module Understanding the capabilities, operating environment, antenna system, and other
settings requirements of the GPS7 module can help you decide how to configure it to
best meet the needs of your specific applications. The GPS7 menu trees and
menu descriptions can help you configure the module. (See page 3-113, GPS7
module main menu.)

Save the module settings as the Power On Default preset. After you have
configured the settings for the GPS7 module, perform the following steps to save
the settings to the Power On Default preset:

NOTE. After you configure the GPS7 module, it is strongly recommended that you
save the module settings to the Power On Default preset. The Power On Default
preset saves the configuration parameters in both the TG8000 mainframe and the
installed modules, which helps the instrument power up faster in the event of a
power outage or interruption.

1. Press the SYSTEM button to access the SYSTEM menu.

2. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : PRESET.
3. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
4. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TG8000 : PRESET :
SAVE.
5. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Power On Default.
6. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings as the Power
On Default settings.

3–112 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module main menu

Use the GPS7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
View the status of the module and signal
View diagnostics results for the module
Select the LTC output or GPI input and output
Select the GPS signal type (GPS only, GLONASS only or GPS & GLONASS)
Set the antenna voltage, time-of-day, and other time related parameters
Generate a Black 1, Black 2, or Black 3 signal
Set the timing reference source (Internal, Genlock, or GPS signal)
Set the Genlock Timing
Set the Time Of Day source (Internal, VITC input, or GPS signal)

NOTE. Earlier GPS7 modules do not have the REF IN input connector (shared
with the BLACK 1 output connector). Modules without REF IN do not support
Genlock.
Menus illustrated in this manual represent the newest features. GPS7 modules
without the REF IN input have similar menu structures but not identical menu
content.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–113

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the GPS7 module main menu.

Figure 3-55: GPS7 module main menu

3–114 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

STATUS. Displays the status of the GPS7 module.

The top line displays the selected timecode reference and signal presence. When
the internal reference frequency is used as the timecode reference, the top line
displays Internal.

NOTE. When GPS is set as the timecode reference, the top line includes the Figure
of Merit (FOM) rating for the relative strength of the GPS/GLONASS signal. (See
page 3-105, Figures of Merit (FOM).)

The bottom line displays the additional status of the GPS7 module. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to view the following status displays:
Genlock amplitude and VITC line number
Date and time of the currently used timecode reference
LTC timing and status

NOTE. The LTC Timing Status screen shows the relationship between the LTC
frame and either the genlock video or the internal frame pulse used to latch the
LTC time-code into the system. If the LTC input rate and the genlock video input
rate are compatible, then the LTC Timing Status screen will show the timing
relationship between the LTC frame and the video.
If the LTC input rate and genlock video input rate are not compatible, then the
LTC Timing Status screen will show the timing between the LTC input and the
internal frame pulse used to register the incoming time. Depending on which
internal frame rate has been allocated, the LTC Timing readout may be stable,
or may cycle though several possible values. Regardless, if the display is stable
or cycling, this number has limited utility, since it is not related to the normal
LTC-to-video relationship. If the instrument is in internal reference mode, then
the LTC Timing Status readout and messages are disabled.
The time status messages for VITC and LTC timing sources include the time zone
offset and whether DST is enabled or disabled in the timing source. If there is
no time and date information on the input signal, the message “No Signal”
is displayed.

The LTC Timing Status screen shows the time between the reference datums
and one of the following three messages:
12M OK: Indicates that the timing is within the window described in
SMPTE 12M.
OK: Indicates that the timing is within the window that the GPS7 is able to
consistently assign the time code to the correct video frame.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–115

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Warning: Indicates that the timing is near the threshold between frames. The
time code may be assigned to the adjacent video frame, or may shift one
frame if the timing changes slightly.
If the LTC timing is slewing, it indicates that the LTC and the selected
reference (Internal, GPS, or Video Genlock) are not synchronous. In this
case, the time code will shift when it crosses the threshold from one frame
to another. This can be avoided by not using the “follow” mode for the time
synchronization. Instead, use the “Synchronize Once” or “Synchronize now”
modes.
LTC time display and status
LTC signal amplitude and status
Time of day and the reference source
UTC, local, and internal time displays
Program time counter
Applied DST offset
GPS/GLONASS signal quality and the number of satellites detected versus
satellites usable

NOTE. Signal quality is an indicator of how well the GPS/GLONASS signal is

being received. It is a sum of the correlation for each of the satellites. It can be
used to evaluate the antenna and connecting cable, but it can take a while for the
receivers to recognize which satellites are available and stabilize at the final level.

Antenna power status: Power OFF, Open, Short, or Nominal.

NOTE. A shorted GPS/GLONASS antenna will not damage the GPS7 module. If a
splitter is used on the antenna, it may appear as a short at DC but will still pass
through the RF signal, which will allow the GPS to function.
The status will read Open if no antenna is connected or if the current load is less
than expected because a splitter or DC block is being used.

REFERENCE. Selects the timing reference and the response for a loss of lock to
the timing reference. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to
access the REFERENCE submenu. (See page 3-118.)

3–116 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

SELECT OUTPUT. Selects which BLACK output to configure for signal format,
timing, and timecode parameters or selects the HD trilevel sync rate for the
three BLACK outputs. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select
the output you want to configure (BLACK 1, BLACK 2, BLACK 3, or HD
TRI-LEVEL SYNC RATE), and then press the ENTER button to access the
BLACK submenu (See page 3-122.) or the HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC RATE
submenu (See page 3-126.).

GPS SETUP. Sets GPS signal parameters and sets the level at which a warning
message will be generated if the GPS/GLONASS signal quality deteriorates.
Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the GPS
SETUP submenu. (See page 3-130.)

TIME SETUP. Provides access to several submenus for setting timing parameters
for the module. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select one of the
following submenus, and then press the ENTER button to access the selected
submenu.
TIME OF DAY menu: Use this submenu to set the module time of day
reference. (See page 3-133.)
TIME ZONE OFFSET menu: Use this submenu to set the time zone offset
for your location. (See page 3-138.)
DST SCHEDULE menu: Use this submenu to configure how the module
handles Daylight Saving Time. (See page 3-139.)
PROGRAM TIME menu: Use this submenu to configure the program time
parameters. (See page 3-142.)
JAM SYNC menu: Use this submenu to set parameters for the Jam Sync
function. (See page 3-143.)
LEAP SECOND menu: Use this submenu to configure how the module
handles leap seconds. (See page 3-144.)
EPOCH SELECT menu: Use this submenu to configure which time epoch
the module will use. (See page 3-145.)
ALARM TIME menu: Use this submenu to configure a time-based alarm.
(See page 3-145.)
ALARM DELAY menu: Use this submenu to configure a time to defer
reporting errors so that brief errors are ignored. (See page 3-146.)

SELECT LTC. Selects which LTC output to configure for timecode parameters.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the output you want to
configure (LTC 1, LTC 2, LTC 3, or LTC 4), and then press the ENTER button to
access the LTC submenu for the selected output. (See page 3-148.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–117

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

SELECT GPIO. Sets how the GPS7 General Purpose Interface (GPI) is configured.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the GPI input or output you
want to configure (INPUT 1, OUTPUT 1, or OUTPUT 2), and then press the
ENTER button to access the GPI submenu for the selected input or output.
When you select INPUT 1, you will access the GPI submenu. (See page 3-150.)
When you select OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2, you will access the GPO submenu
for the selected output. (See page 3-151.)

DIAGNOSTICS. Allows access to the outputs of several diagnostics. Select this

menu item, and then press the ENTER button to enter the DIAGNOSTICS
submenu. (See page 3-152.)

GPS7 module Use this submenu to select the timing reference and the response for a loss of lock
REFERENCE submenu to the timing reference. The following figure shows the REFERENCE submenu.

Figure 3-56: GPS7 module REFERENCE submenu

3–118 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

SOURCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the reference source
for the module timing. Select one of the following references, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Internal: Uses the internal clock frequency setting as the timing reference.
GPS Signal: Uses the GPS/GLONASS signal input as the timing reference.
NTSC Burst: Uses the NTSC black burst signal applied to the
BLACK 1 / REF IN connector as the timing reference.
NTSC Burst with 10 Field ID: Uses the NTSC black burst with 10 Field ID
signal applied to the BLACK 1 / REF IN connector as the timing reference.
PAL Burst: Uses the PAL black burst signal applied to the
BLACK 1 / REF IN connector as the timing reference.
HD Tri-Level Sync: Uses the HDTV trilevel signal applied to the
BLACK 1 / REF IN connector as the timing reference.
CW: Uses the 1, 3.58, 4.43, 5, or 10 MHz continuous wave signal applied to
the BLACK 1 / REF IN connector as the timing reference.

GENLOCK TIMING. Adjusts the timing offset of the input signal relative to the
internal reference signal. Press the ENTER button to access the GENLOCK
TIMING submenu shown below.

NOTE. GENLOCK TIMING is only available when the REFERENCE SOURCE is

set to NTSC Burst, NTSC Burst with 10 FieldID, PAL BURST, HD TRI-LEVEL
SYNC, or CW.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–119

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select a timing parameter, and then
use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the parameter. The range of
the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format. (See Table 3-20.)
Vertical: Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the Genlock
vertical offset in 1 line increments.
Horizontal Coarse: Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the
Genlock horizontal offset in 0.0185 μsec increments.
Horizontal Fine: Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the
Genlock horizontal offset in 0.1 nsec increments.

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) and right
(►) arrow buttons simultaneously.
If you are using the 50, 59.94 or 60 Hz progressive sync as a genlock source, as
well as LTC as a time-code source, there are two possible alignments for the
resulting system. Alignment can be checked by looking at the LTC timing status
screen. If the timing is near zero, then it is aligned. If the timing is near a frame of
offset, then it is not aligned.
You will need to unlock and re-lock the reference to achieve the desired alignment
if this is important to the application you are using. Alternatively, you can use a
lower frame rate video reference like NTSC, PAL, or 1080i tri-level.

Table 3-20: Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 input signals

Format name Line settings Coarse settings (μs) Fine settings (ns)
NTSC ± 525 ± 63.5556 ± 10.00
PAL ± 1250 ± 64.0000 ± 10.00
1080 60i ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 10.00
1080 59.94i ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 10.00
1080 50i ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 10.00
1080 24sF ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 10.00
1080 23.98sF ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 10.00
1080 30p ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 10.00
1080 29.97p ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 10.00
1080 25p ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 10.00
1080 24p ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 10.00
1080 23.98p ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 10.00
720 60p ± 375 ± 22.2222 ± 10.00
720 59.94p ± 375 ± 22.2444 ± 10.00
720 50p ± 375 ± 26.6667 ± 10.00

3–120 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

LOSS LOCK ACTION. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the
action that the module will make when a loss of lock condition is detected. This
can happen for example, if the GPS/GLONASS antenna signal is lost. Select
one of the following actions, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection.
Stay at Current Frequency: Sets the module timing to keep operating at the
current frequency until the reference signal is recovered.
Use Internal Frequency: Sets the module timing to switch to the internal
frequency setting until the reference signal is recovered.

GPS HOLDOVER RECOVERY. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select
how the module timing responds when the reference signal is recovered after
a loss of lock. Select one of the following recovery modes, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. If the module timing is off by more than 20 ms when the GPS/GLONASS
signal is recovered, the module forces a jam phase timing recovery. In genlock
mode, a jam sync may occur if the timing has drifted more than 20 ns.

Stay Legal: Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered

GPS/GLONASS signal while staying within the specified frequency offset and
frequency rate of change specifications for NTSC and PAL reference signals.

NOTE. It can take a long time for the module to recover in this mode since it takes
about 300 seconds to correct each 64 μs line of timing error.

Jam Phase: Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered

GPS/GLONASS signal immediately but will typically cause a sync “shock”
to the system.
Fast Slew: Adjusts the module timing to match the recovered GPS/GLONASS
signal at a rate 25 times faster than the legal rate without jumping.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–121

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this submenu to configure the selected black output for signal format, timing,
BLACK submenu and timecode parameters. The following figure shows the BLACK submenu.

Figure 3-57: GPS7 module BLACK submenu

3–122 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

INPUT-OUTPUT. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button configure the
BLACK 1 connector as an INPUT or an OUTPUT (if allowed). This connector
is forced to be an input if the TIMING REFERENCE SOURCE is set to a Genlock
signal or if VITC is the TIME OF DAY reference.

NOTE. If a reference signal is connected to the BLACK 1 / REF IN connector, you

should configure this connector as an input so that the GPS7 module does not
output a video signal if the Reference Source is changed to GPS or internal.
This might occur when using the GPS7 module in a dual-configuration where the
module is being switched between being a slave via genlock to incoming video or
a master source using the GPS/GLONASS reference.
This menu selection is available only when BLACK 1 is selected for configuration
and the GPS7 module has the BLACK 1 / REF IN connector.

FORMAT. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the signal
formats in the following table. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Table 3-21: GPS7 module output signal formats
Common Non-integer HD trilevel Integer HD trilevel sync
sync rate 1 rate 1
NTSC 1080 59.94i 1080 60i
NTSC-J 1080 23.98sf 1080 50i
PAL 1080 29.97p 1080 24sf
CW 10 MHz 2 1080 23.98p 1080 30p
720 59.94p 1080 25p
1080 24p
720 60p
720 50p
1 The signal formats available in this submenu depend on the HD trilevel sync rate setting (non-integer or integer),
which is set using the Select Output selection in the GPS7 module main menu. (See page 3-113, GPS7 module
main menu.)
2 The CW 10 MHz format is available on the BLACK 3 output only.

FIELD REFERENCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to Enable or
Disable the field reference in the output signal. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.

NOTE. This submenu is available only when a non-HD format is set as the signal
format of the selected BLACK output.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–123

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

BLACK TIMING. Press the ENTER button to access the BLACK TIMING
submenu shown below.

Figure 3-58: GPS7 module BLACK TIMING submenu

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select a timing parameter, and then
use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the parameter.
Vertical: Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to adjust the vertical
timing. For NTSC and PAL, you can adjust the timing by ± ½ a color frame.
For HDTV trilevel sync signals, you can adjust the timing by ± ½ a field or
frame (progressive or interlaced signals, respectively). (See Table 3-22.)
Horizontal Coarse: Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the
horizontal coarse timing. For NTSC, PAL, and HDTV trilevel sync signals,
you can adjust the timing by ± 1 μs.
Horizontal Fine: Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the
horizontal fine timing. For NTSC and PAL signals, you can adjust the timing
by ±10.00 ns. For HD trilevel sync signals, you can adjust the timing by
± 7.00 ns.

Table 3-22: Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 output signals

Format name Line settings Coarse settings (μs) Fine settings (ns)
NTSC ± 525 ± 63.5556 ± 10.00
PAL ± 1250 ± 64.0000 ± 10.00
1080 60i ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 7.00
1080 59.94i ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 7.00
1080 50i ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 7.00
1080 24sF ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 7.00

3–124 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Table 3-22: Timing adjustment ranges for GPS7 output signals (cont.)
Format name Line settings Coarse settings (μs) Fine settings (ns)
1080 23.98sF ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 7.00
1080 30p ± 562 ± 29.6296 ± 7.00
1080 29.97p ± 562 ± 29.6593 ± 7.00
1080 25p ± 562 ± 35.5556 ± 7.00
1080 24p ± 562 ± 37.0370 ± 7.00
1080 23.98p ± 562 ± 37.0741 ± 7.00
720 60p ± 375 ± 22.2222 ± 7.00
720 59.94p ± 375 ± 22.4444 ± 7.00
720 50p ± 375 ± 26.6667 ± 7.00

BLACK TIMECODE. Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected
BLACK output. Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu.
(See page 3-127.)

NOTE. This submenu is available only when a non-HD format is set as the signal
format of the selected BLACK output.

BLANK ON GPS UNLOCK. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to turn ON
or OFF the blanking function on the BLACK 2 output when a loss of lock to the
GPS/GLONASS signal is detected. When turned on, the BLACK 2 output will be
blanked as long as the loss of lock condition occurs. This purpose of this function
is to trigger a change-over. If configured to blank on loss of lock, this output
should not be used for normal reference applications.

NOTE. This submenu is available only when BLACK 2 is the selected output.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–125

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this submenu to select whether an integer or non-integer clock will be used
HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC for the HD tri-level sync rate for the BLACK outputs. Use the left (◄) or right
RATE submenu (►) arrow button to select Integer (60, 50, 30, 25, 24) or Non-Integer (59.94,
29.97, 23.98). Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. The clock rate selected here affects which signal formats are available
for the BLACK outputs.

The following figure shows the HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC-RATE submenu.

Figure 3-59: GPS7 module HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC RATE submenu

3–126 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The
TIMECODE submenu following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu.

Figure 3-60: GPS7 module TIMECODE submenu

NOTE. This submenu is available only when a non-HD format is set as the signal
format of the selected BLACK output.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–127

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

SOURCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the timecode
source from the following choices. The default value is Disable.
Disable: Disables the timecode function for the selected Black output.
Local (DST): Uses the local time of day with Daylight Saving Time offset
as the timecode.
Local (No DST): Uses the local time of day without Daylight Saving Time
offset as the timecode.
UTC: Uses Coordinated Universal Time as the timecode.
Program Time: Uses the program time counter as the timecode.

NOTE. In addition to enabling the timecode source, at least one line must be
specified and enabled to carry VITC using the VITC submenu below.

OFFSET. Use this menu item to set an offset for the selected black output, relative
to the selected timecode source. You can enter a time offset of up to ±23:59:59:29
(maximum frame value depends on the frame rate of the video signal). Press the
ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a
digit in the offset value to change. An underline character appears under the
selected offset digit.
After you select an offset digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
change the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required for your offset.
Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change.

NOTE. The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to
±23:59 hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones
in the range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use
ST309 data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined
programmed offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12
to +13 hours.

30 DROP. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to Enable or Disable the 30
Drop Frame mode. Most applications will prefer drop-frame compensation VITC
on NTSC, but if needed, it can be disabled by this menu. This menu selection
appears only when NTSC or NTSC-J is set as the signal format for the selected
BLACK output.

VITC. Use this menu item to insert the same VITC signal on 1 or 2 lines of the
vertical interval. Select VITC 1 for one line and VITC 2 for the second line.
Select the VITC output you want to configure, and then press the ENTER button
to enter the VITC submenu for the selected output. (See page 3-129.)

3–128 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to enable or disable the output of a VITC on the selected line. Use
VITC submenu the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following
figure shows the VITC submenu.

Figure 3-61: GPS7 module VITC submenu

OUTPUT. Use this menu item to enable or disable insertion of a VITC on the
selected line. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select ENABLE or
DISABLE. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Line number. Use this menu item to select the video line on which the selected
VITC signal will be inserted. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select
the video line number. For NTSC, you can select lines from line 10 to 20 (lines 14
and 16 are recommended). For PAL, you can select lines between 6 and 22 (lines
19 and 21 are recommended). Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–129

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to set the GPS operating parameters and set the level at which
GPS SETUP submenu a warning message will be generated if the GPS/GLONASS signal quality
deteriorates. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the menu items.
The following figure shows the GPS SETUP submenu.

Figure 3-62: GPS7 module GPS SETUP submenu

3–130 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

ANTENNA POWER. The ANTENNA connector on the rear panel can supply DC
power for a connected GPS/GLONASS antenna. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select from the following antenna power settings:

CAUTION. To avoid antenna damage, do not turn on the DC antenna power until
you know that the antenna is designed to handle the selected voltage. Antenna
damage can occur if the antenna is not designed to handle the voltage you select.

OFF: No power is supplied to the GPS/GLONASS antenna.

3.3 V: Supplies 3.3 V DC to power the GPS/GLONASS antenna.
5 V: Supplies 5 V DC to power the GPS/GLONASS antenna.
When the ANTENNA connector is configured to provide power to the antenna,
the rear-panel POWER indicator lights as follows:
Blinks green to indicate an open circuit. This occurs if no antenna is
connected or if the current load is less than expected because a splitter or DC
block is being used.
Displays solid red if the connected antenna is shorted. A shorted antenna will
not damage the GPS7 module. If a splitter is used on the antenna, it may
appear as a short at DC but still pass through the RF signal, which would
allow the GPS to function.
Displays solid green if the current load of the antenna is within the nominal
range.

POSITION. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Fixed or Mobile.
The Fixed and Mobile settings define how the GPS/GLONASS receiver calculates
the time and position information.
In fixed mode, an averaged position is stored in flash memory, and only the
time is calculated each second. This provides greater stability of the time
information, and allows operation with fewer satellites. This mode is well suited
to broadcast-type installations where the antenna and mainframe do not move.
Mobile mode recalculates both the position and time each second. This allows
for compensation of velocity and acceleration, so the frequency and timing
information stay correct while moving, at the expense of some stability. This
mode is required if the antenna and mainframe are moving.
For applications where the position changes occasionally, but where the antenna
and unit are not moving, then either mode may be applicable. Mobile mode
may boot up faster since it does not need to average 60 fixes to establish a fixed
location. However, fixed mode can run with fewer satellites once the position
is stored.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–131

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

ACQUIRE POSITION. Press the ENTER button to erase the saved position, and
then acquire and save a new averaged position. Note that the signal quality might
indicate low or no signal during this process.

NOTE. The module must make 60, 1 second GPS readings with at least four
satellites to acquire the position. How long this takes depends on various
conditions. If there are less than four satellites, a reading cannot be taken.

GPS CONSTELLATION. This menu selection appears only for GPS7 modules
with a GPS/GLONASS receiver that are installed in a TG8000 with firmware
version 1.6 or later.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select GPS Only, GLONASS Only,
or GPS & GLONASS.

NOTE. After you configure the GPS constellation, it is strongly recommended that
you save the module settings to the Power On Default preset. The Power On
Default preset saves the configuration parameters in both the TG8000 mainframe
and the installed modules, which helps the instrument power up faster in the event
of a power outage or interruption. (See page 3-112, Save the module settings as
the Power On Default preset.)

Earlier versions of the GPS7 module included a receiver that could use only GPS
signals. Later versions of the module include a receiver that can use GPS and/or
GLONASS signals. (See page 3-102, How to determine which GPS receiver is
installed in your GPS7 module.)

SIGNAL WARNING. This function provides a warning that the antenna signal
has degraded. Set this level below the normal range experienced as a function
of time of day, weather, or other variables. To configure the output warning, see
the GPO submenu. (See page 3-151, GPS7 module GPO submenu.) Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the FOM (quality of the GPS/GLONASS
signal) value that will trigger warning indicators. (See page 3-105, Figures of
Merit (FOM).)

3–132 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to set the source for the time of day setting and to set the date and
TIME OF DAY submenu time that will be used when the GPS reference is set to internal. The following
figure shows the TIME OF DAY submenu.

Figure 3-63: GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu

Source. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the timecode
reference.
Internal: Enables the Internal Time of Day mode. When the timecode
reference is set to Internal, an additional menu setting appears where you
can set the time manually (like setting any clock) and then activate the
time-of-day change.

CAUTION. When Internal is selected as the timecode reference, the time-of-day

will not be automatically changed. (See page 3-137, How to set the time-of-day
in Internal mode.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–133

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

VITC Input: Selects the vertical interval time code as the timecode reference.
VITC is only available when the Reference Source is set to a video Genlock
signal.

NOTE. The VITC and LTC inputs are not available on earlier GPS7 modules that
do not have the Black 1 / REF IN input connector.
When the VITC or LTC inputs are used as time-of-day sources, the hh:mm:ss:ff
settings will be synchronized to the VITC or LTC source (if present). When the
SMPTE309 Data mode is set to Use as Input or to Use as Input/Output, the date
is set using the VITC or LTC source. When the SMPTE309 Data mode is set to
Ignore, the date is set from the internal RTC. (See page 3-135, SMPTE309 Data.)

LTC Input: Selects the LTC time code input as the timecode reference. This
selection is only available when the function of the LTC connector is set
to Input.
GPS Signal: If GPS Signal is selected, the time from the GPS receiver is used
to derive the time of day. This selection is only available if GPS Signal is the
selected Reference Source.

NOTE. When you select GPS signal as the timecode reference source, then
depending on the GPS/GLONASS signal availability, it can take a while for the
instrument to lock to the GPS/GLONASS signal. During the time before the
instrument locks to the GPS/GLONASS signal, the instrument uses time based
on the internal real time clock.

Mode. When VITC or LTC is the Time of Day source, Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to select the synchronization mode.
Follow: The time of day follows the VITC or LTC on the input signal if the
signal is stable for at least 100 consecutive frames.
Synchronize Once: The VITC or LTC on the input signal is continuously
monitored until a stable signal is received (at least 100 consecutive frames).
At that time, the time of day synchronizes (once) to this reference.
Synchronize Now: The time of day attempts to synchronize with the VITC or
LTC on the input signal when the ENTER button is pressed. A total of ten
attempts to synchronize are made. After ten attempts, no further attempts are
made to synchronize regardless if synchronization occurred or failed. A stable
signal of at least 100 consecutive frames is needed.

3–134 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

SMPTE309 Data. When VITC or LTC is selected as the Time of Day source, use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set how the instrument responds to ST309
data in the timing source. (See page 3-136, Notes about SMPTE309 data usage.)

NOTE. The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to
±23:59 hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones
in the range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use
ST309 data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined
programmed offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12
to +13 hours.

Ignore: If available, the HH:MM:DD;FF data on the incoming LTC/VITC

signal is used, but any YYYY-MM-DD, TZ-Offset and DST enabled/disabled
data is completely ignored in the Time of Day system. In this mode, the Time
Zone and DST settings in the instrument menu are used to set the time of day
from the input time code and the date is set from the internal RTC. This is the
mode that should be used if there is no ST309 date data on the input time code.
In this case, the STATUS button display will still show the YYYY-MM-DD,
TZ-Offset and DST settings from the instrument menu.
Use as Input: The ST309 data in the timing source is used and applied to the
master Time system in the instrument. For example, if the data indicates
that the time zone offset is +8:00 hours, then the master Time is set to the
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS;FF from the LTC/VITC input, minus the 8 hour
offset. This makes the master Time set to UTC. However, the timecode data
on all outputs is then recalculated based on the time zone offset and DST
offset settings on the instrument. This mode is useful if the incoming time
code data is from a different time zone than the outputs you intend to create.
Use as Input/Output: The ST309 data in the timing source is used and
applied to the master Time as when “Use as Input” is selected. But in this
case, the time zone offset and DST enabled/disabled data from the LTC/VITC
timing source is used to drive the output timecode including the ST309
data. This means that any time zone offset and DST adjustment settings in
the instrument are ignored and that whatever timecode data is coming in
from the LTC/VITC timing source will match the data on the timecode for
the signal outputs.

Internal. When the Time of Day source is set to Internal, use this menu selection
to manually enter the date and time and to activate the time-of-day change. (See
page 3-137, How to set the time-of-day in Internal mode.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–135

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Notes about SMPTE309 data usage. If ST309 data is not present on the selected
time reference, then the default SMPTE309 Data mode setting of “Ignore” is the
correct selection. For most applications in which the input time reference does
have the ST309 data, then the setting of “Input” is usually the best choice. While
in “Input” mode, the time zone and DST programming on the input and output are
independent, with the input set by the ST309 data on the input and the outputs
being set by the menu in the instrument. This is the best mode of operation even if
all units are set to the same time zone and DST values.
When the SMPTE309 Data mode is set to “Ignore,” you cannot use the Time Zone
Offset or DST offset controls on the slave unit to adjust the time code outputs.
The reason for this is that the slave unit assumes that the VITC/LTC inputs are
local time and already have such corrections applied. However, you can offset
the time code on individual outputs using the offset controls for each output. The
local time zone and DST settings do affect the master time-of-day since the offsets
are subtracted from the input and added to the output, but the net effect is that the
outputs match the inputs unless individually offset.
SMPTE309 time zone offset data on individual outputs is not affected by adjusting
time code offsets on individual outputs. The time code offset controls on the
individual outputs does not affect the time zone offset fields in the output time code
data. For example, if the slave unit is configured with a time zone offset of –08:00
and then you also adjust the time code offset on the SDI7 module Channel 1 by
another +03:00 hours, the SMPTE309 data on that output will still read –08:00 in
the time zone offset field even though the actual output is UTC –05:00 hours.
Many installations use multiple instruments configured in a master/slave
relationship (for example, when sending signals across time zones). In these
instances, if the master instrument is locked to a GPS/GLONASS signal, is
running in Internal mode, or is genlocked to a source without ST309 data, the
SMPTE309 Data mode on the master instrument should be set to “Ignore.” If the
master instrument is locked to a source providing ST309 data, the SMPTE309
Data mode on the master instrument should be set to “Input” and on the slave
instrument the mode should be set to “Input.”
The DST scheduler system applies the DST offset even if the Time-Of-Day
(TOD) source is set to “VITC Input” or “LTC Input” and the SMPTE309 mode is
set to “Ignore” or “Use As Input.” In these cases, the offset is applied whether or
not a valid VITC or LTC input signal is available. For proper DST scheduling,
you need to ensure that the instrument has valid time information and manually
enter the correct time of day if the system is not synchronized to an accurate
time of day source.
The GPS7 module Black outputs (when VITC is enabled) and the LTC outputs
always have the SMPTE309 date, time-zone offset, and DST enabled/disabled
fields included. The content of these fields depends on the current SMPTE309
mode setting (Ignore, Use As Input, or Use As Input/Output).

3–136 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

If an SDI7 module is installed, the SDI embedded timecode (when enabled) also
includes the SMPTE309 date, time-zone offset, and DST enabled/disabled fields.
The content of these fields depends on the current SMPTE309 mode setting on the
GPS7 module (Ignore, Use As Input, or Use As Input/Output).
The Status display for the module now includes the received ST309 time zone and
DST data (if present).

How to set the time-of-day in Internal mode. Perform the following steps to set the
Time of Day in Internal mode.
1. Set the Time of Day source to Internal:
a. From the GPS7 module main menu, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
button to select TIME SETUP : SELECT MENU.
b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select TIME OF DAY
menu, and then press the ENTER button.
c. In the TIME OF DAY submenu, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select Source: Internal. Press the ENTER button to confirm
the selection.
2. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select INTERNAL: <time>.
3. Press the ENTER button to enter the date and time edit mode.
4. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a digit in the time offset to
change. An underline character appears under the selected time digit. The
date and time digits take the following form: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.
5. After you select an offset digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
change the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required for your date
and time.

CAUTION. When you press the ENTER button, this applies the start time and
date offset. Typically, this causes a disruption to the syncs, so care should be
taken to verify the date and time are correct before activating Internal mode
time-of-day setting.

6. Press the ENTER to confirm the change and set the time.

NOTE. The manual time of day setting is not automatically reapplied when the
instrument power is cycled. If the instrument powers on in Internal mode, the time
of day will be acquired from the real time clock in the instrument.
The time zone offset must be set to maintain the correct relationship between
UTC and local time.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–137

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to set the time zone offset for your location in reference to UTC.
TIME ZONE OFFSET Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button
submenu to select a digit in the offset value to change. An underline character appears
under the selected offset digit. The date and time digits take the following form:
HH:MM.

After you select an offset digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
change the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required for you offset.
Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change. The following figure shows the
TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu.

Figure 3-64: GPS7 module TIME ZONE OFFSET submenu

NOTE. When the DST event occurs, the scheduled offset will be added to the time
zone offset, and the DST schedule will be cleared. This allows for a new schedule
to be set up for any time in the future.
The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to ±23:59
hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones in the
range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use ST309
data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined programmed
offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12 to +13 hours.

3–138 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to schedule when Daylight Saving Time changes are implemented.
DST SCHEDULE submenu Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The
following figure shows the DST SCHEDULE submenu.

Figure 3-65: GPS7 module DST SCHEDULE submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–139

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

ENABLE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the DST schedule
function to OFF, ONCE, or RECURRING. Use ONCE to schedule a specific
calendar date and time to apply or remove the daylight savings time offset. For
example, “2011-03-06 02:00:00.” Use RECURRING to set up relative dates
and times to apply and remove the DST offset. For example, “1st Sun of Oct
02:00:00.”

CAUTION. When you change the DST Schedule mode between ENABLE, ONCE,
and RECURRING, any DST offset that is currently being applied will be removed
and any new DST offset that is configured for the new mode will be applied
immediately.
The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to ±23:59
hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones in the
range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use ST309
data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined programmed
offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12 to +13 hours.

OFFSET. Use this selection to set the DST offset that will be applied when either
the ONCE event or the DST START event occurs at the user-scheduled time.
Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select a digit in the DST offset value to change. An underline character appears
under the selected offset digit. The date and time digits take the following form:
HH:MM. When the DST Schedule function is set to RECURRING, this offset
can only be a positive number.
After you select an offset digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
change the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required for your offset.
Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change.

3–140 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

ONCE. This selection appears only when you set DST Schedule function to OFF
or ONCE. Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select a digit in the DST setup value to change. An underline character
appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits take the following
form: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.
After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change
the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required for your date and time.
Press the ENTER to confirm the change.

NOTE. In ONCE mode, the pending offset can be positive or negative, which
allows you to add or subtract from the currently applied DST offset.

CAUTION. An incoming VITC or LTC reference may have DST shift already
applied. To avoid duplicating DST shifts, disable the DST SCHEDULER if the
time of day reference has DST applied.
In ONCE mode, DST offsets can be compounded. This means that if an offset is
currently being applied, and the scheduled time is then changed to a future date,
the newly configured DST offset will be added to the already applied offset. For
example, if an offset of +1 hour is applied on March 9 and the scheduled date is
then changed to March 16, the resulting offset after March 16 will be +2 hours.

RECUR. There are two Recurring selections: DST Start and DST End. These
selections appear only when you set the DST Schedule function to OFF or
RECURRING. The DST Start time is the time when the DST offset you enter will
be added to the time zone offset. The DST End time is the time when the DST
offset will be removed.
The DST Start and DST End times are edited in the same manner. Press the
Enter button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a
digit in the DST START or DST END value to change. An underline character
appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits take the following
form: Week-Day-Month HH:MM:SS. After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or
down (▼) arrow button to change the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as
required for your date and time.
For example, if you enter First-Sun-Mar 02:00:00 for the DST Start time, the DST
offset you entered would be added to the time zone offset on the first Sunday in
March at 2 AM. The Week field can be set to the First, Second, Third, Fourth, or
Last. Press the ENTER to confirm the change.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–141

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to set the initial value for the Program Time counter. The following
PROGRAM TIME submenu figure shows the PROGRAM TIME submenu.

Figure 3-66: GPS7 module PROGRAM TIME submenu

APPLY. Press the ENTER button to immediately apply the initial program time
entered in the SETUP parameter below.

SETUP. Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select a digit in the Program Time counter to change. An underline
character appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits take the
following form: HH:MM:SS.
After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change
the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required. Press the ENTER to
confirm the change.

3–142 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to set parameters for the Jam Sync function. Use the function to
JAM SYNC submenu immediately synchronize the module timecode with the selected time source for
each output or to regularly schedule a synchronization. Use the up (▲) or down
(▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the
JAM SYNC submenu.

Figure 3-67: GPS7 module JAM SYNC submenu

APPLY. Press the ENTER button to immediately synchronize the module

timecode with the GPS/GLONASS signal timecode.

ENABLE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to turn ON or OFF the
Jam Sync function.

SETUP. Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select a digit in the Jam Sync schedule to change. An underline character
appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits take the following
form: HH:MM:SS.
After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change
the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required. Press the ENTER to
confirm the change.

NOTE. A daily Jam Sync should be performed on systems running at non-integer

frame rates.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–143

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to schedule when leap seconds are implemented. For many
LEAP SECOND submenu applications, it might be fine to apply the leap second at midnight UTC, but for
some time zones this might cause a disruption, so the leap second menu allows
the leap second to be deferred up to 24 hours. Use the up (▲) or down (▼)
arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the LEAP
SECOND submenu.

Figure 3-68: GPS7 module LEAP SECOND submenu

APPLY. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select when a leap second
will be scheduled. Select Use Current Time (Immediately) to apply the leap
second adjustment immediately when signalled by the GPS system at 23:59:60
UTC on June 30 or December 31 (as appropriate), regardless of the local time.
Select Use Scheduled Time to apply the leap second adjustment at a deferred
time, as entered in the SETUP menu below.

SETUP. Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select a digit in the schedule time to change. An underline character
appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits take the following
form: HH:MM:SS.
After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the
value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required. Press the ENTER button
to confirm the change.

NOTE. The LEAP SECOND menu is only available when GPS is the Reference
source.

3–144 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to select which time epoch the GPS7 module will use: 1970 or
EPOCH SELECT submenu 1958. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the desired time epoch,
and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. The following figure
shows the EPOCH SELECT submenu.

Figure 3-69: GPS7 module EPOCH SELECT submenu

NOTE. PTP (Precision Time Protocol) uses the epoch established 1 January,
1970 00:00:00 GMT.

GPS7 module Use this menu to schedule alarm times relative to program time. Using the GPI
ALARM TIME submenu connector, this feature can be used to drive a light or similar indicator of alarm
occurrences at a specific time in a program. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the ALARM
TIME submenu.

Figure 3-70: GPS7 module ALARM TIME submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–145

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

ENABLE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to turn ON or OFF the
Alarm Time function.

SETUP. Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select a digit in the Alarm Time schedule to change. An underline
character appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits take the
following form: HH:MM:SS.
After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change
the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required. Press the ENTER to
confirm the change.

GPS7 module Use this menu to set delays for warning messages. Setting a delay allows short
ALARM DELAY submenu errors and warnings to be ignored. For example, with the holdover capability, a
short GPS unlock will not cause any disruption in the syncs, so there is no reason
to immediately register an error and trigger an ECO to change. Use the up (▲) or
down (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows
the ALARM DELAY submenu.

Figure 3-71: GPS7 module ALARM DELAY submenu

GPO Loss of Lock. Use this feature to set a delay between the time when loss of
lock is detected and when it is reported on the GPI output. Press the ENTER
button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a digit in the
delay time before a GPO loss of lock warning message is displayed. An underline
character appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits take the
following form: HH:MM:SS.
After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change
the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required. Press the ENTER to
confirm the change.

3–146 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPO Signal Warning. Use this feature to set a delay between the time when a
signal warning is detected and when it is reported on the GPI output. Press the
ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a
digit in the delay time before a GPO signal warning message is displayed. An
underline character appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits
take the following form: HH:MM:SS.
After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change
the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required. Press the ENTER to
confirm the change.

Black 2 Blank on Unlock. Use this feature to set a delay between the time when an
unlock is detected and when Black 2 is blanked. Press the ENTER button, and
then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a digit in the delay time
before the BLACK 2 output is blanked for a loss of GPS/GLONASS signal lock.
An underline character appears under the selected digit. The date and time digits
take the following form: HH:MM:SS.
After you select a digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change
the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required. Press the ENTER to
confirm the change.

NOTE. The BLACK 2 output must be configured to be blanked before this delay
will be used. (See page 3-122, GPS7 module BLACK submenu.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–147

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to configure the LTC outputs. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
LTC submenu button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the LTC submenu.

Figure 3-72: GPS7 module LTC submenu

INPUT-OUTPUT. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the function of
LTC1 to INPUT or OUTPUT (if allowed). When LTC is selected as the time of
day reference, LTC1 is forced to be an input.

NOTE. This selection is not available on earlier GPS7 modules that do not have
the REF IN input connector.

3–148 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

TYPE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the following
LTC output signal formats:
Table 3-23: GPS7 module LTC output signal formats
Format Rate Delay range
23.98 24 fps at 23.98 Hz rate ±20.85 ms
24 24 fps at 24 Hz rate ±20.83 ms
25 25 fps at 25 Hz rate ±20.00 ms
30 30 fps at 30 Hz rate ±16.67 ms
30 DF 30 fps drop frame at 29.97 Hz ±16.68 ms
rate

SOURCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the following
LTC signal sources The default value is Local (DST).
Disable: Disables the LTC outputs.
Local (DST): Uses the local time of day with Daylight Saving Time offset
as the timecode.
Local (No DST): Uses the local time of day without Daylight Saving Time
offset as the timecode.
UTC: Uses Coordinated Universal Time as the timecode.
Program Time: Uses the Program Time counter as the timecode.

OFFSET. Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select a digit in the LTC offset value to change. An underline character
appears under the selected offset digit. The time digits take the following form:
HH:MM:SS:FF.
After you select an offset digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
change the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required for your offset.
Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change.

NOTE. The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to
±23:59 hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones
in the range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use
ST309 data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined
programmed offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12
to +13 hours.

TIMING. Press the ENTER button to access the LTC TIMING submenu for the
selected LTC output. (See page 3-150.)

OUTPUT LEVEL. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the signal level
of the selected LTC output between 0.5 V and 5.0 V.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–149

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to set the delay used for all the signal formats. Use the left (◄) or
LTC TIMING submenu right (►) arrow button to set the delay. (See Table 3-23.) Press the ENTER button
to confirm the selection. The following figure shows the LTC TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-73: GPS7 module LTC TIMING submenu

GPS7 module Use this menu to select the function that will be performed when a signal is
GPI submenu received on the GPI input. The signal is normally pulled high by an internal
resistor, and will trigger the selected function when pulled low. The following
figure shows the GPI submenu.

Figure 3-74: GPS7 module GPI submenu

Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the following settings:
NONE: Disables the GPI input.
Reset Program Time: Resets the Program Time counter.
Reacquire Position: Reacquires the GPS/GLONASS signal. At least 60
readings from four satellites are required to establish and save a new averaged
position.
Jam Sync: When in GPS mode, performs an immediate jam sync (which can
also be done from the JAM SYNC submenu). (See page 3-143.)
When in VITC time mode, performs an immediate jam sync and sets the
instrument time from the input timecode.
Both actions require that the input timecode has been valid for 100 continuous
frames. In VITC mode, this input is equivalent to executing set commands
from both the Jam Sync menu and the Time of Day synchronize function.

3–150 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to select which alarm will trigger a signal output on the selected
GPO submenu GPI output. The output is an open collector with a weak pull up, so when it is
asserted, the output will be low. The following figure shows the GPO submenu.

Figure 3-75: GPS7 module GPO submenu

Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the following settings:
NONE: Disables the selected GPI output.
GPS Signal Warning (<Figure of Merit level>): Output goes high when
the GPS/GLONASS signal quality reaches the warning level set in the
GPS SETUP submenu. (See page 3-130.) Refer to GPS Signal Quality
(Figure of Merit) for more information about GPS signal quality levels. (See
page 3-105.)
Loss of Lock: Output goes low when a GPS/GLONASS or genlock loss of
lock occurs. A loss of lock alarm is triggered when the GPS/GLONASS signal
falls below the user defined threshold after the delay time has been exceeded.
Alarm Time: A time of day or counter alarm is triggered for one second
when the specified time is reached on the specified counter.
Near Loss of Genlock: Output goes low when the genlock frequency is near
the end of the oven oscillator tuning range. This can happen if the input signal
is too far from the correct frequency. This could also indicate that the oven
oscillator is near its end of life and the instrument needs to be serviced.
No Genlock Detected: Output goes low when no Genlock signal is detected.

NOTE. The GPIO alarms are active for the currently selected reference. For
example, GPS specific alarms assert only if GPS is the selected reference and
the same for Genlock specific alarms. If the selected reference is Internal, then
only the Alarm Time output can be used.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–151

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module Use this menu to view operation parameters for the GPS7 module. Because many
DIAGNOSTICS submenu sync sources are never turned off, it makes sense to check them periodically.
These menus allow access to some internal nodes to forewarn of impending
problems. Module diagnostics provide status information only and do not affect
operating behavior. The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu.

Figure 3-76: GPS7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu

TEMPERATURES. This diagnostic displays the temperature of the GPS receiver

on the GPS7 module.

NOTE. For GPS7 modules with a GPS/GLONASS receiver, the temperature

readout is N/A because there is no temperature sensor on the receiver. (See
page 3-102, How to determine which GPS receiver is installed in your GPS7
module.)

TUNE. This diagnostic displays the following:

Phase – The phase between the GPS pulse per second and the internal master
time. A Tektronix Customer Service Representative may request these values
for troubleshooting installation issues, should they occur.
DAC – The DAC code that is tuning the oscillator. Useful for checking if a
unit is getting close to the end of the oven oscillator tune range.
GPS lock indicator – Displays the GPS/GLONASS lock state. When Boot is
displayed, it means the function is still in special modes needed to get started.
When Coarse is displayed, it means the function is still tracking significant
changes in the timing. When Fine is displayed, it means the function has
stabilized to the point that the loop only needs to make small changes.

VOLTAGE MON 1. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, Warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

VOLTAGE MON 2. This diagnostic measures a voltage divider between a positive

and negative supply. If this diagnostic result is outside the nominal range,
Warning appears, which means that the instrument should be serviced.

3–152 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

PHASE DET RAMPS. This diagnostic monitors voltage ramps used in the phase
detector. If these voltage ramps are outside the nominal range, Warning appears,
which means that the instrument should be serviced.

NOTE. The following diagnostics (ADC BUS, GENLOCK INPUT, LTC

POS INPUT, and LTC NEG INPUT) are available only in modules with the
BLACK 1 / REF IN connector.

ADC BUS. This diagnostic displays the condition of the Genlock input circuit:
Stuck – A 12-bit display showing the bits stuck high (H), low (L), or OK (-).
Short – A 12-bit display showing any shorted adjacent lines (SS) (-).

NOTE. For all bits to move, the correct signal must be applied.

GENLOCK INPUT. This diagnostic displays the following:

Min – The minimum value from the genlock ADC for the present input signal.
Max – The maximum value from the genlock ADC for the present input signal.

LTC POS INPUT. This diagnostic displays the following:

Min (Raw) – The minimum raw ADC values of the positive LTC input.
Max (Raw) – The maximum raw ADC values of the positive LTC input.

LTC NEG INPUT. This diagnostic displays the following:

Min (Raw) – The minimum raw ADC values of the negative LTC input.
Max (Raw) – The maximum raw ADC values of the negative LTC input.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–153

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

GPS7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the GPS7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-24: GPS7 module factory default settings

Submenu
Menu item name item name Settings
REFERENCE
SOURCE GPS Signal
LOSS LOCK Stay at current frequency
ACTION
HOLDOVER Stay legal
RECOVERY

3–154 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Table 3-24: GPS7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Submenu
Menu item name item name Settings
SELECT OUTPUT
Black 1 INPUT-OUTPUT Output (if allowed)
Black 2 (Black 1 only)
NOTE. INPUT-OUTPUT selection for Black 1 is
Black 3 not available on earlier GPS7 modules without the
REF IN input connector.
FORMAT NTSC
Field Disable
Reference
NOTE. This setting appears for non-HD formats
only.
TIMING Vertical: 0 lines
(offset) Horizontal Coarse: 0 μs
Horizontal Fine: 0 ns
TIMECODE Source: Disable
Offset: + 00:00:00:00
30 Drop: Enable 30 Drop Frame
VITC
VITC 1
Output: Disable
Line Number: 14
VITC 2
Output: Disable
Line Number: 16
BLANK ON No
REFERENCE
UNLOCK
(Black 2 only)
HD Non-integer
TRI-LEVEL
SYNC RATE
GPS SETUP Antenna Power: Off
Position: Fixed
GPS Constellation: GPS & GLONASS
NOTE. The GPS Constellation selection appears
only for a GPS7 module with a GPS/GLONASS
receiver that is installed in a TG8000 with firmware
version 1.6 or later.

Signal Warning (threshold) :

6 – Locked >- - - - -

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–155

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module

Table 3-24: GPS7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Submenu
Menu item name item name Settings
TIME SETUP
SELECT TIME OF DAY menu
MENU Source: GPS Signal
Internal: 2008-01-01 00:00:00
TIME ZONE OFFSET menu
+ 00:00
DST SCHEDULE menu
Enable: Off
PROGRAM TIME menu
Setup: Initial Time: 00:00:00
JAM SYNC menu
Enable: ON
LEAP SECOND menu
Setup: Scheduled Time: 00:00:00
ALARM TIME menu
Enable: Off
Setup: Alarm Time: 00:00:00
ALARM DELAY menu
GPO Loss of Lock: 00:00:10
GPO Signal Warning: 00:00:10
Black 2 Blank On Unlock: 00:00:10
SELECT LTC
LTC 1 INPUT-OUTPUT Output (if allowed)
LTC 2 (LTC 1 only)
NOTE. INPUT-OUTPUT selection for LTC 1 is
LTC 3 not available on earlier GPS7 modules without the
LTC 4 REF IN input connector.
TYPE 30 fps drop frame
SOURCE Local (DST)
OFFSET + 00:00:00:00
TIMING Delay: 0.00 ms
OUTPUT Level: 2.0 Volt
LEVEL
SELECT GPIO
INPUT 1 Trigger Select: None
OUTPUT 1 Alarm Select: None
OUTPUT 2

3–156 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s
SDI Video Generator module. Refer to the following locations for additional
information about this module:
HD3G7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors.
(See page 2-15.)
HD3G7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the
module is functional. (See page 1-36.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–157

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module product description

The HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module can be operated in either
of the following two modes:
Generator: The module can output 3 Gb/s SDI and 1.5 Gb/s HD-SDI video
test signals in a variety of formats, including both Level A and Level B
mapping structures for 3G-SDI signals. (See page 3-160, To select the
Generator mode on the HD3G7 module.)
Converter: The module can convert a number of HD-SDI input signal formats
to a variety of 3G-SDI output signal formats, with up to 32 channels embedded
digital audio and ancillary data copied from input signal to output signal. (See
page 3-162, To select the Converter mode on the HD3G7 module.)
The module provides the following features:
Two serial digital outputs for 1.5 Gb/s and 3 Gb/s signals.
One HD-SDI input for use as the converter input.
One clock/frame/line trigger output.
Generates test signals in many formats, with both 3G-SDI Level A and
Level B mapping structures supported.
Standard test signals, including SMPTE color bars and SDI pathological test
patterns.
Zone plate test signals, with full control of all parameters.
Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output
test signal.
Up to 32 channels of 24-bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of
48 kHz.
AV Timing mode.
Timing adjustment anywhere in the frame for the output. The clock resolution
is 6.75 ns (1/148.5 MHz) for fast progressive signals (50p, 59.94p, and 60p).
Clock resolution for other signals is 13.5 ns.
Timecode generator with ATC-LTC or ATC-VITC.
Full remote control using Ethernet interface.
SMPTE 352M payload identifier.
User-defined ancillary data packet.

3–158 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

How to operate the HD3G7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
no error messages appear on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below:

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 module main menu
appears as shown below:

5. Select the frame rate using the FORMAT button, or select the test signal using
the test signal front panel buttons, such as COLOR BARS or LINEARITY.
To learn how to set the instrument to convertor mode, refer to the following
page. (See page 3-160, To select an output signal on the HD3G7 module.)
6. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus. For example, when the OUTPUT MODE menu is
displayed, pressing the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button allows you to select
between output modes such as Level A, Level B, HD, etc.
Refer to HD3G7 module main menu for detailed information about the main
menu items and the submenu items. (See page 3-185.)

NOTE. In addition to the factory installed signal sets, there are enhanced signal
sets available for the HD3G7 module. These signal sets are located on the
TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied with your
instrument. (See page 3-171, To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–159

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

To select an output signal on the HD3G7 module

The HD3G7 module has two modes of operation: converter or generator. To
select an output signal, perform the appropriate procedure below for your selected
mode of operation.

To select the Generator Use this mode to generate either 3 Gb/s SDI or 1.5 Gb/s HD-SDI video test signals.
mode on the HD3G7 1. Select the output mode for the signal. (See page 3-163, To select the output
module mode on the HD3G7 module.)
2. Select the signal format for the output signal. (See page 3-164, To select the
signal format on the HD3G7 module.)
3. Select the sample structure and depth for the output signal. (See page 3-164,
To select the sample structure and depth on the HD3G7 module.)
4. Select the test signal that you want to generate. (See page 3-165, To select the
test signal on the HD3G7 module.)

Table 3-25: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G level A (1920 × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr 4:2:2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X
GBR 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GBR+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-26: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level A (1280 × 720)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:4:4 10b X X X X X X X X
YCbCr+A 4:4:4 10b X X X X X X X X
GBR 4:4:4 10b X X X X X X X X
GBR+A 4:4:4 10b X X X X X X X X

Table 3-27: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level A (2K × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
XYZ 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X
GBR X X X X X X X X X X

3–160 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-28: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr 4:2:2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X
YCbCr+A 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GBR 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GBR+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-29: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level B (2K × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
XYZ 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X
GBR X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-30: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-31: HD3G7 module Generator mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 720)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X

Table 3-32: HD3G7 module Generator mode – HD-SDI (1920 × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-33: HD3G7 module Generator mode – HD-SDI (1280 × 720)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–161

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

To select the Converter Use this mode to convert an HD-SDI signal to a 3G-SDI signal.
mode on the HD3G7 1. Choose a compatible input and output from the following three tables, and
module then connect the input signal to the SDI IN connector on the HD3G7 module.
2. Configure the output mode, signal format, and sample structure as described
on the following pages. (See page 3-163, To select the output mode on the
HD3G7 module.)
3. Press the OTHER test signal button to initiate the converter mode.

NOTE. Press any other test signal button to cancel the converter operation and
return the instrument to generator mode.

Table 3-34: HD3G7 module Converter mode – 3G Level A 1920 × 1080 formats
HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf
59.94 50 60 23.98 24 25 29.97 30 50 59.94 60 23.98 24 25 29/97 30
Output Format 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
Output sample
structure
YCbCr 4:4:4 12b
10b Not available
YCbCr 4:2:2 12b
10b X X X
GBR 4:4:4 12b
10b Not available
GBR+A 10b

Table 3-35: HD3G7 module Converter mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)

HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf
59.94 50 60 23.98 24 25 29.97 30 50 59.94 60 23.98 24 25 29/97 30
Output Format 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
Output sample
structure
YCbCr 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr 4:2:2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X
YCbCr+A 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

3–162 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-35: HD3G7 module Converter mode – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080) (cont.)
HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf
59.94 50 60 23.98 24 25 29.97 30 50 59.94 60 23.98 24 25 29/97 30
Output Format 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
GBR 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GBR+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-36: HD3G7 module Converter mode – 3G Level B (2×HD 1920 × 1080)
HD Input Signal 1080i 1080p 1080i 1080psf
59.94 50 60 23.98 24 25 29.97 30 50 59.94 60 23.98 24 25 29/97 30
Output Format 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
Output sample
structure
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

To select the output mode You can select how the generated 1.5 Gb/s or 3 Gb/s serial data stream is
on the HD3G7 module constructed. This selection is available in the HD3G7 OUTPUT MODE
submenu. Perform the following steps to select the output mode:
1. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HD3G7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

2. Press the down (▼) arrow button to access the output mode menu, as shown
below:

Note the dot at the start of the second line and the return symbol at the end
of the second line. The dot indicates that this is the currently selected output
mode, and the return symbol indicates that you can press the ENTER button
to select a new displayed output mode.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–163

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to scroll through the available
output modes:
3G–Level A (1920 × 1080)
3G-Level A (1280 × 720)
3G–Level A (2K × 1080)
3G–Level B (1920 × 1080)
3G–Level B (2K × 1080)
3G–Level B (2×HD 1080)
3G-Level B (2×HD 720)
HD (1920 × 1080)
HD (1280 × 720)

4. Press the ENTER button to select the desired output mode. Note that the
dot will appear in front of the output mode on the display, to indicate that
it is now the selected output mode.

To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format:
on the HD3G7 module 1. Press the FORMAT button. The menu display changes as follows:

2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the FORMAT button
repeatedly, to select one of the signal formats, and then press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection. The dot will appear at the left of the second
line to indicate that the format has been selected.
3. Press the BACK button to exit FORMAT mode.

To select the sample There are several sample structures to choose from when the output mode is set to
structure and depth on the a non-fast-progressive format. Press the down (▼) arrow button to navigate to
HD3G7 module the sample structure/depth selection shown below:

Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to scroll through the available
sample structures:

3G non-fast progressive formats (1080 line)

• RGB 444 12b • YCbCr 444 10b
• RGB 444 10b • YCbCrA 444 10b
• RGBA 444 10b • YCbCr 422 12b
• YCbCr 444 12b • YCbCrA 422 12b
(Level B mapping only)

3–164 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

3G non-fast progressive formats (1080 line)

3G fast progressive format (1080 line)
• YCbCr 422 10b
3G formats (720 line)
• RGB 444 10b • YCbCr 444 10b
• RGBA 444 10b • YCbCrA 444 10b
2×HD formats (1080 and 720 line)
• YCbCr 422 10b
2K line formats
• XYZ 444 12b • RGB 444 12b
HD format
• YCbCr 422 10b

When the desired sample structure is displayed, press the ENTER button to
select it.

To select the test signal on All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the
the HD3G7 module corresponding test signal buttons. (See Table 3-37.) When the HD3G7 module
is selected and you press any of the front-panel test signal buttons, the selected
signal in the signal set is output. (See Figure 3-77.)

For example, when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button, a signal in
the Color Bars signal set is output. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or
press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal
from the Color Bars signal set.

Figure 3-77: Front-panel test signal buttons

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–165

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the
signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is in generator mode.
Table 3-37: HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
COLOR BAR 100% Color Bars, Eight full-height bars of white, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red,
75% Color Bars (100% White), blue, and black. This pattern is available with three variations, at
75% Color Bars (75% White) 100% value for all bars, at 75% value for colors and 100% for
white, and at 75% value for all bars.
SMPTE EG1 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE EG 1-1990. This pattern includes 75%
color bars, reverse blue bars, −I and +Q sections, black, white,
and pluge sections. Note that this pattern is only available for
YCbCr formats, since the −I and +Q sections contain color
components outside of the legal RGB gamut.
SMPTE RP219 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE RP 219-2002. This pattern is intended for
16×9 aspect ratio displays, with additional elements as compared
to EG1 bars. The HD3G7 implementation includes −I and +Q
sections, but unlike the similar sections in EG1 bars, they have
additional luminance to stay within RGB gamut. The −2% patch of
the pluge section is clipped to 0% black for XYZ formats.
SMPTE EG432-1 Color Accuracy Split-screen color bars using values from SMPTE RP 431-2-2007.
The upper half of the pattern is essentially the same as 100%
color bars, corresponding to the “–1” set of colors defined in Table
A.4 of the RP. The lower half is a set of desaturated color bars,
corresponding to the “–2” color patch values.
LINEARITY 5 Step Staircase, Series of vertical bars of equal steps on all three channels. These
10 Step Staircase patterns are color-independent so they will appear differently in
YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ color spaces. Since the range of valid levels
is not evenly divisible by 5 or 10 steps, the first and last bars
slightly exceed the valid range, but are still well within legal limits.
For example, the valid range for 10-bit YCbCr formats is from
64–940 for the Y channel (876 steps) and from 64–960 for the
Cb/Cr channels (896 steps). Therefore, the level of the first bar is
62 and the level of the last bar is 942/962, which results in equal
step sizes across the pattern.
Valid Ramp, The Valid Ramp is a matrix of three different ramps, designed
Y Valid Ramp, to test the video component channels for YCbCr, and for gamut
B-Y Valid Ramp, range testing in all color spaces. These three ramps are also
R-Y Valid Ramp available as individual patterns that span the picture width. First,
the Y Valid Ramp spans from black to white, across the valid
range of the luminance (Y) channel. Next, the B−Y Valid Ramp
spans from yellow to cyan, across the valid range of the Cb color
difference channel. Last, the R−Y Valid Ramp spans from cyan to
red, across the valid range of the Cr color difference channel.
3 Channel Ramp Wide ramp from the lower valid value to the upper valid value for
all three channels. This pattern is color-independent, so it will
appear differently in YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ color spaces. On each
side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking level
(black) and at the valid level.

3–166 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-37: HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
Limit Ramp Wide ramp that spans the legal limit range (4–1019 for 10-bit
formats and 16–4079 for 12-bit formats) for all three channels. On
each side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking
level, the valid level, and the limit level.
Shallow Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of shallow ramps that together span the range
between legal limits (4–1019 for 10-bit formats and 16–4079 for
12-bit formats). Each bit value is held for 16 pixels for 10-bit
formats and for 4 pixels for 12-bit formats. There is overlap
between the end of one ramp and the start of the next ramp.
Color Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of ramps across the colors available in the valid
RGB gamut. Each set of ramps transitions between adjacent
hues: red–yellow–green–cyan–magenta–blue–red. From the top
of the pattern, the first three rows of ramps are at 25%, 50%, and
75% saturation. The fourth row of ramps includes fully saturated
colors at 100% value. The next three rows of ramps are at 75%,
50%, and 25% value. The bottom row of ramps is monochrome.
FLAT FIELD 0% Flat Field (Black), Full-frame monochrome flat fields. The factory installed patterns
50% Flat Field, include 0% (black), 50%, and 100% (white).
100% Flat Field (White) You can install extended signal sets, which include additional
patterns for the remaining 10% increments. (See page 3-171, To
install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets.)
100% Red Field, 100% Green Field, Full-frame color flat fields. The factory installed patterns include
100% Blue Field, 100% Cyan Field, each of six colors (red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow)
100% Magenta Field, 100% Yellow Field at 100% value.
You can install enhanced signal sets, which include additional
patterns for these six colors at 75% value. (See page 3-171, To
install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal sets.)
10% Flat Field, 20% Flat Field, Full-frame monochrome flat fields available in individual patterns
30% Flat Field, 40% Flat Field, from 10% to 90% in 10% increments.
60% Flat Field, 70% Flat Field, These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets. You
80% Flat Field, 90% Flat Field must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals.
(See page 3-171, To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal
sets.)
75% Red Field, 75% Green Field, Full-frame color flat fields available in individual patterns of 75%
75% Blue Field, 75% Cyan Field, value for each of six colors (red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and
75% Magenta Field, 75% Yellow Field yellow).
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets. You
must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals.
(See page 3-171, To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal
sets.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–167

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-37: HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
Black to White-1, Black to White-2, Full-frame monochrome flat fields representing the individual
Black to White-3, Black to White-4, steps in the SMPTE EG 432–1 step-scale patterns available under
Black to White-5, Black to White-6, the MONITOR button.
Black to White-7, Black to White-8, These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets. You
Black to White-9, Black to White-10, must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals.
Black to Gray-1, Black to Gray-2, (See page 3-171, To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal
Black to Gray-3, Black to Gray-4, sets.)
Black to Gray-5, Black to Gray-6,
Black to Gray-7, Black to Gray-8,
Black to Gray-9, Black to Gray-10
Red-1 Field, Red-2 Field, Full-frame color flat fields representing the individual colors in
Green-1 Field, Green-2 Field, the SMPTE EG 432–1 color-accuracy patterns available under
Blue-1 Field, Blue-2 Field, the COLOR BAR button.
Cyan-1 Field, Cyan-2 Field, These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets. You
Magenta-1 Field, Magenta-2 Field, must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals.
Yellow-1 Field, Yellow-2 Field (See page 3-171, To install the HD3G7 module enhanced signal
sets.)
MULTIBURST —— No test signals are currently available for the MULTIBURST signal
set.
SWEEP Circle, Diagonal Sine, Zone plate test signal with real-time parametric controls. (See
H Sine, H Sweep, V Sine, V Sweep, page 3-172, HD3G7 module zone plate signals.)
Custom-1, Custom-2
MONITOR ChromaDuMonde Color reference chart, used with permission of DSC Laboratories.
The pattern consists of a series of DSC standard color patches
representing the six primary colors, 18 evenly spaced intermediate
colors, and four skin tone reference patches. The 24 primary
and intermediate colors will show as a hexagonal shape on a
vectorscope display, providing a reference for comparison with a
camera-generated image of a physical DSC ChromaDuMonde
chart. The pattern also includes an 11-step crossed grayscale
section and a center section with 0% black and 100% white
patches.
SMPTE 303M Color Reference Color reference chart per SMPTE 303M, also known as the
GretagMacbeth ColorChecker® chart. Note that cyan patch #18
cannot be reproduced properly in the RGB and XYZ color spaces
because the red component lies at approximately −14%, which
exceeds legal limits for RGB formats. This patch will appear as
a cyan and black checkerboard pattern, where the cyan patches
are of a different hue than the full cyan patch as seen in YCbCr
formats because the red component is clipped at 0%. The color
values used from SMPTE 303M are those with respect to the D65
illuminant.

3–168 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-37: HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
Black-White Step Scale, Gray scale patterns per §6.9 of SMPTE EG 432-1-2007. A series
Black-Dark Gray Step Scale of ten different monochrome patches at increasing luminance
values is centered on a gray background, to verify gray scale
tracking. The ten steps of the black to white scale are normalized
gamma-corrected values of 1/10 to 1 and the ten steps of the
black to dark gray scale are 1/31 to 10/31.
Pluge and Luma Reference Includes two elements to assist in black and white balance. The
left side of the pattern contains a pluge pattern, with three vertical
bars of −2%, 0%, and +2% black. The right side of the pattern
contains four gray boxes corresponding to luminance levels of
110 mV, 200 mV, 450 mV, and 700 mV (100% white) in the analog
domain. The −2% patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0%
black for XYZ formats.
Checkerboard 4×4 grid of alternating black and white patches, used to measure
intra-frame contrast per §6.8 of SMPTE SMPTE EG 432-1-2007.
Window White square centered on a black background. This pattern can
be used as an alternative to a full-field white pattern when it
is desirable for the average picture level (APL) to approximate
normal program content.
Production Aperture Includes single-pixel wide lines at the extreme edges of the active
video area, marking the complete production aperture. Vertical
lines are implemented as single-sample pulses with no edge
filtering, so this pattern is not legal as a broadcast signal.
Clean Aperture Grid pattern per SMPTE RP 187-1995. The clean aperture
is marked by the outer markers, with overscan markers at
approximate 2.5% increments. The center 4:3 section of a 16:9
image has an additional set of aperture and overscan markers.
Each line on the grid is implemented with two horizontal lines or a
double-width pulse centered on two samples, because the actual
aperture boundary and the center of the image each lie midway
between lines and samples.
Convergence Grid pattern of equal size squares, with a dot at the center of each
square. Each line and dot is implemented as a single horizontal
line or single-sample pulse. This pattern is used to verify
convergence of RGB channels, and no color fringing should be
visible on the white lines and dots when the channels are aligned.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–169

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-37: HD3G7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
PULSE BAR 2T Pulse and Bar Two pulses of 2T half-amplitude width and full-scale amplitude. A
positive pulse is added to a base level at the minimum valid value,
and a negative pulse is added to a bar level at the maximum valid
value. The 2T pulse is used for Short Time response testing and
the bar is used for Line Time response testing.
Color Pulses Eight color pulses of 2T half-amplitude width upon black and white
backgrounds. The upper half of the pattern has positive pulses on
a black background, testing each combination of the three color
channels. The lower half of the pattern has a white background,
so negative pulses are used to result in the same line colors. For
example, the yellow pulse in the upper half is 100% red plus 100%
green, resulting in yellow on a black background. At the same
horizontal location in the lower half, a pulse of −100% blue added
to the white background also results in a yellow line.
TIMING Co-siting Pulse One single-sample wide pulse in the center of the image, used to
show the timing relationship and alignment between chroma and
luma channels. Different amplitudes are used to distinguish the
three channels.
SDI Equalizer Test Full-field equalizer test pattern per SMPTE RP 198-1998. This
pattern consists of alternate 10-bit words, 300h and 198h,
regardless of the current sampling structure and format. For
10-bit 4:2:2 YCbCr HD-SDI formats, the Y samples carry the
198h words and the Cb/Cr samples carry the 300h words,
resulting in a magenta-shaded field for this pattern. For other
formats, these same 10-bit word values will result in different color
representations. This pattern also includes the polarity control
word, such that the first sample in the active picture in every other
frame is 190h instead of 198h.
PLL Test Full-field phase-locked loop test pattern per SMPTE RP 198-1998.
This pattern consists of alternate 10-bit words, 200h and 110h,
regardless of the current sampling structure and format. It appears
as a 24% gray field in 10-bit 4:2:2 YCbCr formats, but as different
colors in other formats.
SDI Matrix Matrix pattern, with the equalizer test pattern (300h 198h) in the
upper half of the field and the PLL test pattern (200h 110h) in the
lower half of the field.
OTHER —— For 3G output formats only. Use this button to select the converter
mode of operation. Press any other test signal button to return
to generator mode operation.(See page 3-162, To select the
Converter mode on the HD3G7 module.)

3–170 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

To install the HD3G7 In addition to the factory installed signal sets, there are enhanced signal sets
module enhanced signal available for the FLAT FIELD button on the HD3G7 module. These signals are
sets located on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied
with your instrument.
Perform the following steps to install the enhanced signal sets:
1. Install the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD into the DVD drive
on your computer.
2. Using the DVD browser, navigate to the following directory: Test Signals >
HD3G7 Signal Library > Enhanced Signal Set.
The Enhanced Signal Set directory contains the following files:
Monochrome Fields.xml — includes all monochrome flat fields from 0%
to 100% in 10% increments.
Color Fields.xml — includes color fields for six primary and secondary
colors at both 100% and 75% values.
SMPTE RP431-2 Color Patches.xml — includes full field patterns for
each of the Black-White and Black-Dark Gray steps, plus the “–1” and
“–2” color patches.
3. Use FTP to locate and copy the desired signal set file(s) from the DVD to
the HD3G7/SIGNAL directory on your TG8000 generator. Instructions for
using FTP are located in the How to transfer files using FTP section of this
manual. (See page 2-67.)

NOTE. If you load the Monochrome Fields.xml and Color Fields.xml enhanced
signal sets on your TG8000 generator, you can delete the Flat Fields.xml file from
the HD3G7/SIGNAL directory, since it contains a duplicate copy of a subset of the
Monochrome Fields.xml and Color Fields.xml patterns.

4. After you load the new signal set file(s) on the TG8000 generator, you must
either reboot the TG8000 or perform the following SCPI command before the
new signals will be available:
OUTPut[1/2]:SYNThesizer:SIGNal:BUILd
This command rebuilds the XML signal library and will detect any newly
added signals.

To reinstall the factory default signal sets. To reinstall the factory default signal
sets, perform the previous procedure to install the signal set files from the
following directory on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD: Module
Test Signal Library > HD3G7 Signal Library > Standard Signal Set.
After you reinstall the standard signal sets, delete the enhanced signal set file(s)
from the HD3G7/SIGNAL directory, and then reboot the instrument.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–171

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module zone plate signals

Zone plate video test patterns, or simply “zone plates”, have become important
tools for the evaluation of modern video processing systems and techniques.
They are called zone plates because the classical circular pattern looks like an
optical zone plate (which uses the principles of Fresnel diffraction to focus and
intensify light). Today, however, the name has been applied to a wide variety of
stationary and “moving” test patterns.

The following figure shows two enlarged optical zone plates. The white areas
are transparent and the black areas are opaque. The precise spacing of the rings
focuses and intensifies light that passes through the plate.

Figure 3-78: Optical zone plates (enlarged)

The HD3G7 module generates electronic zone plate signals, and can be configured
to provide a near infinite number of test patterns. Six basic patterns are predefined
(Circle, Diagonal, Horizontal Sine, Horizontal Sweep, Vertical Sine, and Vertical
Sweep) for convenience. These patterns all have an overall, or pattern control,
parameter.
Pattern control parameters are unique to the specific predefined signals, and are
only found as the first item of the specific signal menu. User-created zone plate
signals saved as Custom–1 or Custom–2 do not have pattern control parameters.
The dependent parameters are common to all of the zone plate signals, and are
found below the pattern control parameter in the menu for each zone plate signal.
Altering the pattern control parameter will make changes to the test signal while
maintaining the basic pattern. For example, the pattern control parameter for the
Circle zone plate signal is the Circle Frequency parameter. The Circle Frequency
parameter controls the maximum frequency of the circle. You may alter the Circle
Frequency at will, and the system will adjust four other dependent parameters to
maintain the pattern as a circle. However, if you alter the underlying dependent
parameters individually the pattern may change to be something other than a circle.
After changes have been made you can save the new signal as a custom zone
plate signal.

3–172 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

To select a zone plate Perform the following steps to select a zone plate signal for output:
signal on the HD3G7 1. Press the SWEEP test signal button to enter the zone plate signal menu. Once
module you enter the zone plate signal menu, the HD3G7 generator module will start
to output the displayed zone plate signal. The dot in front of the signal name,
on the second line of the display, indicates the selected default signal.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a zone plate signal from
the provided six standard zone plate signals (Circle, Diagonal, Horizontal
Sine, Horizontal Sweep, Vertical Sine, or Vertical Sweep), or from the two
user-defined signals (Custom-1 Zoneplate or Custom-2 Zoneplate).
The zone plate signal whose name is displayed will continue to be output until
a different signal is selected, even if you press the BACK button.
If you select a different signal, such as a color bar signal, and then press the
SWEEP button again, the last displayed zone plate signal will be shown as
the default and will again be the output signal.

To modify a zone plate There are times when a specific test case requires a modified zone plate signal.
signal on the HD3G7 By making and saving changes to the zone plate parameters you can create a new
module signal that is based on the selected signal, and then save that new signal. Changes
you make affect only the new signal; the standard zone plate signal used as a
basis for the new signal is not changed.
Before making changes, make sure you are familiar with both the zone plate
pattern control parameters (below) and zone plate pattern dependent parameters.
(See page 3-177, HD3G7 module zone plate dependent parameters.)
Perform the following steps to change a zone plate signal's parameters:
1. Press the SWEEP button to enter the zone plate signal menu.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a zone plate signal
from the provided six standard zone plate signals (Circle, Diagonal, H Sine,
H Sweep, V Sine, and V Sweep), or two user-defined signals (Custom–1
Zoneplate or Custom–2 Zoneplate).

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–173

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

3. When the desired zone plate signal is displayed, press the ENTER button to
enter the zone plate parameter menu. If Circle Zoneplate was displayed,
for example, the display changes to:

which shows the zone plate signal (CIRCLE SWEEP) and the pattern control
parameter (Circle Frequency). As mentioned earlier, each of the standard zone
plate signals have a pattern control parameter that is unique to that signal:
Zone plate signal Pattern control parameter
Circle Circle frequency: [x] c/aph 1
Diagonal Diag. Frequency: [x] c/aph 1
H Sine Horiz. Frequency: [x] MHz
H Sweep H Sweep Frequency: [x] MHz
V Sine Vert. Frequency: [x] c/aph 1
V Sweep V Sweep Frequency: [x] c/aph 1
1 c/aph = cycles per active picture height

4. While the pattern control parameter is displayed, you can use the left (◄)
or right (►) arrow button to modify it. This will modify the signal while
maintaining the basic pattern.

NOTE. Press the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons at the same time to reset
any parameter.

5. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the parameters
menu which, for the predefined signals, starts with it's unique pattern control
parameter as shown in the table above, and then continues through the list
of dependent parameters. At each parameter, whether it's a pattern control
parameter or a dependent parameter, you can use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to modify it.
6. When you are done altering parameters, scroll to the Save As: selection, at
the bottom of the menu and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select User Custom 1 or User Custom 2.
7. Press the ENTER button to save the modified signal.

3–174 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module zone plate pattern control parameters

NOTE. Zone plate variations can be sinusoidal, square, or triangular. These
discussions of zone plated parameters will refer to sinusoidal variations for
convenience.

Zone plate patterns are made up of sinusoidal variations in luminance, with the
“peaks” of the sine waves resulting in white areas on the video screen and the
wave “troughs” shown as gray or black. The cycles can occur in all three of the
video dimensions: horizontally, or along each line of the picture; vertically, or
“down” the video frame; and temporally (with time). The three dimensions are
often referred to by the shorthand designations of X, Y, and T.
The luminance of any point in the picture, physically on the screen and in time, is
determined by the value of sine at that particular point; the value of sine follows
from the phase of the cycle at that point; and (by the definition of a zone plate)
the phase of any point is determined by the equation:

where x, y, and t are the coordinates of the point in question and kФ, kX, kY, kT,
kXT, kYT, kXY, kX2, kY2, and kT2 are constants.
All HD3G7 zone plate patterns are defined with coefficients of ten parameters that
correspond to the constants in the above equation. Note that while the possibilities
are virtually endless, most common zone plates are defined with only one or two
parameters, while the coefficients of the remaining parameters are kept at zero.
The HD3G7 Generator module generates six standard zone plate signals: circle
frequency, diagonal frequency, horizontal sine frequency, horizontal sweep
frequency, vertical sine frequency, and vertical sweep frequency. Each standard
zone plate signal has a pattern control parameter. (See Table 3-38.) This pattern
control parameter is unique to the zone plate signal it is associated with.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–175

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

When you first enter the zone plate parameters menu for a signal, the pattern
control parameter for that signal is displayed. The pattern control parameter
controls the basic pattern frequency by adjusting the dependent parameters. For
example, if you change the CIRCLE SWEEP Circle Frequency, the generator
adjusts four of the dependent parameters to keep the circle round.
Table 3-38: HD3G7 module zone plate pattern control parameters
Zone plate
signal Pattern control parameter Parameter definition
Circle Circle Frequency (maximum c/aph) The circle frequency is actually the equivalent of the
maximum vertical sinusoid frequency at the very top
and bottom of the screen (see the discussion of the KY 2
parameter). Adjusting the circle frequency has the simple
effect of increasing or decreasing the maximum frequency
at the outer edges of the pattern. However, this adjustment
actually changes the coefficients of four of the zone plate
parameters to keep the pattern round and centered on the
screen.
Diagonal Diagonal Frequency (equivalent c/aph) The diagonal frequency is times the vertical and
horizontal frequencies (c/aph). Adjusting the diagonal sine
frequency changes both the KX and KY coefficients.
H Sine Horizontal Frequency (MHz) The horizontal frequency reported on the display is the real
time frequency of the sine wave that causes the vertical
bar pattern. The maximum frequency is half of the clock
frequency used by the generator for the active video
standard (for example, 74.25 MHz/2 = 37.125 MHz).
H Sweep H Sweep Frequency (maximum MHz, or For horizontal sweep frequencies up to half of the video
multiple) standard’s sampling frequency, fs, the displayed value is the
maximum (or swept to) frequency of the sine wave. For
numbers greater than fs/2, dividing the displayed value by
the sampling frequency will give the number of complete
DC–(fs/2)–DC cycles per line. For example, in a standard
with sampling frequency of 74.25 MHz, a horizontal sweep
frequency of 148.5 MHz will result in approximately two
complete frequency sweeps across the picture.
V Sine Vertical Frequency (c/aph) The vertical frequency is actually the KY coefficient. The
maximum frequency (c/aph) corresponds to the number of
active video lines in a field of the active video standard.
For example, when an 1125-line system is output (which
has 1080 active lines), KY can be any value between –540
and 540.
V Sweep V Sweep Frequency (maximum c/aph, or The vertical sweep frequency is actually the KY 2 coefficient.
multiple) For numbers greater than maximum, dividing the displayed
value by that maximum will give twice the number
of complete DC-max-DC sweeps per field (sweeps =
(KY2/KY)/2). For example, in a standard with 1080 lines per
field, a vertical sweep frequency of 2160 c/aph2 would result
in one complete frequency sweep down the picture.

3–176 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module zone plate dependent parameters

Below the pattern control parameter in each of the parameter menus are the
dependent parameters. The dependent parameters are the same for all the zone
plate patterns. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the
parameter menu. If desired, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change
the parameter.

NOTE. Press the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons at the same time to reset
any parameter to its default value.

If you adjust any one of the dependent parameters individually, the pattern control
parameter will become invalid, and you will see this message:

The zone plate dependent parameters are discussed here, in the order in which
they appear below the pattern control parameter, when using the down (▼) arrow
button to scroll through the parameter menu. The Custom–1 and Custom–2 signal
selections do not have pattern control parameters, and start with the Zone Plate
Amplitude Parameter.

Zone plate amplitude Display name: ZP Amplitude

parameter Units: mV
Use this parameter to adjust the zone plate signal amplitude from 0.0 mV to
798.0 mV, in 0.5 mV increments. The default value is 700 mV.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–177

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

KX parameter Display name: KX (H Freq.)

Units: cycles/active picture height (c/aph)
KX denotes the initial constant horizontal frequency of the pattern. To see the
effects of changing this coefficient, set a waveform monitor to view the video
lines. Note that the units are cycles per active picture height. The number of
cycles in a line will depend on the width-to-height aspect ratio of the active
format. For example, KX = 9.0 will result in approximately 12 cycles per line in a
format with a 4:3 aspect ratio; the same setting will yield about 16 cycles per line
when the ratio is 16:9.
To estimate the equivalent absolute frequency of the sine wave (i.e., to convert
from c/aph to c/s, or Hz), use the formula

where
Raspect = the aspect ratio (width ÷ height)
Nlines = the number of lines per frame
fframe = the frame rate
Rl:av = the ratio of line length to the length of the active video
The maximum frequency is (±) half of the active format’s sampling frequency. In
formats that use a 74.25 MHz clock, for example, the maximum value of KX will
correspond to a sine frequency of 37.1 MHz.
The Horizontal Sine zone plate, for example, is a “KX-only” zone plate. (See
Figure 3-79.)

Figure 3-79: A “KX-only” zone plate

3–178 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

KX2 parameter Display name: KX^2 (H Sweep.)

Units: c/aph per active picture height (c/aph2)
The KX2 (H Sweep) parameter sets the increase (or decrease) in the horizontal
frequency as a function of position along the video line. When KX2 alone is
applied, the result resembles a common sweep test signal. Again, use a waveform
monitor to look at (all) the video lines to see the effects of KX2. When KX is 0.0,
setting KX2 to 9 will result in the line waveform changing from DC to 9 c/aph in
the width equal to one “active picture height.” As with KX, the ending frequency
will depend on the aspect ratio of the active video format. For example, in a
16:9 format with a KX of –9.0, a KX2 coefficient of 9.0 will cause the waveform
to increase to DC in one “aph.” The frequency will continue to increase to
approximately 7.0 c/aph by the end of the line.
Use this formula to calculate KX and KX2 terms for a sweep with the DC point
at mid-screen:

where Raspect is the aspect ratio (width ÷ height) of the active format.
The Horizontal Sweep zone plate (H Sweep) is a “KX2-only” zone plate. (See
Figure 3-80.)

Figure 3-80: A “KX2-only” zone plate

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–179

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

KXY parameter Display name: KXY (V Ch. H Freq.)

Units: c/aph per active picture height (c/aph2)
The KXY (V Ch. H Freq.) parameter sets the change in horizontal frequency
as a function of the vertical position in the video frame. To see the effects of
this parameter, set the waveform monitor to view one selected line only. Then,
with KXY set to approximately 25 (all other coefficients left at 0.0), look at line
waveforms from top to bottom of the frame. The horizontal frequency increases
slightly on each succeeding line, reaching 25 c/aph on the last line of active video.
The result can be thought of as a vertically arranged “sweep” signal.

KY parameter Display name: KY (V Freq.)

Units: cycles per active picture height (c/aph)
The KY (V Freq.) parameter sets the initial vertical frequency of the pattern (it is
analogous to KX rotated 90° clockwise). To see the effects of this parameter, set
it to a low number and adjust a waveform monitor to view one or two fields of
the HD3G7 output. The variation in the (dc) voltage level from line to line will
give the field waveform the appearance of a sampled sine wave, especially at a
KY of around 5 to 10 c/aph (the sinusoid can become difficult to discern at higher
frequencies). Note that in the Y (vertical) parameters, the c/aph units translate
directly into visible cycles down the frame.
The Vertical Sine zone plate is a “KY-only” zone plate. (See Figure 3-81.)

Figure 3-81: A “KY-only” zone plate

3–180 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

KY2 parameter Display name: KY^2 (V Sweep).

Units: c/aph per active picture height (c/aph2)
The KY2 (V Sweep) parameter sets the increase (or decrease) in vertical frequency
down the frame. (KY2 compares to KX2 as KY compares to KX.) Again, a good way
to see the effect of KY2 is to view the field on a waveform monitor. With KY set to
0.0, a KY2 coefficient of 10 will result in the apparent vertical sine wave changing
from DC to 10 c/aph from the top of the picture to the bottom.
To center the “DC point” at mid-screen, set KY2 to –2 times KY.
The Vertical Sweep zone plate is a “KY2-only” zone plate. (See Figure 3-82.)

Figure 3-82: A “KY2-only” zone plate

K parameter Display name: K (Phase)

Units: cycles
The K∅ parameter is the initial phase of the pattern; it cannot create a pattern
by itself. To see the effects of this adjustment, first set the KX coefficient to
approximately 0.75 and set a waveform monitor to view the line waveform. Then
adjust K∅. The sine wave will begin on each line at the selected point in the
cycle. Note that 0.25 cycle corresponds to a phase of 90 degrees (or π/2 radians);
recall that the sine of 90° is 1.0 and the sine of –90° is –1.0. When K∅ = 0.25,
the pattern will begin in the upper left corner of the screen as white; when K∅
= –0.25, the beginning will be black.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–181

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

KXT parameter Display name: KXT (T Ch. H Freq.)

Units: c/aph per second (c/aph/s)
The KXT (T Ch. H Freq.) parameter controls the change in horizontal sine
frequency over time. Setting KXT to 1.0, for example, causes the horizontal
frequency to increase by one c/aph each second. If KX is 0.0, then the frequency
will be 10 c/aph after ten seconds, 20 c/aph after twenty seconds, and so forth.
The frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format,
then the phase of the signal will “flip” by 180° (the sine wave will become
“negative”) and the frequency will continue to “increase” through DC, when the
cycle will begin again.

KYT parameter Display name: KYT (V Ch. V Freq.)

Units: c/aph per second (c/aph/s)
The KYT (V Ch. V Freq.) parameter controls the change in vertical sine frequency
over time. Setting KYT to 1.0, for example, causes the vertical frequency to
increase by one c/aph each second. If KY is initially 0.0, then the frequency will
be 10 c/aph after ten seconds, 20 c/aph after twenty seconds, and so forth. The
frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format, then
the phase of the signal will “flip” by 180° (the frequency will become “negative”)
and the frequency will continue to increase through DC in a repetitive cycle.

KT parameter Display name: KT (T Freq.)

Units: cycles per second (c/s)
The KT (T Freq.) parameter, if used alone, does not create a “pattern.” Rather, the
entire screen will cycle (sinusoidally) between white and black. The effect will be
similar on either line or field display of a waveform monitor.
Typically, a small KT coefficient is set to add apparent motion to a standard circle,
sine wave, or sweep pattern. To see the picture effects of this parameter, select
any of the standard zone plates and vary KT. Note that the KT coefficient may be
positive or negative; the sign will determine the direction of the pattern’s motion.

KT2 parameter Display name: KT^2 (T Sweep)

Units: cycles per second per second (c/s^2)
The KT2 (T Sweep) parameter sets the change in temporal frequency over time. If
KT is initially 0.0, setting KT 2 to 1.0 will result in an apparent KT of 10.0 after ten
seconds, 20.0 after twenty seconds, and so forth. The temporal frequency will
increase to maximum, return to 0.0, and repeat the cycle as long as the value of
KT 2 remains greater than zero.

3–182 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Y/G/X parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components: the Y component for
a YCbCr sample structure, the G component for a GBR sample structure, or the
X component for an XYZ sample structure. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to set the component to ON or OFF.

Cb/B/Y parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components: the Cb component for
a YCbCr sample structure, the B component for a GBR sample structure, or the
Y component for an XYZ sample structure. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to set the component to ON or OFF.

Cr/R/Z parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components: the Cr component for
a YCbCr sample structure, the R component for a GBR sample structure, or the
Z component for an XYZ sample structure. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to set the component to ON or OFF.

NOTE. When the sampling structure for the current format uses the YCbCr color
space, the default settings enable only the Y channel. This results in the familiar
black to white zone plate patterns. When the RGB color space is used the default
settings enable all three channels, also resulting in the black to white zone plate
patterns. A colored zone plate pattern can be created by enabling or disabling
individual channels. When the XYZ color space is used, the resultant patterns will
show some chroma in all combinations of the X/Y/Z channel settings, due to the
inherent encoding of this color space.

Waveform Shape Use the Waveform Shape parameter to set the waveform to a Sine, Triangle,
parameter or Square wave.

T Reset parameter Use the T Reset parameter to reset the time coordinate (t in the zone plate
equation) of the pattern to zero. When the T Reset parameter is first set to Enable,
the time coordinate is reset to zero and there is no apparent motion in the zone
plate, even if any of the time coefficients (KXT, KYT, KT, or KT2) are non-zero.
Enabling the T Reset parameter does not set the other parameters to zero.
If you then alter any of the K parameters, the temporal (t) coordinate will be
allowed to change to match. Subsequent changes to K parameters will first reset
the time coordinate (t), and then allow it to change with the K parameter.
Disable allows the zone plate time coordinate to increment continuously. When
T Reset is set to Disable resetting all of the time coefficients (KXT, KYT, KT, and
KT2) to zero will stop the apparent zone plate motion but the temporal coordinate
will remain where it is, even if it has moved to an off-screen position. You must
Enable the T Reset parameter to reset the temporal coordinate to zero.
To completely disable all motion and reset the pattern, set all of the time related K
parameters to zero and set the T Reset parameter to Enable.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–183

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

How to use zone plate signals on the HD3G7 module

Here is an example of how you can use zone plate signals to simplify a common
task.
One common task is measuring the horizontal frequency response of a system.
With a typical swept-frequency generator you would apply a signal such as a
1 MHz to 30 MHz sweep with markers every 5 MHz. Then you try to estimate the
frequency of the 3 dB roll-off point by interpolating the position of the 3 dB point
between the markers.
The HD3G7 generator module's adjustable zone plate signal provides a better way:
The H Sweep Zoneplate pattern control parameter is the H Sweep Frequency,
which controls the upper frequency limit of the sweep (the swept-to
frequency).
Simply adjust the H Sweep Frequency until the system roll-off is at –3 dB.
Read the frequency directly from the instrument display.
The H Sine Zoneplate, which provides a constant frequency horizontal sine
signal instead of a swept signal, can be used to reduce error in measuring
attenuation at a given frequency.
Set the Horz. Frequency parameter to a low value and measure the
amplitude of the entire line.
Next, calculate the –3 dB point (0.707 × the low frequency amplitude).
Finally, increase the Horz. Frequency parameter until the system response
for the whole line is at the calculated –3 dB level, and read the –3 dB
frequency directly from the instrument display.
Since the ZP Amplitude parameter is adjustable for each of these signals, you
can measure the response at 100%, 60%, or any other level as needed.
These same techniques can be used to measure vertical or diagonal response, by
selecting the appropriate zoneplate signal.

3–184 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module main menu

Use the HD3G7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Set the video signal output mode.
Scroll the active picture area of the output signal.
Change the sample structure and color space.
Control the Embedded Audio characteristics: frequency, amplitude, click
rate, and sampling rate.
Set the timing offset of the outputs relative to an internal reference signal or
an external reference signal.
Enable or disable the Timecode and set the timecode parameters.
Enable or disable the discrete components of the video output signal.
Enable or disable the user-defined ancillary data payload and set the payload
structure.
Enable or disable the SMPTE 352M Payload identifier.
Set the line, frame, or clock rate as a trigger for an external instrument, such
as an oscilloscope.
Select between a test signal or a black signal for the secondary (SIGNAL 2)
output.
View diagnostics, operation parameters, and CRC error counts from the
video input.
Access output calibration (only available when in factory mode).
Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figures show the HD3G7 module main menu.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–185

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Figure 3-83: HD3G7 module main menu

3–186 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Figure 3-84: HD3G7 module main menu (Continued)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–187

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

STATUS. Displays the instrument operating mode, output signal format, and
output sample structure. (See page 3-190, HD3G7 module STATUS menu.)

OUTPUT MODE. Selects the mapping format of the output signal to Level A
(direct image format mapping), Level B ( SMPTE 372M dual link mapping), as
described by SMPTE 425, or HD-SDI.
Within Level A and Level B there are also selections for 1920 × 1080, 2K ×
1080, and 1280 × 720 (Level A only) formats. Also, for Level B only, there are
selections for 2×HD 1920 × 1080 and 2×HD 1280 × 720 formats. The 2×HD
mode produces two standard HD streams in the same format (e.g. 1080). Select
between Test Signal/Test Signal or Test Signal/Black for the two streams. (See
page 3-191, HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu.)

SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH. When the output mode is set to a

non-fast-progressive format, the SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH menu is
available. There are several sample structures to choose from. Press the left (◄)
or right (►) arrow buttons to scroll through the available options. When the
desired sample structure is displayed, press the ENTER button to select it.
3G non-fast progressive formats (1080 line)
• RGB 444 12b • YCbCr 444 10b
• RGB 444 10b • YCbCrA 444 10b
• RGBA 444 10b • YCbCr 422 12b
• YCbCr 444 12b • YCbCrA 422 12b
(Level B mapping only)
3G fast progressive format (1080 line)
• YCbCr 422 10b
3G formats (720 line)
• RGB 444 10b • YCbCr 444 10b
• RGBA 444 10b • YCbCrA 444 10b
2×HD formats (1080 and 720 line)
• YCbCr 422 10b
2K line formats
• XYZ 444 12b • RGB 444 12b
HD format
• YCbCr 422 10b

ALPHA CHANNEL DATA. Selects the data to be placed on the alpha channel when
a sample structure that includes an alpha channel is selected. The channel can
contain a duplicate of the Y or G channel data or a flat field signal. This menu
item appears only when the sample structure is set to “+A” for 3G signal formats.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Use Y/G Channel or to
select a 0% to 100% Flat Field in 10% increments, and then press the ENTER
button to enable the selection.

3–188 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

2×HD STREAM CONTENT. Selects the content for the first and second HD signals
on link A and link B. This menu item appears only when the signal format is set
to 2×HD. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Test Signal / Test
Signal, Test Signal / Black, or Black / Test Signal, and then press the ENTER
button to enable the selection.

MOVING PICTURE. Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. Select
this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING
PICTURE submenu. (See page 3-192, HD3G7 module MOVING PICTURE
submenu.)

AUDIO (EMBEDDED). Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital
signals. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1, Group 2,
Group 3, or Group 4. Once the group is selected, press the ENTER button to
access the AUDIO GROUP submenu. (See page 3-193, HD3G7 module AUDIO
(EMBEDDED) submenu.)
If Level B mapping is selected, all four groups are available in both Link A and
Link B, for a total of eight groups.

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the
internal reference signal (frame reset signal). This allows you to adjust the timing
of this module relative to another module or to an external reference (such as
Genlock or GPS). Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button
to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-196, HD3G7 module TIMING
submenu.)

TIMECODE. Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected output.
Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu. (See page 3-197,
HD3G7 module TIMECODE submenu.)

VIDEO. Enables or disables the individual components of the output serial stream,
such as YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ and allows the edge-shaping filter to be enabled or
disabled on the video. Also allows the A/V timing mode to be invoked. Select this
menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu.
(See page 3-199, HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu.)

ANC PAYLOAD. Use this menu to define and control the user-defined ANC
payload insertion. Press the ENTER button to access the ANC Payload submenu.
(See page 3-201, HD3G7 module ANC PAYLOAD submenu.)

SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to Enable or
Disable the SMPTE 352M Payload Identifier, and then press the ENTER button
to confirm the selection.

NOTE. The SMPTE 352M payload identifier is a required element for a compliant
3 Gb signal stream. In most cases the SMPTE 352M payload setting should be
Enable.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–189

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

TRIGGER OUTPUT. Allows you to select a line rate, frame rate, or the module
system clock as a trigger for an external instrument, such as an oscilloscope. (See
page 3-208, HD3G7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu.)

SECONDARY OUTPUT. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select
between a Test Signal or a Black output for the secondary (bottom) BNC
connector. (See page 3-208, HD3G7 module SECONDARY OUTPUT submenu.)

DIAGNOSTICS. Allows access to the outputs of several diagnostics, shows

operation parameters for the module, and allows you to clear the counts of CRC
errors that are detected in the input signal. This menu provides status information
only and does not affect operating behavior. Select this menu item, and then press
the ENTER button to enter the DIAGNOSTICS submenu. (See page 3-209,
HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu.)

CALIBRATION. Provides a variety of special signals to help measure amplitude

and rise time, and allows you to adjust serial output amplitude. This menu is
accessible in factory mode only. (See page 3-211, HD3G7 module CALIBRATION
submenu.)

HD3G7 module Displays the instrument operating mode, output signal format, and output sample
STATUS menu structure. Examples of the STATUS display are shown below for each of the
operating modes (generator and converter).

Generator Mode: The following figure shows an example STATUS display

when the module is in generator mode.

Figure 3-85: HD3G7 module STATUS menu in generator mode

75% Color Bars (100% White): Indicates the name of the signal currently
being generated.
3G-A: Indicates the 3 Gb/s signal and the level currently being generated.
1080 59.94p: Indicates the output format.
YCbCr 4:2:2 10 bits: Indicates the output sampling structure.

Converter Mode: The following figure shows an example STATUS display when
the module is in the converter mode.

Converter (3G-A): Indicates that the incoming HD SDI video stream is

being converted.

3–190 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

1080 59.94i: Indicates the incoming signal format. If there is no input or

the format is not the correct rate, the following messages will appear on the
second line of the LCD: “No Input Signal” or “Input Signal Error (Check
FORMAT)”.
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b: Indicates the output sampling structure.

HD3G7 module Select Level A or Level B as the serial link multiplexing method, or select HD
OUTPUT MODE submenu mode. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the Level A,
Level B or HD choices listed below. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. The following figure shows the OUTPUT MODE submenu.

Figure 3-86: HD3G7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu

Level A. This is one way of constructing the 3 Gb/s serial data stream, as
described in SMPTE 425. For the mapping structure 1 signals such as 1080p50,
1080p59.94 and 1080p60, a Level A stream looks similar to HD video (as defined
in SMPTE 292), except the data rate is twice as fast. In Level A, the lines
are sent in order, consecutively. For other mapping structures, the video is at a
lower frame rate, but has more bits and/or includes more channels. Refer to the
SMPTE 425 standard for details on the Level A mapping method.

Level B. This is an alternate way of constructing the 3 Gb/s serial data stream, as
described in SMPTE 425. A Level B stream looks similar to dual link (as defined
in SMPTE 372M). The serial data is constructed by interleaving the two links of
the dual link video signal. As a result, some formats will have the serial data take
two lines worth of time to propagate. This has implications for the effects of the
pathological signals, and can confuse the definition of timing adjustments. Refer
to the SMPTE 372M and SMPTE 425 standards for more information.

2K × 1080. Available in both Level A and Level B mapping, this selection

provides 2048 × 1080 resolution signals, primarily for digital cinema applications.

2×HD. Available in Level B mapping, 2×HD signals provide two standard

SMPTE 292 HD streams in the same format (for example 1080i 59.94). Select
between Test Signal/Test Signal or Test Signal/Black for the two streams.

HD. Available when the HD mode is selected. The output is a 1.485 Gb/s
SMPTE 292 compliant signal.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–191

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal
MOVING PICTURE up/down or left/right (or randomly), when in generator mode. Use the up (▲) or
submenu down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu shown below.

Figure 3-87: HD3G7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu

NOTE. Moving picture mode is not available with zone plate signals. However,
zone plate signals may be defined with motion in the zone plate parameters. (See
page 3-173, To modify a zone plate signal on the HD3G7 module.)

H Step. Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period
menu item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the value from
–252 to +252 in 4-sample steps.

V Step. Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu
item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the value from –252 to
+252 in 1-line steps.

Period. Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the value from 1 to 16 in 1-frame steps.

Random. Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select between Disable and Enable. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

3–192 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module Use this menu to select the audio group. For HD-SDI and 3G Level A mapping,
AUDIO (EMBEDDED) you may select audio group 1, 2, 3, or 4. For 3G Level B mapping, you may
submenu select audio group 1, 2, 3, or 4 for both Link A and Link B. Press the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to make the selection. When the desired audio group and
Link are displayed, press the Enter button to access the menu for that group.
In each group you can enable or disable the embedded audio, select a specific
channel, and set the sampling mode. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button
to change the menu items. Press the ENTER button to select a specific channel.
While in the Audio Channel submenu, you can set the embedded audio frequency,
amplitude, and click rate for the channel. The following figure shows the AUDIO
(EMBEDDED) Audio Group submenu. (See Figure 3-88.)

Figure 3-88: HD3G7 module AUDIO (EMBEDDED) submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–193

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

STATUS. Use this menu to enable or disable the embedded audio output for the
selected group. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select ENABLE or
DISABLE, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

CHANNEL. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to choose channel 1, 2,
3, or 4, and then press the ENTER button to enter the AUDIO : CHANNEL
submenu. The CHANNEL submenu allows you to set the frequency, amplitude,
click rate, and channel origin ID for the selected audio channel. The following
figure shows the AUDIO : CHANNEL submenu.

Figure 3-89: HD3G7 module AUDIO : CHANNEL submenu

Status: Use this menu to set the status of the individual channel. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between Active, Inactive, and Mute.
Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Frequency: Use this menu to set the frequency of the Embedded Audio
signal from 10.0 Hz to 20 kHz, in steps of 0.5 Hz. Press the ENTER button
to enter the adjustment mode, then use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow
buttons to position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow
buttons to set the number for that position. Press the ENTER button again to
confirm the new frequency.

3–194 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Amplitude: Use this menu to set the audio amplitude from –60 dBFS to
0 dBFS, in steps of 1 dBFS. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to
set the amplitude, and then press the ENTER button to confirm it.
Audio Click: Use this menu to set the audio click rate to one click every one,
two, three, or four seconds, or turn the click off. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select the click rate, and then press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.
Channel Origin: Use this menu to set a channel origin ID of up to four
ASCII characters. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to position
the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set the ID.
Press the ENTER button to confirm the Channel Origin ID.

Sampling. Use this menu to set the sampling alignment status bits for the
selected audio group's Audio Control Packet (ACP). Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Frame, Frame without Frame Number, and
Asynchronous. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–195

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative
TIMING submenu to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Use the up (▲) or down
(▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the
TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-90: HD3G7 module TIMING submenu

Vertical. Sets the vertical timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from –1/2 to +1/2
frame in 1-line steps.

NOTE. A “line" of timing refers to the timing as if it were a raster scanning a

CRT. This may not be the same as the time that a line of data is present on the
serial link because of the way that Level B signals are interleaved.

Horizontal. Sets the horizontal timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from –1 to +1 line in
1-clock steps.

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) and right
(►) arrow buttons simultaneously.

Relative To. Sets the Zero Timing D-to-A compensation factor on or off for HD
(1.485 Gb/S) formats only. In the serial mode (default), the output timing does
not include compensation for the delay through a nominal D-to-A converter.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the relative timing to either
Serial (0H) or Analog (DAC).

3–196 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected output. Use the up (▲)
TIMECODE submenu or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows
the TIMECODE submenu.

Figure 3-91: HD3G7 module TIMECODE submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–197

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

SOURCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the timecode
source from the following choices:
PROGRAM TIME: Uses the program time counter as the timecode.
TIME OF DAY: Uses the time of day, as determined by the GPS7 module.
This selection is available only if a GPS7 module is installed in the instrument.

NOTE. The Time of Day selection is local time, including any time zone offset and
DST offset applied at the system level.

Press ENTER to apply initial time. Press the Enter button to apply the initial time.
Initial time is set in the next menu item. This selection is available only when
there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument. When a GPS7 module is
installed, it controls this function.

Initial Time. Use this menu selection to set the Initial Time. Press the ENTER
button to enter the adjustment mode. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons
to position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to
adjust the time. Press the ENTER button to confirm the time. This selection is
available only when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument. When
a GPS7 module is installed it controls this function.

Offset. Use this menu selection to set a Timecode Offset for the HD3G7 module
outputs. This is an offset from the timecode input from a GPS7 module. Press
the ENTER button to enter the adjustment mode. Use the left (◄) and right (►)
arrow buttons to position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow
buttons to adjust the offset. Press the ENTER button to confirm the offset. This
selection is available only when a GPS7 module is installed in the instrument.

NOTE. The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to
±23:59 hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones
in the range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use
ST309 data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined
programmed offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12
to +13 hours.

30 DROP. Use this menu to enable or disable the 30 Drop Frame. Use the left
(◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between Enable 30 Drop Frame and
Disable 30 Drop Frame. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. This
menu selection is available only for non-integer frame rates.

ATC-LTC. Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Linear Time
Code. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between Enable and
Disable, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

3–198 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

ATC-VITC. Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Vertical
Interval Time Code. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select
between Enable and Disable, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection.

HD3G7 module Use this menu to turn each serial digital video component on or off individually
VIDEO submenu (generator mode only), and to disable the edge filter and the AV Timing mode.
Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the VIDEO submenu.

NOTE. The items in this menu modify the signal output to make it non-standard.
To indicate that the signal is non-standard, an asterisk “*” is inserted at the
beginning of the signal name when a parameter has been changed in this menu.

Figure 3-92: HD3G7 module VIDEO submenu

Y. Turns the Y component (YCbCr format), G component (GBR format), or X

component (XYZ format) of the serial digital video signal on or off. Use the left

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–199

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

Cb. Turns the Cb component (YCbCr format), B component (GBR format), or

Y component (XYZ format) of the serial digital video signal on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Cr. Turns the Cr component (YCbCr format), R component (GBR format), or

Z component (XYZ format) of the serial digital video signal on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Edge Filter. Enables or disables the Edge Filter on serial digital video signals that
have a filter. This control has no effect on signals without a filter. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between Enable and Disable. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
When the edge filter is enabled, certain data transitions between two levels are run
through a low-pass filter to set rise times, pulse widths, and to prevent ringing.
If the filter is disabled, the edges will not be filtered. The filter should not be
disabled in broadcast environments.
Edge filtering is not necessary in certain environments, such as digital cinema
applications and several types of picture monitors and projectors. In these cases,
disabling the edge filtering will result in instantaneous level changes for adjacent
color bars.

NOTE. Software versions of the HD3G7 module prior to V5.5 included a 2K TEST
SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN menu to select projector-specific test patterns that had no
edge filtering. With software version V5.5, this functionality has been replaced by
the Edge Filter submenu, which can be applied to any test signal.

AV Timing Mode. Turns the AV Timing Mode on or off. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.
In the AV Timing mode, the video and audio are continuously cycled between
being on as configured for 1 second then set to black and muted for 4 seconds.
Use this signal to measure the AV delay through a system with the AV Timing
mode on an appropriate Tektronix waveform monitor or rasterizer.

3–200 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module The ancillary data payload can carry non-video information, such as an Active
ANC PAYLOAD submenu Format Description (AFD), Closed Caption information, or other metadata.

NOTE. The ancillary inserter can place the data packet anywhere in the field
and can overwrite any of the ancillary or video data with a few exceptions; the
inserter will not overwrite embedded audio or CRC. Use care to not overwrite
important information.

Use this menu to set the ancillary data payload structure. The ancillary data
payload can include information to supplement the video stream, including the
Data Identifier (DID), Secondary Data Identifier (SDID), Data Count (DC), User
Data Words (UDW), and a Checksum (CS).
The Data Identifier (DID) and Secondary Data Identifier (SDID) indicate the
type of data contained in the packet.
The Data Count indicates the number of User Data Words to follow, and the User
Data Words (UDW) comprise the actual payload carried in the ancillary data. The
HD3G7 module addresses User Data Words 000 through 254.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–201

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

The following figures show the ANC PAYLOAD submenu.

Figure 3-93: HD3G7 module Ancillary Payload submenu

3–202 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual
 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Figure 3-94: HD3G7 module Ancillary Payload submenu (Continued)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–203

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Output. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between Disable,
Continuous, and Single Packet. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection.

Parity. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between Automatic
and Manual parity. Automatic parity is an 8-bit mode, while Manual parity
allows 10-bits. If a 10-bit word is entered while in manual parity and the module
is later set to automatic parity, the correct 8 bits will be sent. The entire 10-bit
word is in system memory, though, so if the module is then reset to manual parity
the entire 10-bit word entered by the user will be transmitted.

DID. Press the ENTER button to edit the Data ID word. You can set the Data ID
from 0x00 to 0xFF (in 8-bit mode), or from 0x000 to 0x3FF (in 10-bit mode). Use
the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to position the cursor, and then use the
up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set the number for that position. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the Data ID and exit Data ID editing.

SDID. Press the ENTER button to edit the Secondary ID word. You can set
the Secondary ID from 0x00 to 0xFF (in 8-bit mode), or from 0x000 to 0x3FF
(in 10-bit mode). Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to position the
cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set the number
for that position. Press the ENTER button to confirm the Secondary ID and exit
Secondary ID editing.

DC. Press the ENTER button to edit the Data Count word, to show the number
of User Data Words to follow. You can set the Data Count from 0x00 to 0xFF
(in 8-bit mode), or from 0x000 to 0x3FF (in 10-bit mode). Use the left (◄) and
right (►) arrow buttons to position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down
(▼) arrow buttons to set the number for that position. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the Data Count and exit Data Count editing.

UDW. Use this menu selection to set a User Data Word. Use the left (◄) and right
(►) arrow buttons to select the User Data Word you wish to edit, from word 000
through word 254, and then press the ENTER button to edit that User Data Word.
You can set the User Data Word from 0x00 to 0xFF (in 8-bit mode), or from
0x000 to 0x3FF (in 10-bit mode). Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to
position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set
the number for that position. Press the ENTER button to confirm the User Data
Word and exit User Data Word editing for that word.

NOTE. To make this process easier, you can use the PC-based TG Setup
application. This application also allows you to import and export User Data
Words as CSV files.

3–204 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

CLEAR UDW. Use this menu selection to clear the entire User Data Word. Press
the ENTER button to enter the CLEAR UDW mode, which will present the
following dialog:

Press the ENTER button to clear the User Data Word and exit CLEAR UDW, or
press the BACK button to exit without clearing the User Data Word.

CS. Use this menu selection to set the Checksum. Press the ENTER button to
edit the Checksum. You can set the Checksum from 0x00 to 0xFF (in 8-bit mode),
or from 0x000 to 0x3FF (in 10-bit mode). Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow
buttons to position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow
buttons to set the number for that position. Press the ENTER button to confirm
the Checksum and exit Checksum editing.

Auto-Calculate CS. Use this menu selection to enable or disable checksum

auto-calculation. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between
Enable or Disable, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the choice.

NOTE. Different video modes and formats have different ranges of lines and pixels
in their active and ANC spaces. Users should be careful to change the line, field
and sample offset parameters of the ANC insertion feature after changing video
modes or formats to be sure the ANC data is programmed as desired.
If the line number or sample offset are left at values outside the allowed range for
a given format, the packet will not be inserted in the stream. Alternatively if these
parameters are left at values near the end of active or ANC space, the packet may
overwrite other elements of the stream such as EAV and SAV.

Line. Use this menu selection to set the line to carry the ancillary data payload.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set the line number. This menu
selection is available only in progressive formats.

Field. Use this menu selection to set the Field to carry the ancillary data payload.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between Field: 1 Only,
Field: 2 Only, or Field: 1 and 2. This menu selection is available only in
interlaced formats.

Field 1: Line. Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 1 to carry the
ancillary data payload. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set the
line number. This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats.

Field 2: Line. Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 2 to carry the
ancillary data payload. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set the
line number. This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–205

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Sample Offset. Use this menu selection to set the sample number where the
ancillary data header will be. This is the first word of the ancillary data packet.

Video Channel. Use this menu selection to set the video channel to Luma or
Chroma. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to make the selection, and
then press the ENTER button to confirm it.

Link Location. Use this menu selection to set the link location to Link A or Link
B. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to make the selection, and then
press the ENTER button to confirm it. This menu selection is available only
in 3G-B formats.

Stream Location. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select HD
Stream 1 or HD Stream 2, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. This menu selection is available only in 2×HD formats.

NOTE. This is an example only. Inserting an AFD packet will not affect the video
produced by the HD3G7 module.

HD3G7 module ancillary As an example, one of the ancillary data payloads that can be easily generated by
data payload example the HD3G7 module is the Active Format Description (AFD). AFD is a method
of identifying the active area of the video picture to be displayed. Using AFD
the aspect ratio of the picture can be automatically optimized for the display
being used. AFD is defined in SMPTE 2016-1, and mapping AFD and bar data is
defined in SMPTE 2016-3. The packet format appears as shown here:

Where AR = aspect ratio (1=16:9, 0=4:3), T = top bar data flag, B= bottom bar
data flag, L = left bar data flag, and R = right bar data flag.
Note that these are all eight-bit values for the respective User Data Word. The
HD3G7 module will automatically calculate the parity bits when Parity is set to
Automatic, which is the default.

3–206 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Most AFD codes do not require bar data information; only the first user data
word needs to be defined. For example, one common AFD code for a 16:9 coded
frame is “1001” (9), which indicates a 4:3 image, horizontally centered, with
pillarboxes, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 3-95: AFD code “1001” for a 16:9 coded frame

Therefore, for this AFD code set the data words as follows:
UDW [000]: 0x4C
UDW [001]: 0x00
UDW [002]: 0x00
UDW [003]: 0x00
UDW [004]: 0x00
UDW [005]: 0x00
UDW [006]: 0x00
UDW [007]: 0x00

The AFD ancillary data packet should be located in the active line portion of
the vertical ancillary space (VANC), but no earlier than the second line after
the RP 168 switch point. Line 9 with a sample offset of 0 (first word of active
video, immediately after SAV) is a suitable location. The selected video channel
should be “Luma” for most ancillary packets, including AFD. Finally, set the
ANC PAYLOAD Output mode to Continuous to start AFD insertion of the
active test signal. For this example, the SMPTE RP 219 color bars are an effective
test pattern, because the center section of the 16:9 test signal contains the original
4:3 aspect ratio SMPTE pattern.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–207

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module Use this menu to select line rate, frame rate, or the system clock of the module
TRIGGER OUTPUT to trigger an external instrument. The following figure shows the TRIGGER
submenu OUTPUT submenu.

Figure 3-96: HD3G7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu

System Clock. The system clock is a low-jitter clock signal, which runs at the
parallel clock rate for 3G formats or twice the parallel clock rate for HD formats.

Pixel Clock. The pixel clock is an internal parallel rate clock (a low frequency
clock related to the pixel rate of the video signal).

Frame / Field Pulse. The trigger pulse is produced at the field or frame rate of
the video signal. In interlaced and segmented-frame formats, this produces a
frame-rate square wave that is low during field one and high during field two.
In progressive formats the output is high during the vertical blanking period,
producing a field-rate pulse. 1

Line Pulse. The trigger pulse output is high during the horizontal blanking period,
producing a line-rate pulse. 1
1 The Frame/Field Pulse and Line Pulse signals are derived from the EAV and SAV XYZ byte H, V, and F bits,
just prior to the parallel data entering the serializer; therefore these pulses can be used to approximate the
signal timing.

HD3G7 module Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between a Test Signal or a
SECONDARY OUTPUT Black output for the secondary (Signal 2) BNC connector, and then press the
submenu ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. When set for a Test Signal, the Signal 2 output is the same as the Signal 1
output. When set to Black, the black signal is the same format and sample
structure as the Signal 1 output.

3–208 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module Use this menu to view operation parameters for the HD3G7 module. Module
DIAGNOSTICS submenu diagnostics provide status information only and do not affect operating behavior.
The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu.

Figure 3-97: HD3G7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–209

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

PLL STATUS. This diagnostic displays the following:

Jit – Indicates the condition of the jitter attenuator used to clean up the
clock recovered from the input signal. The condition can be reported as
Lock (locked) or Unlk (unlocked). This diagnostic readout is only valid
and significant when in converter mode. If in converter mode it should read
“locked”. If not, there may be a problem with the input signal or the module.
Flex0 – This circuit is not used, so the readout may show locked or unlocked.
The state has no bearing on instrument operation.
Flex1 – Indicates the state of the flexible clock generator. This readout should
show Lock (locked) and is only valid and significant when the instrument is
in generator mode. An Unlk (unlocked) reading might indicate a problem
with the module or mainframe.

DDS STATUS. This diagnostic displays the following:

DDS0 Phase – This circuit is not used, so the readout may show locked or
unlocked. The state has no bearing on instrument operation.
DDS1 Phase – Indicates that the flex clock circuit is correctly aligned with
the internal frame pulse. This readout should show Lock (locked) and is only
valid and significant when the instrument is in generator mode. An Unlk
(unlocked) reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe.
If the instrument is in converter mode, this readout is not active and may
show locked or unlocked.

CRC ERRORS. This diagnostic shows how many CRC errors are detected from
the input signal. If the output signal of the conversion process is not what you
expect, or the jitter attenuator is having trouble locking, then you should check
this readout for errors on the input.
It is normal to see errors when you are connecting or disconnecting the input, or
when no input is present. When this occurs, clear the errors after the connections
are made by using the Diagnostics > Clear CRC Errors submenu. After clearing
the errors, monitor this readout if you have concerns about the input signal.
This diagnostic displays the following:
Y – The number of errors detected on the Y portion of the active picture
area of the input signal.
YANC – The number of errors detected on the Y portion of the ancillary
data space in the input signal.
C – The number of errors detected on the C portion of the active picture area
of the input signal.
CANC – The number of errors detected on the C portion of the ancillary
data space in the input signal.

CLEAR CRC ERRORS. Press the ENTER button to clear the CRC error counters.

3–210 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

TEMPERATURES. This diagnostic displays the temperature of the HD3G7 module

board and FPGA.

FPGA VERSION. This diagnostic displays the current and expected FPGA
versions. If there is a discrepancy between the two, a warning appears, which
means that the FPGA firmware might need to be upgraded.

VOLTAGE MON 1. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, a warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

VOLTAGE MON 2. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, a warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

VOLTAGE MON 3. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, a warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

VOLTAGE MON 4. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, a warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

HD3G7 module This menu is accessible only when the instrument is in factory mode. From
CALIBRATION submenu this menu, you can access several special output signals and adjust the serial
output levels. The special signals are unscrambled and are synchronous with
the clock out of the trigger BNC. They are used to check performance or used
when adjusting serial levels. See the TG8000 Service Manual for information on
adjustments and using factory mode.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–211

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

HD3G7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the HD3G7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-39: HD3G7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
TEST SIGNAL 100% Color Bars
FORMAT 1080 59.94p
SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH YCbCr 4:2:2 10b
OUTPUT MODE 3G-Level A (1920 × 1080)
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable
AUDIO (EMBEDDED)
Status (Level A)
Group 1–4 Disable
Status (Level B)
Group 1–4 Link A Disable
Group 1–4 Link B Disable
Channel
Status Active
Frequency 1000
Amplitude –20 dBFS
Audio Click OFF
Channel Origin A1-1 through A4-4
Sampling Frame
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 μs
Relative To Serial (0H)
TIMECODE
Source Program Time
30 Drop Frame Enable
ATC-LTC OFF
ATC-VITC OFF

3–212 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-39: HD3G7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Menu item name Settings
VIDEO
Y ON
Cb ON
Cr ON
Edge Filter Enable
AV Timing Mode OFF
ANC PAYLOAD
Output Disable
Parity Automatic
DID 0x101
SDID 0x200
DC 0x101
UDW 0x200
CS 0x200
Auto-Calculate CS Enable
Line 9
Field 1, Line: 9
Field 2, Line: 9
Start Sample 1928
Video Channel Luma
Link Location Link A
Stream Location HS Stream 1
SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Enable
TRIGGER OUTPUT System Clock
SECONDARY OUTPUT Test Pattern

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–213

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the HDLG7 HD Dual
Link Video Generator module. Refer to the following locations for additional
information about this module:
HDLG7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors.
(See page 2-16.)
HDLG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the
module is functional. (See page 1-39.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

HDLG7 module product description

The HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module can be operated in either
of the following two modes:
Dual link converter. The module can convert a SMPTE 292M serial digital
video stream carrying a SMPTE 274M signal to a SMPTE 372M serial digital
dual link video signal.
Dual link generator. The module can output either HD SDI video test signals
or projector test patterns (digital cinema 2K formats only).
Refer to the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical
Reference for information about which dual link outputs can be converted from
each input signal format.
Refer to To select the HDLG7 module Converter mode for information about the
available types of conversions. (See page 3-221.)
The module provides the following features:
Two pairs of dual link outputs that include SMPTE 352 payload.
Supports a wide variety of output formats:
1920 × 1080i, 1920 × 1080p, 1920 × 1080PsF, 2K × 1080p, 2K × 1080PsF,
and 2K × 1556PsF

3–214 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

Supports the following sampling structures:

4:4:4 GBR, 4:4:4:4 GBR+A, 4:4:4 YCbCr, 4:4:4:4 YCbCr+A, 4:2:2 YCbCr,
4:2:2:4 YCbCr+A, 4:4:4 XYZ
Test signal buttons have two modes of operation: native YCbCr or RGB
HD video test signals, and native XYZ digital cinema projector test patterns
(only in 2K formats).
Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output
test signal.
Adjustable timing offset between link A and link B outputs.
Full remote control using the Ethernet interface.

How to operate the HDLG7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
no error messages appear on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below:

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HDLG7 module main menu
appears as shown below:

5. Configure the module to the desired operational mode (converter or

generator), select the signal format, and if necessary, select the test signal.
(See page 3-257, To select an output signal on the SDI7 module.)
6. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus.
Refer to HDLG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main
menu items and the submenu items. (See page 3-223.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–215

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

To select an output signal on the HDLG7 module

The HDLG7 module has two modes of operation: converter or generator. To
select an output signal, perform the appropriate procedure below for your selected
mode of operation.

To select the Converter Use this mode to convert a SMPTE 292M serial digital video stream carrying a
mode on the HDLG7 SMPTE 274M signal to a SMPTE 372M serial digital dual link video signal.
module 1. Connect an HD SDI signal to the HD SDI IN connector.
2. Select the signal format for the output signal. (See page 3-217, To select the
signal format on the HDLG7 module.)

NOTE. To avoid an input signal error, select the output signal format that
matches the input signal. If the input signal format does not match the selected
output format, the following message appears: Input Format mismatch (Check
FORMAT) on the STATUS menu.
Refer to the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical
Reference for a listing of the supported input and output format combinations
for the HDLG7 module.

3. Select the converter mode to provide a dual link signal.

4. Press the front-panel arrow buttons to select the desired main menu item
or submenu.

To select the Generator Use this mode to generate either HD SDI video test signals or projector test
mode on the HDLG7 patterns (digital cinema 2K formats only).
module 1. Select the signal format for the output signal. (See page 3-217, To select the
signal format on the HDLG7 module.)
2. Select the test signal that you want to generate. (See page 3-218, To select the
test signal on the HDLG7 module.)
3. Press the front-panel arrow buttons to select the desired main menu item
or submenu.

3–216 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

To select the signal format The following table lists the available signal formats.
on the HDLG7 module
NOTE. Framing resynchronization occurs when the signal format is changed.
Selecting the 1080 50p, 1080 59.94p, or 1080 60p format forces the sampling
structure to be set to YCbCr 4:2:2 10 bits. Selecting a 2K 1080 or 2K 1556 format
will limit the sampling structure to either RGB or XYZ 4:4:4 12 bits.
Refer to SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH for more information. (See page 3-224.)

Table 3-40: HDLG7 module signal formats

1980 × 1080 format
1080 23.98sF 1080 24sF 1080 23.98p 1080 24p
1080 25p 1080 29.97p 1080 30p 1080 50i
1080 59.94i 1080 60i 1080 50p 1080 59.94p
1080 60p
2048 × 1556 format 1
2K 1556 14.99sF 2K 1556 15sF 2K 1556 17.98sF 2K 1556 18sF
2048 × 1080 format
2K 1080 23.98sF 2K 1080 24sF 2K 1080 25sF 2K 1080 29.97sF
2K 1080 30sF 2K 1080 23.98p 2K 1080 24p 2K 1080 25p
2K 1080 29.97p 2K 1080 30p
1 No SMPTE 352M identification payload is added to the output of 2048 × 1556 format signals.

Perform the following steps to select the signal format:

1. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HDLG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

2. Press the FORMAT button. The menu display changes to show the currently
selected signal format as shown below.

3. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select one of the signal formats,
and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–217

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

To select the test signal on The test signals in the HDLG7 module are divided into the following two groups:
the HDLG7 module HD SDI video test signals
Projector test patterns (digital cinema 2K formats only)

NOTE. Use the HDLG7 module Main menu to configure the module to output
HD test signals or projector test patterns. (See page 3-223, HDLG7 module
main menu.)

All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the
corresponding test signal buttons. When the HDLG7 module is selected and you
press any of the front-panel test signal buttons, the selected signal in the signal set
is output. (See Figure 3-98.)

For example, when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button, a signal in
the Color Bars signal set is output. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or
press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal
from the Color Bars signal set. Press the BACK button to return to the main menu.

Figure 3-98: Front-panel test signal buttons

You can download a frame picture file (created by the Frame Picture Generator)
to the mainframe and output the picture from the DVG7 module. Refer to the
TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create,
download, and output a frame picture.

3–218 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the
signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is configured to
output HD test signals. The table also lists the native YCbCr or RGB test signals
that correspond to HD SDI video test signals.
Table 3-41: HDLG7 module HD test signal set assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars,
SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1 2
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Staircase, Ramp, Valid Ramp 2

FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field, 10% Flat Field, 20% Flat Field,
30% Flat Field, 40% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field,
60% Flat Field, 70% Flat Field, 80% Flat Field,
90% Flat Field, 100% Flat Field
MULTI BURST —— ——
SWEEP —— ——
MONITOR Monitor 100% Red Field, 75% Red Field, 100% Green Field,
75% Green Field 100% Blue Field, 75% Blue Field,
Convergence
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T30 Pulse and Bar
TIMING —— ——
SDI —— Equalizer Test, PLL Test, SDI Matrix
OTHER —— Use this button to select the converter mode of
operation and Embedded audio selection menu.
(See page 3-221, To select the Converter mode on
the HDLG7 module.)
1 SMPTE RP219 Color Bars refers to SMPTE RP219 Color Bar (I/Q Even).
2 Not available in 2K-format mode of operation.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–219

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the
signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is configured to
output projector test patterns. The table also lists the native XYZ projector test
patterns that correspond to digital cinema.
Table 3-42: HDLG7 module projector test pattern set assigned to the test signal
buttons
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
COLOR BAR Color Bars Color Bar Patch-1, Color Bar Patch-2
LINEARITY Linearity Step Black-White, Step Black-Dark Gray,
Horizontal Gradient, Vertical Gradient
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields Black Flat Field, White Flat Field,
Black to White Step-1, Black to White Step-2,
Black to White Step-3, Black to White Step-4,
Black to White Step-5, Black to White Step-6,
Black to White Step-7, Black to White Step-8,
Black to White Step-9, Black to White Step-10,
Black to Gray Step-1, Black to Gray Step-2,
Black to Gray Step-3, Black to Gray Step-4,
Black to Gray Step-5, Black to Gray Step-6,
Black to Gray Step-7, Black to Gray Step-8,
Black to Gray Step-9, Black to Gray Step-10
MULTI BURST —— ——
SWEEP —— ——
MONITOR Monitor Red-1 Field, Red-2 Field, Green-1 Field, Green-2 Field,
Blue-1 Field, Blue-2 Field, Cyan-1 Field, Cyan-2 Field,
Magenta-1 Field, Magenta-2 Field, Yellow-1 Field,
Yellow-2 Field, Grid, Checkerboard, Aspect Ratio
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar Window
TIMING —— ——
SDI SDI Equalizer Test, PLL Test, SDI Matrix
OTHER —— Use this button to select the converter mode of operation
and Embedded audio selection menu. (See page 3-221,
To select the Converter mode on the HDLG7 module.)

To set the gradient starting point.

When you select Horizontal Gradient or Vertical Gradient in the Linearity
projector test pattern set, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to set the
starting point of the gradient. The available values are as follows:
Horizontal Gradient: 16 to 1913 in 1 level steps.
Vertical Gradient: 16 to 2880 in 1 level steps (2048 × 1080 format);
16 to 2404 in 1 level steps (2048 × 1556 format).

3–220 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

To select the Converter Select from the following converter modes when you want to convert the SMPTE
mode on the HDLG7 292M 4:2:2 serial digital signal applied to the HD SDI IN connector into a dual
module link output format:

60, 59.94, or 50 Hz Progressive Formats. The HDLG7 module converts the input
interlace signal (60i, 59.94i, or 50i) to a progressive signal by doubling the frame
rate. The input signal is copied to both Link A and Link B, but the payload
identifier is modified to indicate a dual-link signal. The results are a 4:2:2 YCbCr
10-bit signal at the faster progressive rate (60p, 59.94p, or 50p).

4:4:4 YCbCr Formats. The HDLG7 module converts the input 4:2:2 YCbCr signal
to 4:4:4 YCbCr signal by up-interpolating the chroma channel data samples.
This is accomplished by using several incoming data samples before and after
the data samples to derive the extra sample point. If 10-bit sample structure is
selected, the alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled by the ALPHA
CHANNEL DATA menu. If 12 bit is chosen, the addition 2 LSB bits are set to
zero on the Y and co-sited Cb and Cr samples. The derived Cb and Cr samples
will contain derived LSB bits.

4:4:4 RGB Formats. The HDLG7 module converts the input 4:2:2 YCbCr signal
to 4:4:4 YCbCr as described above. Then the signal is color-space converted
using the inverse linear transform defined in SMPTE 274M. If 10-bit sample
structure is selected, the alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled
by the ALPHA CHANNEL DATA menu. If 12 bit is chosen, the addition 2 bits
(LSB) are computed from the linear transform calculations.

4:2:2 YCbCr 12 Bit Formats. The HDLG7 module converts the input 4:2:2 YCbCr
signal to 4:2:2 YCbCr 12 bits by setting zeros for the additional 2 bits (LSB). The
alpha channel is set to blanking levels or is controlled by the ALPHA CHANNEL
DATA menu.

4:4:4 XYZ Formats. The HDLG7 module converts the input 4:2:2 YCbCr signal
to 4:4:4 YCbCr and 4:4:4 RGB as described in the preceding paragraphs. Then
the RGB signal is converted to XYZ by normalizing the gamma corrected RGB
signal and applying the results to a RGB to XYZ color-space converter. The
output of the converter is gamma corrected for digital cinema. The XYZ mode
can be selected only in the 2K format mode.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–221

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

Perform the following steps to select the converter mode:

1. Press the front-panel OTHER button. The menu display changes as follows:

2. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the OTHER button
repeatedly to select between Normal and Y to GBR.
Normal: The incoming YCbCr signal is converted to a normal dual-link
output.
Y to GBR: The incoming Y data is applied to the G, B, and R outputs.
This allows higher bandwidth data, such as multiburst or sweep to be
placed on all three channels. If the sampling structure is for a YCbCr or
XYZ output, the Y to GBR selection is not available.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Embedded Audio
selection menu. Then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select
the following:
Link A Only: Places the incoming embedded audio on the converter mode
Dual Link A output. Conforms to the SMPTE 372M standard. In the case of
converting 1920×1080p/PsF 29.97/30 Hz to 2048×1080p/PsF 29.97/30 Hz
with 16 channels (four groups) of embedded audio, 8 channels (two groups)
will be placed on the Link A output and the other 8 channels (two groups)
will be placed on the Link B output.
Link B Only: Places the incoming embedded audio on the converted mode
Dual Link B output. In the case of converting 1920×1080p/PsF 29.97/30 Hz
to 2048×1080p/PsF 29.97/30 Hz with 16 channels (four groups) of embedded
audio, the two lowest number embedded audio groups (groups 1 and 2) will be
allowed on Link B. Groups 3 and 4 would be deleted.
Link A & B: Places the incoming embedded audio on the converted mode
Dual Link A and B outputs. In the case of converting 1920×1080p/PsF
29.97/30 Hz to 2048×1080p/PsF 29.97/30 Hz with 16 channels (four groups)
of embedded audio, the two lowest number embedded audio groups (groups 1
and 2) will be allowed on both Link A and B. Groups 3 and 4 would be deleted.
4. Press the BACK button to return to the main menu.

NOTE. When you select the converter mode, the 2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN
setting will automatically switch to HD Test Signal.

3–222 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

HDLG7 module main menu

Use the HDLG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Set the sampling structure/pixel depth.
Select the signal of the alpha channel.
Set the timing offset between the Link A and Link B outputs.
Generate a moving picture.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the HDLG7 module main menu.

Figure 3-99: HDLG7 module main menu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–223

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

STATUS. Displays the instrument operating mode, output signal format, and
output sample structure. Examples of the STATUS display are shown below for
each of the operating modes (converter and generator).

Converter Mode: The figure below shows an example STATUS display when
the module is in the converter mode.

CONVERTER (Normal): Indicates that the incoming HD-SDI video stream

is being converted in a normal mode. The other choice is (Y to GBR) where
the incoming Y data is placed on the G, B, and R channels on the output. Y to
GBR is only selectable in the GBR sampling structure.
1080 60i: Indicates the incoming signal format. If there is no input or the
format is not the correct rate, the following messages will appear on the second
line of the LCD; "No Input Signal" or "Input Signal Error (Check FORMAT)"
GBR+A 4:4:4 10 bits: Indicates the output sampling structure.

Generator Mode: The figure below shows an example STATUS display when
the module is in the generator mode.

100% Color Bars: Indicates the name of the signal currently being generated.
As different generator signal is selected, its name will be displayed.
1080 24sF: Indicates the output format.
GBR+A 4:4:4 10 bits: Indicates the output sampling structure.

SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH. Selects the sampling structure and pixel depth of

the output signal. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the
formats listed in the table below. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Table 3-43: HDLG7 module sample structure/depth signal formats
1920 × 1080 formats
1080 GBR 4:4:4 12 bits 1080 GBR 4:4:4 10 bits 1080 GBR+A 4:4:4 10 bits
1080 YCbCr 4:4:4 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4:4:4 10 bits 1080 YCbCr+A 4:4:4 10 bits
1080 YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bits 1080 YCbCr 4:2:2 10 bits 1080 YCbCr+A 4:2:2 12 bits

3–224 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

Table 3-43: HDLG7 module sample structure/depth signal formats (cont.)

1920 × 1080 formats
2K 1080 and 2K 1556 formats
2K GBR 4:4:4 12 bits 2K XYZ 4:4:4 12 bits

NOTE. When the 1080 50p, 1080 59.94p, or 1080 60p format is selected, the
HDLG7 module forces the sampling structure to 1080 YCbCr 4:2:2 10 bits, and
no other sampling structure is allowed.

Selecting Projector Test Pattern while the format is 2K 1080 or 2K 1556 will limit
the sampling structure/depth to 2K XYZ 4:4:4 12 bits.
If the current output format is 1080 23.98sF, 1080 24sF, 1080 23.98p, 1080 24p,
1080 25p, 1080 29.97p, 1080 30p, 1080 50i, 1080 59.94i, or 1080 60i, you
may select 1080 YCbCr 4:2:2 10 bits as the sampling structure. However, the
output signals produced on Link A and Link B are not dual-link signals. The
HDLG7 module will produce two single-link outputs, with incoming ancillary
and embedded audio being placed on Link A and none on Link B.

ALPHA CHANNEL DATA. Sets the alpha channel signal. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to select Use Y/G Channel, 0% Flat Field, 10% Flat Field,
20% Flat Field, 30% Flat Field, 40% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field, 60% Flat
Field, 70% Flat Field, 80% Flat Field, 90% Flat Field, or 100% Flat Field.
The alpha channel data are used only with the following sampling structures:
1080 GBR+A 4:4:4 10 bits, 1080 YCbCr+A 4:4:4 10 bits, and 1080 YCbCr+A
4:2:2 12 bits.

LINK OFFSET. Sets the timing offset of the Link B output relative to the Link A
output. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the
LINK OFFSET submenu. (See page 3-226.)

2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN. Selects the signal sets to be assigned to the test
signal button. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select one of the
following two signal sets:
HD Test Signal: Assigns standard HD video test signals to the test signal
buttons. (See Table 3-41 on page 3-219.)
Projector Test Pattern: Assigns digital cinema projector test patterns to the
test signal buttons. These signal sets are only selectable in the 2K format.
(See Table 3-42 on page 3-220.)

MOVING PICTURE. Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. Select
this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING
PICTURE submenu. (See page 3-226.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–225

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

HDLG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the Link B output relative to the Link
LINK OFFSET submenu A output. The following figure shows the LINK OFFSET submenu.

Figure 3-100: HDLG7 module LINK OFFSET submenu

Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set the
value from -0.2020 μs to +0.2020 μs in 0.0135 μs steps.

NOTE. You can reset the offset value to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.

HDLG7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal
MOVING PICTURE up/down or left/right (or randomly). Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
submenu scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE
submenu.

Figure 3-101: HDLG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu

3–226 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module

H Step. Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period
menu item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You
can set the value from -252 to +252 in 4-sample steps.

V Step. Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu
item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set
the value from -252 to +252 in 1-line steps.

Period. Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set the value from 1
to 16 in 1-frame steps.

Random. Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select between Disable and Enable. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

HDLG7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the HDLG7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

NOTE. The factory default settings put the HDLG7 module in the Generator mode.

Table 3-44: HDLG7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
STATUS SMPTE RP219 Color Bars 1080 59.94i GBR 4:4:4
12 bits
SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH 1080 GBR 4:4:4 12 bits
ALPHA CHANNEL DATA Use Y/G Channel
LINK OFFSET 0.0000 ms
2K TEST SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN HD Test Signal
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable
Converter mode Normal
Converter embedded audio LINK A
2K Horizontal/Vertical Gradient offset
Horizontal Gradient offset 16
Vertical Gradient offset 16

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–227

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the HDVG7 HDTV
Digital Video Generator module. Refer to the following locations for additional
information about this module:
HDVG7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors.
(See page 2-17.)
HDVG7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the
module is functional. (See page 1-40.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

HDVG7 module product description

The HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module provides 1.485 Gb/s serial
digital video signals in various formats. The module provides the following
features:
Two serial digital video outputs
Two serial digital black outputs (Option BK)
Supports SMPTE 274M (1080), SMPTE 240M (1035), and SMPTE 296M
(720)
Overlay of circle, text, or logo on the video signal
Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output
test signal
Generates timecode with ATC when a GPS7 module is installed
Up to 16 channels of Embedded Audio
Full remote control using Ethernet interface

3–228 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

Generates video signals with 24 (or 20) bit embedded digital audio with a
sample rate of 48 kHz. The module supports the following audio frequencies.

Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz

50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz
100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz
150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz
200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz
250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz
300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz
400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz

How to operate the HDVG7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
no error messages appear on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below.

4. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HDVG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

5. Select the signal format and the test signal you want to output. (See
page 3-230, To select an output signal on the HDVG7 module.)
6. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus.
Refer to HDVG7 Module Main Menu for detailed information about the main
menu items and the submenu items. (See page 3-232.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–229

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

To select an output signal on the HDVG7 module

To output a signal from the HDVG7 module, you need to select a signal format
and output signal as described below.

To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format:
1. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the HDVG7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

2. Option BK only: Set the HD trilevel sync rate:

a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main
menu until HD RATE is displayed as shown below.

b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Non-integer (59.94,
29.97, 23.98) or Integer (60, 50, 30, 25, 24), and then press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. The HD RATE setting affects which signal formats can be selected
for output (integer or non-integer).

3. Press the FORMAT button to access the SELECT FORMAT submenu.

4. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the FORMAT button
repeatedly, to select one of the signal formats, and then press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. When you change signal format, synchronization shock occurs.

5. If you change the signal format while a test signal is being output, the
instrument starts loading all of the signal sets for the selected format and
displays the message "Now Loading...". When you see the message, "Done
(Press BACK)", press the BACK button.

3–230 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

To select the test signal All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the
corresponding test signal buttons. When the HDVG7 module is selected and you
press any of the front-panel test signal buttons, the selected signal in the signal set
is output. (See Figure 3-102.)

For example, when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button, a signal in
the Color Bars signal set is output. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or
press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal
from the Color Bars signal set.

Figure 3-102: Front-panel test signal buttons

You can download a frame picture file (created by the Frame Picture Generator)
to the mainframe and output the picture from the HDVG7 module. Refer to the
TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information on how to create,
download, and output a frame picture.

The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and
shows the test signals that are available in each signal set.
Table 3-45: HDVG7 module signal set assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name Signal set Signals in the signal set
COLOR BAR Color Bars 100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars,
SMPTE Color Bars
LINEARITY Linearity 5 Step Staircase, Limit Ramp, Ramp,
Shallow Ramp Matrix, Shallow Ramp
Valid Ramp
FLAT FIELD Flat Fields 0% Flat Field, 50% Flat Field, 100%
Flat Field
MULTI BURST Multiburst Multiburst 1-10 MHz, Multiburst
10-20 MHz, Multiburst 20-30 MHz
SWEEP Sweep 100% Sweep 1-15 MHz, 100% Sweep
1-30 MHz
MONITOR Monitor 75% Blue Field, 75% Green Field, 75%
Red Field, Convergence
PULSE BAR Pulse & Bar 2T30 Pulse and Bar
TIMING Timing Bowtie 1ns Markers, Co-site Pulse
SDI SDI Test Equalizer Test, PLL Test, SDI Matrix
OTHER —— ——

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–231

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module main menu

Use the HDVG7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Set the logo, text, or circle overlay on the output signal.
Set the timing offset on the output signals.
Scroll the active picture area of the output signal.
Enable or disable the output and set parameters for each embedded audio
group.
Enable or disable the Y, Pb, and/or Pr components on the video output signal.

3–232 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figure shows the HDVG7 module main menu.

Figure 3-103: HDVG7 module main menu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–233

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

MOVING PICTURE. Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. Select
this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING
PICTURE submenu. (See page 3-235.)

OVERLAY. Selects an item (logo, text, or circle) that is overlaid on the output test
signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay. Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu. (See page 3-293.)

AUDIO (EMBEDDED). Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the output test
signals. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1, Group 2,
Group 3, or Group 4. Select any of the items, and then press the ENTER button
to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu. (See page 3-241.)

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the
internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-244.)

TIMECODE. Sets the timecode parameters for the module outputs when a
GPS7 module is installed. To support this capability, the module hardware must
be version 2.0 or above. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button
to access the TIMECODE submenu. (See page 3-245.)

VIDEO. Enables or disables the Y, Pb, or Pr component of the output serial digital
video signals and the output mode for audio/video timing measurement. Select
this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu.
(See page 3-246.)

BLACK (OPTION). This menu is only available with Option BK, and sets the
parameters of the serial digital black signals output from the BLACK 1 and
BLACK 2 connectors. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button
to access the BLACK submenu. (See page 3-248.)

HD RATE. This menu item is only available with Option BK, and sets the HD
trilevel sync rate for the signal outputs. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select Non-integer (59.94, 29.97, 23.98) or Integer (60, 50, 30, 25, 24).
Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. The HD trilevel sync rate
selection affects which signal formats can be output from the module (integer or
non-integer).

3–234 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal
MOVING PICTURE up/down or left/right (or randomly). Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
submenu scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the MOVING PICTURE
submenu.

Figure 3-104: HDVG7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu

H Step. Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period
menu item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You
can set the value from -252 to +252 in 4-sample steps.

V Step. Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu
item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set
the value from -252 to +252 in 1-line steps.

Period. Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the value. You can set the value from 1
to 16 in 1-frame steps.

Random. Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select between Disable and Enable. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–235

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to select an item (logo, ID Text, or circle) to overlay on the output
OVERLAY submenu test signal, and to set the blinking mode for the overlay. Use the up (▲) or down
(▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the
OVERLAY submenu.

Figure 3-105: HDVG7 module OVERLAY submenu

OBJECT. Selects an item to overlay on the output test signal. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following overlays, and then press the
ENTER button to access the submenu for setting the parameters of that overlay.
Logo: Opens the LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the
output signal in a specified position. (See page 3-237.)
ID Text: Opens the ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay
the output signal in a specified position. (See page 3-238.)
Circle: Opens the CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and
position to overlay the output signal. (See page 3-240.)

BLINK. Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following blink modes, and then press
the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
OFF: Turns off the blinking function of the overlay.
Fast: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0.5 second intervals.
Slow: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1.0 second intervals.

3–236 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the
LOGO submenu display position of the logo. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll
through the menu. The following figure shows the LOGO submenu.

NOTE. To display a logo using the LOGO submenu, you need to create a logo file
(.lgo) and download it to the LOGO folder of the module. Refer to the TG8000
PC Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo
file and download it to the TG8000.

Figure 3-106: HDVG7 module LOGO submenu

Logo. Selects the logo you want to display. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select OFF or a logo file name. Press the ENTER button confirm the
selection. When you select OFF, the logo overlay is disabled.

X Position. Sets the horizontal position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps.

Y Position. Sets the vertical position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps.

SAVE. Saves the display position for the logo to the logo file. Press the ENTER
button to save the current settings.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–237

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to edit a text overlaid on the output test signal, and to set the
ID TEXT submenu display position of the text. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change
the menu items. The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu.

Figure 3-107: HDVG7 module ID TEXT submenu

Status. Enables or disables the text overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select between Enable and Disable, and then press the ENTER button
to confirm the selection.

X Position. Sets the horizontal position of the text. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

Y Position. Sets the vertical position of the text. The position is set as a percentage
of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

3–238 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

EDIT. Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. Perform the
following steps to edit the text:

NOTE. You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text. Use the blank character
to erase unneeded character(s).

1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select EDIT, and then press the
ENTER button to enable the text edit mode.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
( _ ) to the character you want to change.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the desired character.
4. After you enter all of the desired characters, press the ENTER button to exit
the text editing mode.
5. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select SAVE, and then press the
ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file.

SAVE. Saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output.
Press the ENTER button to save the text and its position to the signal file.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–239

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set the display
CIRCLE submenu position of the circle. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the
menu items. The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu.

Figure 3-108: HDVG7 module CIRCLE submenu

Status. Enables or disables the circle overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Enable and Disable. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.

X Position. Sets the horizontal position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps.

Y Position. Sets the vertical position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps.

Diameter. Sets the diameter of the circle. The diameter is set as a percentage of
active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
value. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps.

3–240 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to perform the following tasks:

AUDIO GROUP submenu Enable or disable the embedded audio of the selected audio group.
Select which audio channel to enable.
Set the emphasis status bits, sampling alignment status bits, and sample bits
of the selected audio group.

Figure 3-109: HDVG7 module AUDIO GROUP submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–241

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

Status. Enables or disables the generation of embedded audio for the selected
audio group. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between Enable
and Disable. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Channel. Selects the audio channel for which you will change the parameters.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1, 2, 3, or 4. Select any audio
channel, and then press the ENTER button to access the AUDIO CHANNEL
submenu. (See page 3-242.)

Emphasis. Sets the emphasis status bits for the selected audio group. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NO EMPHASIS, CD, or CCITT. Press
the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Sampling. Sets the sampling alignment status bits for the selected audio group.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Frame, Frame without
Frame Number, or Asynchronous. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection.

Resolution. Sets the resolution of the audio signal data for the selected audio
group. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between 24 bits and
20 bits. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

HDVG7 module Use this menu to set the frequency, amplitude, and audio click of the embedded
AUDIO CHANNEL audio signal for the selected audio channel. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
submenu button to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the AUDIO
CHANNEL submenu.

Figure 3-110: HDVG7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu

3–242 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

Frequency. Sets the audio signal frequency of the selected audio channel. Use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the frequency. The selection
items are as follows:
Inactive 400 Hz 1600 Hz 6000 Hz
Silence 500 Hz 2000 Hz 8000 Hz
50 Hz 600 Hz 2400 Hz 9600 Hz
100 Hz 750 Hz 3000 Hz 10000 Hz
150 Hz 800 Hz 3200 Hz 12000 Hz
200 Hz 1000 Hz 4000 Hz 15000 Hz
250 Hz 1200 Hz 4800 Hz 16000 Hz
300 Hz 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 20000 Hz

When Inactive is selected, the audio data output is disabled. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

Amplitude. Sets the audio signal amplitude of the selected audio channel. Use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the amplitude. You can set the value
from -60 dBFS to 0 dBFS in 1 dBFS steps.

Audio Click. Inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel. The audio tone, if
any, is turned off for an interval around the audio click. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to make the selection. The choices are OFF, 1 sec, 2 sec, 3 sec,
and 4 sec. Press the ENTER button to enable the selection.
Audio Click becomes valid when you select 1 sec to 4 sec for the Audio Click
rate. When Audio Click is valid, Audio Tone is turned off for 0.25 second around
the click. For example, if you select 3 sec for the click rate, the audio tone will
be output for 2.75 seconds, and silent for 0.25 second; the click occurs during
this silence.
When Audio Click is OFF, the Audio Tone selected in the FREQUENCY menu
is output continuously. Audio Click makes it easy to identify any channel(s) of the
four output channels.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–243

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative
TIMING submenu to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Use the up (▲) or down
(▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the
TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-111: HDVG7 module TIMING submenu

Vertical. Sets the vertical timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from -1/2 to +1/2 frame
in 1-line steps.

Horizontal. (See page 3-133, GPS7 module TIME OF DAY submenu.)Sets the
horizontal timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
timing offset. You can set the value from -1 to +1 line in 1-clock (13.5 ns) steps.

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow buttons simultaneously.

3–244 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the module outputs. This menu is
TIMECODE submenu only available when a GPS7 module is also installed in the instrument.

NOTE. To display the TIMECODE submenu, the HDVG7 module hardware must
be version 2.0 or above.

Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The
following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu.

Figure 3-112: HDVG7 module TIMECODE submenu

SOURCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the timecode
source from the following choices:
Time of Day: Uses the time of day as determined by the time of day menu
selection. (See page 3-133.)

NOTE. The Time of Day selection is local time, including any time zone offset and
DST offset applied at the system level.

Program Time: Uses the program time counter as the timecode.

Disable: Disables the timecode function for the HDVG7 module.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–245

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

OFFSET. Use this menu item to set a time offset for the HDVG7 module outputs
from the timecode input from the GPS7 module. You can enter a time offset of
up to ±23:59:59:29 from the selected time source (hours : minutes : seconds :
video frames). Press the ENTER button, and then use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select a digit in the offset value to change. An underline character
appears under the selected offset digit.
After you select an offset digit, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to
change the value of the digit. Repeat for each digit as required for you offset.
Press the ENTER to confirm the offset change.

NOTE. The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to
±23:59 hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones
in the range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use
ST309 data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined
programmed offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12
to +13 hours.

HDVG7 module Use this menu to turn each serial digital video component (Y, Pb, or Pr) on or off
VIDEO submenu individually, and to turn the output mode for an audio/video timing measurement
on or off. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu.
The following figure shows the VIDEO submenu.

Figure 3-113: HDVG7 module VIDEO submenu

3–246 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

Y. Turns the Y component of the serial digital video signals on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Pb. Turns the Pb component of the serial digital video signals on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Pr. Turns the Pr component of the serial digital video signals on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

AV Timing Mode. Turns the output mode for an audio/video timing measurement
on or off. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and
OFF. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
When you turn this mode on, the specified audio and video signals are
synchronously on for 0.5 second and off for 4.5 seconds. With this signal, you can
measure the time delay that accumulates between the audio and video content of
the television signal during signal transport. The time delay can be measured by a
video analyzer with the serial digital video signal or by an oscilloscope with the
analog audio and video signals extracted from the serial digital video signal.
The following settings are recommended for the audio and video signals when
you use this mode:
Audio signal (CH1 and CH2 of Group 1): 10000 Hz, -20 dBFS
Video signal: 100% Flat Field

NOTE. The AV Timing Mode setting is not saved as a preset.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–247

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

HDVG7 module Use this menu to set the parameters of the serial digital signals output from the
BLACK submenu BLACK1 and BLACK 2 connectors. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button
(Option BK Only) to scroll through the menu. The following figure shows the BLACK submenu.

Figure 3-114: HDVG7 module BLACK submenu (Option BK only)

FORMAT. Selects the format of the output serial digital black signals. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select from the signal formats in the following
table. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. When you change the signal format, synchronization shock will occur.

Table 3-46: HDVG7 module output signal formats

Non-integer HD trilevel sync rate 1 Integer HD trilevel sync rate 1
1080 59.94i 1080 60i
1080 23.98sf 1080 50i
1080 29.97p 1080 24sf
1080 23.98p 1080 30p
1035 59.94i 1080 25p
720 59.94p 1080 24p

3–248 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

Table 3-46: HDVG7 module output signal formats (cont.)

720 29.97p 1035 60i
720 23.98p 720 60p
720 50p
720 30p
720 25p
720 24p
1 The signal formats available in this submenu depend on the HD trilevel sync rate setting (non-integer or integer),
which is set using the HD Rate selection in the HDVG7 module main menu. (See page 3-232, HDVG7 module
main menu.)

SIGNAL. Selects the serial digital black signal to output. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to select between Black (serial digital black), 40% Flat Field,
50% Flat Field, and 100% Flat Field. Press the ENTER button to confirm
the selection.

AUDIO (EMBEDDED). Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital
black signals. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1,
Group 2, Group 3, or Group 4. Select any of the groups, and then press the
ENTER button to access the AUDIO GROUP submenu. (See page 3-241.)

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the serial digital black outputs relative to the
internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-244.)

HDVG7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the HDVG7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-47: HDVG7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
STATUS 1080 59.94i SMPTE Color Bars
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable
OVERLAY : OBJECT Logo
OVERLAY : BLINK OFF
OVERLAY : LOGO
Logo OFF

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–249

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

Table 3-47: HDVG7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Menu item name Settings
OVERLAY : ID TEXT
Status Disable
OVERLAY : CIRCLE
Status Disable
X Position 0.0% APH
Y Position 0.0% APH
Diameter 90% APH
AUDIO : GRP-1 to GRP-4
Status Disable
Emphasis No Emphasis
Sampling Frame
Resolution 24 bits
AUDIO : GRP-1 : CH-1 to CH-4
Frequency 1000 Hz
Amplitude -20.0 dBFS
Audio Click OFF
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 ms
VIDEO
Y ON
Pb ON
Pr ON
AV Timing Mode OFF
TIMECODE (requires GPS7 module
be installed in mainframe)
SOURCE Disable
Option BK
(BLACK) FORMAT 1080 59.94i
(BLACK) SIGNAL Black
(BLACK) AUDIO : GRP-1 to GRP-4
Status Disable
Emphasis No Emphasis
Sampling Frame
Resolution 24 bits

3–250 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module

Table 3-47: HDVG7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Menu item name Settings
(BLACK) AUDIO : CH-1 to CH-4
Frequency 1000 Hz
Amplitude -20.0 dBFS
Audio Click OFF
(BLACK)TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 ms
HD RATE Non-integer

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–251

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

This section describes the module-specific functions of the SDI7 Dual Channel
SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module. Refer to the following locations for
additional information about this module:
SDI7 module connectors for a description of the rear-panel connectors. (See
page 2-18.)
SDI7 module functional check for a basic procedure to check that the module
is functional. (See page 1-41.)
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference for
module specifications and for a detailed procedure to verify that the module
is functioning as specified.
TG8000 Programmer Manual for information about the commands to
remotely control the module.

SDI7 module product description

The SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module can be operated
as a signal generator to output two channels of 270 Mb/s SD-SDI, 1.5 Gb/s
HD-SDI, and 3 Gb/s SDI video test signals in a variety of formats, including both
Level A and Level B mapping structures for 3G-SDI signals. (See page 3-257, To
select an output signal on the SDI7 module.)
The module provides the following features:
Two serial-digital channels, each independently configurable for 270 Mb/s,
1.5 Gb/s, or 3 Gb/s signals.
Two SDI outputs per channel for simultaneous test signal and test/black
signal output.
One clock/frame/line trigger output.
Generates test signals in many formats, with both 3G-SDI Level A and
Level B mapping structures supported.
Standard test signals, including SMPTE color bars and SDI pathological test
patterns.
Zone plate test signals, with full control of all parameters.
Full frame picture display.
Overlay of circle or logo on the video signal.
Text overlay with support for Latin, Cryillic, Greek, and symbol character sets.

3–252 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output
test signal.
Up to 32 channels of 24-bit embedded digital audio with a sample rate of
48 kHz.
AV Timing mode.
Timing adjustment anywhere in the frame for the output.
Timecode generator with ATC-LTC or ATC-VITC.
Full remote control using Ethernet interface.
SMPTE 352M payload identifier.
User-defined ancillary data packet.

How to operate the SDI7 module

After the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in
the rack or other location where it will be used, use the following procedure to
access each function of the module:
1. Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear panel, and then
plug the cord into the AC electric power source. Electric power is supplied
to the mainframe.
2. Wait until the power-on initialization process is complete, and then check that
no error messages appear on the display.
3. After the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears
as shown below:

4. For first-time operation only, if you ordered Option 3G and/or DBT as an

upgrade to your existing SDI7 module, you must enter the option key that was
supplied with the upgrade in order to enable the software option(s). (See
page 3-254, To enter the option key on the SDI7 module.)

NOTE. If you ordered Option 3G and/or DBT at the same time you ordered the
SDI7 module, the module was shipped from the factory with the option already
enabled.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–253

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

5. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the SDI7 module main menu
appears for the desired SDI7 channel (channel 1 or channel 2).

NOTE. The SDI7 module provides two channels of output. The display indicates
which SDI7 channel is selected. For example, a display of SDI7[3-1] indicates
that the SDI7 module is installed in slot 3 and that channel 1 is selected. A display
of SDI7[3-2] indicates that channel 2 is selected.
Press the MODULE button to advance from channel 1 to channel 2. You can press
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to switch between channels 1 and 2 of the
selected SDI7 module when the STATUS menu is displayed as shown above.

6. Select the frame rate using the FORMAT button, or select the test signal using
the test signal front panel buttons, such as COLOR BARS or LINEARITY.
7. Use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main
menu and submenus. For example, when the OUTPUT MODE menu is
displayed, pressing the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button allows you to select
between output modes such as Level A, Level B, SD, HD, etc.
Refer to SDI7 module main menu for detailed information about the main
menu items and the submenu items. (See page 3-283.)

NOTE. In addition to the factory installed signal sets, there are enhanced signal
sets available for the SDI7 module. These signal sets are located on the TG8000
SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied with your instrument.
(See page 3-268, To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module.)

To enter the option key on the SDI7 module

If you ordered Option 3G and/or DBT as an upgrade to your existing SDI7
module, you must enter the option key that was supplied with the upgrade in
order to enable the software option(s).

NOTE. If you ordered Option 3G and/or DBT at the same time you ordered the
SDI7 module, the module was shipped from the factory with the option already
enabled.
Option 3G is available for both the TG700 and the TG8000 generators. Option
DBT is available for only the TG8000 generator.

3–254 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Each option key applies to only one SDI7 module. After the option key is entered,
the option key stays with that SDI7 module, enabling Option 3G and/or DBT
even when the module is moved to another TG8000 mainframe or to a TG700
mainframe that is running software version 5.6 or above.
Locate the option key document, and then perform the following steps to enter
the option key:

NOTE. This procedure uses the instrument front panel to enter the option key. You
can also use the TG Setup utility to remotely enter the option key. Refer to the
TG8000 PC Tools Technical Reference for information about using TG Setup
to enter the option key.

1. Press the front-panel MODULE button until TG8000 : PRESET is

displayed.
2. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY is
displayed, and then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY :
OPTIONS ENABLED is displayed. The bottom line of the display will
list the slot number in which the SDI7 module is installed and will indicate
whether Option 3G and/or DBT is enabled. None is displayed when no
options are enabled, 3G and/or DBT is displayed when options are enabled.

4. If more than one SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe, use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the desired module, and then press
the ENTER button.
5. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY :
MODULE ID is displayed.
6. Verify that the displayed module ID matches the module ID listed on the
option key document.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–255

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

7. Enter the option key:

a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY :
OPTION KEY is displayed.

b. Press the ENTER button to enter the option key edit mode. The
underscore character (_) appears under the first character of the option key.
c. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the first character of
the option key.
d. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore
character to the next character in the option key.
e. Enter all of the option key characters, and then press ENTER button to
confirm the selection.
f. Press the BACK button twice to exit the UTILITY submenu. This returns
to the top of the UTILITY submenu.
8. Cycle power on the instrument to ensure the newly enabled option(s) is fully
operational.

CAUTION. For Option DBT upgrades, be sure to cycle power on the instrument
after entering the new option key. A reboot is required in order to fully activate
the Dolby E functionality.

9. After the instrument reboots, verify that Option 3G and/or DBT is enabled:
a. If necessary, press the front-panel MODULE button until TG8000 :
PRESET is displayed.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY is
displayed, and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY
: OPTIONS is displayed.
d. Verify that SDI7[slot number] 3G and/or DBT is displayed. This
indicates that Option 3G and/or DBT has been enabled.

3–256 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

To select an output signal on the SDI7 module

To select an output signal, perform the following procedure to generate either
3 Gb/s SDI, 1.5 Gb/s HD-SDI, or 270 Mb/s SD video test signals:
1. Select the output mode. (See page 3-259, To select the output mode on the
SDI7 module.)
2. Select the signal format. (See page 3-260, To select the signal format on
the SDI7 module.)
3. Select the sample structure and depth. (See page 3-260, To select the sample
structure and depth for the SDI7 module (Option 3G only).)
4. Select the test signal that you want to generate. (See page 3-261, To select
the test signal on the SDI7 module.)

Table 3-48: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (1920 × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr 4:2:2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X
GBR 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GBR+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-49: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (1280 × 720)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:4:4 10b X X X X X X X X
YCbCr+A 4:4:4 10b X X X X X X X X
GBR 4:4:4 10b X X X X X X X X
GBR+A 4:4:4 10b X X X X X X X X

Table 3-50: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level A (2K × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
XYZ 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X
GBR X X X X X X X X X X

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–257

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-51: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (1920 × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
YCbCr 4:2:2 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X
YCbCr+A 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GBR 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X
GBR+A 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-52: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2K × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
XYZ 4:4:4 12b X X X X X X X X X X
GBR X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-53: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2×HD 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-54: SDI7 module (Option 3G only) – 3G Level B (2×HD 720)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X

Table 3-55: SDI7 module – HD-SDI (1920 × 1080)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Table 3-56: SDI7 module – HD-SDI (1280 × 720)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X X X X X X X X

Table 3-57: SDI7 module – SD-525 (720 × 486)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X

3–258 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-58: SDI7 module – SD-625 (720 × 576)

Structure 59.94i 50i 60i 23.98p 24p 25p 29.97p 30p 50p 59.94p 60p 23.98psf 24psf 25psf 29.97psf 30psf
YCbCr 4:2:2 10b X

To select the output mode You can select how the generated 270 Mb/s, 1.5 Gb/s, or 3 Gb/s serial data
on the SDI7 module stream is constructed. This selection is available in the SDI7 OUTPUT MODE
submenu. Perform the following steps to select the output mode:
1. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the SDI7 module main menu
appears as shown below.

2. Press the down (▼) arrow button to access the output mode menu as shown
below.

Note the dot at the start of the second line and the return symbol at the end
of the second line. The dot indicates that this is the currently selected output
mode, and the return symbol indicates that you can press the ENTER button
to select a new displayed output mode.
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to scroll through the available
output modes:

SD
HD (1920 × 1080)
HD (1280 × 720)
3G–Level A (1920 × 1080) *1
3G–Level A (1280 × 720) *1
3G–Level A (2K × 1080) *1
3G–Level B (1920 × 1080)*1
3G–Level B (2K × 1080)*1
3G–Level B (2×HD 1080) *1
3G–Level B (2×HD 720) *1

*1 Available with Option 3G only

4. Press the ENTER button to select the desired output mode. Note that the
dot will appear in front of the output mode on the display, to indicate that
it is now the selected output mode.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–259

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

To select the signal format Perform the following steps to select the signal format:
on the SDI7 module 1. Press the FORMAT button. The menu display changes as follows:

2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or press the FORMAT button
repeatedly, to select one of the signal formats, and then press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection. The dot will appear at the left of the second
line to indicate that the format has been selected.
3. Press the BACK button to exit FORMAT mode.

To select the sample This menu item appears only when Option 3G is enabled. There are several sample
structure and depth structures to choose from when the output mode is set to a non-fast-progressive
for the SDI7 module format. Press the down (▼) arrow button to navigate to the sample structure/depth
(Option 3G only) selection shown below:

Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to scroll through the available
sample structures. When the desired sample structure is displayed, press the
ENTER button to select it.

3G non-fast progressive formats (1080 line)

• RGB 444 12b • YCbCr 444 10b
• RGB 444 10b • YCbCrA 444 10b
• RGBA 444 10b • YCbCr 422 12b
• YCbCr 444 12b • YCbCrA 422 12b
(Level B mapping only)
3G formats (720 line)
• RGB 444 10b • YCbCr 444 10b
• RGBA 444 10b • YCbCrA 444 10b
2K line formats
• XYZ 444 12b • RGB 444 12b

3–260 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

To select the test signal on All of the signal sets that are available in the module are already assigned to the
the SDI7 module corresponding test signal buttons. (See Table 3-59.) When the SDI7 module is
selected and you press any of the front-panel test signal buttons, the selected
signal in the signal set is output. (See Figure 3-115.)

For example, when you press the COLOR BAR test signal button, a signal in
the Color Bars signal set is output. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button, or
press the COLOR BAR test signal button repeatedly to select a different signal
from the Color Bars signal set.

Figure 3-115: Front-panel test signal buttons

The following table lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the
signals that can be selected in the signal set when the module is in generator mode.

Table 3-59: SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
COLOR BAR 100% Color Bars, Eight full-height bars of white, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red,
75% Color Bars (100% White), blue, and black. This pattern is available with three variations, at
75% Color Bars (75% White) 100% value for all bars, at 75% value for colors and 100% for
white, and at 75% value for all bars.
100% Color Bars Over Red, These variations on color bars are available only in the 625 50i
75% Color Bars Over Red format of the SD output mode. They consist of the 75% or 100%
color bars signal on the top half of the raster, and a matching 75%
or 100% red field on the lower half.
SMPTE EG1 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE EG 1-1990. This pattern includes 75%
color bars, reverse blue bars, −I and +Q sections, black, white,
and pluge sections. Note that this pattern is only available for
YCbCr formats, since the −I and +Q sections contain color
components outside of the legal RGB gamut. For the SD output
mode, this pattern is available only for the 525-line 59.94i format.
SMPTE RP219 Color Bars Color bars per SMPTE RP 219-2002. This pattern is intended for
16×9 aspect ratio displays, with additional elements as compared
to EG1 bars. The SDI7 implementation includes −I and +Q
sections, but unlike the similar sections in EG1 bars, they have
additional luminance to stay within RGB gamut. The −2% patch
of the pluge section is clipped to 0% black for XYZ formats. For
SD, the color bars are the 4:3 aspect ratio version, as if converted
from the 16:9 image with a center cut.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–261

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-59: SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
SMPTE EG432-1 Color Accuracy Split-screen color bars using values from SMPTE RP 431-2-2007.
The upper half of the pattern is essentially the same as 100%
color bars, corresponding to the “–1” set of colors defined in Table
A.4 of the RP. The lower half is a set of desaturated color bars,
corresponding to the “–2” color patch values.
LINEARITY 5 Step Staircase, Series of vertical bars of equal steps on all three channels. These
10 Step Staircase patterns are color-independent so they will appear differently in
YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ color spaces. Since the range of valid levels
is not evenly divisible by 5 or 10 steps, the first and last bars
slightly exceed the valid range, but are still well within legal limits.
For example, the valid range for 10-bit YCbCr formats is from
64–940 for the Y channel (876 steps) and from 64–960 for the
Cb/Cr channels (896 steps). Therefore, the level of the first bar is
62 and the level of the last bar is 942/962, which results in equal
step sizes across the pattern.
Valid Ramp, The Valid Ramp is a matrix of three different ramps, designed
Y Valid Ramp, to test the video component channels for YCbCr, and for gamut
B-Y Valid Ramp, range testing in all color spaces. These three ramps are also
R-Y Valid Ramp available as individual patterns that span the picture width. First,
the Y Valid Ramp spans from black to white, across the valid
range of the luminance (Y) channel. Next, the B−Y Valid Ramp
spans from yellow to cyan, across the valid range of the Cb color
difference channel. Last, the R−Y Valid Ramp spans from cyan to
red, across the valid range of the Cr color difference channel.
3 Channel Ramp Wide ramp from the lower valid value to the upper valid value for
all three channels. This pattern is color-independent, so it will
appear differently in YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ color spaces. On each
side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking level
(black) and at the valid level.
Limit Ramp Wide ramp that spans the legal limit range (4–1019 for 10-bit
formats and 16–4079 for 12-bit formats) for all three channels. On
each side of the ramp there are small plateaus at the blanking
level, the valid level, and the limit level.
Shallow Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of shallow ramps that together span the range
between legal limits (4–1019 for 10-bit formats and 16–4079 for
12-bit formats). Each bit value is held for 16 pixels for 10-bit
formats and for 4 pixels for 12-bit formats. There is overlap
between the end of one ramp and the start of the next ramp.
Color Ramp Matrix Vertical matrix of ramps across the colors available in the valid
RGB gamut. Each set of ramps transitions between adjacent
hues: red–yellow–green–cyan–magenta–blue–red. From the top
of the pattern, the first three rows of ramps are at 25%, 50%, and
75% saturation. The fourth row of ramps includes fully saturated
colors at 100% value. The next three rows of ramps are at 75%,
50%, and 25% value. The bottom row of ramps is monochrome.

3–262 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-59: SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
FLAT FIELD 0% Flat Field (Black), Full-frame monochrome flat fields. The factory installed patterns
50% Flat Field, include 0% (black), 50%, and 100% (white).
100% Flat Field (White) You can install extended signal sets, which include additional
patterns for the remaining 10% increments. (See page 3-268, To
install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module.)
100% Red Field, 100% Green Field, Full-frame color flat fields. The factory installed patterns include
100% Blue Field, 100% Cyan Field, each of six colors (red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow)
100% Magenta Field, 100% Yellow Field at 100% value.
You can install enhanced signal sets, which include additional
patterns for these six colors at 75% value. (See page 3-268, To
install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7 module.)
10% Flat Field, 20% Flat Field, Full-frame monochrome flat fields available in individual patterns
30% Flat Field, 40% Flat Field, from 10% to 90% in 10% increments.
60% Flat Field, 70% Flat Field, These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets. You
80% Flat Field, 90% Flat Field must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals.
(See page 3-268, To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7
module.)
75% Red Field, 75% Green Field, Full-frame color flat fields available in individual patterns of 75%
75% Blue Field, 75% Cyan Field, value for each of six colors (red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and
75% Magenta Field, 75% Yellow Field yellow).
These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets. You
must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals.
(See page 3-268, To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7
module.)
Black to White-1, Black to White-2, Full-frame monochrome flat fields representing the individual
Black to White-3, Black to White-4, steps in the SMPTE EG 432–1 step-scale patterns available under
Black to White-5, Black to White-6, the MONITOR button.
Black to White-7, Black to White-8, These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets. You
Black to White-9, Black to White-10, must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals.
Black to Gray-1, Black to Gray-2, (See page 3-268, To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7
Black to Gray-3, Black to Gray-4, module.)
Black to Gray-5, Black to Gray-6,
Black to Gray-7, Black to Gray-8,
Black to Gray-9, Black to Gray-10
Red-1 Field, Red-2 Field, Full-frame color flat fields representing the individual colors in
Green-1 Field, Green-2 Field, the SMPTE EG 432–1 color-accuracy patterns available under
Blue-1 Field, Blue-2 Field, the COLOR BAR button.
Cyan-1 Field, Cyan-2 Field, These signals are not part of the factory installed signal sets. You
Magenta-1 Field, Magenta-2 Field, must install the enhanced signal sets to access these signals.
Yellow-1 Field, Yellow-2 Field (See page 3-268, To install the enhanced signal sets on the SDI7
module.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–263

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-59: SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
MULTIBURST Multiburst pattern consisting of five or six sine wave packets, each
of fixed frequency. This pattern is typically used for frequency
response testing for one or three video channels. The packets
have a 60% amplitude range upon a 50% level, therefore range
between 20% and 80% levels.
For comparison to these peak limits, flat pedestals at 80% and
20% levels are present on the left side of the pattern. The set
of packet frequencies used in each pattern is determined by the
maximum bandwidth of the output format.
For 4:2:2 YCbCr formats, one multiburst pattern consists only of
a Y channel signal, up to the maximum frequency limit, and the
second multiburst pattern is identical for all three channels, up to
half of the Y channel frequency limit.
For 4:4:4 formats, each multiburst pattern is identical for all three
channels.
Multiburst 0.5–2.75 MHz (SD formats only) Three channel pattern with packet frequencies
of 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, and 2.75 MHz.
Y Multiburst 0.5–5.75 MHz (SD formats only) Y channel pattern with packet frequencies of
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 and 5.75 MHz.
Multiburst 1–15 MHz (HD and 3G formats only) Three channel pattern with packet
frequencies of 1, 3, 6, 9, 12, and 15 MHz.
Y Multiburst 15–30 MHz (HD formats only) Y channel pattern with packet frequencies of
15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 MHz.
Multiburst 15–30 MHz (4:4:4 and fast-progressive 3G formats only) Three channel
pattern with packet frequencies of 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 MHz.
Y Multiburst 35–60 MHz (Fast-progressive 3G formats only) Y channel pattern with packet
frequencies of 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, and 60 MHz.
SWEEP Circle, Diagonal Sine, Zone plate test signal with real-time parametric controls. (See
H Sine, H Sweep, V Sine, V Sweep, page 3-270, SDI7 module zone plate signals.)
Custom-1, Custom-2
MONITOR ChromaDuMonde Color reference chart, used with permission of DSC Laboratories.
The pattern consists of a series of DSC standard color patches
representing the six primary colors, 18 evenly spaced intermediate
colors, and four skin tone reference patches. The 24 primary
and intermediate colors will show as a hexagonal shape on a
vectorscope display, providing a reference for comparison with a
camera-generated image of a physical DSC ChromaDuMonde
chart. The pattern also includes an 11-step crossed grayscale
section and a center section with 0% black and 100% white
patches.

3–264 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-59: SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
SMPTE 303M Color Reference Color reference chart per SMPTE 303M, also known as the
GretagMacbeth ColorChecker® chart. Note that cyan patch #18
cannot be reproduced properly in the RGB and XYZ color spaces
because the red component lies at approximately −14%, which
exceeds legal limits for RGB formats. This patch will appear as
a cyan and black checkerboard pattern, where the cyan patches
are of a different hue than the full cyan patch as seen in YCbCr
formats because the red component is clipped at 0%. The color
values used from SMPTE 303M are those with respect to the D65
illuminant.
Black-White Step Scale, Gray scale patterns per §6.9 of SMPTE EG 432-1-2007. A series
Black-Dark Gray Step Scale of ten different monochrome patches at increasing luminance
values is centered on a gray background, to verify gray scale
tracking. The ten steps of the black to white scale are normalized
gamma-corrected values of 1/10 to 1 and the ten steps of the
black to dark gray scale are 1/31 to 10/31.
Pluge and Luma Reference Includes two elements to assist in black and white balance. The
left side of the pattern contains a pluge pattern, with three vertical
bars of −2%, 0%, and +2% black. The right side of the pattern
contains four gray boxes corresponding to luminance levels of
110 mV, 200 mV, 450 mV, and 700 mV (100% white) in the analog
domain. The −2% patch of the pluge section is clipped to 0%
black for XYZ formats.
Checkerboard 4×4 grid of alternating black and white patches, used to measure
intra-frame contrast per §6.8 of SMPTE SMPTE EG 432-1-2007.
Window White square centered on a black background. This pattern can
be used as an alternative to a full-field white pattern when it
is desirable for the average picture level (APL) to approximate
normal program content.
Production Aperture Includes single-pixel wide lines at the extreme edges of the active
video area, marking the complete production aperture. Vertical
lines are implemented as single-sample pulses with no edge
filtering, so this pattern is not legal as a broadcast signal.
Clean Aperture Grid pattern per SMPTE RP 187-1995. The clean aperture
is marked by the outer markers, with overscan markers at
approximate 2.5% increments. The center 4:3 section of a 16:9
image has an additional set of aperture and overscan markers.
Each line on the grid is implemented with two horizontal lines or a
double-width pulse centered on two samples, because the actual
aperture boundary and the center of the image each lie midway
between lines and samples.
Convergence Grid pattern of equal size squares, with a dot at the center of each
square. Each line and dot is implemented as a single horizontal
line or single-sample pulse. This pattern is used to verify
convergence of RGB channels, and no color fringing should be
visible on the white lines and dots when the channels are aligned.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–265

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-59: SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
PULSE BAR 2T Pulse and Bar Two pulses of 2T half-amplitude width and full-scale amplitude. A
positive pulse is added to a base level at the minimum valid value,
and a negative pulse is added to a bar level at the maximum valid
value. The 2T pulse is used for Short Time response testing and
the bar is used for Line Time response testing.
The type of 2T pulse depends on the signal format:
For SD-525 format, this is a 2T4 pulse
For SD-625 format, this is a 2T5 pulse
For HD and slow-progressive 3G formats, this is a 2T30 pulse
For 3G fast progressive formats, this is a 2T60 pulse
For 4:2:2 formats, chroma pulses are at half the bandwidth
Color Pulses Eight color pulses of 2T half-amplitude width upon black and white
backgrounds. The upper half of the pattern has positive pulses on
a black background, testing each combination of the three color
channels. The lower half of the pattern has a white background,
so negative pulses are used to result in the same line colors. For
example, the yellow pulse in the upper half is 100% red plus 100%
green, resulting in yellow on a black background. At the same
horizontal location in the lower half, a pulse of −100% blue added
to the white background also results in a yellow line.
TIMING Co-siting Pulse One single-sample wide pulse in the center of the image, used to
show the timing relationship and alignment between chroma and
luma channels. Different amplitudes are used to distinguish the
three channels.

3–266 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-59: SDI7 module signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.)
Button name Signals in the signal set Description
SDI Equalizer Test Full-field equalizer test pattern per SMPTE RP 198-1998. This
pattern consists of alternate 10-bit words, 300h and 198h,
regardless of the current sampling structure and format. For
10-bit 4:2:2 YCbCr HD-SDI formats, the Y samples carry the
198h words and the Cb/Cr samples carry the 300h words,
resulting in a magenta-shaded field for this pattern. For other
formats, these same 10-bit word values will result in different color
representations. This pattern also includes the polarity control
word, such that the first sample in the active picture in every other
frame is 190h instead of 198h.
PLL Test Full-field phase-locked loop test pattern per SMPTE RP 198-1998.
This pattern consists of alternate 10-bit words, 200h and 110h,
regardless of the current sampling structure and format. It appears
as a 24% gray field in 10-bit 4:2:2 YCbCr formats, but as different
colors in other formats.
SDI Matrix Matrix pattern, with the equalizer test pattern (300h 198h) in the
upper half of the field and the PLL test pattern (200h 110h) in the
lower half of the field.
OTHER Frame Picture Picture rendered from user-supplied BMP files stored in the
PICTURE directory of the TG8000 mainframe memory. Use the
left or right arrow button to select a test signal from the list. (See
page 3-269, To install custom picture files (BMP format).)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–267

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

To install the enhanced In addition to the factory installed signal sets, there are enhanced signal sets
signal sets on the SDI7 available for the FLAT FIELD button on the SDI7 module. These signals are
module located on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD that was supplied
with your instrument.
Perform the following steps to install the enhanced signal sets:
1. Install the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD into the DVD drive
on your computer.
2. Using the DVD browser, navigate to the following directory: Test Signals >
SDI7 Signal Library > Enhanced Signal Set.
The Enhanced Signal Set directory contains the following files:
Monochrome Fields.xml — includes all monochrome flat fields from 0%
to 100% in 10% increments.
Color Fields.xml — includes color fields for six primary and secondary
colors at both 100% and 75% values.
SMPTE RP431-2 Color Patches.xml — includes full field patterns for
each of the Black-White and Black-Dark Gray steps, plus the “–1” and
“–2” color patches.
3. Use FTP to locate and copy the desired signal set file(s) from the DVD to
the SDI7/SIGNAL directory on your TG8000 generator. Instructions for
using FTP are located in the How to transfer user files using FTP section of
this manual. (See page 2-67.)

NOTE. If you load the Monochrome Fields.xml and Color Fields.xml enhanced
signal sets on your TG8000 generator, you can delete the Flat Fields.xml file from
the SDI7/SIGNAL directory, since it contains a duplicate copy of a subset of the
Monochrome Fields.xml and Color Fields.xml patterns.

4. After you load the new signal set file(s) on the TG8000 generator, you must
either reboot the TG8000 or perform the following SCPI command before the
new signals will be available:
OUTPut[1/2]:SYNThesizer:SIGNal:BUILd
This command rebuilds the XML signal library and will detect any newly
added signals.

To reinstall the factory default signal sets. To reinstall the factory default signal
sets, perform the previous procedure to install the signal set files from the
following directory on the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD: Test
Signals > SDI7 Signal Library > Standard Signal Set.
After you reinstall the standard signal sets, delete the enhanced signal set file(s)
from the SDI7/SIGNAL directory, and then reboot the instrument.

3–268 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

To install custom picture To install custom picture test signals, use FTP to copy the BMP picture file(s) you
files (BMP format) created to the SDI7/PICTURE directory on the TG8000. The instructions for
using FTP are located in the How to transfer user files using FTP section of this
manual. (See page 2-67.) After the BMP files are downloaded to the TG8000,
press the MODULE button to select the desired SDI7 module, and then press the
OTHER button to select the desired BMP file.

NOTE. Picture displays work best with uncompressed BMP images (24 bits
and 32 bits true color). Picture displays do not work with RLE8 or RLE4 BMP
compression.

About SDI7 picture file generation. When generating signals from frame pictures,
the SDI7 does not filter the video signal except at the left and right borders of the
raster. The unfiltered signal allows users to control exactly what is generated
and to create stressful patterns.
The SDI7 allows picture files to be used at resolutions larger and smaller than the
native size of the picture file. If the picture image is larger than needed, it will
be truncated and only the upper left corner of the image will be displayed. If the
picture file resolution is smaller than the output raster, then the image will be
displayed in the upper left corner of the output, and black will be shown in the
rest of the image.
The combination of not filtering and the use of nonnative image sizes has the
potential to cause problems in several areas:
If the video in the frame picture file has fast transitions that exceed the normal
video limits, then the final output may ring excessively and therefore not
be appropriate for transmission. In most cases, the picture file should be
processed to limit the edge speed before it is downloaded to the SDI7.
If the video in the frame picture file is not shaped at the edges of the raster,
then there may be ringing if the signal is put in motion. If this is a concern,
then the picture file should be processed to have gradual transitions at the
edges before it is downloaded.
If the frame picture file is used at a raster that is smaller than the native size of
the file, then it will be truncated at the output raster size which may create
unshaped edges. These will be masked for normal operation, but will be
exposed if the signal is set in motion. If this is a problem, then the user should
create a second version of the picture file that has the desired native raster
size and has shaped edges.
If a frame picture file is used at a raster size greater than the native size
of the file, then the two edges will inherently end up somewhere inside the
output raster image. If the file has unshaped edges, then the output may have
excessive ringing even when not in motion. If this is a concern, then the
picture file should be processed to have gradual transitions at the edges before
it is downloaded.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–269

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module zone plate signals

Zone plate video test patterns, or simply “zone plates”, are important tools for the
evaluation of video processing systems and techniques.
They are called zone plates because the classical circular pattern looks like an
optical zone plate (which uses the principles of Fresnel diffraction to focus and
intensify light). Today, however, the name has been applied to a wide variety of
stationary and “moving” test patterns.

The following figure shows two enlarged optical zone plates. The white areas
are transparent and the black areas are opaque. The precise spacing of the rings
focuses and intensifies light that passes through the plate.

Figure 3-116: Optical zone plates (enlarged)

The SDI7 module generates electronic zone plate signals, and can be configured
to provide a near infinite number of test patterns. Six basic patterns are predefined
(Circle, Diagonal, Horizontal Sine, Horizontal Sweep, Vertical Sine, and Vertical
Sweep) for convenience. These patterns all have an overall, or pattern control,
parameter.
Pattern control parameters are unique to the specific predefined signals, and are
only found as the first item of the specific signal menu. User-created zone plate
signals saved as Custom–1 or Custom–2 do not have pattern control parameters.
The dependent parameters are common to all of the zone plate signals, and are
found below the pattern control parameter in the menu for each zone plate signal.
Altering the pattern control parameter will make changes to the test signal while
maintaining the basic pattern. For example, the pattern control parameter for the
Circle zone plate signal is the Circle Frequency parameter. The Circle Frequency
parameter controls the maximum frequency of the circle. You may alter the Circle
Frequency at will, and the system will adjust four other dependent parameters to
maintain the pattern as a circle. However, if you alter the underlying dependent
parameters individually the pattern may change to be something other than a circle.
After changes have been made you can save the new signal as a custom zone
plate signal.

3–270 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

To select a zone plate Perform the following steps to select a zone plate signal for output:
signal on the SDI7 module 1. Press the SWEEP test signal button to enter the zone plate signal menu. Once
you enter the zone plate signal menu, the SDI7 generator module will start to
output the displayed zone plate signal. The dot in front of the signal name, on
the second line of the display, indicates the selected default signal.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a zone plate signal from
the provided six standard zone plate signals (Circle, Diagonal, Horizontal
Sine, Horizontal Sweep, Vertical Sine, or Vertical Sweep), or from the two
user-defined signals (Custom-1 Zoneplate or Custom-2 Zoneplate).
The zone plate signal whose name is displayed will continue to be output until
a different signal is selected, even if you press the BACK button.
If you select a different signal, such as a color bar signal, and then press the
SWEEP button again, the last displayed zone plate signal will be shown as
the default and will again be the output signal.

To modify a zone plate There are times when a specific test case requires a modified zone plate signal.
signal on the SDI7 module By making and saving changes to the zone plate parameters you can create a new
signal that is based on the selected signal, and then save that new signal. Changes
you make affect only the new signal; the standard zone plate signal used as a
basis for the new signal is not changed.
Before making changes, make sure you are familiar with both the zone plate
pattern control parameters (below) and zone plate pattern dependent parameters.
(See page 3-275, SDI7 module zone plate dependent parameters.)
Perform the following steps to change a zone plate signal's parameters:
1. Press the SWEEP button to enter the zone plate signal menu.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a zone plate signal
from the provided six standard zone plate signals (Circle, Diagonal, H Sine,
H Sweep, V Sine, and V Sweep), or two user-defined signals (Custom–1
Zoneplate or Custom–2 Zoneplate).

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–271

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

3. When the desired zone plate signal is displayed, press the ENTER button to
enter the zone plate parameter menu. If Circle Zoneplate was displayed,
for example, the display changes to:

which shows the zone plate signal (CIRCLE SWEEP) and the pattern control
parameter (Circle Frequency). As mentioned earlier, each of the standard zone
plate signals have a pattern control parameter that is unique to that signal:
Zone plate signal Pattern control parameter
Circle Circle frequency: [x] c/aph 1
Diagonal Diag. Frequency: [x] c/aph 1
H Sine Horiz. Frequency: [x] MHz
H Sweep H Sweep Frequency: [x] MHz
V Sine Vert. Frequency: [x] c/aph 1
V Sweep V Sweep Frequency: [x] c/aph 1
1 c/aph = cycles per active picture height

4. While the pattern control parameter is displayed, you can use the left (◄)
or right (►) arrow button to modify it. This will modify the signal while
maintaining the basic pattern.

NOTE. Press the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons at the same time to reset
any parameter.

5. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the parameters
menu which, for the predefined signals, starts with it's unique pattern control
parameter as shown in the table above, and then continues through the list
of dependent parameters. At each parameter, whether it's a pattern control
parameter or a dependent parameter, you can use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to modify it.
6. When you are done altering parameters, scroll to the Save As: selection, at
the bottom of the menu and use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select User Custom 1 or User Custom 2.
7. Press the ENTER button to save the modified signal.

3–272 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module zone plate pattern control parameters

NOTE. Zone plate variations can be sinusoidal, square, or triangular. These
discussions of zone plated parameters will refer to sinusoidal variations for
convenience.

Zone plate patterns are made up of sinusoidal variations in luminance, with the
“peaks” of the sine waves resulting in white areas on the video screen and the
wave “troughs” shown as gray or black. The cycles can occur in all three of the
video dimensions: horizontally, or along each line of the picture; vertically, or
“down” the video frame; and temporally (with time). The three dimensions are
often referred to by the shorthand designations of X, Y, and T.
The luminance of any point in the picture, physically on the screen and in time, is
determined by the value of sine at that particular point; the value of sine follows
from the phase of the cycle at that point; and (by the definition of a zone plate)
the phase of any point is determined by the equation:

where x, y, and t are the coordinates of the point in question and kФ, kX, kY, kT,
kXT, kYT, kXY, kX2, kY2, and kT2 are constants.
All SDI7 zone plate patterns are defined with coefficients of ten parameters that
correspond to the constants in the above equation. Note that while the possibilities
are virtually endless, most common zone plates are defined with only one or two
parameters, while the coefficients of the remaining parameters are kept at zero.
The SDI7 Generator module generates six standard zone plate signals: circle
frequency, diagonal frequency, horizontal sine frequency, horizontal sweep
frequency, vertical sine frequency, and vertical sweep frequency. Each standard
zone plate signal has a pattern control parameter. (See Table 3-60.) This pattern
control parameter is unique to the zone plate signal it is associated with.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–273

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

When you first enter the zone plate parameters menu for a signal, the pattern
control parameter for that signal is displayed. The pattern control parameter
controls the basic pattern frequency by adjusting the dependent parameters. For
example, if you change the CIRCLE SWEEP Circle Frequency, the generator
adjusts four of the dependent parameters to keep the circle round.
Table 3-60: SDI7 module zone plate pattern control parameters
Zone plate
signal Pattern control parameter Parameter definition
Circle Circle Frequency (maximum c/aph) The circle frequency is actually the equivalent of the
maximum vertical sinusoid frequency at the very top
and bottom of the screen (see the discussion of the KY 2
parameter). Adjusting the circle frequency has the simple
effect of increasing or decreasing the maximum frequency
at the outer edges of the pattern. However, this adjustment
actually changes the coefficients of four of the zone plate
parameters to keep the pattern round and centered on the
screen.
Diagonal Diagonal Frequency (equivalent c/aph) The diagonal frequency is times the vertical and
horizontal frequencies (c/aph). Adjusting the diagonal sine
frequency changes both the KX and KY coefficients.
H Sine Horizontal Frequency (MHz) The horizontal frequency reported on the display is the real
time frequency of the sine wave that causes the vertical
bar pattern. The maximum frequency is half of the clock
frequency used by the generator for the active video
standard (for example, 74.25 MHz/2 = 37.125 MHz).
H Sweep H Sweep Frequency (maximum MHz, or For horizontal sweep frequencies up to half of the video
multiple) standard’s sampling frequency, fs, the displayed value is the
maximum (or swept to) frequency of the sine wave. For
numbers greater than fs/2, dividing the displayed value by
the sampling frequency will give the number of complete
DC–(fs/2)–DC cycles per line. For example, in a standard
with sampling frequency of 74.25 MHz, a horizontal sweep
frequency of 148.5 MHz will result in approximately two
complete frequency sweeps across the picture.
V Sine Vertical Frequency (c/aph) The vertical frequency is actually the KY coefficient. The
maximum frequency (c/aph) corresponds to the number of
active video lines in a field of the active video standard.
For example, when an 1125-line system is output (which
has 1080 active lines), KY can be any value between –540
and 540.
V Sweep V Sweep Frequency (maximum c/aph, or The vertical sweep frequency is actually the KY 2 coefficient.
multiple) For numbers greater than maximum, dividing the displayed
value by that maximum will give twice the number
of complete DC-max-DC sweeps per field (sweeps =
(KY2/KY)/2). For example, in a standard with 1080 lines per
field, a vertical sweep frequency of 2160 c/aph2 would result
in one complete frequency sweep down the picture.

3–274 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module zone plate dependent parameters

Below the pattern control parameter in each of the parameter menus are the
dependent parameters. The dependent parameters are the same for all the zone
plate patterns. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the
parameter menu. If desired, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change
the parameter.

NOTE. Press the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons at the same time to reset
any parameter to its default value.

If you adjust any one of the dependent parameters individually, the pattern control
parameter will become invalid, and you will see this message:

The zone plate dependent parameters are discussed here, in the order in which
they appear below the pattern control parameter, when using the down (▼) arrow
button to scroll through the parameter menu. The Custom–1 and Custom–2 signal
selections do not have pattern control parameters, and start with the Zone Plate
Amplitude Parameter.

Zone plate amplitude Display name: ZP Amplitude

parameter Units: mV
Use this parameter to adjust the zone plate signal amplitude from 0.0 mV to
798.0 mV, in 0.5 mV increments. The default value is 700 mV.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–275

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

KX parameter Display name: KX (H Freq.)

Units: cycles/active picture height (c/aph)
KX denotes the initial constant horizontal frequency of the pattern. To see the
effects of changing this coefficient, set a waveform monitor to view the video
lines. Note that the units are cycles per active picture height. The number of
cycles in a line will depend on the width-to-height aspect ratio of the active
format. For example, KX = 9.0 will result in approximately 12 cycles per line in a
format with a 4:3 aspect ratio; the same setting will yield about 16 cycles per line
when the ratio is 16:9.
To estimate the equivalent absolute frequency of the sine wave (i.e., to convert
from c/aph to c/s, or Hz), use the formula

where
Raspect = the aspect ratio (width ÷ height)
Nlines = the number of lines per frame
fframe = the frame rate
Rl:av = the ratio of line length to the length of the active video
The maximum frequency is (±) half of the active format’s sampling frequency. In
formats that use a 74.25 MHz clock, for example, the maximum value of KX will
correspond to a sine frequency of 37.1 MHz.
The Horizontal Sine zone plate, for example, is a “KX-only” zone plate. (See
Figure 3-117.)

Figure 3-117: A “KX-only” zone plate

3–276 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

KX2 parameter Display name: KX^2 (H Sweep.)

Units: c/aph per active picture height (c/aph2)
The KX2 (H Sweep) parameter sets the increase (or decrease) in the horizontal
frequency as a function of position along the video line. When KX2 alone is
applied, the result resembles a common sweep test signal. Again, use a waveform
monitor to look at (all) the video lines to see the effects of KX2. When KX is 0.0,
setting KX2 to 9 will result in the line waveform changing from DC to 9 c/aph in
the width equal to one “active picture height.” As with KX, the ending frequency
will depend on the aspect ratio of the active video format. For example, in a
16:9 format with a KX of –9.0, a KX2 coefficient of 9.0 will cause the waveform
to increase to DC in one “aph.” The frequency will continue to increase to
approximately 7.0 c/aph by the end of the line.
Use this formula to calculate KX and KX2 terms for a sweep with the DC point
at mid-screen:

where Raspect is the aspect ratio (width ÷ height) of the active format.
The Horizontal Sweep zone plate (H Sweep) is a “KX2-only” zone plate. (See
Figure 3-118.)

Figure 3-118: A “KX2-only” zone plate

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–277

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

KXY parameter Display name: KXY (V Ch. H Freq.)

Units: c/aph per active picture height (c/aph2)
The KXY (V Ch. H Freq.) parameter sets the change in horizontal frequency
as a function of the vertical position in the video frame. To see the effects of
this parameter, set the waveform monitor to view one selected line only. Then,
with KXY set to approximately 25 (all other coefficients left at 0.0), look at line
waveforms from top to bottom of the frame. The horizontal frequency increases
slightly on each succeeding line, reaching 25 c/aph on the last line of active video.
The result can be thought of as a vertically arranged “sweep” signal.

KY parameter Display name: KY (V Freq.)

Units: cycles per active picture height (c/aph)
The KY (V Freq.) parameter sets the initial vertical frequency of the pattern (it
is analogous to KX rotated 90° clockwise). To see the effects of this parameter,
set it to a low number and adjust a waveform monitor to view one or two fields
of the SDI7 output. The variation in the (dc) voltage level from line to line will
give the field waveform the appearance of a sampled sine wave, especially at a
KY of around 5 to 10 c/aph (the sinusoid can become difficult to discern at higher
frequencies). Note that in the Y (vertical) parameters, the c/aph units translate
directly into visible cycles down the frame.
The Vertical Sine zone plate is a “KY-only” zone plate. (See Figure 3-119.)

Figure 3-119: A “KY-only” zone plate

3–278 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

KY2 parameter Display name: KY^2 (V Sweep).

Units: c/aph per active picture height (c/aph2)
The KY2 (V Sweep) parameter sets the increase (or decrease) in vertical frequency
down the frame. (KY2 compares to KX2 as KY compares to KX.) Again, a good way
to see the effect of KY2 is to view the field on a waveform monitor. With KY set to
0.0, a KY2 coefficient of 10 will result in the apparent vertical sine wave changing
from DC to 10 c/aph from the top of the picture to the bottom.
To center the “DC point” at mid-screen, set KY2 to –2 times KY.
The Vertical Sweep zone plate is a “KY2-only” zone plate. (See Figure 3-120.)

Figure 3-120: A “KY2-only” zone plate

K parameter Display name: K (Phase)

Units: cycles
The K∅ parameter is the initial phase of the pattern; it cannot create a pattern
by itself. To see the effects of this adjustment, first set the KX coefficient to
approximately 0.75 and set a waveform monitor to view the line waveform. Then
adjust K∅. The sine wave will begin on each line at the selected point in the
cycle. Note that 0.25 cycle corresponds to a phase of 90 degrees (or π/2 radians);
recall that the sine of 90° is 1.0 and the sine of –90° is –1.0. When K∅ = 0.25,
the pattern will begin in the upper left corner of the screen as white; when K∅
= –0.25, the beginning will be black.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–279

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

KXT parameter Display name: KXT (T Ch. H Freq.)

Units: c/aph per second (c/aph/s)
The KXT (T Ch. H Freq.) parameter controls the change in horizontal sine
frequency over time. Setting KXT to 1.0, for example, causes the horizontal
frequency to increase by one c/aph each second. If KX is 0.0, then the frequency
will be 10 c/aph after ten seconds, 20 c/aph after twenty seconds, and so forth.
The frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format,
then the phase of the signal will “flip” by 180° (the sine wave will become
“negative”) and the frequency will continue to “increase” through DC, when the
cycle will begin again.

KYT parameter Display name: KYT (V Ch. V Freq.)

Units: c/aph per second (c/aph/s)
The KYT (V Ch. V Freq.) parameter controls the change in vertical sine frequency
over time. Setting KYT to 1.0, for example, causes the vertical frequency to
increase by one c/aph each second. If KY is initially 0.0, then the frequency will
be 10 c/aph after ten seconds, 20 c/aph after twenty seconds, and so forth. The
frequency will increase until it reaches the maximum for the active format, then
the phase of the signal will “flip” by 180° (the frequency will become “negative”)
and the frequency will continue to increase through DC in a repetitive cycle.

KT parameter Display name: KT (T Freq.)

Units: cycles per second (c/s)
The KT (T Freq.) parameter, if used alone, does not create a “pattern.” Rather, the
entire screen will cycle (sinusoidally) between white and black. The effect will be
similar on either line or field display of a waveform monitor.
Typically, a small KT coefficient is set to add apparent motion to a standard circle,
sine wave, or sweep pattern. To see the picture effects of this parameter, select
any of the standard zone plates and vary KT. Note that the KT coefficient may be
positive or negative; the sign will determine the direction of the pattern’s motion.

KT2 parameter Display name: KT^2 (T Sweep)

Units: cycles per second per second (c/s^2)
The KT2 (T Sweep) parameter sets the change in temporal frequency over time. If
KT is initially 0.0, setting KT 2 to 1.0 will result in an apparent KT of 10.0 after ten
seconds, 20.0 after twenty seconds, and so forth. The temporal frequency will
increase to maximum, return to 0.0, and repeat the cycle as long as the value of
KT 2 remains greater than zero.

3–280 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Y/G/X parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components: the Y component for
a YCbCr sample structure, the G component for a GBR sample structure, or the
X component for an XYZ sample structure. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to set the component to ON or OFF.

Cb/B/Y parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components: the Cb component for
a YCbCr sample structure, the B component for a GBR sample structure, or the
Y component for an XYZ sample structure. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to set the component to ON or OFF.

Cr/R/Z parameter This parameter displays one of the three signal components: the Cr component for
a YCbCr sample structure, the R component for a GBR sample structure, or the
Z component for an XYZ sample structure. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to set the component to ON or OFF.

NOTE. When the sampling structure for the current format uses the YCbCr color
space, the default settings enable only the Y channel. This results in the familiar
black to white zone plate patterns. When the RGB color space is used the default
settings enable all three channels, also resulting in the black to white zone plate
patterns. A colored zone plate pattern can be created by enabling or disabling
individual channels. When the XYZ color space is used, the resultant patterns will
show some chroma in all combinations of the X/Y/Z channel settings, due to the
inherent encoding of this color space.

Waveform Shape Use the Waveform Shape parameter to set the waveform to a Sine, Triangle,
parameter or Square wave.

T Reset parameter Use the T Reset parameter to reset the time coordinate (t in the zone plate
equation) of the pattern to zero. When the T Reset parameter is first set to Enable,
the time coordinate is reset to zero and there is no apparent motion in the zone
plate, even if any of the time coefficients (KXT, KYT, KT, or KT2) are non-zero.
Enabling the T Reset parameter does not set the other parameters to zero.
If you then alter any of the K parameters, the temporal (t) coordinate will be
allowed to change to match. Subsequent changes to K parameters will first reset
the time coordinate (t), and then allow it to change with the K parameter.
Disable allows the zone plate time coordinate to increment continuously. When
T Reset is set to Disable resetting all of the time coefficients (KXT, KYT, KT, and
KT2) to zero will stop the apparent zone plate motion but the temporal coordinate
will remain where it is, even if it has moved to an off-screen position. You must
Enable the T Reset parameter to reset the temporal coordinate to zero.
To completely disable all motion and reset the pattern, set all of the time related K
parameters to zero and set the T Reset parameter to Enable.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–281

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

How to use zone plate signals on the SDI7 module

Here is an example of how you can use zone plate signals to simplify a common
task.
One common task is measuring the horizontal frequency response of a system.
With a typical swept-frequency generator you would apply a signal such as a
1 MHz to 30 MHz sweep with markers every 5 MHz. Then you try to estimate the
frequency of the 3 dB roll-off point by interpolating the position of the 3 dB point
between the markers.
The SDI7 generator module's adjustable zone plate signal provides a better way:
The H Sweep Zoneplate pattern control parameter is the H Sweep Frequency,
which controls the upper frequency limit of the sweep (the swept-to
frequency).
Simply adjust the H Sweep Frequency until the system roll-off is at –3 dB.
Read the frequency directly from the instrument display.
The H Sine Zoneplate, which provides a constant frequency horizontal sine
signal instead of a swept signal, can be used to reduce error in measuring
attenuation at a given frequency.
Set the Horz. Frequency parameter to a low value and measure the
amplitude of the entire line.
Next, calculate the –3 dB point (0.707 × the low frequency amplitude).
Finally, increase the Horz. Frequency parameter until the system response
for the whole line is at the calculated –3 dB level, and read the –3 dB
frequency directly from the instrument display.
Since the ZP Amplitude parameter is adjustable for each of these signals, you
can measure the response at 100%, 60%, or any other level as needed.
These same techniques can be used to measure vertical or diagonal response, by
selecting the appropriate zoneplate signal.

3–282 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module main menu

Use the SDI7 module main menu to perform the following tasks:
Set the video signal output mode.
Change the sample structure and color space.
Scroll the active picture area of the output signal.
Set the logo, text, or circle overlay on the output signal.
Control the embedded audio characteristics: frequency, amplitude, click rate,
and sampling rate.
Set the timing offset of the outputs relative to an internal reference signal or
an external reference signal.
Enable or disable ancillary timecode and set timecode parameters.
Enable or disable the discrete components of the video output signal.
Enable or disable edge filtering on the video output signal.
Enable or disable the AV Timing mode.
Enable or disable the user-defined ancillary data payload and set the payload
structure.
Enable or disable the SMPTE 352M video payload identifier.
Set the line, frame, or clock rate as a trigger for an external instrument, such
as an oscilloscope.
Select between a test signal or a black signal for the secondary (SIGNAL 1B
or SIGNAL 2B) output.
View diagnostics, operation parameters, and CRC error counts from the
video input.
Access output calibration (only available when in factory mode).
Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. The
following figures show the SDI7 module main menu.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–283

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Figure 3-121: SDI7 module main menu

3–284 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Figure 3-122: SDI7 module main menu (Continued)

NOTE. When the instrument is in Factory mode, a Calibration menu option is

available. See the TG8000 Service Manual for more information.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–285

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

STATUS. Displays the instrument operating mode, output signal format, and
output sample structure. (See page 3-289, SDI7 module STATUS menu.)

OUTPUT MODE. Which output modes are available depend on whether Option 3G
is enabled or not. When Option 3G is not enabled, only the SD and HD output
modes are available.
Selects the mapping format of the output signal to Level A (direct image format
mapping), Level B ( SMPTE 372M dual link mapping), as described by SMPTE
425, SD, or HD-SDI.
Within Level A and Level B there are also selections for 1920 × 1080, 2K ×
1080, and 1280 × 720 (Level A only) formats. Also, for Level B only, there are
selections for 2×HD 1920 × 1080 and 2×HD 1280 × 720 formats. The 2×HD
mode produces two standard HD streams in the same format (e.g. 1080). Select
between Test Signal/Test Signal or Test Signal/Black for the two streams. (See
page 3-290, SDI7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu.)

SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH. (Option 3G only) When the output mode is set to

a non-fast-progressive format, the SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH menu is
available. There are several sample structures to choose from. Press the left (◄)
or right (►) arrow buttons to scroll through the available options. When the
desired sample structure is displayed, press the ENTER button to select it.
3G non-fast-progressive formats (1080 line)
• RGB 444 12b • YCbCr 444 10b
• RGB 444 10b • YCbCrA 444 10b
• RGBA 444 10b • YCbCr 422 12b
• YCbCr 444 12b • YCbCrA 422 12b
(Level B mapping only)
3G formats (720 line)
• RGB 444 10b • YCbCr 444 10b
• RGBA 444 10b • YCbCrA 444 10b
2K line formats
• XYZ 444 12b • RGB 444 12b

NOTE. For SD, HD, and 3G fast-progressive formats, the color space / sample
structure / depth is always YCbCr 422 10 bit.

3–286 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

ALPHA CHANNEL DATA. This menu item appears only when the sample structure
is set to “+A” for 3G signal formats. Selects the data to be placed on the alpha
channel when a sample structure that includes an alpha channel is selected. The
channel can contain a duplicate of the Y or G channel data or a flat field signal.
Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Use Y/G Channel or to
select a 0% to 100% Flat Field in 10% increments, and then press the ENTER
button to enable the selection.

2×HD STREAM CONTENT. This menu item appears only when the signal format
is set to 2×HD. Selects the content for the first and second HD signals on link A
and link B. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Test Signal / Test
Signal, Test Signal / Black, or Black / Test Signal, and then press the ENTER
button to enable the selection.

MOVING PICTURE. Scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. Select
this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the MOVING
PICTURE submenu. (See page 3-291, SDI7 module MOVING PICTURE
submenu.)

OVERLAY. Selects an item (logo, text, or circle) that is overlaid on the output test
signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay. Select this menu item, and then
press the ENTER button to access the OVERLAY submenu. (See page 3-293.)

AUDIO (EMBEDDED). Sets the parameters for embedded audio on the serial digital
signals. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Group 1, Group 2,
Group 3, or Group 4. Once the group is selected, press the ENTER button to
access the AUDIO GROUP submenu. (See page 3-302, SDI7 module AUDIO
(EMBEDDED) submenu.)
If Level B mapping is selected, all four groups are available in both Link A and
Link B, for a total of eight groups.

DOLBY-E CONFIG. This menu selection appears only when Option DBT is
installed. Press the ENTER button to access the DOLBY-E CONFIG submenu
for the selected SDI output, which allows you to configure the Dolby E program,
level, bit depth, position, and other metadata. (See page 3-306, SDI7 module
DOLBY-E CONFIG submenu (Option DBT only).)

TIMING. Sets the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative to the
internal reference signal (frame reset signal). This allows you to adjust the timing
of this module relative to another module or to an external reference (such as
Genlock or GPS). Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to
access the TIMING submenu. (See page 3-319, SDI7 module TIMING submenu.)

TIMECODE. Use this menu to set timecode parameters for the selected output.
Press the ENTER button to access the TIMECODE submenu. (See page 3-320,
SDI7 module TIMECODE submenu.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–287

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

VIDEO. Enables or disables the individual components of the output serial stream,
such as YCbCr, RGB, or XYZ and allows the edge-shaping filter to be enabled or
disabled on the video. Also allows the A/V timing mode to be invoked. For SD
formats, Error Detection and Handling (EDH) packets can be enabled or disabled.
Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO
submenu. (See page 3-323, SDI7 module VIDEO submenu.)

ANC PAYLOAD. Use this menu to define and control the user-defined ancillary
data payload insertion. Press the ENTER button to access the ANC Payload
submenu. (See page 3-325, SDI7 module ANC PAYLOAD submenu.)

SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to Enable or
Disable the SMPTE 352M Payload Identifier, and then press the ENTER button
to confirm the selection.

NOTE. The SMPTE 352M payload identifier is a required element for a compliant
3 Gb/s signal stream. The payload identifier is optional for SD and HD formats.

TRIGGER OUTPUT. Allows you to select a line rate, frame rate, the module
system clock, or a pixel clock as a trigger for an external instrument, such as an
oscilloscope. You can also select which SDI7 channel to use as the trigger source.
(See page 3-332, SDI7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu.)

SECONDARY OUTPUT. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select one of
the following signals for the secondary (bottom) BNC connector: Test Pattern,
Black, Black (No Audio), Black (Mute Audio), Test Pattern (No Audio), or
Test Pattern (Mute Audio). Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
When set to any of the Test Pattern selections for channel 1, the Signal 1A and
Signal 1B connectors will output the same test signal. The same is true for the
channel 2 connectors when Test Pattern is set as the Secondary Output selection
for channel 2.
When set to any of the Black selections for channel 1, the Signal 1B black signal
is the same format and sample structure as the Signal 1A output. The same is
true for the channel 2 connectors when Black is set as the Secondary Output
selection for channel 2.

3–288 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

DIAGNOSTICS. Allows access to the outputs of several diagnostics, shows

operation parameters for the module, and allows you to clear the counts of CRC
errors that are detected in the input signal. This menu provides status information
only and does not affect operating behavior. Select this menu item, and then press
the ENTER button to enter the DIAGNOSTICS submenu. (See page 3-333,
SDI7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu.)

CALIBRATION. Provides a variety of special signals to help measure amplitude

and rise time, and allows you to adjust serial output amplitude. This menu is
accessible in factory mode only. (See page 3-336, SDI7 module CALIBRATION
submenu.)

SDI7 module Displays the output signal format, and output sample structure.
STATUS menu
The following figure shows an example STATUS display with Option 3G enabled.

Figure 3-123: SDI7 module STATUS menu in Generator mode

100% Color Bars: Indicates the name of the signal currently being generated.
3G-A: Indicates the 3 Gb/s signal and the level currently being generated.
1080 59.94p: Indicates the output format.
YCbCr 4:2:2 10 bits: Indicates the output sampling structure.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–289

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Select SD or HD mode, or set the 3G-SDI serial link multiplexing method to
OUTPUT MODE submenu Level A or Level B (Option 3G only). Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button
to select from the choices listed below. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. The following figure shows the OUTPUT MODE submenu.

Figure 3-124: SDI7 module OUTPUT MODE submenu

SD. The output is a SMPTE 259 compliant signal that runs at 270 Mbps.

HD (1920 × 1080). The output is a 1080-line, SMPTE 274M compliant signal.

HD (1280 × 720). The output is a 720-line, SMPTE 296M compliant signal.

Level A. (Option 3G only) This is one way of constructing the 3 Gb/s serial data
stream, as described in SMPTE 425. For the mapping structure 1 signals such as
1080p50, 1080p59.94 and 1080p60, a Level A stream looks similar to HD video
(as defined in SMPTE 292), except the data rate is twice as fast. In Level A, the
lines are sent in order, consecutively. For other mapping structures, the video is at
a lower frame rate, but has more bits and/or includes more channels. Refer to the
SMPTE 425 standard for details on the Level A mapping method.

Level B. (Option 3G only) This is an alternate way of constructing the 3 Gb/s

serial data stream, as described in SMPTE 425. A Level B stream looks similar
to dual link (as defined in SMPTE 372M). The serial data is constructed by
interleaving the two links of the dual link video signal. As a result, some
formats will have the serial data take two lines worth of time to propagate.
This has implications for the effects of the pathological signals, and can
confuse the definition of timing adjustments. Refer to the SMPTE 372M and
SMPTE 425 standards for more information.

2K × 1080. (Option 3G only) Available in both Level A and Level B mapping, this
selection provides 2048 × 1080 resolution signals, primarily for digital cinema
applications.

2×HD. (Option 3G only) Available in Level B mapping, 2×HD signals provide two
standard SMPTE 292 HD streams in the same format (for example 1080i 59.94).
Select between Test Signal/Test Signal or Test Signal/Black for the two streams.

3–290 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to scroll the active picture area of the serial digital video signal
MOVING PICTURE up/down or left/right (or randomly), when in generator mode. Use the up (▲) or
submenu down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu shown below.

Figure 3-125: SDI7 module MOVING PICTURE submenu

NOTE. The Moving Picture function is not available with zone plate or multiburst
signals. However, zone plate signals may be defined with motion in the zone plate
parameters. (See page 3-271, To modify a zone plate signal on the SDI7 module.)
The Moving Picture function is enabled whenever the H Step or V Step parameter
is set to a value other than 0.
When Moving Picture is enabled, the circle and text overlays remain static
regardless of the signal type (standard test signal or “frame (.BMP) picture”).
However, the logo overlay remains static for only standard test signals, but
continues to move when used with a “frame (.BMP) picture.”
The Moving Picture behavior is different when the SDI7 module is installed in
a TG700 mainframe. (See page 1-3, Module compatibility between the TG8000
and TG700 mainframes.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–291

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

H Step. Sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the Period
menu item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the value from
–252 to +252 in 4-sample steps.

V Step. Sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the Period menu
item. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the value from –252 to
+252 in 1-line steps.

Period. Sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the value from 1 to 16 in 1-frame steps.

Random. Sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select between Disable and Enable. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

3–292 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to select an item (logo, ID text, circle, or burnt-in timecode) to
OVERLAY submenu overlay on the output test signal, and to set the blinking mode for the overlay. Use
the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu.

NOTE. You can store overlay functions, including text, in the mainframe presets
so that the overlay is restored on power up.

The following figure shows the OVERLAY submenu.

Figure 3-126: SDI7 module OVERLAY submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–293

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

LOGO. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the
LOGO submenu where you can select a logo to overlay the output signal in a
specified position. (See page 3-295.)

ID TEXT. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the
ID TEXT submenu where you can edit the text to overlay the output signal in a
specified position. (See page 3-297.)

CIRCLE. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button to access the
CIRCLE submenu where you can specify a circle size and position to overlay
the output signal. (See page 3-301.)

BURNT-IN TIMECODE. Select this menu item, and then press the ENTER button
to access the BURNT-IN TIMECODE submenu where you can enable or disable
the burnt-in timecode, and set the size and position of the timecode overlay on
the output signal. (See page 3-301.)

BLINK. Sets the blinking mode for the enabled overlay. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select one of the following blink modes, and then press
the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
Disable: Disables the blinking function of the overlay.
Fast: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 0.5 second intervals.
Slow: Sets the overlay to blink at approximately 1.0 second intervals.

BORDER. Displays a black border around the text and circle overlays when
enabled. Select this menu item, and then use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button
to select Enable or Disable. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. Turn on the border to provide cleaner transitions between the overlay and
the test signal. This is especially useful for 4:2:2 format signals, which may have
some ringing when the border is turned off.

3–294 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal and to set the
LOGO submenu display position of the logo. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll
through the menu. The following figure shows the LOGO submenu.

NOTE. To display a logo using the LOGO submenu, you need to create a logo file
(.bmp) and use FTP to copy the file to the SDI7/LOGO folder on the TG8000
mainframe. The instructions for using FTP are located in the How to transfer user
files using FTP section of this manual. (See page 2-67.) Refer to the TG8000 PC
Tools Technical Reference for detailed information about how to create a logo file.
Logo displays work best with the uncompressed BMP images (24 bits and 32 bits
true color). Logo displays do not work with RLE8 or RLE4 BMP compression.
BMP files are not scaled for each raster size. For example, a 320×240 size bitmap
will be rendered as 320×240 pixels regardless of the current raster area. The
bitmap would occupy about 25% of the active video for the SD-525 format, but less
than 4% of a 1920×1080 picture. Therefore, you might need to choose a bitmap
size appropriate for the target display resolution when using the logo overlay.

Figure 3-127: SDI7 module LOGO submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–295

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Status. Displays the status of the logo overlay display. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select Disable or Enable. Press the ENTER button
confirm the selection.

Source. Displays the selected logo file. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select a logo file stored in the SDI7/LOGO directory. Press the ENTER
button confirm the selection.
The default logo is the "first" file in the SDI7/LOGO directory, as sorted by the
date of the logo file (oldest first). If the factory-provided logo files are installed,
the default logo is “Tektronix_logo_500x125.bmp.”
However, if the user has removed the factory-provided logo files and added their
own custom files, then the default logo will be the oldest file installed in the
SDI7/LOGO directory.

NOTE. The position of the logo overlay is referenced from the lower right of
the active raster area.

X Position. Sets the horizontal position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to -1.0% in 0.1% steps.
Press the ENTER button confirm the selection.

Y Position. Sets the vertical position of the logo. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -100.0% to -1.0% in 0.1% steps.
Press the ENTER button confirm the selection.

3–296 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to create text or to select a text file that will be overlaid on the
ID TEXT submenu output test signal, and to set the display position of the text.

NOTE. You can store overlay functions, including text, in the mainframe presets
so that the overlay is restored on power up.

Displaying Text. To display a text overlay using the ID TEXT submenu, you
need to either enter a text string or create a text file (.txt) and download it to the
SDI7/TEXT folder using FTP. The instructions for using FTP are located in the
How to transfer user files using FTP section of this manual. (See page 2-67.)
When the string is entered from the front panel, it is limited to 30 characters in
length, and may contain only standard ASCII characters. When a text file is used,
any Unicode character supported by the default font can be displayed. The text
file can be encoded as plain 7-bit ASCII text, or UTF-8 encoding when extended
Unicode characters are used. The text file can also include embedded newline
characters to create text overlays spanning multiple lines.

Font Files. The SDI7 module uses a TrueType font to render text overlays; the
default typeface is Deja Vu Sans. The font file is named “default.ttf” and is stored
in the SDI7 directory of the TG8000 mainframe memory.
The SDI7 module supports Latin, Cryillic, Greek, and symbol character sets for
use with the text overlay. Using FTP, you can download an alternate TrueType font
file. Make sure that the font file is renamed to “default.ttf” and that the TG8000 is
rebooted for the new font to take effect. The instructions for using FTP are located
in the How to transfer user files using FTP section of this manual. (See page 2-67.)
The original Deja Vu Sans file can be recovered from the TG8000 SW Library
and Documentation DVD if necessary.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–297

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

The following figure shows the ID TEXT submenu. Use the up (▲) or down (▼)
arrow button to change the menu items.

Figure 3-128: SDI7 module ID TEXT submenu

3–298 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Status. Displays the status of the ID Text overlay display. Use the left (◄) or
right (►) arrow button to select between Enable and Disable, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Source. Displays the user-entered text string or the selected text file. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select text string to be entered from the front
panel or a text file stored in the SDI7/TEXT directory. Press the ENTER button
confirm the selection.

EDIT. Edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. Perform the
following steps to edit the text:

NOTE. You can use up to 30 characters for the logo text. Use the blank character
to erase unneeded character(s).

1. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select EDIT, and then press the
ENTER button to enable the text edit mode.
2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character
( _ ) to the character you want to change.
3. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select the desired character.
4. After you enter all of the desired characters, press the ENTER button to exit
the text editing mode.

NOTE. The position of the text overlay is referenced from the top left of the active
picture.

X Position. Sets the horizontal position of the text. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 99.0% in 0.1% steps.
Press the ENTER button confirm the selection.

Y Position. Sets the vertical position of the text. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from 0.0% to 99.0% in 0.1% steps.
Press the ENTER button confirm the selection.

Font Size. Sets the font size of the text. The size is is set as a percentage of active
picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the font size.
You can set the value from 1.0% to 100.0% in 0.1% steps. Press the ENTER
button confirm the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–299

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to overlay a circle on the output test signal and set the display
CIRCLE submenu position of the circle. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the
menu items. The following figure shows the CIRCLE submenu.

Figure 3-129: SDI7 module CIRCLE submenu

Status. Enables or disables the circle overlay. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Enable and Disable. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.

NOTE. The position of the circle overlay is referenced from the center of the
active picture.

X Position. Sets the horizontal position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 0.1% steps.

Y Position. Sets the vertical position of the circle. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 0.1% steps.

Diameter. Sets the diameter of the circle. The diameter is set as a percentage of
active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to change the
value. You can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 0.1% steps.

3–300 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to overlay a timecode readout (HH:MM:SS;frames) on the output
BURNT-IN TIMECODE test signal and set the display position of the timecode. Use the up (▲) or down
submenu (▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the
BURNT-IN TIMECODE submenu.

Figure 3-130: SDI7 module BURNT-IN TIMECODE submenu

Mode. Enables or disables the burnt-in timecode. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Enable, Small, and Large. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

X Position. Sets the horizontal position of the timecode. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture width. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 0.1% steps.

Y Position. Sets the vertical position of the timecode. The position is set as a
percentage of active picture height. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
change the position. You can set the value from -50.0% to 50.0% in 0.1% steps.

Second Line. Enables or disables a second line of timecode readout (YY/MM/DD)

on the output signal.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–301

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to select the audio group for subsequent audio channel
AUDIO (EMBEDDED) configuration, and to configure audio group parameters. You may select audio
submenu group 1, 2, 3, or 4 for all SD, HD, and 3G Level A formats. For 3G Level B
formats, you may select audio group 1, 2, 3, or 4 for both Link A and Link B.
Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to make the selection. When the
desired audio group and Link are displayed, press the ENTER button to access
the menu for that group.
In each group you can enable or disable the embedded audio, select a specific
channel, and set the sampling mode. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button
to change the menu items. Press the ENTER button to select a specific channel.
While in the Audio Channel submenu, you can set the embedded audio frequency,
amplitude, and click rate for the channel. The following figure shows the AUDIO
(EMBEDDED) Audio Group submenu. (See Figure 3-131.)

Figure 3-131: SDI7 module AUDIO (EMBEDDED) submenu

3–302 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

STATUS. Enables or disables the embedded audio output for the selected audio
group. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable or Disable,
and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Dolby-E Stream Ch1-2. This menu item appears only when Option DBT is
installed. Use this menu item to enable or disable the Dolby E stream for audio
channels 1 and 2. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable or
Disable, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Dolby-E Stream Ch3-4. This menu item appears only when Option DBT is
installed. Use this menu item to enable or disable the Dolby E stream for audio
channels 3 and 4 Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Enable or
Disable, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. There is only one Dolby generator per SDI channel. Therefore, if you
enable multiple pairs they will have the same content.

CHANNEL. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to choose channel 1, 2,
3, or 4, and then press the ENTER button to enter the AUDIO : CHANNEL
submenu. The AUDIO : CHANNEL submenu allows you to set the frequency,
amplitude, click rate, and channel origin ID for the selected audio channel. (See
page 3-304, SDI7 module AUDIO CHANNEL submenu.)

Sampling. Use this menu to set the sampling alignment status bits for the
selected audio group's Audio Control Packet (ACP). Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select between Frame, Frame without Frame Number, and
Asynchronous. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–303

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module AUDIO Use this submenu to set the frequency, amplitude, click rate, and channel origin
CHANNEL submenu ID for the selected audio channel.

Figure 3-132: SDI7 module AUDIO : CHANNEL submenu

3–304 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Status. Use this menu to set the status of the individual channel. Use the left (◄)
or right (►) arrow button to select between Active, Inactive, and Mute. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Frequency. Use this menu to set the frequency of the Embedded Audio signal
from 10.0 Hz to 20 kHz, in steps of 0.5 Hz. Press the ENTER button to enter the
adjustment mode, then use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to position
the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set the number
for that position. Press the ENTER button again to confirm the new frequency.

Amplitude. Use this menu to set the audio amplitude from –60 dBFS to 0 dBFS,
in steps of 1 dBFS. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set the
amplitude, and then press the ENTER button to confirm it.

Audio Click. Use this menu to set the audio click rate to one click every one,
two, three, or four seconds, or turn the click off. Use the left (◄) or right (►)
arrow button to select the click rate, and then press the ENTER button to confirm
the selection.

Channel Origin. Use this menu to set a channel origin ID of up to four ASCII
characters. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to position the cursor,
and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set the ID. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the Channel Origin ID.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–305

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module The DOLBY-E CONFIG submenu is available only when Option DBT is installed.
DOLBY-E CONFIG The following menu opens for the selected SDI output when you press ENTER in
submenu the main menu with DOLBY-E CONFIG selected.
(Option DBT only)

Figure 3-133: DOLBY-E CONFIG submenu diagram – part 1

3–306 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Figure 3-134: DOLBY-E CONFIG submenu diagram – part 2

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–307

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

DOLBY-E PROGRAM. Use this menu item to specify the program configuration of
the Dolby E signal. This parameter controls both the number of programs in the
stream as well as how the eight audio channels are allocated to the programs.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select 5.1, 5.1+2 (default value),
7.1, 4x2, or 8x1. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

DOLBY-E LEVEL. Use this menu item to set the level of the Dolby E signal. Use
the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select –18.0 dBFS, –20.0 dBFS, or
Multi Tone. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

DOLBY-E BIT DEPTH. Use this menu item to set the bit depth of the Dolby E
signal when the program type is set to 5.1. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow
buttons to select 16 bits or 20 bits. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. The
bit depth setting is forced to 20 bits for all Dolby E program types except 5.1.
If you set the Dolby E bit depth to 16 bits, the Dolby E program setting is changed
to 5.1 and the user interface for the program setting shows only 5.1 as being
available. (See page 3-311, Dolby E metadata configuration.)

DOLBY-E POSITION. Use this menu item to set the starting line position of the
Dolby E signal. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select Early
(Line xx), Ideal (Line xx), Late (Line xx), or Custom. Press ENTER to confirm
the selection.
The line numbers for the starting position varies depending on the format of the
video signal. See the Dolby Web site (www.dolby.com) for information about the
starting line position for each video format.
When you select Custom and press ENTER, you enter the Custom Start Position
edit mode where you can use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set a
custom start position ranging from line 7 to line 70. Press BACK to confirm the
selection and to return to the DOLBY CONFIG submenu.

DOLBY-E DESCRIPTION. Use this menu item to label each of the available
programs (1-8) with a descriptive text identifier. Use the left (◄) and right (►)
arrow buttons to select a program number (1-8), and then press ENTER to view
the program description text. The default program description is Tektronix
Program X, where X is the program number (1-8).
Press ENTER to enter the description edit mode. In edit mode, use the left (◄)
or right (►) arrow button to move the underscore character ( _ ), and use the up
(▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select a value for the selected character. The
maximum length of the program description is 30 characters.
After you edit the program description, press the ENTER button to enable the
description change, and then press BACK to return to the DOLBY CONFIG
submenu.

3–308 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

DOLBY-E METADATA Dialnorm. Use this menu item to set the dialnorm setting of
the Dolby E signal. This value should represent the long term weighted average
level of the dialog within a program. A Dolby Digital decoder will use this
parameter to determine what level shift to apply to the audio that will normalize
the decoder output. This allows different content to be automatically normalized
by the decoder, provided that the dialnorm value is set correctly.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set a value between –1 dB and
–31 dB. The default values are:
–23 dB for –20 dBFS signal levels
–24 dB for –18 dBFS signal levels

DOLBY-E METADATA Line Mode. Use this menu item to set the line mode
compression profile for the Dolby E signal. Line mode compression is typically
used in decoders with either six or two channel line level outputs.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select Film Standard, Film
Light, Music Standard, Music Light, Speech, or Disable. Press ENTER to
confirm the selection.

DOLBY-E METADATA RF Mode. Use this menu item to set the RF mode
compression profile for the Dolby E signal. RF mode compression is typically
used in decoders with two channel RF modulated outputs.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select Film Standard, Film
Light, Music Standard, Music Light, Speech, or Disable. Press ENTER to
confirm the selection.

DOLBY-E METADATA Center Downmix Level. Use this menu item to set the center
downmix level of the Dolby E signal. This parameter indicates what level shift
should be applied to the center channel before adding it to the left and right
channels when downmixing to a stereo output. This parameter is used when
extended BSI parameters are not active.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select –3.0 dB, –4.5 dB, or
–6.0 dB. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

DOLBY-E METADATA Surround Downmix level. Use this menu item to set the
surround downmix level of the Dolby E signal. This parameter indicates what
level shift should be applied to the surround channels before adding them to the
left and right channels when downmixing to a stereo output. This parameter is
used when extended BSI parameters are not active.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select –3.0 dB, –6.0 dB, or
Infinite. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–309

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

DOLBY-E METADATA Downmix Preferred. Use this menu item to set the preferred
downmix of the Dolby E signal. This parameter is used in consumer decoders that
have stereo outputs. This parameter is part of the extended BSI.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select LoRo, Not Indicated, or
LtRt. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

DOLBY-E METADATA LtRt Center Mix Level. Use this menu item to set the LtRt
center mix level of the Dolby E signal. This parameter indicates what level
shift should be applied to the center channel before adding it to the left and
right channels when downmixing to an LtRt output. This parameter is part of
the extended BSI.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select –3.0 dB, –4.5 dB, –6.0 dB,
Infinite, +3.0 dB, +1.5 dB, 0.0 dB, or –1.5 dB. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.

DOLBY-E METADATA LtRt Surround Mix Level. Use this menu item to set the LtRt
surround mix level of the Dolby E signal. This parameter indicates what level
shift should be applied to the surround channels before adding them to the left
and right channels when downmixing to an LtRt output. This parameter is part of
the extended BSI.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select –3.0 dB, –4.5 dB, –6.0 dB,
Infinite, +3.0 dB, +1.5 dB, 0.0 dB, or –1.5 dB. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.

DOLBY-E METADATA LoRo Center Mix Level. Use this menu item to set the LoRo
center mix level of the Dolby E signal. This parameter indicates what level
shift should be applied to the center channel before adding it to the left and
right channels when downmixing to an LoRo output. This parameter is part of
the extended BSI.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select –3.0 dB, –4.5 dB, –6.0 dB,
Infinite, +3.0 dB, +1.5 dB, 0.0 dB, or –1.5 dB. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.

DOLBY-E METADATA LoRo Surround Mix Level. Use this menu item to set the
LoRo surround mix level of the Dolby E signal. This parameter indicates what
level shift should be applied to the surround channels before adding them to the
left and right channels when downmixing to an LoRo output. This parameter is
part of the extended BSI.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select –3.0 dB, –4.5 dB, –6.0 dB,
Infinite, +3.0 dB, +1.5 dB, 0.0 dB, or –1.5 dB. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.

3–310 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

DOLBY-E METADATA Frame Rate. Use this menu item to select the video frame
rate associated with the Dolby E signal. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow
buttons to select 23.98 fps, 24 fps, 25 fps, 29.97 fps, or 30 fps. Press ENTER to
confirm the selection.

DOLBY-E METADATA Set Metadata to default <Press ENTER>. Use this menu item
to reset the Dolby metadata settings back to the factory default settings. Select
this menu item and press ENTER to reset the Dolby metadata.

Dolby E metadata
configuration

CAUTION. Use caution when changing the Dolby E metadata values. Changing
the metadata does not change the encoded audio. Changing the metadata values
from default values may cause the signal to not decode correctly.

When you configure the Dolby E metadata, depending on your selections, other
metadata values may change or be limited as follows:

Program setting. The Program setting is the primary metadata control. When you
select a program type, the metadata is set according to that program type.
For example, if you set the Dolby E program to 5.1, the Dolby E bit depth setting
remains as it is and the user interface for the bit depth control shows both 16-bits
and 20-bits as being available.

Bit depth setting. If the selected Dolby-E program is 5.1, the bit-depth control
allows you to select either 16-bits or 20-bits. For all other supported Dolby-E
programs, the bit-depth control shows only the 20-bits selection.
The instrument saves the bit-depth setting for the 5.1 program type. For example,
if you select the 5.1 program with 16-bits data and then you change the program
to 7.1, the instrument forces the bit-depth setting to 20-bits. If you then switch
back to the 5.1 program, the instrument returns the bit-depth setting to 16-bits,
since that was the last bit-depth selection made for the 5.1 program configuration.

Frame rate setting. If you change the Dolby E frame rate setting, it does not affect
the actual audio data being streamed out by the generator, and it does not change
the rate at which this data is being streamed or the video frame rate itself.

Dolby E generated formats The tables on the following pages list the Dolby E generated formats according
to frame rate.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–311

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-61: Dolby E generated formats – 23.98 Hz frame rate

Dolby E Dolby E
program level Signal levels and frequencies
8x1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 5 Program 6 Program 7 Program 8
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
119.9 Hz 239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 1798.2 Hz 2397.6 Hz
7.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lb Rb
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 240 Hz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 240 Hz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 119.9 Hz 1798.2 Hz 2397.6 Hz
5.1+2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lt Rt
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 240 Hz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 240 Hz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 119.9 Hz 1798.2 Hz 2397.6 Hz
5.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 240 Hz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 240 Hz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS
239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 119.9 Hz
4x2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 2 Program 3 Program 3 Program 4 Program 4
L1 R1 L2 R2 L3 R3 L4 R4
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz 2.398 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
119.9 Hz 239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 1798.2 Hz 2397.6 Hz

3–312 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-62: Dolby E generated formats – 24 Hz frame rate

Dolby E Dolby E
program level Signal levels and frequencies
8x1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 5 Program 6 Program 7 Program 8
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
7.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lb Rb
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 240 Hz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 240 Hz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 120 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
5.1+2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lt Rt
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 240 Hz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 240 Hz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 120 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
5.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 240 Hz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 240 Hz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS
240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 120 Hz
4x2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 2 Program 3 Program 3 Program 4 Program 4
L1 R1 L2 R2 L3 R3 L4 R4
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz 2.400 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–313

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-63: Dolby E generated formats – 25 Hz frame rate

Dolby E Dolby E
program level Signal levels and frequencies
8x1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 5 Program 6 Program 7 Program 8
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
125 Hz 250 Hz 350 Hz 475 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
7.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lb Rb
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 240 Hz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 240 Hz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
250 Hz 350 Hz 475 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 125 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
5.1+2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lt Rt
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 240 Hz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 240 Hz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
250 Hz 350 Hz 475 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 125 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
5.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 240 Hz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 240 Hz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS
250 Hz 350 Hz 475 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 125 Hz
4x2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 2 Program 3 Program 3 Program 4 Program 4
L1 R1 L2 R2 L3 R3 L4 R4
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
125 Hz 250 Hz 350 Hz 475 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz

3–314 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-64: Dolby E generated formats – 29.97 Hz frame rate

Dolby E Dolby E
program level Signal levels and frequencies
8x1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 5 Program 6 Program 7 Program 8
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
119.9 Hz 239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 1798.2 Hz 2397.6 Hz
7.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lb Rb
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 240 Hz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 240 Hz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 119.9 Hz 1798.2 Hz 2397.6 Hz
5.1+2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lt Rt
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 240 Hz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 240 Hz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 119.9 Hz 1798.2 Hz 2397.6 Hz
5.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 240 Hz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 240 Hz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS
239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 119.9 Hz
4x2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 2 Program 3 Program 3 Program 4 Program 4
L1 R1 L2 R2 L3 R3 L4 R4
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz 2.997 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
119.9 Hz 239.8 Hz 359.7 Hz 479.5 Hz 599.4 Hz 1198.8 Hz 1798.2 Hz 2397.6 Hz

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–315

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-65: Dolby E generated formats – 30 Hz frame rate

Dolby E Dolby E
program level Signal levels and frequencies
8x1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 5 Program 6 Program 7 Program 8
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
7.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lb Rb
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 240 Hz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 240 Hz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 120 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
5.1+2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE Lt Rt
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 240 Hz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 240 Hz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 120 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz
5.1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1 Program 1
L C R Ls Rs LFE
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 240 Hz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 240 Hz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS
240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 120 Hz
4x2 Program 1 Program 1 Program 2 Program 2 Program 3 Program 3 Program 4 Program 4
L1 R1 L2 R2 L3 R3 L4 R4
–20 dBSF –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS –20 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz
–18 dBSF –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS –18 dBFS
3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz 3.0 kHz
Multitone –18 dBFS –20 dBFS –22 dBFS –24 dBFS –26 dBFS –28 dBFS –30 dBFS –32 dBFS
120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 1200 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz

3–316 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

The following tables list the Dolby E loudness measurements for each program.
The measurements were made with a Tektronix WFM8000 Series waveform
monitor using the ATSC A/85 2013 Loudness preset.
Dialnorm values of –23 dB and –24 dB are used by default within the instrument,
depending on the Dolby E level setting. If you want to use the measured loudness
values instead of the default dialnorm values, you can enter them by adjusting
the Dolby E metadata dialnorm setting. If you want to continue using these
measured loudness values, use the PRESET menu to create a preset with the
specific values you want.

Table 3-66: Dolby E loudness measurements – 23.98 and 24 Hz frame rates

Dolby E Dolby E Loudness measurement values (LKFS)
program level Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 5 Program 6 Program 7 Program 8
8x1 –20 dBSF –20.2 –20.2 –20.2 –20.2 –20.2 –20.2 –20.2 –20.2
–18 dBSF –18.2 –18.2 –18.2 –18.2 –18.2 –18.2 –18.2 –18.2
Multitone –22.5 –23.9 –25.7 –27.6 –29.6 –30.5 –31.0 –32.2
7.1 –20 dBSF –11.3
–18 dBSF –9.3
Multitone –17.2
5.1+2 –20 dBSF –12.6 –17.2
–18 dBSF –10.6 –15.2
Multitone –17.5 –28.5
5.1 –20 dBSF –12.6
–18 dBSF –10.6
Multitone –17.5
4x2 –20 dBSF –17.2 –17.2 –17.2 –17.2
–18 dBSF –15.2 –15.2 –15.2 –15.2
Multitone –20.1 –23.6 –27.0 –28.5

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–317

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-67: Dolby E loudness measurements – 25 Hz frame rate

Dolby E Dolby E Loudness measurement values (LKFS)
program level Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 5 Program 6 Program 7 Program 8
8x1 –20 dBSF –23.0 –23.0 –23.0 –23.0 –23.0 –23.0 –23.0 –23.0
–18 dBSF –21.0 –21.0 –21.0 –21.0 –21.0 –21.0 –21.0 –21.0
Multitone –22.5 –23.9 –25.7 –27.6 –29.6 –30.5 –31.0 –32.2
7.1 –20 dBSF –14.1
–18 dBSF –12.1
Multitone –17.2
5.1+2 –20 dBSF –15.4 –20.0
–18 dBSF –13.4 –18.0
Multitone –17.5 –28.5
5.1 –20 dBSF –15.4
–18 dBSF –13.4
Multitone –17.5
4x2 –20 dBSF –20.0 –20.0 –20.0 –20.0
–18 dBSF –18.0 –18.0 –18.0 –18.0
Multitone –20.1 –23.6 –27.0 –28.5

Table 3-68: Dolby E loudness measurements – 29.97 and 30 Hz frame rates

Dolby E Dolby E Loudness measurement values (LKFS)
program level Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 5 Program 6 Program 7 Program 8
8x1 –20 dBSF –19.9 –19.9 –19.9 –19.9 –19.9 –19.9 –19.9 –19.9
–18 dBSF –17.9 –17.9 –17.9 –17.9 –17.9 –17.9 –17.9 –17.9
Multitone –22.5 –23.9 –25.7 –27.6 –29.6 –30.5 –31.0 –32.2
7.1 –20 dBSF –11.0
–18 dBSF –9.0
Multitone –17.2
5.1+2 –20 dBSF –12.3 –16.9
–18 dBSF –10.3 –14.9
Multitone –17.5 –28.5
5.1 –20 dBSF –12.3
–18 dBSF –10.3
Multitone –17.5
4x2 –20 dBSF –16.9 –16.9 –16.9 –16.9
–18 dBSF –14.9 –14.9 –14.9 –14.9
Multitone –20.1 –23.6 –27.0 –28.5

3–318 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to adjust the timing offset of the serial digital video outputs relative
TIMING submenu to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). Use the up (▲) or down
(▼) arrow button to change the menu items. The following figure shows the
TIMING submenu.

Figure 3-135: SDI7 module TIMING submenu

Vertical. Sets the vertical timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from –½ to +½ frame in
1-line steps.

NOTE. A “line" of timing refers to the timing as if it were a raster scanning a

CRT. This may not be the same as the time that a line of data is present on the
serial link because of the way that Level B signals are interleaved.

Horizontal. Sets the horizontal timing offset. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to change the timing offset. You can set the value from –1 to +1 line in
1-clock steps.

NOTE. You can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left (◄) and right
(►) arrow buttons simultaneously.

Relative To. Sets the Zero Timing D-to-A compensation factor on or off for HD
(1.485 Gb/s) and SD (270 Mb/s) formats only. In the serial mode (default), the
output timing does not include compensation for the delay through a nominal
D-to-A converter. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the relative
timing to either Serial (0H) or Analog (DAC).

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–319

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to set ancillary timecode (ATC) parameters for the selected output.
TIMECODE submenu Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the TIMECODE submenu.

Figure 3-136: SDI7 module TIMECODE submenu

3–320 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SOURCE. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the timecode
source from the following choices. The default value is Local (DST).
Local (DST): Uses the local time of day with Daylight Saving Time offset
as the timecode.
Local (No DST): Uses the local time of day without Daylight Saving Time
offset as the timecode.
UTC: Uses Coordinated Universal Time as the timecode.
PROGRAM TIME: Uses the program time counter as the timecode.

NOTE. The Local (DST), Local (No DST) and UTC settings use the time of day,
as determined by the GPS7 module. These selections are available only if a
GPS7 module is installed in the instrument.

Press ENTER to apply initial time. Press the ENTER button to apply the initial
time. Initial time is set in the next menu item. This selection is available only
when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument. When a GPS7 module
is installed, this function is controlled from the GPS7 module main menu.

Initial Time. Use this menu selection to set the Initial Time. Press the ENTER
button to enter the adjustment mode. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons
to position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to
adjust the time. Press the ENTER button to confirm the time. This selection is
available only when there is no GPS7 module installed in the instrument. When
a GPS7 module is installed, this function is controlled from the GPS7 module
main menu.

Offset. Use this menu selection to set a Timecode Offset for the SDI7 module
outputs. This is an offset from the timecode source (Time of Day or Program
Time) from the GPS7 module. Press the ENTER button to enter the adjustment
mode. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to position the cursor, and
then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to adjust the offset. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the offset. This selection is available only when a
GPS7 module is installed in the instrument.

NOTE. The Offset adjustment allows you to enter a time zone correction of up to
±23:59 hours. However, the ST309 standard only implements codes for time zones
in the range of -12 to +13 hours. Therefore, when the GPS7 module is set to use
ST309 data as the Time of Day source, it is recommended that the combined
programmed offset from time zone and DST be restricted to the range of -12
to +13 hours.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–321

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

30 DROP. Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Drop Frame mode for
the 30 frame per second timecode format. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow
buttons to select Enable 30 Drop Frame or Disable 30 Drop Frame, and then
press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. This menu selection is available
only when the frame or field rate for the current format is 29.97, 30, 59.94, or 60.

ATC-LTC. Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Linear Time
Code. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select Enable or Disable,
and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

NOTE. If a GPS7 module is installed, the embedded LTC and VITC timecode
(when enabled) on the SDI7 module outputs also includes the SMPTE309 date,
time-zone offset, and DST enabled/disabled fields. The content of these fields
depends on the SMPTE309 mode setting on the GPS7 module (Ignore, Use As
Input, or Use As Input/Output). (See page 3-133, GPS7 module TIME OF DAY
submenu.)

ATC-VITC. Use this menu selection to enable or disable the Ancillary Vertical
Interval Time Code. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select
Enable or Disable, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.

3–322 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to modify the video output signal. You can enable or disable
VIDEO submenu individual video components, enable or disable edge filtering on each video
line, enable or disable Error Detection and Handling (EDH) packet insertion
(SD formats only), and enable or display the AV Timing mode.
Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to scroll through the menu. The
following figure shows the VIDEO submenu.

NOTE. The items in this menu modify the signal output to make it non-standard.
To indicate that the signal is non-standard, an asterisk “*” is inserted at the
beginning of the signal name displayed on the STATUS menu.

Figure 3-137: SDI7 module VIDEO submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–323

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Y. Turns the Y component (YCbCr format), G component (GBR format), or X

component (XYZ format) of the serial digital video signal on or off. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER
button to confirm the selection.

Cb. Turns the Cb component (YCbCr format), B component (GBR format), or

Y component (XYZ format) of the serial digital video signal on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Cr. Turns the Cr component (YCbCr format), R component (GBR format), or

Z component (XYZ format) of the serial digital video signal on or off. Use the
left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

Edge Filter. Enables or disables the Edge Filter on serial digital video signals that
have a filter. This control has no effect on signals without a filter. Use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between Enable and Disable. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
When the edge filter is enabled, certain data transitions between two levels are run
through a low-pass filter to set rise times, pulse widths, and to prevent ringing.
If the filter is disabled, the edges will not be filtered. The filter should not be
disabled in broadcast environments.
Edge filtering is not necessary in certain environments, such as digital cinema
applications and several types of picture monitors and projectors. In these cases,
disabling the edge filtering will result in instantaneous level changes for adjacent
color bars.

AV Timing Mode. Turns the AV Timing Mode on or off. Use the left (◄) or right
(►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the selection.
In the AV Timing mode, the video and audio are continuously cycled between
being on as configured for 1 second then set to black and muted for 4 seconds.
Use this signal to measure the AV delay through a system with the AV Timing
mode on an appropriate Tektronix waveform monitor or rasterizer.

EDH. (SD output mode only) Turns the insertion of EDH packets on or off. Use
the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select between ON and OFF. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.

3–324 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module The ancillary data payload can carry non-video information, such as an Active
ANC PAYLOAD submenu Format Description (AFD), Closed Caption information, or other metadata.

NOTE. The ancillary inserter can place the data packet anywhere in the field
and can overwrite any of the ancillary or video data with a few exceptions; the
inserter will not overwrite embedded audio or CRC. Use care to not overwrite
important information.

Use this menu to set the ancillary data payload structure. The ancillary data
payload can include information to supplement the video stream, including the
Data Identifier (DID), Secondary Data Identifier (SDID), Data Count (DC), User
Data Words (UDW), and a Checksum (CS).
The Data Identifier (DID) and Secondary Data Identifier (SDID) indicate the
type of data contained in the packet.
The Data Count indicates the number of User Data Words to follow, and the User
Data Words (UDW) comprise the actual payload carried in the ancillary data. The
SDI7 module addresses User Data Words 000 through 254.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–325

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

The following figures show the ANC PAYLOAD submenu.

Figure 3-138: SDI7 module Ancillary Payload submenu

3–326 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual
 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Figure 3-139: SDI7 module Ancillary Payload submenu (Continued)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–327

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Output. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between Disable,
Continuous, and Single Packet. Press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection.

Parity. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between Automatic
and Manual parity. Automatic parity is an 8-bit mode, while Manual parity
allows 10-bits. If a 10-bit word is entered while in manual parity and the module
is later set to automatic parity, the correct 8 bits will be sent. The entire 10-bit
word is in system memory, though, so if the module is then reset to manual parity
the entire 10-bit word entered by the user will be transmitted.

DID. Press the ENTER button to edit the Data ID word. You can set the Data ID
from 0x00 to 0xFF (in 8-bit mode), or from 0x000 to 0x3FF (in 10-bit mode). Use
the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to position the cursor, and then use the
up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set the number for that position. Press the
ENTER button to confirm the Data ID and exit Data ID editing.

SDID. Press the ENTER button to edit the Secondary ID word. You can set
the Secondary ID from 0x00 to 0xFF (in 8-bit mode), or from 0x000 to 0x3FF
(in 10-bit mode). Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to position the
cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set the number
for that position. Press the ENTER button to confirm the Secondary ID and exit
Secondary ID editing.

DC. Press the ENTER button to edit the Data Count word, to show the number
of User Data Words to follow. You can set the Data Count from 0x00 to 0xFF
(in 8-bit mode), or from 0x000 to 0x3FF (in 10-bit mode). Use the left (◄) and
right (►) arrow buttons to position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down
(▼) arrow buttons to set the number for that position. Press the ENTER button to
confirm the Data Count and exit Data Count editing.

UDW. Use this menu selection to set a User Data Word. Use the left (◄) and right
(►) arrow buttons to select the User Data Word you wish to edit, from word 000
through word 254, and then press the ENTER button to edit that User Data Word.
You can set the User Data Word from 0x00 to 0xFF (in 8-bit mode), or from
0x000 to 0x3FF (in 10-bit mode). Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to
position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow buttons to set
the number for that position. Press the ENTER button to confirm the User Data
Word and exit User Data Word editing for that word.

NOTE. To make this process easier, you can use the PC-based TG Setup
application. This application also allows you to import and export User Data
Words as CSV files.

3–328 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

CLEAR UDW. Use this menu selection to clear the entire User Data Word. Press
the ENTER button to enter the CLEAR UDW mode, which will present the
following dialog:

Press the ENTER button to clear the User Data Word and exit CLEAR UDW, or
press the BACK button to exit without clearing the User Data Word.

CS. Use this menu selection to set the Checksum. Press the ENTER button to
edit the Checksum. You can set the Checksum from 0x00 to 0xFF (in 8-bit mode),
or from 0x000 to 0x3FF (in 10-bit mode). Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow
buttons to position the cursor, and then use the up (▲) and down (▼) arrow
buttons to set the number for that position. Press the ENTER button to confirm
the Checksum and exit Checksum editing.

Auto-Calculate CS. Use this menu selection to enable or disable checksum

auto-calculation. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between
Enable or Disable, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the choice.

NOTE. Different video modes and formats have different ranges of lines and pixels
in their active and ANC spaces. Users should be careful to change the line, field
and sample offset parameters of the ANC insertion feature after changing video
modes or formats to be sure the ANC data is programmed as desired.
If the line number or sample offset are left at values outside the allowed range for
a given format, the packet will not be inserted in the stream. Alternatively if these
parameters are left at values near the end of active or ANC space, the packet may
overwrite other elements of the stream such as EAV and SAV.

Line. Use this menu selection to set the line to carry the ancillary data payload.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set the line number. This menu
selection is available only in progressive formats.

Field. Use this menu selection to set the Field to carry the ancillary data payload.
Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select between Field: 1 Only,
Field: 2 Only, or Field: 1 and 2. This menu selection is available only in
interlaced formats.

Field 1: Line. Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 1 to carry the
ancillary data payload. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set the
line number. This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats.

Field 2: Line. Use this menu selection to set the line in Field 2 to carry the
ancillary data payload. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to set the
line number. This menu selection is available only in interlaced formats.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–329

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Sample Offset. Use this menu selection to set the sample number where the
ancillary data header will be. This is the first word of the ancillary data packet.

NOTE. Be sure to change the sample offset when you change the raster size.
Otherwise, the ANC insertion may occur in an unexpected place or even be
outside the raster structure. The sample offset is set relative to SAV in order to use
standard sample numbering. However, this means that the most normal location
at the start of HANC varies as a function of raster size.

Video Channel. Use this menu selection to set the video channel to Luma or
Chroma. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to make the selection, and
then press the ENTER button to confirm it.

Link Location. Use this menu selection to set the link location to Link A or Link
B. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to make the selection, and then
press the ENTER button to confirm it. This menu selection is available only
in 3G-B formats.

Stream Location. Use the left (◄) and right (►) arrow buttons to select HD
Stream 1 or HD Stream 2, and then press the ENTER button to confirm the
selection. This menu selection is available only in 2×HD formats.

NOTE. This is an example only. Inserting an AFD packet will not affect the video
produced by the SDI7 module.

SDI7 module ancillary data As an example, one of the ancillary data payloads that can be easily generated
payload example by the SDI7 module is the Active Format Description (AFD). AFD is a method
of identifying the active area of the video picture to be displayed. Using AFD
the aspect ratio of the picture can be automatically optimized for the display
being used. AFD is defined in SMPTE 2016-1, and mapping AFD and bar data is
defined in SMPTE 2016-3. The packet format appears as shown here:

3–330 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Where AR = aspect ratio (1=16:9, 0=4:3), T = top bar data flag, B= bottom bar
data flag, L = left bar data flag, and R = right bar data flag.
Note that these are all eight-bit values for the respective User Data Word. The
SDI7 module will automatically calculate the parity bits when Parity is set to
Automatic, which is the default.

Most AFD codes do not require bar data information; only the first user data
word needs to be defined. For example, one common AFD code for a 16:9 coded
frame is “1001” (9), which indicates a 4:3 image, horizontally centered, with
pillarboxes, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 3-140: AFD code “1001” for a 16:9 coded frame

Therefore, for this AFD code set the data words as follows:
UDW [000]: 0x4C
UDW [001]: 0x00
UDW [002]: 0x00
UDW [003]: 0x00
UDW [004]: 0x00
UDW [005]: 0x00
UDW [006]: 0x00
UDW [007]: 0x00

The AFD ancillary data packet should be located in the active line portion of
the vertical ancillary space (VANC), but no earlier than the second line after
the RP 168 switch point. Line 9 with a sample offset of 0 (first word of active
video, immediately after SAV) is a suitable location. The selected video channel
should be “Luma” for most ancillary packets, including AFD. Finally, set the
ANC PAYLOAD Output mode to Continuous to start AFD insertion of the
active test signal. For this example, the SMPTE RP 219 color bars are an effective
test pattern, because the center section of the 16:9 test signal contains the original
4:3 aspect ratio SMPTE pattern.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–331

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module Use this menu to select which SDI7 channel will be the trigger source and
TRIGGER OUTPUT to select line rate, frame rate, pixel clock, or the system clock of the module
submenu to trigger an external instrument. The following figure shows the TRIGGER
OUTPUT submenu.

Figure 3-141: SDI7 module TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu

Source. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CH1 or CH2 as the
trigger source, and then press the ENTER button. The signal format of the trigger
output will be based on the signal format of the selected output channel.

System Clock. The system clock is a low-jitter clock signal, which runs at the
parallel clock rate for 3G formats or twice the parallel clock rate for HD formats.
For SD formats, the clock rate is 148.5 MHz. When this menu item is displayed,
use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a different clock.

Pixel Clock. The pixel clock is an internal parallel rate clock (a low frequency
clock related to the pixel rate of the video signal). When this menu item is
displayed, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a different clock.

3–332 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

The rate of the pixel clock depends on the format of the signal selected as the
trigger source (channel 1 or channel 2):
27 MHz for SD formats
74.25 or 74.18 MHz for HD formats and most 3G formats (where 74.25 MHz
is for integer frame rates and 74.18 MHz is for non-integer frame rates such
as 59.94, 29.97, and 23.98 fps)
148.5 MHz or 148.35 MHz for 3G fast progressive formats such as 60p,
59.94p and 50p

Frame / Field Pulse. The trigger pulse is produced at the field or frame rate of
the video signal. In interlaced and segmented-frame formats, this produces a
frame-rate square wave that is low during field one and high during field two.
In progressive formats the output is high during the vertical blanking period,
producing a field-rate pulse. 1
When this menu item is displayed, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select a different clock.

Line Pulse. The trigger pulse output is high during the horizontal blanking period,
producing a line-rate pulse. 1
When this menu item is displayed, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to
select a different clock.
1 The Frame/Field Pulse and Line Pulse signals are derived from the EAV and SAV XYZ byte H, V, and F bits,
just prior to the parallel data entering the serializer; therefore these pulses can be used to approximate the
signal timing.

SDI7 module Use this menu to view operation parameters for the SDI7 module. Module
DIAGNOSTICS submenu diagnostics provide status information only and do not affect operating behavior.
The following figure shows the DIAGNOSTICS submenu. (See Figure 3-142.)

NOTE. The SDI7 module provides additional diagnostics for checking the DDR2
and SRAM memory that can be accessed only in factory mode. See the TG8000
Service Manual for information on using the factory mode.

PLL STATUS. This diagnostic displays the following:

Flex0 – Indicates the state of the flexible clock generator for output channel 1
(SIGNAL 1A and SIGNAL 1B connectors). This readout should show Lock
(locked). An Unlk (unlocked) reading might indicate a problem with the
module or mainframe.
Flex1 – Indicates the state of the flexible clock generator for output channel 2
(SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B connectors). This readout should show Lock
(locked). An Unlk (unlocked) reading might indicate a problem with the
module or mainframe.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–333

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

DDS STATUS. This diagnostic displays the following:

DDS0 Phase – Indicates that the flex clock circuit is correctly aligned with
the internal frame pulse for output channel 1 (SIGNAL 1A and SIGNAL 1B
connectors). This readout should show Lock (locked). An Unlk (unlocked)
reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe.
DDS1 Phase – Indicates that the flex clock circuit is correctly aligned with
the internal frame pulse for output channel 2 (SIGNAL 2A and SIGNAL 2B
connectors). This readout should show Lock (locked). An Unlk (unlocked)
reading might indicate a problem with the module or mainframe.

TEMPERATURES. This diagnostic displays the temperature of the SDI7 module

board and FPGA.

FPGA VERSION. This diagnostic displays the current and expected FPGA
versions. If there is a discrepancy between the two, a warning appears, which
means that the FPGA firmware might need to be upgraded.

3–334 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Figure 3-142: SDI7 module DIAGNOSTICS submenu

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–335

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

VOLTAGE MON 1. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, a warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

VOLTAGE MON 2. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, a warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

VOLTAGE MON 3. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, a warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

VOLTAGE MON 4. This diagnostic measures internal voltage supplies. If these

supplies are outside the nominal range, a warning appears, which means that the
instrument should be serviced.

SDI7 module This menu is accessible only when the instrument is in factory mode. From
CALIBRATION submenu this menu, you can access several special output signals and adjust the serial
output levels. The special signals are unscrambled and are synchronous with
the clock out of the trigger BNC. They are used to check performance or used
when adjusting serial levels. See the TG8000 Service Manual for information on
adjustments and using factory mode.

3–336 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

SDI7 module factory default settings

The following table shows the factory default settings for the SDI7 module.
These settings are recalled when you select Factory Default from the PRESET :
RECALL menu item in the mainframe main menu.

Table 3-69: SDI7 module factory default settings

Menu item name Settings
TEST SIGNAL 100% Color Bars
FORMAT 1080 59.94i
SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH YCbCr 4:2:2 10b
OUTPUT MODE HD (1920 × 1080)
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable
OVERLAY : LOGO
Status Disable
Source Tektronix_logo_500x125.bmp
NOTE. The default logo is the "first" file in the
SDI7/LOGO directory, as sorted by the date of
the logo file (oldest first). If the factory-provided
logo files are installed, the default logo is
“Tektronix_logo_500x125.bmp.”
However, if the user has removed the
factory-provided logo files and added their own
custom files, then the default logo will be the oldest
file installed in the SDI7/LOGO directory.
X Position –5 % APW
Y Position –5 % APH
OVERLAY : ID TEXT
Status Disable
Source User-entered string
X Position 5.0 % APW
Y Position 5.0 % APH
Font Size 8.0 % APH

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–337

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-69: SDI7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Menu item name Settings
OVERLAY : CIRCLE
Status Disable
X Position 0.0 % APW
Y Position 0.0 % APH
Diameter 90.0 % APH
OVERLAY : BURNT-IN TIMECODE
Mode Disable
X Position 5.0 % APW
Y Position 5.0 % APH
Second Line Disable
OVERLAY : BLINK
Text/Circle Blink Off
OVERLAY : BORDER
Text/Circle Border Enable
AUDIO (EMBEDDED)
Status (Level A)
Group 1–4 Disable
Status (Level B)
Group 1–4 Link A Disable
Group 1–4 Link B Disable
Dolby-E Stream Ch 1-2 1 Disable
Dolby-E Stream Ch 3-4 1 Disable
Channel
Status Active
Frequency 1000
Amplitude –20 dBFS
Audio Click OFF
Channel Origin A1-1 through A4-4
Sampling Frame

3–338 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-69: SDI7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Menu item name Settings
DOLBY-E CONFIG 1
Program 5.1
Level –18.0 dBFS
Bit Depth 20 bits
Line Position Ideal (Line xx)
Program 1 Description Tektronix Program 1
Program 2 Description Tektronix Program 2
Program 3 Description Tektronix Program 3
Program 4 Description Tektronix Program 4
Program 5 Description Tektronix Program 5
Program 6 Description Tektronix Program 6
Program 7 Description Tektronix Program 7
Program 8 Description Tektronix Program 8
Dialnorm –23 dB
Line Mode Film Standard
RF Mode Film Standard
Center Downmix Level –3.0 dB
Surround Downmix Level –3.0 dB
Downmix Preferred LoRo
LtRt Center Mix Level –3.0 dB
LtRt Surround Mix Level –3.0 dB
LoRo Center Mix Level –3.0 dB
LoRo Surround Mix Level –3.0 dB
Frame Rate –3.0 dB
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 μs
Relative To Serial (0H)
TIMECODE
Source Local (DST)
30 Drop Frame Enable
ATC-LTC OFF
ATC-VITC OFF

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual 3–339

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module

Table 3-69: SDI7 module factory default settings (cont.)

Menu item name Settings
VIDEO
Y ON
Cb ON
Cr ON
Edge Filter Enable
AV Timing Mode OFF
EDH ON
(SD output mode only)
ANC PAYLOAD
Output Disable
Parity Automatic
DID 0x101
SDID 0x200
DC 0x101
UDW 0x200
CS 0x200
Auto-Calculate CS Enable
Line 9
Field 1, Line: 9
Field 2, Line: 9
Start Sample 1928
Video Channel Luma
Link Location Link A
Stream Location HS Stream 1
SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Enable
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Clock System Clock
Source CH1
SECONDARY OUTPUT Test Pattern
1 The Dolby-E Stream and Dolby Config settings are available only when Option DBT is installed.

3–340 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

Index
Index

Symbols and Numbers AGL7 Antenna

10/100/1000 BASE-T port, 2-6 BLACK 1 connector, 2-8 Amplification, 3-104
BLACK 2 connector, 2-8 Cabling, 3-104
BLACK 3 connector, 2-8 GPS receiver types, 3-102
A CW connector, 2-8 Location, 3-104
AC line voltage Factory default settings, 3-16 Requirements for
requirements, 1-10 Functional checks, 1-17 GPS7, 3-103
Accessories GENLOCK submenu, 3-9, System for GPS7, 3-103
optional, 1-4 3-10 ATG7
standard, 1-4 Main menu, 3-9 APL submenu, 3-22, 3-27
AG7 Operating procedure, 3-8 BARS connector, 2-10
1+2 connector, 2-7 OUTPUT submenu, 3-12 BLACK 1 connector, 2-10
3+4 connector, 2-7 Product description, 3-7 BLACK 2 connector, 2-10
48 kHz CLOCK Rear-panel connectors, 2-8 Bounce submenu, 3-28
connector, 2-7 REF connector, 2-8 Factory default settings, 3-28
5+6 connector, 2-7 SELECT OUTPUT Functional checks, 1-19
7+8 connector, 2-7 submenu, 3-9 ID TEXT submenu, 3-22,
AUDIO TIMING SIGNAL submenu, 3-13 3-25
submenu, 3-4, 3-6 STATUS submenu, 3-9 Main menu, 3-21
AUDIO-VIDEO SYNC TIMING submenu, 3-14 Operating procedure, 3-18
submenu, 3-4 Alarm status, 2-32 Product description, 3-17
CHANNEL PARAMETERS Analog Genlock See AGL7 Rear-panel connectors, 2-10
submenu, 3-3, 3-4 Analog Test Generator See ATG7 SELECT OUTPUT
Factory default settings, 3-6 Analog Video Generator See submenu, 3-23
Functional checks, 1-16 AVG7 SELECT SIGNAL
Main menu, 3-3 Analog Wideband Video submenu, 3-24
Operating procedure, 3-2 Generator See AWVG7 SIGNAL connector, 2-10
product description, 3-1 STATUS submenu, 3-22
Rear-panel connectors, 2-7 TIMING submenu, 3-22,
RESOLUTION submenu, 3-3 3-26
SILENCE connector, 2-7 Audio Generator See AG7

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Index-1

Index

AVG7 B DIAGNOSTICS submenu

Adjusting the SCH Backup presets and user mainframe, 2-43
phase, 3-45 data, 2-65 Digital Video Generator See
APL submenu, 3-37, 3-46 Beeper control, 2-31 DVG7
Bounce submenu, 3-46 BG7 Dolby E audio
CH 1 connector, 2-10 BLACK 1 connector, 2-11 configuration controls, 3-306
CH 2 connector, 2-10 BLACK 2 connector, 2-11 enabling, 3-303
CH 3 connector, 2-10 BLACK 3 connector, 2-11 generated formats, 3-311
CIRCLE submenu, 3-42 BLACK 4 connector, 2-11 metadata
Factory default settings, 3-47 BLACK submenu, 3-66 configuration, 3-311
Functional checks, 1-21 Factory default settings, 3-74 DVG7
ID TEXT submenu, 3-40 Functional checks, 1-24 AUDIO CHANNEL
LOGO submenu, 3-39 Main menu, 3-65 submenu, 3-89
Main menu, 3-36 Operating procedure, 3-64 Audio click, 3-90, 3-243
MOVING PICTURE Product description, 3-63 AUDIO GROUP
submenu, 3-37 Rear-panel connectors, 2-11 submenu, 3-88
Operating procedure, 3-30 SELECT OUTPUT BLACK 1 connector, 2-12
OVERLAY submenu, 3-37, submenu, 3-65 BLACK 2 connector, 2-12
3-38 TIMECODE submenu, 3-71 BLACK submenu (Option BK
Product description, 3-29 TIMING submenu, 3-69 only), 3-94
Rear-panel connectors, 2-10 Black Generator See BG7 CIRCLE submenu, 3-87
TIMING submenu, 3-37, EDH insertion, 3-93
3-43 Embedded audio, 3-75, 3-88
VIDEO submenu, 3-37, 3-44 C Factory default settings, 3-95
AWVG7 CAL OVEN submenu, 2-47 Functional checks, 1-25
CH 1 connector, 2-11 Calibration ID TEXT submenu, 3-85
CH 2 connector, 2-11 Gain, 3-100 LOGO submenu, 3-84
CH 3 connector, 2-11 internal oscillator Main menu, 3-79
CIRCLE submenu, 3-58 frequency, 2-47 MOVING PICTURE
Factory default settings, 3-62 Internal oscillator submenu, 3-82
Functional checks, 1-23 frequency, 3-100 Operating procedure, 3-76
ID TEXT submenu, 3-56 Character set installation, 3-297 OVERLAY submenu, 3-83
LOGO submenu, 3-55 Cleaning, 2-69 Product description, 3-75
Main menu, 3-52 Exterior, 2-70 Rear-panel connectors, 2-12
MOVING PICTURE Configuration SIGNAL 1 connector, 2-12
submenu, 3-53 GPS7 module, 3-100 SIGNAL 2 connector, 2-12
Operating procedure, 3-49 hardware installation, 1-6 TIMING submenu, 3-91
OVERLAY submenu, 3-53, Connectors VIDEO submenu, 3-92
3-54 Rear-panel, 2-6
Product description, 3-48 Crossover Ethernet cable, 2-48
Rear-panel connectors, 2-11
E
Environmental operating
TIMING submenu, 3-53, D requirements, 1-9
3-59 Description EXT LED indicator, 2-3
VIDEO submenu, 3-53, 3-61 product overview, 1-1 External reference
Diagnostic routines indicator, 3-105
mainframe, 2-43

Index-2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Index

F GPS Synchronization and REFERENCE

Factory default settings Timecode module See GPS7 submenu, 3-118
HD3G7, 3-212 GPS7 TIME OF DAY
SDI7, 3-337 10 MHz connector, 2-14 submenu, 3-133
Fan fault ALARM DELAY TIME ZONE OFFSET
beeper control, 2-31 submenu, 3-146 submenu, 3-138
Fan fault alarm, 2-21 ALARM TIME TIMECODE submenu, 3-127
FAULT LED indicator, 2-5 submenu, 3-145 VITC submenu, 3-129
Features, 1-1 ANTENNA connector, 2-13
Figures Of Merit (FOM), 3-105 Antenna power, 3-131 H
File transfer using FTP, 2-67 Antenna system, 3-103
Hardware installation, 1-6
Flash memory, 2-34 BLACK 1 connector, 2-14
HD Dual Link Video
Font file installation, 3-297 BLACK 2 connector, 2-14
Generator See HDLG7
FORMAT button, 2-2 BLACK 3 connector, 2-14
HD3G7
FRAME RESET 1, 2-20 BLACK submenu, 3-122
ANC PAYLOAD
FRAME RESET 2, 2-20 DIAGNOSTICS
submenu, 3-201
FRAME RESET 3, 2-20 submenu, 3-152
Ancillary data payload
Frame reset signals, 2-20 DST SCHEDULE
example, 3-206
FRAME RESET STATUS submenu, 3-139
AUDIO (EMBEDDED)
submenu, 2-26 EPOCH SELECT
submenu, 3-193
Front panel submenu, 3-145
CALIBRATION
disable, 2-31 Factory default
submenu, 3-211
Operation, 2-1 settings, 3-154
DIAGNOSTICS
FRONT PANEL ENABLE Functional checks, 1-26
submenu, 3-209
button, 2-2 GPI submenu, 3-150
Factory default
FTP file transfer, 2-67 GPO submenu, 3-151
settings, 3-212
Functional checks, 1-16 GPS SETUP submenu, 3-130
Functional checks, 1-36
AG7, 1-16 HD TRI-LEVEL SYNC
HD SDI IN connector, 2-15
AGL7, 1-17 RATE submenu, 3-69,
Installing enhanced signal
ATG7, 1-19 3-126
sets, 3-171
AVG7, 1-21 JAM SYNC submenu, 3-143
Main menu, 3-185
AWVG7, 1-23 LEAP SECOND
Modifying a Zone Plate
BG7, 1-24 submenu, 3-144
Signal, 3-173
DVG7, 1-25 LTC submenu, 3-148
MOVING PICTURE
GPS7, 1-26 LTC TIMING
submenu, 3-192
HD3G7, 1-36 submenu, 3-150
Operating procedure, 3-159
HDLG7, 1-39 LTC/GPI connector, 2-13
OUTPUT MODE
HDVG7, 1-40 Main menu, 3-113
submenu, 3-191
SDI7, 1-41 Operating procedure, 3-99
Product description, 3-158
Oven calibration, 3-100
Rear-panel connectors, 2-15
POWER indicator, 2-13,
G 3-131
SECONDARY OUTPUT
General Purpose Interface submenu, 3-208
Product description, 3-98
Mainframe See GPI Select sample structure and
PROGRAM TIME
GPI depth, 3-164
submenu, 3-142
Mainframe, 2-50 Select the output mode, 3-163
Rear-panel connectors, 2-12
GPI port, 2-6 Select the signal
REF IN connector, 2-14
format, 3-164

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Index-3

Index

Select the test signal, 3-165 HDVG7 M

Selecting a Zone Plate AUDIO CHANNEL Mainframe main menu, 2-22
Signal, 3-173 submenu, 3-242 Manual
Selecting an output AUDIO GROUP description, xxi
signal, 3-160 submenu, 3-241 related documents, xxii
Selecting converter BLACK 1 connector, 2-17 terms, xxii
mode, 3-162 BLACK 2 connector, 2-17 Memory
Selecting generator BLACK submenu (Option BK how much is available, 2-34
mode, 3-160 only), 3-248 Menu control buttons, 2-2
SIGNAL 1 connector, 2-15 CIRCLE submenu, 3-240 Module
SIGNAL 2 connector, 2-15 Embedded audio, 3-229, installation, 1-11
TIMECODE submenu, 3-197 3-241 removal, 1-11
TIMING submenu, 3-196 Factory default MODULE button, 2-1
TRIG OUT connector, 2-15 settings, 3-249 Module compatibility
TRIGGER OUTPUT Functional checks, 1-40 TG700 and TG8000
submenu, 3-208 ID TEXT submenu, 3-238 mainframes, 1-3
Using Zone Plate LOGO submenu, 3-237 Modules
signals, 3-184 Main menu, 3-232 AG7 Audio Generator, 3-1
VIDEO submenu, 3-199 MOVING PICTURE AGL7 Analog Genlock, 3-7
Zone Plate Control submenu, 3-235 ATG7 Analog Test
parameters, 3-175 Operating procedure, 3-229 Generator, 3-17
Zone Plate Dependent OVERLAY submenu, 3-236 AVG7 Analog Video
parameters, 3-177 Product description, 3-228 Generator, 3-29
Zone Plate Signals, 3-172 Rear-panel connectors, 2-17 AWVG7 Analog Wideband
HDLG7 SIGNAL 1 connector, 2-17 Video Generator, 3-48
Embedded audio SIGNAL 2 connector, 2-17 BG7 Black Generator, 3-63
selection, 3-222 TIMECODE submenu, 3-245 DVG7 Digital Video
Factory default TIMING submenu, 3-244 Generator, 3-75
settings, 3-227 VIDEO submenu, 3-246 GPS7 GPS Synchronization
Functional checks, 1-39 and Timecode
HD SDI IN connector, 2-16 I module, 3-97
LINK A connectors, 2-16 HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video
Initial product inspection, 1-6
LINK B connectors, 2-16 Generator, 3-157
Inspection, 2-69
LINK OFFSET HDLG7 HD Dual Link video
Exterior, 2-69
submenu, 3-226 generator, 3-214
Installation
Main menu, 3-223 HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video
mainframe, 1-6
MOVING PICTURE Generator, 3-228
module, 1-11
submenu, 3-226 SDI7 2 Channel SD/HD
rackmounting, 1-7
Operating procedure, 3-215 3 Gb/s SDI Video
INT LED indicator, 2-3
Product description, 3-214 Generator, 3-252
Rear-panel connectors, 2-16
Selecting the converter K
mode, 3-221 Key features, 1-1
N
Setting the gradient starting NETWORK INFORMATION
point, 3-220 submenu, 2-38
HDTV Digital Video
L NETWORK SETUP
Generator See HDVG7 LCD display, 2-1 submenu, 2-39, 2-48
LED indicators, 2-3

Index-4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual

 Index

O Ancillary data payload Selecting an output

Operating basics, 2-1 example, 3-330 signal, 3-257
Optional accessories, 1-4 AUDIO (EMBEDDED) SIGNAL 1A connector, 2-18
Options submenu, 3-302 SIGNAL 1B connector, 2-18
International power BURNT-IN TIMECODE SIGNAL 2A connector, 2-18
cords, 1-5 submenu, 3-301 SIGNAL 2B connector, 2-18
Option 3G (3 Gb/s SDI signal CALIBRATION TIMECODE submenu, 3-320
generation for SDI7 submenu, 3-336 TIMING submenu, 3-319
module), 1-4 character set TRIG OUT connector, 2-19
Option BK (Serial Digital installation, 3-297 TRIGGER OUTPUT
Black Output for CIRCLE submenu, 3-300 submenu, 3-332
DVG7 and HDVG7 DIAGNOSTICS Using Zone Plate
modules), 1-4 submenu, 3-333 signals, 3-282
Option CB (NTSC/PAL Entering the option VIDEO submenu, 3-323
Color Bars signals for key, 3-254 Zone Plate Control
BG7 module), 1-4 Factory default parameters, 3-273
Option D1 (Calibration Test settings, 3-337 Zone Plate Dependent
Data Report), 1-4 font file installation, 3-297 parameters, 3-275
Option DBT (Embedded Functional checks, 1-41 Zone Plate Signals, 3-270
Dolby E audio program ID TEXT submenu, 3-297 SEQUENCE submenu, 2-25
generation for SDI7 Installing custom picture Service
module), 1-4 files, 3-269 manual, xxii
OPTIONS submenu, 2-35 Installing enhanced signal Setting Ethernet parameters, 2-48
sets, 3-268 SIGNAL KEY ASSIGN
LOGO submenu, 3-295 submenu, 2-37
P Main menu, 3-283 Signal quality
Power connector, 2-6 Modifying a Zone Plate Figures Of Merit
Power supply module Signal, 3-271 (FOM), 3-105
replacement, 1-5 MOVING PICTURE SMPTE309 data, 3-108, 3-110,
Preface, xxi submenu, 3-291 3-135, 3-136, 3-322
PRESET submenu, 2-23 Operating procedure, 3-253 Standard accessories, 1-4
Product Description, 1-1 OUTPUT MODE
submenu, 3-290 T
R OVERLAY submenu, 3-293
Test signal buttons, 2-2
Rackmount Product description, 3-252
TG700 module compatibility, 1-3
installation, 1-7 Rear-panel connectors, 2-18
TG800UP PW upgrade, 1-5
Related manuals, xxii SECONDARY OUTPUT
TIME (timecode) LED
Removal signal selection, 3-288
indicator, 2-4
module, 1-11 Select sample structure
Time flow block diagram, 3-106
Restore presets and user and depth (Option 3G
TIME OF DAY submenu
data, 2-65 only), 3-260
GPS7 module, 3-133
Select the output mode, 3-259
using Internal mode, 3-137
Select the signal
S format, 3-260
Timecode
SDI7 As related to time flow, 3-106
Select the test signal, 3-261
ANC PAYLOAD Selecting a Zone Plate
submenu, 3-325 Signal, 3-271

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual Index-5

Index

U Z Zone Plate Signals

Upgrades Zone Plate signals Control parameters, 3-175,
firmware, 1-5 Parameters 3-273
hardware, 1-5 Dependent, 3-177, 3-275 Defined, 3-172, 3-270
USB drive Dependent
backup and restore parameters, 3-177, 3-275
functions, 2-65 Modifying, 3-173, 3-271
mount and unmount, 2-33 Parameters
USB port, 2-2 Control, 3-175, 3-273
UTILITY submenu, 2-27 Selecting, 3-173, 3-271
Using, 3-184, 3-282

Index-6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator User Manual